Cisco Webex Board Reference guide
Werbung
Werbung
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Collaboration Endpoint Software 9.12
APRIL 2020 xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Application Programming Interface (API)
Reference Guide
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software 9.12
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 1 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
What’s in this guide?
The top menu bar and the entries in the table of contents are all hyperlinks, just click on them to go to the topic.
We recommend you visit our web site regularly for updated versions of the user documentation.
Go to: https://www.cisco.com/go/telepresence/docs
Table of Contents
Introduction ...........................................................................3
About this guide ......................................................................4
What’s new in CE9.12 .............................................................5
What’s new in CE9.10 ........................................................... 10
What’s new in CE9.9 ............................................................. 14
What’s new in CE9.8 ............................................................. 19
What’s new in CE9.7 .............................................................24
What’s new in CE9.6 .............................................................28
What’s new in CE9.5 .............................................................34
What’s new in CE9.4 .............................................................38
What’s new in CE9.3 .............................................................44
What’s new in CE9.2 ............................................................. 51
What’s new in CE9.1 .............................................................59
What’s new in CE9.0 .............................................................65
About the API ...................................................................... 72
API fundamentals ..................................................................73
Connecting to the API ........................................................73
SSH ....................................................................................73
Telnet ..................................................................................73
HTTP/HTTPS ......................................................................73
WebSocket .........................................................................73
RS-232 / serial connection ............................................... 74
Ethernet ports .....................................................................75
User roles ...........................................................................75
Passphrase .........................................................................75
API output .............................................................................76
Using the command line .......................................................77
API commands ...................................................................77
Other commands................................................................77
Command line shortcuts ....................................................78
Searching ...........................................................................78
Value types and formats.....................................................78
Multiline commands ..............................................................80
Synchronous API calls ..........................................................81
Events ...................................................................................82
Feedback mechanism ...........................................................83
Feedback expressions .......................................................83
Terminal connections .........................................................84
HTTP XMLAPI Authentication .............................................85
HTTP XMLAPI Session Authentication ...............................85
Getting status and configurations ......................................86
Sending commands and configurations .............................86
Feedback from the device over HTTP ..................................87
Registering for feedback ....................................................87
Translating from terminal mode to XML .............................88
Dos and don’ts ......................................................................89
xConfiguration commands ..................................................90
Description of the xConfiguration commands ......................91
xCommand commands ..................................................... 249
Description of the xCommand commands .........................250
xStatus commands ........................................................... 370
Description of the xStatus commands ................................371
Appendices .......................................................................485
Supported commands matrix .............................................486
Startup scripts ....................................................................534
The SystemTools commands ..............................................535
Disconnect cause types .....................................................537
User documentation on the Cisco web site ........................538
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 2 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Chapter 1
Introduction
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 3 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
About this guide
This guide introduces you to the Application Programming
Interface (API) for the Collaboration Endpoint software, and serves as a reference guide for the command line commands.
The guide describes the API for on-premise registered video conferencing devices (CUCM, VCS) as well as devices registered to Cisco’s cloud service (Cisco Webex).
Which commands are available depends on the product, the back-end (on-premise, cloud), and the user role of the local user (admin, audit, integrator, roomcontrol, user). To get an overview of the commands, see the
“Supported commands matrix” on page 486
.
xConfiguration xCommand
This guide applies to the following products:
• MX Series:
• MX200 G2
• MX300 G2
• MX700
• MX800
• SX Series:
• SX10 Quick Set
• SX20 Quick Set
• SX80 Codec
• Room Series:
• Room Kit
• Room Kit Mini
• Codec Plus 1
• Codec Pro 2
• Room 55
• Room 55 Dual
• Room 70
• Room 70 G2
• Desk Series / DX Series:
• Desk Pro
• DX70
• DX80
• Webex Boards:
• Webex Board 55 and 55S
• Webex Board 70 and 70S
• Webex Board 85S
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
Downloading the user documentation
You can download the user documentation from the Cisco web site, go to:
https://www.cisco.com/go/telepresence/docs
For Cisco Webex registred devices, go to:
https://help.webex.com
Guidelines for how to find the documentation on the Cisco web site are included in the
appendix.
1 Included in Room Kit Plus and Room Kit Plus Precision 60
2 Included in Room Kit Pro and Room Kit Pro Precision 60
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 4 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.12
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.12 (CE9.12) compared to CE9.10.
The following Webex products are new in CE9:
• CE9.0 - Room Kit
• CE9.1 - Codec Plus, and Room 55
• CE9.2 - Room 70
• CE9.4 - Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, and Room 55 Dual
• CE9.6 - Room Kit Mini
• CE9.8 - Board 55/55S, Board 70/70S, and Board 85S
• CE9.12 - Desk Pro, Room USB
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.12
New products
• Cisco Webex Room USB
• Cisco Webex Desk Pro
DX Series renamed to Desk Series
The new Desk Series contains the DX70, DX80, and Desk Pro products.
Support for using Room Kit Mini with Samsung Flip
(Room Kit Mini)
The Room Kit Mini can be connected with a Samsung Flip device to get a touch interface. Then, you can also use the whiteboard feature. You can easily switch between the Samsung Flip and the Room Kit Mini user interfaces by pressing the Flip button.
One-way whiteboard sharing in-call (Boards)
You can now share the whiteboard while in-call. To initiate this, click the Home button followed by the Whiteboard button. Enter Editing mode and the sharing will begin. To stop the whiteboard sharing, press the Done button, followed by
Stop sharing .
Note that the whiteboard share is one-way. Only the device sharing the whiteboard can draw on the whiteboard. Remote participants can only observe.
Webex Join support for Personal Meeting Room IDs
(All Products)
The Webex Join button now supports dialing Personal
Meeting Room (PMR) IDs. You can address them by entering the full URL or a short path (i.e., username.sitename); as well as, by entering the meeting number.
PMRs from your recent calls list will be suggested as you type.
HTTP proxy support for Webex Edge for Devices
(All products)
HTTP Proxy support has been enhanced to include devices linked to Webex Edge for Devices .
Webx Edge for Device s can select the HTTP Proxy services for the HttpClient, HttpFeedback, and/or the WebEngine.
If so enabled, all HTTP requests to the Webex Cloud will use the configured HTTP Proxy. However, regardless of the Proxy
Mode, the device will never communicate with the Cisco
Unified Communication Manager (CUCM), MRA (CUCM via
Expressway), or TMS (phonebook) via proxy.
In addition, the following new configurations allow you to enable/disable use of the HTTP Proxy:
• xConfiguration HttpClient UseHttpProxy
• xConfiguration HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy
• xConfiguration WebEngine UseHttpProxy
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 5 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
In-call touch forwarding
(Boards)
Touch forwarding has been enabled for use while in-call and can be activated and deactivated using a floating toolbar.
Hide Proximity notifications (All products)
You can now hide the Proximity notifications. This includes the Proximity icon that is visible on-screen when someone is paired with Proximity and the notification that appears when someone has just paired.
This can be configured via the API or the web interface of the device, or it can be provisioned (e.g., via TMS).
Hide scheduled meeting titles
(All products)
A setting has been added to hide/show the scheduled meeting titles. When hidden, the words “Scheduled meeting” will be displayed instead of the meeting information.
Increased manual zoom range
(Room Kit Mini, Room Kit and Room 55)
The manual zoom range is increased from 2x (Room Kit
Mini) / 3x (Room Kit, Room 55) to 5x. The automatic best overview or speaker track zoom range is not changed.
xConfiguration xCommand
Improvements for the Call Control page in the web interface of the device (All products)
• On a SpeakerTrack-enabled device, a button can be used to alter the current SpeakerTrack status. Click the button to disable or enable SpeakerTrack.
• The Mute button will correctly reflect the mute status of the microphones.
• When a preset is selected and accepted by the video device, it will be highlighted in blue. This includes selection from other devices, such as the Touch 10 controller.
Note that preset highlighting and detection occurs only if the Camera Positions window is open.
• On devices where PresenterTrack is configured, it can be enabled from the Camera Positions window.
• For cases where the main video consists of a composited image of more than one input source, the
DefaultMainVideo source will be displayed. By default, this is the main camera. This requires the remote monitoring option key.
• Regarding the display of directory entries, recent calls, and favorite entries, the maximum number that can be displayed at one time is increased from 50 to 100. The search field can be used to narrow down the list.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 6 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.12
New configurations
Audio Input WebView [1] Mode
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled
(Board 55S, Board 70S, Board 85S)
Cameras Camera [1..3] Flip (Codec Plus, Room 55D, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [1..7] Flip (Room 70 G2)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection * (Codec Plus)
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode (Codec Plus)
HttpClient UseHttpProxy (All products)
HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy (All products)
NetworkServices SMTP * (Room Kit Mini)
SIP TlsVerify (All products)
Standby Signage InteractionMode
(Room Kit Mini)
SystemUnit State CameraLid (DX80, DX70)
UserInterface Bookings Visibility Title (All products)
UserInterface Diagnostics Notifications (All products)
UserInterface Features Call Keypad (All products)
UserInterface Proximity Notifications (All products)
UserInterface Whiteboard ActivityIndicators
(All products)
Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55,
Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX80, SX20, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
Video Output Connector [n] Location VerticalOffset
(CCodec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room
55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX80, SX20, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
VoiceControl Wakeword Mode (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
WebEngine UseHttpProxy
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Boards) xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are removed
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address
(All products)
Configurations that are modified
Network [1] QoS Diffserv Audio (All products)
OLD: Default: 0
NEW: Default: 46
Network [1] QoS Diffserv Data
(All products)
OLD: Default: 0
NEW: Default: 34
Network [1] QoS Diffserv Signalling (All products)
OLD: Default: 0
NEW: Default: 24
Network [1] QoS Diffserv Video (All products)
OLD: Default: 0
NEW: Default: 34
NetworkServices SMTP Username (Boards, DX80, DX70)
OLD: String (0, 50)
NEW: String (0, 80)
SerialPort BaudRate (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Valuespace: 115200
NEW: Valuespace: 9600/19200/38400/57600/115200
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 7
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.12
New commands
Network SMTP VerifyConfig
(Room Kit Mini,Boards, DX80, DX70)
Network Wifi * (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2,
Boards, DX80, DX70)
Webex Join (All products)
Webex Registration ConvertToCloud (All products)
Commands that are removed
None.
Commands that are modified
Audio Diagnostics Advanced Run (All products)
NEW: Channel: Integer (0..13), Default: 0
NEW: Output: HDMI/Line/Internal/Headset/All, Default: All
Audio Diagnostics MeasureDelay (All products)
OLD: HDMI: All/HDMI/Internal/Line
NEW: HDMI: All/HDMI/Headset/Internal/Line
Audio LocalInput AddConnector (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: ConnectorType: ARC/HDMI/Microphone
NEW: ConnectorType: ARC/HDMI/Microphone/WebView
Audio LocalInput RemoveConnector (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: ConnectorType: ARC/HDMI/Microphone
NEW: ConnectorType: ARC/HDMI/Microphone/WebView
CallHistory Get
(All products)
OLD: Filter: All/AnsweredElsewhere/Forwarded/Missed/NoAnswer/Placed/Received/
Rejected/UnacknowledgedMissed
NEW: Filter: All/AnsweredElsewhere/Forwarded/Missed/NoAnswer/Placed/Pmr/Received/
Rejected/UnacknowledgedMissed
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
CallHistory Recents
(All products)
OLD: Filter: All/AnsweredElsewhere/Forwarded/Missed/NoAnswer/Placed/Received/
Rejected/UnacknowledgedMissed
NEW: Filter: All/AnsweredElsewhere/Forwarded/Missed/NoAnswer/Placed/Pmr/Received/
Rejected/UnacknowledgedMissed
Presentation Start (All products)
OLD: Layout: Default: none
NEW: Layout: Default: Equal
Presentation Start
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2)
OLD: PresentationSource: Integer (1..n)
NEW: PresentationSource: None/1/2/../n
SystemUnit Boot (All products)
NEW: Force: False/True, Default: True
UserInterface Extensions Panel Update (All products)
NEW: Color: String (0, 255), Default: none
NEW: Icon: Briefing/Camera/Concierge/Disc/Handset/Help/Helpdesk/Home/Hvac/Info/
Input/Language/Laptop/Lightbulb/Media/Microphone/Power/Proximity/Record/Spark/Tv/
Webex/General, Default: none
NEW: Visibility: Auto/Hidden, Default: none
OLD: Name: required parameter
NEW: Name: optional parameter
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 8 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.12
New statuses
Audio Input Connectors USBC [n] Mute
(All products)
Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] DirectShare (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit
Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Conference SelectedCallProtocol (All products)
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] *
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Network [n] Wifi * (All products)
RoomAnalytics Engagement CloseProximity (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Boards)
UserInterface Features Call Keypad (All products)
UserInterface OSD Output (All products)
Video Input DirectShare [n] Peer Address (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55,
Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Video Input DirectShare [n] Peer PeripheralID (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55,
Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Video Input DirectShare [n] Type (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Webex Services Proximity GuestToken (All products)
Statuses that are removed
Audio Input Connectors ARC [n] EcReferenceDelay (All products)
Audio Input Connectors HDMI [n] EcReferenceDelay
(All products)
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] ConnectionStatus
(Codec Pro, Room Kit Mini, Room 70 G2) xStatus Security FIPS Mode (All products) xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type
(All products)
Added to valuespace: AmplifierDetection/AmplifierFanStatus/CurrentNetworkQuality/
KioskModeFailedToLoad/LowBattery/MissingDisplay/MissingThirdDisplay/
PanoramaCameraHdmi/PanoramaView/PeripheralSoftwareUpgrade/
WebexEdgeAccountPendingCloudRegistration
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Type (All products)
OLD: Byod/Camera/ControlSystem/ISDNLink/InputDevice/Other/SpeakerTracker/
TouchPanel
NEW: Byod/Camera/ControlSystem/Headset/ISDNLink/InputDevice/Other/SpeakerTracker/
TouchPanel
Proximity Services Availability (All products)
OLD: Available for on-premises registered devices
NEW: Available for both on-premises and Webex cloud registered devices
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 9 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.10
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.10 (CE9.10) compared to CE9.9.
The following Webex products are new in CE9:
• CE9.0 - Room Kit
• CE9.1 - Codec Plus, and Room 55
• CE9.2 - Room 70
• CE9.4 - Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, and Room 55 Dual
• CE9.6 - Room Kit Mini
• CE9.8 - Board 55/55S, Board 70/70S, and Board 85S
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.10
Webex Edge for Devices
(All products)
Devices running CE9.10 are ready for Webex Edge for
Devices . You can use Webex Edge for Devices to link your on-premises devices to the Cisco Webex cloud service.
This gives you access to select cloud features, while your registration, device management, calling, and media services remain on-premises. You can manage cloud services and get device diagnostics from them in Webex Control Hub.
You need the Device Connector tool to get started. Read the
Release Notes on Webex Help Center to find out when the tool is available.
Easier to join Webex meetings (All products)
We have added a Join Webex button in the user interface.
The button is shown by default.
The Join Webex button allows users to join meetings by entering the meeting number without a domain. This information is available in the Webex email invite. The infrastructure must allow calls to be routed to *@webex.com
.
New procedure for defining a password policy
(All products)
(
In earlier CE software versions, the password policy was defined using the systemtools securitysettings command.
This command has now been replaced by configurations xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy *
Some of the previous restrictions are discontinued.
).
When upgrading a device from an earlier CE software version, the values previously stored through the systemtools securitysettings command are preserved. The ones that are no longer reflected by configurations are deleted. The previous defaults were all 0, so on upgrade, if no changes had been made, the new defaults are also all 0.
SNMP is switched off by default (All products)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is switched off by default. Also, we no longer provide a default community name.
When upgrading a device from an earlier CE software version, the values that were previously stored are preserved.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 10 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.10
New configurations
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
(Boards)
Macros UnresponsiveTimeout
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards, SX80, SX20, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX80, DX70)
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini,
Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards, SX80, SX20, SX10, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
Provisioning WebexEdge (All products)
Security Fips Mode (All products)
UserInterface Features Call JoinWebex (All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumDigits (All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumLength (All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumLowercase
(All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumSpecial
(All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumUppercase (All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy MaxLifetime (All products)
UserManagement PasswordPolicy ReuseLimit (All products)
Configurations that are removed
None.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are modified
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, SX80, MX700, MX800)
OLD: Auto/Off
NEW: Auto/Off/On
NetworkServices SMTP Security (Boards)
OLD: Default: None
NEW: Default: StartTls
NetworkServices SNMP Mode (All products)
OLD: Default: ReadOnly
NEW: Default: Off
Standby Signage Mode (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Boards)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 11 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.10
New commands
Video CEC Output SendInactiveSourceRequest
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini,
Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
Commands that are removed
Security FIPSMode Activate
(All products)
Replaced by the Security Fips Mode configuration.
Commands that are modified
UserInterface WebView Display (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
NEW: Header: String (0, 8192) [multiple 15]
UserManagement User Add (All products)
Removed: PinChangeRequired
UserManagement User Modify (All products)
Removed: PinChangeRequired xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 12 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.10
New statuses
None.
Statuses that are removed
None.
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type (All products)
Added to valuespace: ProvModeWebexAndWebexEdgeEnabled/
WebexAccountPlusWebexEdgeEnabled/WebexEdgeAccountPlusProvModeWebex/
WebexMustUpgradeCeSoftware/WebexShouldUpgradeCeSoftware xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 13 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.9
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.9 (CE9.9) compared to CE9.8.
The following Webex products are new in CE9:
• CE9.0 - Room Kit
• CE9.1 - Codec Plus, and Room 55
• CE9.2 - Room 70
• CE9.4 - Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, and Room 55 Dual
• CE9.6 - Room Kit Mini
• CE9.8 - Board 55/55S, Board 70/70S, and Board 85S
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.9
Updates to the UI Extensions editor
(All products)
The In-room control editor has been renamed to UI
Extensions editor to reflect the additional features that are available. You can launch the editor by going to Integration >
UI Extension Editor on the web interface. In addition, the editor’s UI has been updated.
For more information, see the Customization guide for CE9.9 at https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Web apps (Boards)
You can use the UI Extensions editor to create web apps. This way you can access apps such as Jira, Miro, Office 365, and
Google docs directly from a board.
Digital signage
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Digital signage allows you to display custom content, such as company news, building maps, or emergency information, when the device is in half-wake mode.
Users can interact with the signage content only on Webex
Boards.
Fetch branding images and custom wallpaper from an external URL (All products)
You can use the xCommand UserInterface Branding Fetch
API command to download branding images or a custom wallpaper from an external URL.
Custom wallpaper is not available for Webex Boards.
Changes to the Network Settings menu
(All products)
The Network connection page on the device’s user interface has changed. First you see an overview of the current network set-up, then you can open the Ethernet or Wi-Fi settings if you want to change them. A few settings, which were not available from the GUI before, are now added.
Changes to the ultrasound settings (All products)
All products now has the same default value for the Audio
Ultrasound MaxVolume setting. Also the volume range is aligned between the different products. Product specific differences are handled internally and no longer reflected in the range of values and the default value. We have not made any changes to the sound level that is played out from a device.
TLS configuration changes (All products)
For security reasons we have made some changes to the TLS configuration on HTTPS client, syslog, and SIP connections:
• You must explicitly turn off certificate verification if you don’t want to perform a certificate check. By default, certificates are checked on all TLS connections.
• The minimum TLS version is increased from version 1.0 to 1.1 (exceptions for CUCM and SIP, which still allow version 1.0). Also note that the Webex cloud is using TLS version 1.2.
• You can configure certificate verification for provisioning, phone book, and other HTTP servers separately. The former NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting, which covered all these server types, are replaced by three settings: Provisioning TLSVerify ,
Phonebook Server [1] TlsVerify , and HTTPFeedback
TlsVerify .
• You can configure certificate verification for external logging (both audit logging and regular logging).
• For SIP, the certificates are verified against the Custom
CA list , which is uploaded to the device manually using the web interface or API. For other connections, the certificates are verified against either the Pre-installed CA list on the device, or the Custom CA list .
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 14 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Updates to whiteboarding and annotations
(Boards)
• Create, edit, and move stickies on your whiteboard and annotations.
• Choose between three different pen sizes when whiteboarding and annotating.
• Create copies of whiteboards and annotations. The whiteboard or annotated snapshot of a presentation is stored in the Whiteboard menu. You can go back to it and continue work on the copy as you would on any other whiteboard or snapshot.
Wired touch redirect (Boards)
Touch redirect enables you to control your laptop from a
Webex Board screen. You must connect the laptop to the
Webex Board with an HDMI cable (wired sharing) and a
USB-C cable.
Touch redirect only works outside of call.
This feature is only available on the second generation of boards (Webex Board 55S, 70S, and 85S).
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 15 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration changes in CE9.9
New configurations
Audio Input ARC [1] Mode
(Codec Plus)
Audio Input HDMI [2..3] Level
(Room 55D, Room 70)
Audio Input HDMI [2..3] Mode (Room 55D, Room 70)
Audio Input HDMI [2..3] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo (Room 55D, Room 70)
BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled (Boards)
Not available in CE9.9.0.
HttpFeedback TlsVerify (All products)
Logging External TlsVerify (All products)
Phonebook Server [1] TlsVerify (All products)
Provisioning TlsVerify (All products)
SIP MinimumTLSVersion (All products)
Standby Signage Audio (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Boards)
Standby Signage InteractionMode (Boards)
Standby Signage Mode (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Boards)
Standby Signage RefreshInterval (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Standby Signage Url (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room
70 G2, Boards)
WebEngine Mode (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70
G2, Boards)
WebEngine RemoteDebugging (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Configurations that are removed
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate
(All products)
Replaced by:
• HttpFeedback TlsVerify
• Phonebook Server [1] TlsVerify
• Provisioning TlsVerify
Configurations that are modified
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
The valuespace and default value has changed for many products. Product specific differences are now handled internally and not reflected in the default value and range of possible values.
NEW: Integer (0..90)
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, SX80, SX20)
NEW: Integer (0..70) (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards, SX10,
MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
NEW: Default value: 70 (All products)
SIP ListenPort (All products)
OLD: Off/On
NEW: Auto/Off/On
SIP ListenPort (Boards)
OLD: Default: On
NEW: Default: Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 16 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.9
New commands
Logging SendLogs
(All products)
Security Certificates Webex Show
(All products)
UserInterface Branding Fetch (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, Boards, SX80, SX20, MX700, MX800, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, DX70, DX80)
UserInterface WebView Clear (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
UserInterface WebView Display (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
WebEngine DeleteStorage (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Boards)
Commands that are removed
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Start (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Boards)
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Stop (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Boards)
Commands that are modified
Audio Volume SetToDefault (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB
Camera PositionSet
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
NEW: Roll: Integer (-300..300)
HttpClient Delete
(All products)
OLD: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (1..100000)
HttpClient Get (All products)
OLD: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (1..100000)
HttpClient Patch (All products)
OLD: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (1..100000) xCommand xStatus
HttpClient Post
(All products)
OLD: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (1..100000)
HttpClient Put (All products)
OLD: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (1..100000)
Phonebook Contact Add
(All products)
OLD: CallRate: Integer (0..6000), Default: 0
NEW: CallRate: Integer (0..6000), Default: none
Phonebook ContactMethod Add (All products)
OLD: CallRate: Integer (0..6000), Default: 0
NEW: CallRate: Integer (0..6000), Default: none
Phonebook ContactMethod Modify (All products)
OLD: CallRate: Integer (0..6000), Default: 0
NEW: CallRate: Integer (0..6000), Default: none
Standby ResetTimer (All products)
OLD: Delay: required parameter
NEW: Delay: optional parameter
UserInterface Extensions Clear (All products)
NEW: ActivityType: Custom/WebApp
UserInterface Extensions List (All products)
NEW: ActivityType: Custom/WebApp
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 17
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.9
New statuses
Cameras Camera [n] Position Roll
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level A
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room
55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Renamed from RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level dBA
RoomAnalytics Sound Level A (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Temperature Status (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini,
Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
WebEngine Features Signage
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
WebEngine Features WebEngine (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Webex Status (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2,
Boards)
Statuses that are removed
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level dBA (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room
55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards)
Renamed to RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level A
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type (All products)
Added to valuespace: CompanionModeIncompatibilityLocal/
CompanionModeIncompatibilityRemote/EmbeddedWebViewFailedToLoad/
EmbeddedWebViewTerminatedUnexpectedly/SoftwareUpgradeKeepsFailing xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 18 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.8
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.8 (CE9.8) compared to CE9.7.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/ collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-setseries/products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.8
New products
The Cisco Webex Boards, which previously have been available only for cloud registration, are now also available for on-premises registration:
• Cisco Webex Board 55/55S
• Cisco Webex Board 70/70S
• Cisco Webex Board 85S
Support for USB headsets
(Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
You can connect a USB Headset, Handset or USB Bluetooth dongle to the USB-A port on the devices. This is similar to the
DX series.
Extended support for HTTP requests (All products)
Since CE9.6 a device has been able to send arbitrary
HTTP(S) Post and Put requests to an HTTP(S) server. This feature is extended to support more request types (Get,
Patch, and Delete), and also to handle data that is returned from the server (response headers and body).
Improved USB-C experience (Room Kit Mini)
The Room Kit Mini is in USB camera mode only when it is streaming media to a computer over the USB-C port. In previous releases it was sufficient that at computer was connected to the USB-C port.
Add participant to CMS conference from the device UI
(All products)
Any user can add another participant to an ongoing CMS conference using the user interface of the device. This also includes PSTN calls. When the participant accepts the call, the participant will be added to the same CMS conference.
In this case the device will tell the CMS to dial the participant using the Active Control mechanism. Then the CMS will dial directly to the participant you want to add.
For this feature to work, Active Control must be enabled on the device, the call protocol must be SIP, and the CMS must be on version 2.4 or higher. The feature doesn’t work if multipoint mode is set to CUCMMediaResourceGroupList.
Register a device to Cisco Webex using API or local web
Interface
(All products)
You can register a device to Cisco Webex remotely, so you don’t have to be in the same room as the device. You can do this programmatically from the API or use the local web interface. In earlier releases you had to use the on-screen setup assistant.
From the web interface, you can only start Webex registering if the device is not currently registered anywhere. If you are using the API, you can start Webex registering even if the device is currently registered to an on-premise system
(CUCM or VCS).
Pre-installed list of Certificate Authorities - CAs (All products)
A list of commonly used CA certificates are pre-installed on the video conferencing device. The device uses this list when validating certificates from external servers that it communicates with:
• HTTP servers that host content used by the HttpClient
API or macros
• SMTP mail servers (only relevant for Webex Boards)
A factory reset does not delete the list.
xAPI over WebSocket: Authentication using auth protocol header (All products)
Authentication using an auth protocol header is supported.
This comes in addition to Basic authentication using an HTTP header field.
This means that browser-based clients, which don’t have direct control over HTTP headers, can authenticate to a device directly from the browser using Javascript.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 19 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
More device settings can be provisioned from UCM than before (All products)
If the device is registered to Cisco UCM 12.5(1)SU1 more settings and parameters can be provisioned from UCM than before ( Device > Product Specific Configuration Layout ). Also, if these settings are changed locally on the device, the new value can be written back to the UCM.
Most of the device’s public settings (xConfiguration), are included. Exceptions are made for Network, Provisioning and
SIP settings.
See the Video Endpoints Management Overview section in the
Release Notes for Cisco Unified ommunications
Manager and the IM and Presence Service, Release 12.5(1)
SU1 for more information.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 20 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration changes in CE9.8
New configurations
Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability
(All products)
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode
(All products)
Conference Multipoint Mode (SX10, DX70, DX80)
FacilityService Service [1..5] CallType (All products)
FacilityService Service [1..5] Name (All products)
FacilityService Service [1..5] Number (All products)
FacilityService Service [1..5] Type (All products)
NetworkServices SMTP From (Boards)
NetworkServices SMTP Mode (Boards)
NetworkServices SMTP Password (Boards)
NetworkServices SMTP Port
(Boards)
NetworkServices SMTP Security
(Boards)
NetworkServices SMTP Server (Boards)
NetworkServices SMTP Username (Boards)
Security Audit Logging Mode (All products)
Security Audit OnError Action (All products)
Security Audit Server Address (All products)
Security Audit Server Port (All products)
Security Audit Server PortAssignment (All products)
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime (All products)
Security Session InactivityTimeout
(All products)
Security Session MaxFailedLogins
(All products)
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
(All products)
Security Session MaxTotalSessions (All products)
Security Session ShowLastLogon (All products)
SerialPort LoginRequired (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 xConfiguration
21
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator
(All products)
UserInterface Phonebook DefaultSearchFilter
(All products)
UserInterface SoundEffects Mode (All products)
Configurations that are removed
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote (SX10, DX70, DX80)
Configurations that are modified
Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: On
NEW: Default: True
OLD: Off/On
NEW: False/True
Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled (Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D,
Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: Off
NEW: Default: True
OLD: Off/On
NEW: False/True
Audio Output Line [1..6] Delay Mode (Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: RelativeToHDMI
NEW: Default: Fixed
NetworkServices Wifi Allowed
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room
70, Room 70 G2, DX70, DX80)
OLD: Public: False
NEW: Public: True
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand changes in CE9.8
New commands
Audio Select
(Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
HttpClient Delete
(All Products)
HttpClient Get (All Products)
HttpClient Patch (All Products)
Security Certificates ThirdParty Disable (All Products)
Security Certificates ThirdParty Enable (All Products)
Security Certificates ThirdParty List (All Products)
Security Certificates ThirdParty Show (All Products)
Webex Registration Cancel (All Products)
Webex Registration Start (All Products)
Commands that are removed
None.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
Commands that are modified
Audio Volume Decrease
(Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB
NEW: Steps: Integer (1..10), Default: 5
Audio Volume Increase (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB
NEW: Steps: Integer (1..100)
Audio Volume Set (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB
NEW: Steps: Integer (1..1000), Default: 100
Audio VuMeter Start (All Products)
NEW: IntervalMs: Integer (10..1000), Default:100
HttpClient Post (All Products)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000), Default: 100000
NEW: ResultBody: None/PlainText/Base64, Default: None
HttpClient Put (All Products)
NEW: ResponseSizeLimit: Integer (0..100000), Default: 100000
NEW: ResultBody: None/PlainText/Base64, Default: None
Presentation Start (Room Kit Mini)
OLD: ConnectorId: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: ConnectorId: Integer (1..2)
OLD: PresentationSource: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: PresentationSource: Integer (1..2)
Presentation Stop
(Room Kit Mini)
OLD: PresentationSource: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: PresentationSource: Integer (1..2)
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 22 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.8
New statuses
Audio Devices HandsetUSB ConnectionStatus
(Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio Devices HandsetUSB Cradle
(Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio Devices HeadsetUSB ConnectionStatus (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Description (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Manufacturer (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio SelectedDevice (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio VolumeHandsetUsb (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio VolumeHeadsetUsb (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Audio VolumeInternal (Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55)
Cameras Camera [n] LightingConditions (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantDisconnect
(All Products)
Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantList
(All Products)
Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantMute (All Products)
Conference Call [n] EventCenter Mode (All Products)
Conference Call [n] Streamed (All Products)
UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini)
Statuses that are removed
None.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Statuses that are modified
Audio Input KeyClick Attenuate
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: On/Off
NEW: False/True
Audio Input KeyClick Enabled (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: On/Off
NEW: False/True
Diagnostics Message[n] Type (All Products)
Added to valuespace: SignageFailedToLoad/SignageTerminatedUnexpectedly
SystemUnit Notifications Notification [n] Type (All Products)
OLD: FactoryResetFailed/FactoryResetOK/Other/RebootRequired/SoftwareUpgradeFailed/
SoftwareUpgradeOK
NEW: Other/RebootRequired/SoftwareUpgradeFailed/SoftwareUpgradeOK
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 23 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.7
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.7 (CE9.7) compared to CE9.6.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements in CE9.7
Connect to xAPI over a WebSocket
(All products)
You can now connect to the xAPI over WebSocket. The communication channel over WebSocket is open both ways until it is explicitly closed. This means that the server can send data to the client as soon as the new data is available, and there is no need for re-authentication for every request.
This improves speed significantly compared to HTTP.
Each message contains a complete JSON document and nothing else. Many programming languages have good library support for WebSocket and JSON-RPC.
WebSocket is not enabled by default. Note that WebSocket is tied to HTTP and HTTP or HTTPS must be enabled before you can use WebSocket.
For more information, see xAPI over WebSocket guide.
Graphical sound mixer available on Audio Console
(Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2, Room 70D G2, SX80)
The Audio Console now has a graphical sound mixer. It has
8 user-definable parametric equalizer settings. A setting consists of up to 6 sections, each of which has its own filter type, gain, center/crossover frequency and Q value. Each section is shown with its own color and the effect of altering any of the parameters immediately becomes visible in the graph.
For more information, see the Customization guide for CE9.7 at https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Ambient noise reporting
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room
Kit, Room Kit Mini)
The Room series devices can be configured to report the stationary ambient noise level in the room. The reported value is an A-weighted decibel value (dBA), which reflects the response of the human ear. Based on reported noise, facility management or a building manager can intervene to troubleshoot the issue.
All signal processing related to this feature is local and the only data transmitted is the calculated noise level.
Support for multiple SRG-120DH/PTZ-12 cameras
(Codec Plus)
You can now connect up to three SRG-120DH/PTZ-12 cameras to a Codec Plus using an HDMI and an Ethernet switch.
Other updates
• 1080p support for Room Kit Mini when it is used as a USB camera. (Room Kit Mini)
• You can turn video off and on during calls.
(All products)
• A device administrator can prevent the use of HTTP and only allow HTTPS Post and HTTPS Put requests.
(All products)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 24 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.7
New configurations
CallHistory Mode
(All products)
Conference Multipoint Mode
(Codec Pro, Codec Plus, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit,
Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX20, SX80)
HttpClient AllowHTTP (All products)
Logging External Mode (All products)
Logging External Protocol
(All products)
Logging External Server Address
(All products)
Logging External Server Port (All products)
Logging Internal Mode (All products)
NetworkServices Websocket (All products)
Phonebook Server [1] Pagination (All products)
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room
55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
SIP ANAT (All products)
UserInterface Features Call VideoMute (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800,
Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX10, SX20, SX80)
UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start
(DX70, DX80)
UserInterface Phonebook Mode (All products)
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility (All products)
UserInterface UsbPromotion (Room Kit Mini)
Video Presentation Priority (All products)
Configurations that are removed
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall (MX700, MX800)
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are modified
Audio Input Line [1..4] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
OLD: 1/2/3/4/5
NEW: 1/2/3/4
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: 1/2/3/4/5
NEW: 1/2/3/4/5/6
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource (MX700, MX800, SX80)
OLD: 1/2/3/4/5
NEW: 1/2/3/4
Video Input Connector [6] CameraControl Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: On
NEW: Default: Off
OLD: On
NEW: On/Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 25 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand changes in CE9.7
New commands
Audio Diagnostics Advanced Run
(All products)
Audio Setup Reset
(Codec Pro, MX700, M800, Room 70 G2, SX80)
Conference Call AuthenticationResponse (All products)
Conference Participant Admit (All products)
Conference Participant Disconnect (All products)
Conference Participant Mute (All products)
Conference ParticipantList Search (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Panel Open (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Panel Update (All products)
Video Input MainVideo Mute (All products)
Video Input MainVideo Unmute
(All products)
Video Matrix Assign
(Room 55D, Room 70)
Video Matrix Reset (Room 55D, Room 70)
Video Matrix Swap (Room 55D, Room 70)
Video Matrix Unassign (Room 55D, Room 70)
Commands that are removed
None.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
Commands that are modified
Audio LocalOutput Add
(Codec Pro, MX700, M800, Room 70 G2, SX80)
NEW: AutoconnectRemote: On/Off, Default: On
OLD: VolumeControlled, Default: none
NEW: VolumeControlled, Default: Off
Audio LocalOutput Update (Codec Pro, MX700, M800, Room 70 G2, SX80)
NEW: AutoconnectRemote: On/Off
CallHistory Get (All products)
OLD: CallHistoryId: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: CallHistoryId: Integer (1..2147483647)
HttpClient Post (All products)
NEW: Timeout: Integer (1..30), Default: 30
HttpClient Put (All products)
NEW: Timeout: Integer (1..30), Default: 30
UserInterface Message TextInput Display (All products)
NEW: InputText: String (0, 255), Default: ““
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 26 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.7
New statuses
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] AutoconnectRemote
(Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2, SX80)
Call [n] Ice
(All products)
Conference Call [n] AuthenticationRequest (All products)
NetworkServices UPnP Status (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] SerialNumber (All products)
Provisioning CUCM Customization Checksum (All products)
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level dBA (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room
55D, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start (DX70, DX80)
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility (All products)
Video Input MainVideoMute (All products)
Statuses that are removed
None.
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type (All products)
Added to valuespace: PIILoggingMode/WebexAudioProximityConnectivity/
WebexLyraConnectivity/WebexNotificationConnectivity
Video Input Connector[n] Type (All products)
OLD: 3G-SDI/Camera/Composite/DVI/HD-SDI/HDMI/USB/Unknown/VGA/YC/YPbPr
NEW: 3G-SDI/Camera/Composite/DVI/HD-SDI/HDMI/USB/Unknown/VGA/YC/YPbPr/
USBC-DP xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 27 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.6
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.6 (CE9.6) compared to CE9.5.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
HDCP support
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
One of the device’s HDMI inputs can be configured to support
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) protected content. This allows customers to re-purpose the screen by connecting other devices such as a Google Chromecast, an
Apple TV, or an HDTV decoder. This type of content cannot be shared while in a call.
When the connector is configured to support HDCP, it is reserved for this type of content. This means that you cannot share any content from this specific connector while in a call, not even non-protected content from a laptop.
Remove default buttons from the user interface
(All products)
If you don’t need all of the default buttons on the user interface, you can remove the ones that you don’t need. This makes it possible to fully customize the user interface. The configuration only removes the buttons, not the functionality as such, and the custom In-Room Control panels can still be exposed.
For more information, see the Cusomization guide for CE9.6 at
https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Support for third-party USB controllers
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, DX70, DX80, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room
70 G2, Room Kit)
You can use a third-party USB input device to control certain functions on a room device. A Bluetooth remote control with a
USB dongle and a USB keyboard are examples of such input devices. You can setup the desired features through macros.
This feature is meant to complement the functionality of the
Touch 10 or the DX user interfaces. It is not meant to replace the Touch 10 and DX user interfaces.
For more information, see the Cusomization guide for CE9.6 at https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
HTTP Post and Put requests
(All products)
This feature makes it possible to send arbitrary HTTP(S) Post and Put requests from a device to an HTTP(S) server.
By using macros, you can send data to an HTTP(S) server whenever you want. You can choose what data to send, and structure them as you like. This way you can adapt the data to an already established service.
Security measures:
• The HTTP(S) Post/Put feature is disabled by default.
• The device administrator can specify a list of HTTP(S) servers that the device is allowed to send data to.
• The number of concurrent Post and Put requests is limited.
Content priority
(All products)
You can now configure your device to prioritize bandwidth usage for either Main Video Channel or Presentation Channel. xConfiguration Video Presentation Priority: <Equal,
High>
Equal is the default configuration and means 50 / 50 bandwidth division. Selecting “High” divides the bandwidth
25 / 75 in favor of the presentation channel.
Other updates (All products)
• You can start and control recording meetings from the device’s user interface, provided that recording is supported by your infrastructure.
• Edit favorite contact’s information on Touch 10 controller.
• SIP calls now display the SIP Session ID field in the logs to help identify calls.
• Ability to use ICE over MRA to locate the best path for media.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 28 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.6
New configurations
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Channel
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level
(Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode (Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
Audio Input HDMI [2..5] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo (Room 70 G2)
Audio Microphones PhantomPower (Codec Plus, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Room 55, Room Kit, SX20)
Audio Output ConnectorSetup (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output HDMI [n] Level (MX700, MX800)
Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode (Codec Plus, MX700, MX800)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (MX700, MX800, Room 55 Dual, Room 70)
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer ID (Room 70 G2)
Audio Output Line [1..6] Equalizer Mode
(Room 70 G2)
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS
(All products)
HttpClient Mode (All products)
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] Key (All products)
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] KeyId (All products)
NetworkServices NTP Server [1..3] KeyAlgorithm (All products)
Peripherals InputDevice Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, DX70, DX80, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors (All products)
UserInterface Features Call End (All products)
UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls (All products)
UserInterface Features Call Start (All products)
UserInterface Features HideAll (All products)
UserInterface Features Share Start (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] HDCP Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
Video Output Connector [2] CEC Mode
(Room 70 Single) xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are removed
Conference MultiStream Mode
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, SX20)
Configurations that are modified
Audio Output ARC [1] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: Auto
NEW: Default: On
OLD: Off/On/Auto
NEW: Off/On
Audio Output HDMI [1..3] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: Auto (Codec Pro)
NEW: Default: On
(Codec Pro)
OLD: Default, HDMI [2..3]: Auto (Room 70 G2 Single)
NEW: Default, HDMI [2..3]: Off (Room 70 G2 Single)
OLDl: Default, HDMI [3]: Auto (Room 70 G2 Dual)
NEW: Default, HDMI [3]: Off
(Room 70 G2 Dual)
OLD: Off/On/Auto
NEW: Off/On
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Room 55, Room 70 G2, Room Kit)
OLD: Default: Auto (Room 70 G2)
NEW: Default: On (Room 70 G2)
OLD: Off/On/Auto (Room 70 G2)
NEW: Off/On/UltrasoundOnly (Room 70 G2)
OLD: Off/On (Room 55, Room Kit)
NEW: Off/On/UltrasoundOnly (Room 55, Room Kit)
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume (SX20)
OLD: Default: 70
NEW: Default: 60
Provisioning Mode (All products)
OLD: Auto/CUCM/Edge/Off/TMS/VCS/Spark
NEW: Auto/CUCM/Edge/Off/TMS/VCS/Webex
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 29 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Provisioning Mode
(Room 55 Dual)
OLD: Default: Off
NEW: Default: On
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (Room 55 Dual)
OLD: Default: Off
NEW: Default: On xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 30 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.6
New commands
Conference Recording Pause
(All products)
Conference Recording Resume
(All products)
Conference Recording Start (All products)
Conference Recording Stop (All products)
HttpClient Allow Hostname Add (All products)
HttpClient Allow Hostname Clear (All products)
HttpClient Allow Hostname List (All products)
HttpClient Allow Hostname Remove (All products)
HttpClient Post (All products)
HttpClient Put (All products)
Security Session Get
(All products)
Commands that are removed
None.
Commands that are modified
Audio Sound Play (All products)
OLD: Sound: Alert/Binding/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/PresentationConnect/
Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/StartListening/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp
NEW: Sound: Alert/Binding/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/
Dial/KeyInput/KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/
PresentationConnect/Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/StartListening/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/
VolumeAdjust/WakeUp/Announcement
Audio VuMeter Start (DX70, DX80, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 50, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room Kit, SX10)
OLD: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/Line
NEW: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Audio VuMeter Stop
(DX70, DX80, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 50, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room Kit, SX10)
OLD: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/Line
NEW: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone
Dial (All products)
OLD: CallType: Audio/Video
NEW: CallType: Audio/Video/Auto
Phonebook Contact Add
(All products)
OLD: CallType: Audio/Video
NEW: CallType: Audio/Video/Auto
Phonebook ContactMethod Add (All products)
OLD: CallType: Audio/Video
NEW: CallType: Audio/Video/Auto
Phonebook ContactMethod Modify (All products)
OLD: CallType: Audio/Video
NEW: CallType: Audio/Video/Auto
Phonebook Search (All products)
NEW: SearchFilter: All/Rooms/People
Presentation Start (All products)
NEW: Layout: Equal/Prominent
SystemUnit FactoryReset (All products)
OLD: Keep: Certificates/HTTP/LocalSetup/Network/Provisioning/SerialPort/Spark
NEW: Keep: Certificates/HTTP/LocalSetup/Network/Provisioning/SerialPort/Webex
UserInterface Message TextInput Clear (All products)
NEW: FeedbackId: String (0, 255)
UserInterface Message TextInput Display
(All products)
OLD: User role: Admin, Integrator, RoomControl, User
NEW: User role: Admin, Integrator, RoomControl
OLD: FeedbackId: required paramter
NEW: FeedbackId: optional parameter
UserInterface Message TextInput Response
(All products)
OLD: FeedbackId: required paramter
NEW: FeedbackId: optional parameter
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 31 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
UserManagement User Add
(All products)
OLD: Passphrase: optional paramter
NEW: Passphrase: required paramter
Video Input SetMainVideoSource (All products)
OLD: Layout: Equal/PIP
NEW: Layout: Equal/PIP/Prominent
NEW: PIPPosition: LowerLeft/LowerRight/UpperLeft/UpperRight
NEW: PIPSize: Auto/Large
Video Matrix Assign (All products)
NEW: Layout: Equal/Prominent
NEW: RemoteMain: Integer (1..4)
Video Matrix Unassign (All products)
OLD: SourceId: required paramter
NEW: SourceId: optional paramter
NEW: RemoteMain: Integer (1..4) xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 32 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.6
New statuses
Audio Input Connectors HDMI [n] Mute
(All products)
Audio Input Connectors Line [n] Mute
(All products)
Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] Mute (All products)
H320 Gateway Address (All products)
H320 Gateway Id (All products)
H320 Gateway Mode (All products)
H320 Gateway Number (All products)
H320 Gateway Reason (All products)
H320 Gateway Status (All products)
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio ChannelRole (All products)
UserInterface Features Call End
(All products)
UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls
(All products)
UserInterface Features Call Start (All products)
UserInterface Features Share Start (All products)
Video Layout Site [n] Frame [n] Mirrored (All products)
Statuses that are removed
Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] DelayMs (Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] Mode (Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
Video Mute
(All products)
Statuses that are modified
Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2,
Room Kit)
OLD: Off/On
NEW: Off/On/DelayMeasurement xCommand
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 33 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.5
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.5 (CE9.5) compared to CE9.4.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
Presentation source compositing
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room 55,
Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room Kit, SX20, SX80)
With using two or more content sources and sending them as one image, you can create a new experience for sharing in meetings
This gives users more flexibility with what they present to remote sites. You can configure the presentation composition through In-Room Controls together with Macros or an external controller.
The number of sources is determined by the device in use:
• MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Room Kit and SX20: up to two sources
• Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room Kit Plus: up to three sources
• MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2, Room Kit Pro, and SX80: up to four sources
You can only compose content that has been shared through a VGA or HDMI cable.
Web audio console (Codec Pro, SX80)
The new audio console is natively available on the web interface of the high-end integrator devices. The audio console gives you simplified tools to route audio from an input to an output. The new audio console replaces the old java-based
CE Console that is no longer maintained.
When you access the audio console for the first time you will see the default device audio routes. The audio console is controlled by an underlying macro which is saved and started once you select Choose to overwrite the current device configurations.
For more information, see the Cusomization guide for CE9.5 at https://www.cisco.com/go/in-room-control-docs
Classroom scenario
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2, SX80)
The Classroom mode uses macros to tailor a room setup that works well for presenting and teaching scenarios. The template provides easy setup, maintenance, and use of the room. Classroom works similarly to the existing Briefing Room mode but it doesn’t require three screens.
Support for Korean keyboard (All products)
Korean keyboard input is now supported on Touch 10 controller when the user interface language is set to Korean.
Remote monitoring of screen status (SX20, SX80)
The remote monitoring of screen status that has been available for the Webex Room series and SX10 is now available for SX20 and SX80.
The video conferencing device can wake up the screen if it is in standby mode or put the screen to standby when the device enters standby. The input source can also be changed automatically when a call is received.
CEC is disabled on the device by default and must be enabled in the Video Output Connector [1] CEC Mode setting.
Your screen must support CEC and it has to be enabled on it for remote monitoring to work.
Welcome banner (All products)
You can set up a welcome banner that the user sees after they sign in to the device’s web interface or the command line interface. The banner can for example contain information that the user needs to get started or things they need to be aware of when changing settings.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 34 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.5
New configurations
Audio Input ARC [n] Mode
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ARC [1] Delay DelayMs
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ARC [1] Delay Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output ARC [1] Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Room 70 G2)
Audio Output Line [1] Mode (Codec Plus, Room 55)
Audio Output Line [1] OutputType (Codec Plus, Room 55)
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm (All products)
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall (SX80, MX700ST)
Configurations that are removed
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Codec Pro)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are modified
Audio Input Microphone [1..8] Equalizer ID
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Integer (1..14)
NEW: Integer (1..8)
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
(Codec Pro, MX700 with dual camera, Room 70 G2, SX80)
OLD: Default: 70 (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, SX80)
NEW: Default: 60 (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2, SX80)
OLD: Default: 70 (MX700 with dual camera)
NEW: Default: 66
(MX700 with dual camera)
OLD: Integer: 0 – 90 (Room 70 G2)
NEW: Integer: 0 – 80 (Room 70 G2)
Video Input Connector[3,4,5] PreferredResolution (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: Default: 3840_2160_30
NEW: Default: 1920_1080_60
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 35 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.5
New commands
Audio Equalizer List
(SX80, Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2)
Audio Equalizer Update
(SX80, Codec Pro, MX700, MX800, Room 70 G2)
Provisioning RoomType Activate (Codec Plus, Room 70)
SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear (All products)
SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get (All products)
SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Panel Close (All products)
UserInterface Message TextInput Response (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
UserManagement User Unblock (All Products)
Video CEC Output KeyClick (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video CEC Output SendActiveSourceRequest
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Commands that are removed
None.
Commands that are modified
Audio LocalInput AddConnector (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/Line
NEW: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/ARC
Audio LocalInput RemoveConnector (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/Line
NEW: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/ARC
Audio LocalOutput AddConnector
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2
OLD: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone
NEW: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/ARC
Audio LocalOutput RemoveConnector (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
OLD: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone
NEW: ConnectorType: HDMI/Microphone/ARC
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Audio Sound Play
(All products)
OLD: Sound: Alert/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/PresentationConnect/
Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/StartListening/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp
NEW: Sound: Alert/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/PresentationConnect/
Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/StartListening/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp/
Binding
Phonebook Search (SX80, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit NOTE: Only when registered to Cisco Webex)
NEW: SearchFilter: All/Rooms/People
UserManagement User Modify (All products)
Removed: Unblock: False/True
Video Matrix Assign (SX20, SX80, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800,
Room 70 G2)
OLD: SourceId: required parameter
NEW: SourceId: optional parameter
Video Matrix Unassign (SX20, Codec Plus, Room Kit, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
OLD: SourceId: Integer (1..4) (Codec Plus)
NEW: SourceId: Integer (1..3)
(Codec Plus)
OLD: SourceId: Integer (1..4) (Room Kit, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
NEW: SourceId: Integer (1..2) (Room Kit, MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
OLD: SourceId: Integer (1..3) (SX20)
NEW: SourceId: Integer (1..2) (SX20)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 36 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.5
New statuses
Audio Input Connectors ARC [n] EcReferenceDelay
(All products)
Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] DelayMs
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
Provisioning RoomType (Codec Plus, Room 70)
SystemUnit Software OptionKeys MultiSite (SX10, DX70, DX80)
Video Mute (All products)
Video Output Monitor [n] FirmwareVersion (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor [n] ModelName (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor [n] Position (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor [n] SerialNumber (SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor [n] Temperature
(SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800)
Statuses that are removed
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerControl (All products)
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Statuses that are modified
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Type
(All products)
OLD: Byod/Camera/ControlSystem/ISDNLink/Other/SpeakerTracker/TouchPanel
NEW: Byod/Camera/ControlSystem/ISDNLink/Other/SpeakerTracker/TouchPanel/
InputDevice
SystemUnit Software OptionKeys MultiSite (SX20, SX80, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room Kit, MX200 G2,
MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room 55, Room 70, Room 70 G2)
OLD: False/True
NEW: False/True/NotApplicable
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 37 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.4
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.4 (CE9.4) compared to CE9.3.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
New products
• Cisco Webex Codec Pro
• Cisco Webex Room 70 Single G2
• Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual G2
• Cisco Webex Room 55 Dual
Rebranding from Cisco Spark to Cisco Webex (All products)
Cisco Spark has changed its name to Cisco Webex, and the user interface elements that displayed Spark are changed to
Webex . In the activation flow you now see Cisco Webex as a registration option instead of Cisco Spark.
The following products have gotten new names:
• Cisco Spark Room Kit is now Cisco Webex Room Kit
• Cisco Spark Room Kit Plus is now Cisco Webex Room Kit
Plus
• Cisco Spark Codec Plus is now Cisco Webex Codec Plus
• Cisco Spark Quad Camera is now Cisco Quad Camera
• Cisco Spark Room 55 and 70 are now Cisco Webex
Room 55 and 70
• Cisco DX70 is now Cisco Webex DX70
• Cisco DX80 is now Cisco Webex DX80
The maximum number of Proximity clients is increased
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room
Kit)
A Cisco Webex Room Series device can have up to 30 paired clients simultaneously when the Proximity service
ContentShare ToClients is disabled. If ContentShare ToClients is enabled, the limit of paired clients is 7 which is the same as in earlier software releases.
CUCM provisioning of the admin settings lockdown configuration (All products)
The admin settings lockdown configuration, that was introduced in CE9.2.1, can now be provisioned from CUCM. You can lock a selection of the settings on the settings menu on all of your devices simultaneously when you configure them through CUCM.
Your CUCM may require a device package in order to expose the new fields for this configuration.
Support for content sharing using H.263 in a call between
Cisco Webex Room Series and legacy MXP devices
(Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room
Kit)
Support for H.263 content sharing between MXP and Cisco
Webex Room Series is now available. The Room Series previously had a limitation where it could not receive or share content in a separate content channel. Sharing content from a
Room Series device to a MXP device would in earlier versions compose the presentation into the main video stream.
This is only supported in certain scenarios:
• Direct H.323 calls (IP dialing) between a Room Series device and a MXP device.
• MXP registered on VCS on H.323 and a Room Series device registered to the same VCS on either SIP or
H.323. Note that making a H.323 to SIP call on a VCS requires that an interworking option key is installed on the
VCS.
See the CE9 release notes for information on other limitations related to this feature.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 38 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Enable backlight compensation from the touch screen
(DX70, DX80)
A new setting on the DX70 and DX80 main menu enables and disables backlight compensation. This is a fixed setting that increases (on) or decreases (off) the sensors brightness levels in order to compensate for sunlight or other bright light sources behind the user. The backlight compensation sets the sensor to a fixed level and it is not auto adjusted to the backlight.
Changed default HTTP mode from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS
(All products)
The default value of NetworkServices HTTP Mode is changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS. This is to increase the security of the room devices on default configuration. Upgrading from earlier software versions will not automatically change the default value and it will stay on HTTP+HTTPS to avoid breaking current HTTP implementations.
The change is seen on new devices running CE9.4.0 or later, or if the device is factory reset on CE9.4.0. The HTTP requests are redirect to HTTPS and on the first visit to the device’s web interface, the device displays an “Insecure connection warning”. To proceed to the web interface, you need to create an exception in your browser. This is a one-time operation unless you access the web interface with a different browser that has never visited the device web interface or if the device is factory reset.
In-Room Control update (All products)
You can add buttons for as many panels as you want on the home screen as well as on the in-call screen of the user interface.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 39 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.4
New configurations
Audio Input Microphone [n] PhantomPower
(Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode
(Room 55, Codec Pro)
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo (Room 55, Codec Pro)
Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay DelayMs (Codec Pro)
Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay Mode (Codec Pro)
Audio Output Line [1] OutputType (Room 70, Room 55D)
Cameras Camera [1] Backlight DefaultMode (DX70, DX80)
Cameras Camera [1..2] Mirror (MX700, MX800)
Conference FarendMessage Mode (All products)
Configurations that are removed
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed (All products)
Video Output Connector [2] CEC Mode (DX70, DX80)
Video Output Connector [2] OverscanLevel (DX70, DX80)
Video Output Connector [2] Resolution (DX70, DX80) xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are modified
Audio Output Line [1] OutputType
(Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: LineOut
NEW: Default value: Loudspeaker
OLD: Value space: LineOut/Subwoofer
NEW: Value space: LineOut/Loudspeaker/Recorder/Subwoofer
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Codec Plus, Room 70)
OLD: Default value: 60 (MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
70 (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
NEW: Default value: 50 (MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
60 (Codec Plus, Room 70)
64 (Room 55)
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..80) (MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
Integer (0..90) (Room 55, Room 70)
NEW: Value space: Integer (0..70)
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2)
Integer (0..80)
(Room 70)
Integer (0..84)
(Room 55)
Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN
Network [1] Speed (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices HTTP Mode (All products)
OLD: Default value: HTTP+HTTPS
NEW: Default value: HTTPS
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
(All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP Host [1..3] Address (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 40 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
NetworkServices SNMP Mode
(All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
(All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
UserInterface ContactInfo Type (SX10, DX70, DX80)
OLD: Value space: Auto/DisplayName/IPv4/IPv6/None/SipUri/SystemName
NEW: Value space: Auto/DisplayName/E164Alias/H320Number/H323Id/IPv4/IPv6/None/
SipUri/SystemName
Video Output Connector [1] CEC Mode (SX10)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Output Connector [3] Resolution (SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 41 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommands changes in CE9.4
New commands
Audio LocalInput Add
(MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalInput AddConnector
(MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalInput Remove (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalInput RemoveConnector (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalInput Update (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput Add (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput AddConnector (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput ConnectInput (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput DisconnectInput (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput Remove (MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput RemoveConnector
(MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput Update
(MX700, MX800)
Audio LocalOutput UpdateInputGain (MX700, MX800)
Audio RemoteOutput ConnectInput (MX700, MX800)
Audio RemoteOutput DisconnectInput (MX700, MX800)
Audio RemoteOutput UpdateInputGain (MX700, MX800)
Audio Setup Clear (MX700, MX800)
Call FarEndMessage Send (All products)
Provisioning RoomType Activate (SX80, MX700, MX800, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Security FIPSMode Activate (All products)
Video Matrix Assign
(Room Kit, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Video Matrix Reset
(Room Kit, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Video Matrix Swap
(Room Kit, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Video Matrix Unassign (Room Kit, Codec Pro, Room 70 G2)
Commands that are removed
None.
xConfiguration
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 42
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Commands that are modified
Audio LocalInput Add
(SX80)
NEW: Direct: On/Off
Audio LocalInput Update (SX80)
NEW: Direct: On/Off
OLD: AGC, Channels, MixerMode, Mute, Name: Required parameters
NEW: AGC, Channels, MixerMode, Mute, Name: Optional parameters
Audio LocalOutput Update (SX80)
OLD: Channels, Loundspeaker, Name: Required parameters
NEW: Channels, Loundspeaker, Name: Optional parameters
Camera PositionSet (All products except DX70, DX80)
OLD: Zoom: Integer (0..8500)
NEW: Zoom: Integer (0..11800)
Conference DoNotDisturb Activate (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Conference DoNotDisturb Deactivate
(All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
SystemUnit FactoryReset (All products)
OLD: Keep: Certificates/LocalSetup/Network/Provisioning/SerialPort/Spark
NEW: Keep: Certificates/LocalSetup/Network/Provisioning/SerialPort/Spark/HTTP
SystemUnit SoftwareUpgrade (All products)
Removed: UserName, Password
UserManagement User Modify
(All products)
NEW: Unblock: False/True
Video Selfview Set (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
OLD: OnMonitorRole: First/Second/Third
NEW: OnMonitorRole: First/Second/Third/Fourth
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.4
New statuses
Audio Input LocalInput [n] Direct
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] DelayMs
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2,
Room 55D)
Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] Mode (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room
55D)
Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] DelayMs (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70,
Room 70 G2, Room 55D)
Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] Mode (Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 55D, Room 70, Room
70 G2)
Audio Output MeasuredHdmiArcDelay (All products)
Audio Output MeasuredHdmiDelay
(All products)
Audio Output ReportedHdmiCecDelay
(All products)
Cameras Camera [n] LightingConditions (Room Kit, Room 55, Codec Plus, Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70
G2, Room 55D)
Cameras Camera [n] Position Lens (Codec Pro, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Room 55D)
Network [n] IPv6 LinkLocalAddress
(All products)
RoomPreset [n] Defined
(All products except DX70 and DX80)
RoomPreset [n] Description (All products except DX70 and DX80)
RoomPreset [n] Type (All products except DX70 and DX80)
SystemUnit Hardware TemperatureThreshold (SX80, SX20, SX10, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800,
DX70, DX80)
Statuses that are removed
None.
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type
(All products)
NEW: Value space: SparkActivationRequired and SparkConnectivity removed
Video Monitors (All products)
OLD: Valuespace: Dual/DualPresentationOnly/Single/Triple/TriplePresentationOnly
NEW: Valuespace: Dual/DualPresentationOnly/Single/Triple/TriplePresentationOnly/
Quadruple
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole (All products)
OLD: Valuespace: First/InternalSetup/PresentationOnly/Recorder/Second/Third
NEW: Valuespace: First/InternalSetup/PresentationOnly/Recorder/Second/Third/Fourth
Video Selfview OnMonitorRole
(All products)
OLD: Valuespace: First/Second/Third
NEW: Valuespace: First/Second/Third/Fourth
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 43 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.3
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.3 (CE9.3) compared to CE9.2.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
Backup and restore settings and custom elements
(All products)
You can include custom elements as well as configurations in a backup file bundle (zip). You can choose which of the following elements to include in the bundle:
• Branding images
• Macros
• Favorites
• Sign-in banner
• In-room control panels
• Configurations (all or a sub-set)
In previous software versions, you could only backup the configurations.
The backup file can either be restored manually from the device’s web interface, or you can generalize the backup bundle so that it can be provisioned across multiple devices, for example using Cisco UCM or TMS.
You will find the backup and restore functionality under
Maintenance > Backup and Restore on the device’s web interface.
Provisioning of custom elements (All products)
The backup bundle, as described above, can be provisioned to many devices using Cisco UCM or TMS. It is important that device specific information is removed when creating a backup bundle intended for multiple devices. If you include device specific information in such a bundle, you may end up with multiple devices that cannot be reached.
By provisioning a non-device specific backup bundle, you can for example, copy a device’s setup with macros, branding elements, and in-room control panels across multiple devices.
Currently, provisioning via Cisco UCM will not restore any configurations, only the other custom elements; TMS will restore everything that is included in the backup bundle.
See the release note for more details about provisioning.
In-Room Control updates (All products)
The following functionality is added to the in-room control feature:
• You can add buttons for up to 20 panels in total. The buttons appear on the home screen or the in-call screen of the user interface depending on the panel type.
• As before, there are three types of in-room control panels: global panels (always available), in-call panels
(available only when in call), and out-of-call panels (only available when not in a call). The entry point for the global panel has been removed from the status bar (top right corner of the user interface). Buttons to open global panels are added to both the home screen and the in-call screen instead, together with the buttons for the out-ofcall only and in-call only panels, respectively.
• You can make standalone trigger-buttons, which are buttons that trigger an event directly, without opening a panel on the user interface.
Also the following features are added in the in-room control editor:
• Some new icons are available.
• A set of colors to choose from for the in-room-control buttons.
• Double click text elements to edit text directly.
• Drag and drop in-room control XML files into the editor.
For a full description of in-room controls, see the
Cusomization guide for CE9.3 at https://www.cisco.com/ go/in-room-control-docs
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 44 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
Support for ISDN Link
(All products)
ISDN Link with software version IL1.1.7 is supported for all video conferencing devices that supports CE9.3.0.
As before, when using automatic pairing (which allows the
ISDN Link to be automatically discovered by the device) IPv6 must be enabled on the device.
One Button to Push snooze (All products)
You are able to snooze an One Button to Push (OBTP) meeting reminder for 5 minutes. The snooze time cannot be changed. The reminder typically appears if you are in a call and a scheduled meeting is about to start. You can snooze the reminder for 5 minutes each time it appears until the meeting has ended.
Screen status monitoring and control
(SX10)
SX10 now has the same CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) behavior as the devices in the Room series.
The device will use CEC to set the screen in standby when the device itself enters standby, and wake up the screen and select the correct video input when the device itself wakes up from standby. CEC information from the screen is included in the device’s status. Of course, the screen must also support
CEC and send the relevant information to the device.
CEC is disabled on the device by default, and must be enabled in the Video Output Connector [1] CEC Mode setting.
Adjust the call rate before making a call
(All products)
As soon as you start typing in the Search or dial field, you can open a dialog and select a custom call rate. In earlier releases this was available only when selecting an entry from the Directory.
If you don’t select a custom call rate, you get the rate set in the Conference DefaultCall Rate setting.
Select ring-tone and adjust ring-tone volume
(All products)
You can select a ring-tone and adjust the ring-tone volume from the settings menu on the user interface. In the previous releases this was done from the web interface.
Resume a postponed upgrade (All products)
When you get a notification about software upgrade, you can choose Upgrade now or Postpone . If you postpone the upgrade, you can resume the upgrade from the Settings
> About this device menu on the user interface when you are ready; you don’t have to wait for 6 hours like you had to before.
If you don’t manually resume the upgrade, the upgrade will start automatically after 6 hours.
Prevent device information from being exposed in the user interface (All products)
You can prevent important device information from being exposed in the user interface, for example:
• IP addresses (video system, touch controller, UCM/VCS registrar)
• MAC address
• Serial number
• Software version
To enable this feature the following must be done:
• A passphrase must be set for all users with administrator rights
• UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode must be set to Locked
• UserInterface Security Mode must be set to Strong
This feature also means that the IP address is not displayed on the screen when you disconnect a Touch controller.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Accessibility: Flashing screen on incoming calls
(All products)
You can configure the device so that the screen and Touch controller flashes red / light grey when the system receives an incoming call. This feature is mainly targeting hearing impaired users, making it easier for them to notice an incoming call.
The feature is disabled by default, and must be enabled by the Accessibility IncomingCallNotification setting.
Mirrored self-view (DX70 and DX80)
You can configure the device to show the self-view image the way other people see you, or as you would see yourself in a mirror. Use the Video Selfview Mirrored setting. Mirrored self-view used to be available only for Cisco DX devices running Android software.
Mirroring only applies to the self-view image, and has no effect on the video that is sent to the far end.
One common API guide
We have gathered all API information in one API guide, that covers all products. This is in contrast to earlier releases were we have had one API guide per product.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 45 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration changes in CE9.3
New configurations
Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [1..3] AssignedSerialNumber (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Backlight DefaultMode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Brightness DefaultLevel (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Brightness Mode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Focus Mode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Gamma Level (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Gamma Mode (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Mirror (Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Whitebalance Level
(Codec Plus, Room 70)
Cameras Camera [3] Whitebalance Mode
(Codec Plus, Room 70)
Network [1] DNS DNSSEC Mode (All products)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl (All products)
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode (All products)
SystemUnit CrashReporting URL (All products)
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification (All products)
UserInterface Security Mode (All products)
Video Selfview Mirrored (DX70/DX80)
Configurations that are removed
Provisioning HttpMethod (All products) xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
Configurations that are modified
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed
(All products)
OLD: Default value: True
NEW: Default value: False
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode (All products)
OLD: Value space: Manual/Off
NEW: Value space: Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
Proximity Mode (Room 70)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (Room 70)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Video Input Connector [2] Name (Room 55)
OLD: Default value: “PC 1 (HDMI)”
NEW: Default value: “”
Video Input Connector [3] Name
(Room 55)
OLD: Default value: “PC 2 (HDMI)”
NEW: Default value: “”
Video Input Connector [1] CEC Mode (Room 70)
OLD: Value space: Off/On
NEW: Value space: On
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 46 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommands changes in CE9.3
New commands
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Stop
(All products)
Bookings NotificationSnooze
(All products)
HttpFeedback Enable (All products)
Macros Macro RemoveAll (All products)
Provisioning Service Fetch (All products)
Standby ResetHalfwakeTimer (All products)
UserInterface Branding Clear (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Panel Clicked (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Panel Remove (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Panel Save (All products)
Video CEC Output KeyClick
(SX10)
Video CEC Output SendActiveSourceRequest
(Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit, SX10)
Video Matrix Assign (Codec Plus)
Video Matrix Reset (Codec Plus)
Video Matrix Swap (Codec Plus)
Video Matrix Unassign (Codec Plus)
Commands that are removed
Provisioning StartUpgrade (All products)
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Commands that are modified
Audio Sound Play
(All products)
OLD: Sound: Alert/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/PresentationConnect/
Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp
NEW: Sound: Alert/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/PresentationConnect/
Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp/StartListening
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play (All products)
NEW: Loop: On/Off
Dial (DX70, DX80)
OLD: CallRate: Integer (64..3072)
NEW: CallRate: Integer (64..6000)
Dial
(All products)
NEW: TrackingData: String (0, 255)
Macros Macro Save (Codec Plus, DX70, DX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room 55, Room 70,
Room Kit, SX20, SX80)
NEW: Transpile: False/True
Peripherals List (All products)
NEW: Type: Default: All
SystemUnit ProductPlatform Set (Codec Plus, Room 70)
OLD: Platform: ROOM70D/ROOM70S
NEW: Platform: ROOM70D/ROOM70S/ROOM55D
UserInterface Extensions Widget Action (All products)
OLD: WidgetId: String (0, 40)
NEW: WidgetId: String (0, 255)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 47 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
UserInterface Extensions Widget SetValue (All products)
OLD: WidgetId: String (0, 40)
NEW: WidgetId: String (0, 255)
UserInterface Extensions Widget UnsetValue (All products)
OLD: WidgetId: String (0, 40)
NEW: WidgetId: String (0, 255)
Video Matrix Assign (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX800, MX700, SX20, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Video Matrix Reset (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX800, MX700, SX20, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Video Matrix Swap
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX800, MX700, SX20, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Video Matrix Unassign (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX800, MX700, SX20, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 48 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.3
New statuses
Audio Input KeyClick Attenuate
(Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit)
Audio Input KeyClick Enabled
(Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit)
Audio Input KeyClick Detected (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit)
HttpFeedback [n] Status (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeFailureReason (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeURL (All products)
Provisioning RoomType (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Urgency (All products)
Video Output Monitor [n] FirmwareVersion (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit, SX10)
Video Output Monitor [n] ModelName (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit, SX10)
Video Output Monitor [n] Position
(Codec Plus, Room 55, Room Kit)
Video Output Monitor [n] SerialNumber
(Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit, SX10)
Video Output Monitor [n] Temperature (Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room Kit, SX10)
Statuses that are removed
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Netstat Drop (All products)
USB Device [n] State (SX20)
USB Device [n] Type (SX20)
Statuses that are modified
Cameras Camera [n] Flip (Codec Plus, MX700, MX800, Room 70, SX10, SX20, SX80)
OLD: String
NEW: Off/On
Diagnostics Message [n] Type (All products)
OLD: ANATOnVCS/AbnormalCallTermination/AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/
AudioPairingInterference/AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/
AudioPairingSNR/AudioPairingTokenDecode/CAPFOperationState/
CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/CallProtocolDualStackConfig/
CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 49
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
CameraDetected/CameraId/CameraPairing/CameraSerial/CameraSoftwareVersion/
CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/CaptivePortalDetected/CertificateExpiry/
ConfigurationFile/ContactInfoMismatch/ControlSystemConnection/
DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/ECReferenceDelay/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/
FirstTimeWizardNotCompleted/H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/
HasActiveCallProtocol/HasValidReleaseKey/IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/
ISDNLinkCompatibility/ISDNLinkIpStack/ITLinstallation/InvalidSIPTransportConfig/
IpCameraStatus/LockDown/MediaBlockingDetected/MediaPortRangeNegative/
MediaPortRangeOdd/MediaPortRangeOverlap/MediaPortRangeTooSmall/
MediaPortRangeValueSpace/MicrophoneReinforcement/MicrophonesConnected/
MonitorDelay/NTPStatus/NetLinkStatus/NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/
OSDVideoOutput/OutputConnectorLocations/PlatformSanity/PresentationSourceSelection/
PresenterTrack/ProvisioningDeveloperOptions/ProvisioningStatus/RoomControl/
SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/SIPListenPortAndRegistration/
SIPProfileRegistration/SIPProfileType/SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/
SipIceAndAnatConflict/SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/SoftwareUpgrade/
SparkActivationRequired/SparkConnectivity/SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/
SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/
SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/TCPMediaFallback/TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/TemperatureCheck/
TouchPanelConnection/TurnBandwidth/UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/
VideoFromInternalCamera/VideoInputSignalQuality/VideoInputStability/
VideoPortRangeNegative/VideoPortRangeOdd/VideoPortRangeTooSmall/
VideoPortRangeValueSpace/WifiCARequired/ActiveMacros/AudioECRefDelay
NEW: ANATOnVCS/AbnormalCallTermination/AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/
AudioPairingInterference/AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/
AudioPairingSNR/AudioPairingTokenDecode/CAPFOperationState/
CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/CallProtocolDualStackConfig/
CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/
CameraDetected/CameraId/CameraPairing/CameraSerial/CameraSoftwareVersion/
CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/CaptivePortalDetected/CertificateExpiry/
ConfigurationFile/ContactInfoMismatch/ControlSystemConnection/
DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/ECReferenceDelay/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/
FirstTimeWizardNotCompleted/H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/
HasActiveCallProtocol/HasValidReleaseKey/IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/
ISDNLinkCompatibility/ISDNLinkIpStack/ITLinstallation/InvalidSIPTransportConfig/
IpCameraStatus/LockDown/MediaBlockingDetected/MediaPortRangeNegative/
MediaPortRangeOdd/MediaPortRangeOverlap/MediaPortRangeTooSmall/
MediaPortRangeValueSpace/MicrophoneReinforcement/MicrophonesConnected/
MonitorDelay/NTPStatus/NetLinkStatus/NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/
OSDVideoOutput/OutputConnectorLocations/PlatformSanity/PresentationSourceSelection/
PresenterTrack/ProvisioningDeveloperOptions/ProvisioningStatus/RoomControl/
SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/SIPListenPortAndRegistration/
SIPProfileRegistration/SIPProfileType/SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/
SipIceAndAnatConflict/SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/SoftwareUpgrade/
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
SparkActivationRequired/SparkConnectivity/SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/
SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/
SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/TCPMediaFallback/TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/TemperatureCheck/
TouchPanelConnection/TurnBandwidth/UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/
VideoFromInternalCamera/VideoInputSignalQuality/VideoInputStability/
VideoPortRangeNegative/VideoPortRangeOdd/VideoPortRangeTooSmall/
VideoPortRangeValueSpace/WifiCARequired/ HTTPFeedbackFailed/
HdmiCecModeNoSound/MacrosRuntimeStatus/MicrophoneOverloaded/SparkOffline/
UltrasoundConfigSettings xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 50 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.2
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.2 (CE9.2) compared to CE9.1.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
Macro framework
(All products except SX10)
The macro framework allows users and integrators to write
JavaScript macros in order to automate scenarios and customize device behavior so that it suites an individual customer’s requirements.
The combination of macros and powerful features such as listening for events/status changes, automating execution of commands and configurations, and providing local control functionality for the In-Room control feature, provides many possibilities for custom setups.
Minor behavioral changes, such as having the device in
Do Not Disturb for an infinite amount of time, can be easily realized by macros. Some other examples are: Reset configurations automatically, make a call at a certain time of the day, and issue alert or help messages depending on status changes.
The macro editor, which also provides several example macros, is available from the device’s web interface.
HDCP support (Room 55)
The device’s second HDMI input (Connector 3) can be configured to support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) protected content. This allows customers to re-purpose the device’s screen by connecting other devices such as a Google ChromeCast, an AppleTV, or an HDTV decoder. This type of content cannot be shared while in a call.
When the connector is configured to support HDCP, it is reserved for this type of content. This means that you cannot share any content from this specific connector while in a call, not even non-protected content from a laptop.
Branding and halfwake customization
(All products except SX10)
You can upload your own text and images to customize the appearance of the screen and user interface in both the halfwake state and the awake state.
In the Halfwake state you can:
• Add a background brand image to the screen and user interface.
• Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the screen and user interface.
In the Awake state you can:
• Add a small logo in the bottom right corner of the screen and user interface.
• Add a label or message in the bottom left corner of the screen (not the user interface).
Source composition
(All products except DX70, DX80 and SX10)
You can compose up to four input sources (depending on how many input sources are available on the device) into one image. This is the image that will be sent in the main video stream to the far end in a call. Source composition can only be enabled via the API, so we recommend creating a user interface extension combined with a macro to control the compositions on demand.
This feature replaces some of the functionality that was provided by the TC Console application for TC software.
HTTP Proxy support (All products)
You can set up the device to go through a HTTP Proxy when registering it to Cisco’s cloud service, Cisco Spark.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 51 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
User interface features
(All products)
• The Settings panel is restructured.
• The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch 10 or on-screen) can be protected by the device’s admin password. If the password is blank, anyone can access the Settings and factory reset the device.
• If you select the Russian language on the user interface, you can choose between a Russian keyboard and a keyboard with a Latin character set.
• Arabic and Hebrew languages are added to the user interface. Also localized keyboards are included.
• Basic IEEE 802.1x settings are added to the Settings panel in the user interface.
Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 Camera support
(Codec Plus)
You can connect Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 cameras to Codec Plus. Note that you need a switch for the camera control cables if you have more than one camera. The People
Count feature is not supported if Precision 60 is the only camera type connected to the device.
Cisco Spark Quad Camera support (SX80)
You can connect a Cisco Spark Quad Camera to the SX80.
Note that the Quad Camera uses only one of the device’s
HDMI inputs, while the SpeakerTrack 60 camera uses two.
The People Count feature (in call) is also available when using the Quad Camera.
Support for the Snap to Whiteboard feature
(SX80, MX700/MX800, Room Kit, Room Kit Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
The Snap to Whiteboard feature is now available for all products that have a camera with speaker track functionality:
SX80 with Cisco TelePresence Speaker Track 60 camera or
Cisco Spark Quad camera, MX700/MX800 with dual camera,
Room Kit, Room Kit Plus, Room 55 and Room 70.
When the device detects a person that is speaking close to the whiteboard, the camera view will switch to the whiteboard area. The wizard in the Settings panel on the Touch 10 user interface helps you to set up the feature and define where the whiteboard area is.
Briefing Room mode
(SX80, MX700/MX800)
The Briefing Room feature, which was introduced already in TC software, has been reworked. The in-room control framework is used for creating the associated user interface elements.
MX700/MX800: As before, Briefing Room is supported only for dual camera devices. Also, you need a Precision 60 camera, and a total of three screens.
SX80: Briefing Room is supported when a speaker track camera, a Precision 60 camera, and three screens are connected. The speaker track camera can be either Cisco
TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 or Cisco Spark Quad Camera.
USB to Serial port support
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70)
You can connect a USB (Type A) to serial (D-sub 9) adapter to access the device’s API. Cisco recommends the UC232R-
10 USB to RS232 (FTDI) adapter.
Mute and unmute remote participants in a CMS hosted conference - Active Control (All products)
When a device is enabled for Active Control in a CMS (2.1 or later) conference you can mute and unmute remote participants from the participant list on the user interface (the feature must also be enabled on the CMS).
A device that is running software version CE9.2 will not be unmuted directly. When you try to unmute such a device remotely, a message will show up on its screen requesting the user to unmute the audio locally.
API commands for Custom input prompt
(All products)
API commands are introduced to allow for an input prompt in the user interface: xCommand UserInterface Message
TextInput * . When issuing the display command a prompt with your custom text, a text input field for the user, and a submit button, shows up on the user interface. For example, you can prompt a user to leave feedback after an ended call.
You can specify what type of input you want from the user: single line text, numeric, password, or PIN code.
The prompt can only be enabled via the API, so it is recommended to combine it with macros (not available for SX10) and either a custom user interface panel or an auto-triggered event.
Certificate upload via API (All products)
ASCII PEM formatted certificates can be installed directly using multiline API commands ( xCommand Security
Ceritifcates CA Add , or xCommand Security Ceritifcates
Services Add ). You can also upload certificates to a device from its web interface, as before.
API commands for user management
(All products)
You can create and manage user accounts directly using API commands ( xCommand UserManagement User * ). As before, you can also do this from the device’s user interface.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 52 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Preview mode for In-Room Controls
(All products)
The In-Room Control editor has a new preview mode. A virtual touch user interface shows how the design looks on the user interface. The user interface is interactive so that you can test the functionality. It produces real events on the device, which can trigger any functionality you have created with a third-party control system or with a macro. A console in the right pane displays both the widget values when interacted with, and control system feedback messages.
Intelligent Proximity changes (All products)
A Proximity indicator is displayed on the screen (middle right) to inform that one or more clients are paired to the device with Cisco Proximity. The old indicator (top left), which was always shown when Proximity was enabled, has been removed.
You can no longer disable the Proximity services from the user interface.
The ultrasound settings have moved from Peripherals Pairing
Ultrasound to Audio Ultrasound.
Automatic factory reset when changing the call service - device activation (All products)
The device will automatically factory reset and restart when using the user interface to change the device activation method, for example from VCS to Cisco UCM. This will prevent conflicting configurations when provisioning the device to a new service.
Changing the provisioning from the API will not automatically factory reset the device.
Support for separate RTP port ranges for audio and other media (All products)
You can configure the device so that audio uses a different
RTP port range than other media. The two ranges cannot overlap. As default, all media use the same RTP port range.
xConfiguration
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 53 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.2
New configurations
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode
(Codec Plus)
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
(Room Kit, Codec Plus)
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode (Room 55)
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume (All products)
Cameras Camera [1..2] Focus Mode (MX700/MX800)
Added for the integrated cameras
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
(RoomKit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Macros AutoStart
(All products except SX10)
Macros Mode (All products except SX10)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Allowed (All products)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName (All products)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode (All products)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password (All products)
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url (All products)
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection (All products)
UserInterface CustomMessage (All products)
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
(All products)
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
(All products)
Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Video Input Connector [n] HDCP Mode (Room 55)
Configurations that are removed
Conference MultiStream Mode (SX10, DX70/DX80)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
54
Configurations that are modified
Audio Input MicrophoneMode
(DX70/DX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Audio Input Microphone [n] Level (Room Kit, Room 55)
OLD: Value space: Integer (0..36)
NEW: Value space: Integer (0..26)
Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode (SX80, MX700/MX800, Codec Plus)
OLD: Value space: Auto/Manual
NEW: Value space: Auto/AutoLimited/Manual
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup (SX80, MX700/MX800, Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode (SX80, MX700/MX800)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
UserInterface Language
(All products)
NEW: Arabic and Hebrew added to valuespace
UserInterface OSD Output (RoomKit)
OLD: Default value: 1
NEW: Default value: Auto
Video Input Connector [2] Name (Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: Default value: PC (HDMI1)
NEW: Default value: PC 1 (HDMI)
Video Input Connector [3] Name
(Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: Default value: PC (HDMI2)
NEW: Default value: PC 2 (HDMI)
Video Output Connector [1] Resolution (MX200G2/MX300G2, DX70/DX80, Room 55)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Video Selfview OnCall Mode (RoomKit)
OLD: Default value: Off
NEW: Default value: On
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.2
New commands
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard ActivatePosition
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard AlignPosition
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard SetDistance (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard StorePosition (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Macros Log Clear (All products except SX10)
Macros Log Get (All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Activate (All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Deactivate (All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Get (All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Remove (All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Rename
(All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Roles Set
(All products except SX10)
Macros Macro Save (All products except SX10)
Macros Runtime Restart (All products except SX10)
Macros Runtime Start (All products except SX10)
Macros Runtime Status (All products except SX10)
Macros Runtime Stop (All products except SX10)
Message Send (All products)
Security Certificates CA Add (All products)
Security Certificates CA Delete (All products)
Security Certificates CA Show
(All products)
Security Certificates Services Activate
(All products)
Security Certificates Services Add
(All products)
Security Certificates Services Deactivate (All products)
Security Certificates Services Delete (All products)
Security Certificates Services Show (All products)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 55 xCommand xStatus
Standby Halfwake
(All products)
SystemUnit ProductPlatform Set
(SX80, MX700/MX800, Codec Plus)
UserInterface Branding Delete (All products except SX10)
UserInterface Branding Get (All products except SX10)
UserInterface Branding Updated (All products except SX10)
UserInterface Branding Upload (All products except SX10)
UserInterface Extensions Widget Action (All products)
UserInterface Message TextInput Clear (All products)
UserInterface Message TextInput Display (All products)
UserManagement User Add (All products)
UserManagement User Delete (All products)
UserManagement User Get
(All products)
UserManagement User List
(All products)
UserManagement User Modify (All products)
Video CEC Input KeyClick (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Video CEC Output KeyClick (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Commands that are removed
UserInterface OSD Key Click (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
UserInterface OSD Key Press
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
UserInterface OSD Key Release
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Commands that are modified
Audio Microphones Mute
(All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio Microphones ToggleMute (All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio Microphones Unmute (All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio Sound Play (All products)
OLD: Sound: Alert/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/PresentationConnect/Ringing/SignIn/
SpecialInfo/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp
NEW: Sound: Alert/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/Dial/KeyInput/
KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/PresentationConnect/
Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/VolumeAdjust/WakeUp
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio Sound Stop
(All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone List (All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play
(All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Audio SpeakerCheck (MX700/MX800)
OLD: Volume: Integer (1..10)
NEW: Volume: Integer (1..30) xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Call Disconnect
(All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Camera PositionReset (SX80, SX20, SX10, MX200G2/MX300G2, MX700/MX800, Codec Plus)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Camera PositionSet
(All products except DX70/DX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Added: Lens: Wide/Center/Left/Right
Camera Ramp (All products except DX70/DX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras PresenterTrack ClearPosition
(SX80, MX700/MX800)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras PresenterTrack Set (SX80, MX700/MX800)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras PresenterTrack StorePosition (SX80, MX700/MX800)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Start (SX80, MX700/MX800, RoomKit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Stop (SX80, MX700/MX800, RoomKit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard ActivatePosition
(SX80, MX700/MX800)
Removed: Camera
Added: CameraId: Integer (1..7)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 56 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard AlignPosition
(SX80, MX700/MX800)
Removed: Camera
Added: CameraId: Integer (1..7)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard StorePosition (SX80, MX700/MX800)
Removed: Camera
Added: CameraId: Integer (1..7)
Dial
(All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Peripherals HeartBeat (All products)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, ROOMCONTROL, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
SystemUnit Boot (All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
SystemUnit FirstTimeWizard Stop (All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
UserInterface Extensions List (All products)
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
UserInterface Message Prompt Display
(All products)
Added: Duration: Integer (0..3600)
Video Input SetMainVideoSource
(SX80, SX20, MX200G2/MX300G2, DX70/DX80, MX700/MX800, Room Kit,
Codec Plus, Room 55)
Added: Layout: Equal/PIP
OLD: User role: INTEGRATOR, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 57 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.2
New statuses
Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] EcReferenceDelay
(Room Kit)
Cameras Camera [n] DetectedConnector
(SX80, SX20, SX10, MX700/MX800, Codec Plus)
Cameras Camera [n] Position Lens (SX80, MX700/MX800, Codec Plus)
Cameras SpeakerTrack ActiveConnector (SX80, MX700/MX800, Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] LogicalAddress (Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] LogicalAddress (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice ScreenSize (All products)
Statuses that are removed
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerControl
(Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55)
Cameras SpeakerTrack LeftCamera VideoInputConnector
(SX80, MX700/MX800)
Cameras SpeakerTrack RightCamera VideoInputConnector (SX80, MX700/MX800)
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type (All products)
Removed from valuespace: CamerasDetectedNoIr/UdpPortRangeViolation
Added to valuespace: CameraDetected/CertificateExpiry/MacrosRuntimeStatus /
MediaPortRangeNegative/MediaPortRangeOdd/MediaPortRangeOverlap/
MediaPortRangeTooSmall/MediaPortRangeValueSpace/MicrophonesConnected/
SparkActivationRequired/VideoPortRangeNegative/VideoPortRangeOdd/
VideoPortRangeTooSmall/VideoPortRangeValueSpace/UltrasoundConfigSettings
Video Input MainVideoSource (All products)
OLD: Value space: Integer
NEW: Value space: 1/2/3/4/Composed xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 58 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.1
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.1 (CE9.1) compared to CE9.0.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
Dual Screen experience and Active Control for CMS based meetings
(All products except DX70/DX80, SX10, SX20, MX200/MX300)
Dual screen devices can utilize both screens for video in a
CMS based meeting. The device receives two transcoded video streams and one content stream from the CMS, and utilizes both screens to render the streams.
With Active Control enabled, you get a participant list that shows all meeting participants and their current activity status, such as mute, sharing and active speaker indication.
You can change the layout seamlessly from the touch interface by using the layout selection panels.
New wake-up experience (All products)
SX10/DX70: Only Halfwake
Other products: Halfwake, and Standby with motion detection
The new wake-up experience introduces a Halfwake state, which leads to a calmer wake-up of the device, and gives users better guidance on how to get started.
When wake-up on motion detection is enabled the device will automatically wake to the Halfwake state when people enter the room. The device will also wake to this state when a user pairs a Cisco Proximity client to the device (also DX70).
Bluetooth headset support (DX70, DX80)
A Bluetooth headset can be used with the device. The headset must support HFP (Hands Free Protocol). The user can enable Bluetooth and set the device in Bluetooth pairing mode from the user interface.
Support for the EAP authentication framework for wireless networks (DX70, DX80, Room Kit)
In addition to WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK, the device now supports the WPA-EAP authentication framework for Wi-Fi connections. In total the following methods are supported:
• Open
• WPA-PSK (AES)
• WPA2-PSK (AES)
• EAP-TLS
• EAP-TTLS
• EAP-FAST
• PEAP
• EAP-MSCHAPv2
• EAP-GTC
Additions for Room Analytics
(All products except SX10, DX70, DX80)
Detect people presence in the room: The device has the capability to find whether there are people present in the room. The feature is based on ultrasound, and it does not keep record of who was in the room, only whether or not the room is in use.
People count (only Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55) : The device counts the number of people in the room when in a call, and when displaying the self-view picture. You can configure the device to also count the number of people outside of call, but the device cannot count the number of people when it is in standby. It does not keep record of who was in the room, only the number of faces that were detected.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 59 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Network port 2 can be disabled (DX70, DX80)
You can connect a computer to the network through the video conferencing device’s second network port. Then you only need one network wall socket to support both the device and the computer.
For security reasons, we recommend that you disable this network port if the device is used in a public environment.
This way, you prevent someone from connecting a computer to your network through the device.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 60 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.1
New configurations
Cameras Camera Framerate
(Room Kit)
NetworkPort [2] Mode
(DX70, DX80)
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall (Room Kit)
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX20, SX80)
Configurations that are removed
None.
Configurations that are modified
Conference DefaultCall Rate (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX20, SX80)
OLD: Default value: 3072
NEW: Default value: 6000
Conference MultiStream Mode (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
OLD: Valuespace: Off; Default value: Off
NEW: Valuespace: Auto/Off; Default value: Auto
Network[ 1] IEEE8021X Password (All products)
OLD: Valuespace: String (0, 32)
NEW: Valuespace: String (0, 50)
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels (SX80, Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: NotSet
NEW: Default value: Minimum1
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
(All products)
OLD: Valuespace: AutoShare/Manual/OnConnect (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit,
SX10, SX20, SX80)
OLD: Valuespace: AutoShare/Desktop/Hidden/Manual/OnConnect (DX70, DX80)
NEW: Valuespace: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect (All products)
Video Output Connector [1..2] MonitorRole (Room Kit)
OLD: Default value: Connector [1]: First; Connector [2]: Second
NEW: Default value: Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 61 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand changes in CE9.1
New commands
SystemUnit FirstTimeWizard Stop
(All products)
UserInterface Extensions Set
(All products)
Commands that are removed
Camera PositionReset (Room Kit)
Camera TriggerAutofocus (Room Kit)
Commands that are modified
Audio Select
(DX70, DX80)
OLD: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
Audio Volume Decrease (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
Audio Volume Increase (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
Audio Volume Set (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
Audio Volume SetToDefault (DX70, DX80)
OLD: Device: Internal/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
NEW: Device: Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HandsetUSB
Dial
(DX70, DX80)
OLD: CallRate: Integer (64..6000)
NEW: CallRate: Integer (64..3072)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Start (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, USER
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 62
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Stop
(MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
NEW: User role: ADMIN, USER
Presentation Start (Room Kit)
OLD: ConnectorID: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: ConnectorID: Integer (1..2)
OLD: PresentationSource: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: PresentationSource: Integer (1..2)
Presentation Stop (Room Kit)
OLD: PresentationSource: Integer (0..65534)
NEW: PresentationSource: Integer (1..2)
SystemUnit FactoryReset (All products)
OLD: Keep: LocalSetup/Network/Spark/Provisioning
NEW: Keep: LocalSetup/Network/Spark/Provisioning/SerialPort/Certificates (not in use)
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.1
New statuses
Audio Output Connectors Line ConnectionStatus
(Room Kit)
Audio Output Connectors Line ConnectionStatus
(Room Kit)
Audio Devices Bluetooth ActiveProfile (DX70, DX80)
Audio VolumeHeadsetBluetooth (DX70, DX80)
RoomAnalytics PeopleCount Current (Room Kit)
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence (SX20, SX80, Room Kit, MX200, MX300, MX700, MX800)
SystemUnit Software OptionKeys Encryption (SX20, Room Kit, DX70, DX80)
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] DeviceType (Room Kit)
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name (Room Kit)
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerStatus (Room Kit)
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId
(Room Kit)
Statuses that are removed
Cameras Camera [n] Flip (Room Kit)
Cameras Camera [n] HardwareID (Room Kit)
Cameras Camera [n] MacAddress (DX70, DX80, Room Kit)
Cameras Camera [n] Position Focus (Room Kit)
Cameras Camera [n] SerialNumber (Room Kit)
Cameras Camera [n] SoftwareID (Room Kit)
Video Input Source [n] TmdsClockPresent
(Room Kit)
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message Type (All products)
OLD: Value space: CAPFOperationState/CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/
CallProtocolDualStackConfig/CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/
CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/CameraId/CameraPairing/CameraSerial/
CameraSoftwareVersion/CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/ConfigurationFile/
DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/PresenterTrack/
H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/HasValidReleaseKey/IpCameraStatus/
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 63
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/ISDNLinkCompatibility/ISDNLinkIpStack/
ITLinstallation/InvalidSIPTransportConfig/LockDown/RoomControl/MediaBlockingDetected/
NetLinkStatus/NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/NTPStatus/OSDVideoOutput/
OutputConnectorLocations/ProvisioningDeveloperOptions/ProvisioningStatus/
SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/SIPProfileRegistration/
SIPProfileType/SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/SipIceAndAnatConflict/
SIPListenPortAndRegistration/TCPMediaFallback/TemperatureCheck/
TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/TouchPanelConnection/ControlSystemConnection/
TurnBandwidth/UdpPortRangeViolation/UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/
VideoFromInternalCamera/VideoInputStability/VideoInputSignalQuality/SparkConnectivity/
SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/
SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/ANATOnVCS/
ECReferenceDelay/AudioECRefDelay/AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/AudioPairingSNR/
AudioPairingInterference/AudioPairingTokenDecode/AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/
AbnormalCallTermination/HasActiveCallProtocol/SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/
PresentationSourceSelection/SoftwareUpgrade/PlatformSanity/ContactInfoMismatch/
MicrophoneReinforcement/FirstTimeWizardNotCompleted/CaptivePortalDetected/
MonitorDelay
NEW: Value space: CAPFOperationState/CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/
CallProtocolDualStackConfig/CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/
CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/CameraId/CameraPairing/CameraSerial/
CameraSoftwareVersion/CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/CamerasDetectedNoIr/
ConfigurationFile/DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/
PresenterTrack/H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/HasValidReleaseKey/
IpCameraStatus/IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/ISDNLinkCompatibility/
ISDNLinkIpStack/ITLinstallation/InvalidSIPTransportConfig/LockDown/RoomControl/
MediaBlockingDetected/NetLinkStatus/NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/
NTPStatus/OSDVideoOutput/OutputConnectorLocations/ProvisioningDeveloperOptions/
ProvisioningStatus/SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/SIPProfileRegistration/
SIPProfileType/SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/SipIceAndAnatConflict/
SIPListenPortAndRegistration/TCPMediaFallback/TemperatureCheck/
TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/TouchPanelConnection/ControlSystemConnection/
TurnBandwidth/UdpPortRangeViolation/UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/
VideoFromInternalCamera/VideoInputStability/VideoInputSignalQuality/SparkConnectivity/
SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/
SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/ANATOnVCS/
ECReferenceDelay/AudioECRefDelay/AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/AudioPairingSNR/
AudioPairingInterference/AudioPairingTokenDecode/AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/
AbnormalCallTermination/HasActiveCallProtocol/SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/
PresentationSourceSelection/SoftwareUpgrade/PlatformSanity/ContactInfoMismatch/
MicrophoneReinforcement/FirstTimeWizardNotCompleted/CaptivePortalDetected/
MonitorDelay/WifiCARequired
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Standby State
(All products)
OLD: Value space: Standby/EnteringStandby/Off
NEW: Value space: Standby/EnteringStandby/Halfwake/Off xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 64 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
What’s new in CE9.0
This section provides an overview of the new and changed device settings, and the new features and improvements in the Cisco Collaboration Endpoint software version 9.0 (CE9.0) compared to CE8.3.
For more details, we recommend reading the Software release notes:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/collaboration-endpoints/telepresence-quick-set-series/ products-release-notes-list.html
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
New features and improvements
Updated user interface
(All products)
The user interfaces on the Touch 10, on screen, and on the integrated touch screen have been updated. The main menu items on the home screen have been replaced with more prominent activities.
Some of the setting have been removed from the Touch 10 advanced settings menu to align with the on-screen display menu.
Wakeup on motion detection (All products)
Wakeup on motion detection senses when a person walks into the conference room and the device wakes up automatically. You need to enable the following setting for this feature to work: xConfiguration Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
You can’t manually place the device in standby when this feature is enabled.
Updated In-Room Control Editor
(All products)
The In-Room Control editor is updated with a new look, improved logic and usability for producing a control interface more efficiently. In addition, a new directional pad widget and an In-Room Control simulator is added.
Added language support (All products)
We have added support for Potuguese (Portugal) to the on-screen display and Touch controller menus.
Other changes (All products)
• Support for HTTPS client certificates has been added.
• Unplugging the presentation cable instantly stops the presentation sharing.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 65 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration changes in CE9.0
New configurations
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
(All products)
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity (All products)
NetworkServices UPnP Mode (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Configurations that are removed
Audio Microphones PhantomVoltage (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, SX20)
Configurations that are modified
Cameras Camera [n] * (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX10, SX20, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Cameras SpeakerTrack * (MX700, MX800, SX80)
OLD: User role: ADMIN, USER
NEW: User role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Conference MultiStream Mode (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX20, SX80)
OLD: Value space: Auto/Off
NEW: Value space: Off
UserInterface Language
(All products)
NEW: Portuguese added to value space
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 66
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfigurations with INTERATOR user role
A new user role - INTEGRATOR - is introduced in CE9.0. It has been added to the following configurations:
Audio DefaultVolume (All products)
Audio Input HDMI [n] * (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Audio Input Line [n] *
(MX700, MX800, SX20, SX80)
Audio Input Microphone [n] *
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement *
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled (All products)
Audio Output HDMI [n] * (SX80)
Audio Output Line [n] * (MX700, MX800, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Audio SoundsAndAlerts * (All products)
Cameras Camera [n] * (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras SpeakerTrack * (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Conference DefaultCall Rate (All products)
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout (All products)
GPIO Pin [n] Mode
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
Peripherals Profile *
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX10, SX20, SX80)
SerialPort BaudRate (MX700, MX800, SX20, SX80)
SerialPort Mode (All products)
Standby * (DX70, DX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Standby BootAction (MX700, MX800)
Standby Control (MX700, MX800)
Standby Delay (MX700, MX800)
Standby StandbyAction (MX700, MX800)
Standby WakeupAction (MX700, MX800)
SystemUnit Name
(All products)
Time Zone
(All products)
UserInterface OSD Output (All products)
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
(All products)
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode
(All products)
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] Name (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] Quality (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility (All products)
Video Monitors (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole (MX700, MX800, SX20, SX80)
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution (All products)
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
(All products)
Video Selfview Default *
(All products)
Video Selfview OnCall * (All products)
<path> * means that the change applies to all configurations starting with <path>.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 67 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand changes in CE9.0
New commands
Audio Microphones ToggleMute
(All products)
Audio Volume ToggleMute
(All products)
Audio Sound Play (All products)
Audio Sound Stop (All products)
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Start (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Stop (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
SystemUnit SignInBanner Clear (All products)
SystemUnit SignInBanner Get (All products)
SystemUnit SignInBanner Set (All products)
Video Output Monitor Backlight Set (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Brightness Set
(MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Color Blue Set
(MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Color Green Set (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Color Red Set (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Color Select (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Contrast Set (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor CSC Select (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Gamma Set (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Reset (MX700, MX800)
Video Output Monitor Sharpness Set (MX700, MX800)
Commands that are modified
SystemUnit FactoryReset (All products)
NEW: Keep: LocalSetup, Network, Spark, Provisioning xConfiguration
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 68 xCommand xStatus xCommand with INTEGRATOR user role
Audio Microphones Mute
(All products)
Audio Microphones ToggleMute (All products)
Audio Microphones Unmute (All products)
Audio Sound Play (All products)
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone List (All products)
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play (All products)
Audio Sound Stop (All products)
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Start (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Stop (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
Cameras PresenterTrack ClearPosition (SX80, MX700, MX800)
Cameras PresenterTrack Set
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
Cameras PresenterTrack StorePosition
(SX80, MX700, MX800)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Start (SX80, MX700, MX800)
Peripherals Connect (All products)
Peripherals List (All products)
Standby Activate (All products)
Standby Deactivate (All products)
SystemUnit Boot (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Clear (All products)
UserInterface Extensions List (All products)
UserInterface Extensions Widget SetValue
(All products)
UserInterface Extensions Widget UnsetValue
(All products)
UserInterface Message Alert Clear (All products)
UserInterface Message Alert Display (All products)
UserInterface Message Prompt Clear (All products)
UserInterface Message Prompt Display (All products)
UserInterface Message Prompt Response (All products)
UserInterface Message TextLine Clear (All products)
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
UserInterface Message TextLine Display
(All products)
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add
(All products)
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource List (All products)
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Remove (All products)
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource RemoveAll (All products)
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Select (All products)
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource State Set (All products)
UserManagement User Passphrase Change (All products)
Video Input SetMainVideoSource (DX70, DX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, SX20, SX80) xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 69 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus changes in CE9.0
New statuses
Cameras PresenterTrack Availability
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras PresenterTrack Status (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId (All products)
Statuses that are modified
Diagnostics Message [n] Type (All Products)
OLD: CAPFOperationState/CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/
CallProtocolDualStackConfig/CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/
CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/CameraId/CameraPairing/CameraSerial/
CameraSoftwareVersion/CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/ConfigurationFile/
DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/PresenterTrack/
H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/HasValidReleaseKey/
IpCameraStatus/IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/ISDNLinkCompatibility/
ISDNLinkIpStack/ITLinstallation/InvalidSIPTransportConfig/LockDown/RoomControl/
MediaBlockingDetected/NetLinkStatus/NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/
NTPStatus/OSDVideoOutput/OutputConnectorLocations/ProvisioningStatus/
SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/SIPProfileRegistration/
SIPProfileType/SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/SipIceAndAnatConflict/
TCPMediaFallback/TemperatureCheck/TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/TouchPanelConnection/
ControlSystemConnection/TurnBandwidth/UdpPortRangeViolation/
UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/VideoFromInternalCamera/
VideoInputStability/SparkConnectivity/SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/
SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/
SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/ANATOnVCS/ECReferenceDelay/AudioECRefDelay/
AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/AudioPairingSNR/AudioPairingInterference/
AudioPairingTokenDecode/AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/AbnormalCallTermination/
HasActiveCallProtocol/SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/PresentationSourceSelection/
SoftwareUpgrade/PlatformSanity/ContactInfoMismatch/MicrophoneReinforcement
NEW: CAPFOperationState/CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/
CallProtocolDualStackConfig/CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/
CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/CameraId/CameraPairing/CameraSerial/
CameraSoftwareVersion/CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/ConfigurationFile/
DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/PresenterTrack/
H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/HasValidReleaseKey/
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
IpCameraStatus/IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/ISDNLinkCompatibility/
ISDNLinkIpStack/ITLinstallation/InvalidSIPTransportConfig/LockDown/RoomControl/
MediaBlockingDetected/NetLinkStatus/NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/
NTPStatus/OSDVideoOutput/OutputConnectorLocations/ProvisioningDeveloperOptions/
ProvisioningStatus/SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/
SIPProfileRegistration/SIPProfileType/SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/
SipIceAndAnatConflict/SIPListenPortAndRegistration/TCPMediaFallback/
TemperatureCheck/TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/TouchPanelConnection/
ControlSystemConnection/TurnBandwidth/UdpPortRangeViolation/
UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/VideoFromInternalCamera/
VideoInputStability/VideoInputSignalQuality/SparkConnectivity/
SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/
SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/ANATOnVCS/
ECReferenceDelay/AudioECRefDelay/AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/
AudioPairingSNR/AudioPairingInterference/AudioPairingTokenDecode/
AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/AbnormalCallTermination/HasActiveCallProtocol/
SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/PresentationSourceSelection/SoftwareUpgrade/
PlatformSanity/ContactInfoMismatch/MicrophoneReinforcement/
FirstTimeWizardNotCompleted/CaptivePortalDetected/MonitorDelay xStatus with INTEGRATOR user role
Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] ConnectionStatus (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, SX10, SX20)
Audio Microphones Mute (All products)
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs (All products)
Audio Volume (All products)
Call [n] FacilityServiceId (All products)
Call [n] ReceiveCallRate (All products)
Call [n] TransmitCallRate
(All products)
Cameras Camera [n] Capabilities Options
(All products)
Cameras Camera [n] Connected (All products)
Cameras Camera [n] Flip (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras Camera [n] MacAddress (DX70, DX80, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras Camera [n] Manufacturer (All products)
Cameras Camera [n] Model (All products)
Cameras Camera [n] Position Focus (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20,
SX80)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 70 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Cameras Camera [n] Position Pan
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras Camera [n] Position Tilt
(MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras Camera [n] Position Zoom (MX200 G2, MX300 G2, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras Camera [n] SerialNumber (DX70, DX80, MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX10, SX20, SX80)
Cameras Camera [n] SoftwareID (All products)
Cameras PresenterTrack Availability (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras PresenterTrack Status (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Availability (MX700, MX800, Room Kit, SX80)
Cameras SpeakerTrack LeftCamera VideoInputConnector (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras SpeakerTrack RightCamera VideoInputConnector (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Cameras SpeakerTrack Status
(MX700, MX800, SX80)
Conference DoNotDisturb
(All products)
Conference Presentation CallId (All products)
Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] SendingMode (All products)
Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] Source (All products)
Conference Presentation Mode (All products)
GPIO Pin [n] State (MX700, MX800, SX80)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] HardwareInfo (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] ID (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Name (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] SoftwareInfo
(All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Status
(All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Type (All products)
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeStatus (All products)
Standby State (All products)
SystemUnit State NumberOfActiveCalls (All products)
SystemUnit State NumberOfInProgressCalls (All products)
Time SystemTime (All products)
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
UserInterface Extensions Widget [n] Value
(All products)
UserInterface Extensions Widget [n] WidgetId
(All products)
Video ActiveSpeaker PIPPosition (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] Connected (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] SignalState (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] SourceId (All products)
Video Input Connector [n] Type (All products)
Video Input Source [n] ConnectorId (All products)
Video Input Source [n] FormatStatus (All products)
Video Input Source [n] FormatType (All products)
Video Input Source [n] Resolution Height (All products)
Video Input Source [n] Resolution RefreshRate
(All products)
Video Input Source [n] Resolution Width
(All products)
Video Output Connector [n] Connected (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] DeviceType (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerControl (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerStatus (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice Name (All products)
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice PreferredFormat (All products)
Video Selfview FullscreenMode
(All products)
Video Selfview Mode
(All products)
Video Selfview OnMonitorRole (All products)
Video Selfview PIPPosition (All products)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 71 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Chapter 2
About the API
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 72 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
API fundamentals
This chapter contains a top-level view of the mechanisms supported by the device API.
Here you can read about how to access the API, how to use the command line and what the different parts of the API can be used for. This chapter also describes how to use the feedback functions that are available for the device.
The API consists of four major groups:
• Commands
• Configurations
• Status
• Events
These four groups are hierarchically organized, which makes it easier to find related functionality. You can find the complete lists of all commands, configurations and statuses in the following chapters.
NOTE: The commands return values that may affect how the device interacts with third-party systems. These may change from release to release and are not documented.
1 Telnet is only available for DX, MX, and SX series.
2 API access over a serial connection is not available for DX70, DX80, Room 55
Dual, and Room 70.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Connecting to the API
There are several ways to access the device API:
• SSH
• Telnet 1
• HTTP/HTTPS
• WebSocket
• Serial connection 2
Regardless of which method you choose, the structure of the
API is the same. Choose the connection method that suits your application best. Note that all methods are not available for all products.
Before you start, please read this section about the different methods, as some of them may require additional configuration changes before being enabled. The configurations, apart from password, can be set from the Configuration menu on the web interface or from the command line interface. The examples are for the command line interface.
SSH
SSH is a secure TCP/IP connection and it is enabled by default on the device. It can be disabled. You need an SSH client, such as PuTTY, to access the API over SSH.
xConfiguration NetworkServices SSH Mode:
<Off,On>
Telnet
Telnet 1 can be viewed as the equivalent of the serial protocol in the TCP/IP world. Telnet is disabled by default. Before connecting to the device with Telnet you have to enable it.
To enable the Telnet service, configure the following setting on the device. Changing this setting does not require a reboot of the device, but it may take some time to take effect.
xConfiguration NetworkServices Telnet Mode:
<Off,On>
HTTP/HTTPS
As HTTP/HTTPS are connectionless protocols, there is no persistent connection. There are several ways of communicating with the API over HTTP.
In order to enable or disable the HTTP and HTTPS services, configure the following setting on the device. xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Mode:
<Off, HTTP+HTTPS, HTTPS>
Connecting
You can inspect the API by entering the IP-address or host name of the device in your web browser. This opens the web interface, and you can find the API documents under the menu section Integration > Developer API . The HTTP POST and GET methods are used to execute commands and get
feedback from the device. This is described in “Using HTTP” on page 85
in this document.
WebSocket
WebSocket is a protocol that provides a full-duplex communication channel between a client and the API of the device. The API commands are embedded in JSON-RPC objects before they are sent over WebSocket.
In order to enable or disable the use of WebSocket, configure the following settings. Because WebSocket is tied to HTTP, also HTTP or HTTPS must be enabled before you can use
WebSocket.
xConfiguration NetworkServices WebSocket:
<Off, FollowHTTPService> xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Mode:
<Off, HTTP+HTTPS, HTTPS>
Read the xAPI over WebSocket guide for details how to convey API commands in JSON-RPC objects over
WebSocket.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 73 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
RS-232 / serial connection
You may want to set up serial connection to a device for the following purposes:
• Access to the device's API
Depending on the device type, the serial connection for API access is set up via an USB-A or a COM-port
(D-SUB 9 or 3-pin Euroblock).
3
• Maintenance and service
You may need a serial connection to the device to recover from a faulty state. Refer to the administrator guide of the product for details.
Serial communication can be used without an IP-address,
DNS, or a network.
Serial communication is enabled by default, but can be disabled by setting the serial port mode to Off.
4 xConfiguration SerialPort Mode: <Off/On>
Baud rate and other serial port parameters
Refer to the table to find the connector types and serial port parameters for each device type.
Some device types allow a range of baud rates.
5 The device can give very much feedback, so we recommend keeping the connection at the highest rate possible. In some situations, such as when using long cables, a lower rate may be used to avoid bit errors.
xConfiguration SerialPort BaudRate:
<9600/19200/38400/57600/115200>
A new baud rate takes effect after a device reboot.
Login and password
For security reasons the password prompting is turned on by default, but it can be turned off if preferred. xConfiguration SerialPort LoginRequired: <Off/On> xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Device type
Room Kit Mini
Room Kit
Room 55
Codec Plus
Desk Pro
SX10
Codec Pro
Room 70 G2
SX80
MX700, MX800
SX20 6
MX200 G2, MX300 G2
Board 55, 70
Board 55S, 70S, 85S
DX70, DX80
Room 55 Dual, Room 70
Connector type
USB-A + RS-232 adapter 115200
Baud rate (bps)
Not available
Other parameters
COM (Euroblock, 3 -pin) recommended
USB-A + RS-232 adapter
COM (D-SUB 9)
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or
115200 (default)
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Hardware flow control: Off
USB-A + RS-232 adapter
USB-A + RS-232 adapter
9600, 19200, 38400 (default),
57600, or 115200
115200
Serial connection for API access
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020
3 API access over a serial connection is not available for DX70, DX80, Room 55 Dual, and Room 70.
4 Serial communication is always enabled for Webex Board 55 and 70 (first generation of boards); it cannot be disabled.
5 Applies only to the ports that are used to accesss the devices’s API. A dedicated maintenance port (micro USB) always uses the default baud rate.
6 During the initial boot sequence, the device uses a baud rate of 38400 bps regardless of the baud rate you have set.
74 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Ethernet ports
The main network port - Network port 1 - is always reserved for the connection to LAN.
7 This applies to all devices.
Some of our devices have more than one network port.
The additional ports can be used for peripheral devices like cameras, Touch 10, and more.
A device that is connected to such a network port gets a local
IP-address from the video conferencing device, and therefore is not part of the corporate network.
• A Cisco device is assigned a dynamic IP-address in the range (DHCP): 169.254.1.41 to 169.254.1.240
• A non-Cisco device is assigned the dynamic IP-address
(DHCP): 169.254.1.30
NOTE: Only one non-Cisco device can get a dynamic
IP-address at a time.
• A non-Cisco device can be assigned a static IP-address in the range: 169.254.1.241 to 169.254.1.254
This method can also be used to connect to the device with
SSH. In this case you can use the IP-address 169.254.1.1.
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
The following products have one or more Ethernet ports that provide PoE:
• Codec Plus, Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55 Dual,
Room 70 (marked with the Touch controller symbol ( ))
• Codec Pro, Room 70 G2 (2 ports: one marked with the
Touch controller symbol ( ), the other with the letters
“PoE”)
User roles
A user account may hold one or a combination of user roles.
A user account with full access rights, like the default admin user, should possess the ADMIN, USER, and AUDIT roles.
These are the user roles:
ADMIN: A user with this role can create new users, change most settings, make calls, and search the contact lists. The user cannot upload audit certificates and change the security audit settings.
USER: A user with this role can make calls and search the contact lists. The user can modify a few settings, for example adjust the ringtone volume and set the time and date format.
AUDIT: A user with this role can change the security audit settings and upload audit certificates.
ROOMCONTROL: A user with this role can create customized UI panels (for example in-room controls). The user has access to the UI Extensions editor and associated developement tools.
INTEGRATOR: A user with this role has access to settings, commands and status that are required to set up advanced AV scenarios, and to integrate our devices with third-party equipment. Such a user can also create customized UI panels.
Passphrase
The device is delivered with a default user account with full credentials. The user name is admin , and initially, no passphrase is set for the default user.
It is mandatory to set a passphrase for the admin user in order to restrict access to device configuration. You should in addition set a passphrase for any other user with similar credentials.
You can set the passphrase on the device’s web interface.
Open a web browser and enter the IP-address of the device in the address bar and sign in. Click your user name in the upper right corner and choose Change passphrase in the drop down menu.
7 Depending on the device, Network port 1 is marked with the number 1, the network symbol ( ), or both.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 75 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
API output
The xPreferences is used to set preferences for the RS-232,
Telnet and SSH sessions.
The output modes are:
Terminal : Line based output for use with line based control systems
XML : XML output for use with control systems that understand XML.
JSON : JSON format is convenient when integrating with web based systems.
The default output mode is terminal . To change this you have to define your preferences for each session individually.
Examples in this guide are in terminal mode.
To set output mode to XML, issue the command: xPreferences outputmode xml
To revert to terminal mode, issue the command: xPreferences outputmode terminal xConfiguration xCommand
Example: Command in terminal mode xCommand Audio Volume Set Level: 50
Example: Command in XML mode
<Command>
<Audio>
<Volume>
<Set command=”True”>
<Level>50</Level>
</Set>
</Volume>
</Audio>
</Command> xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 76 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Using the command line
Help
To get a list of all supported top level commands you can type ?
or help after connecting to the device using RS-232,
Telnet or SSH (Example 1).
Bye
Typing the bye command closes the command line interface.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
Example 1:
?
- User Commands help xcommand xconfiguration xevent xfeedback xgetxml xpreferences xstatus bye echo log systemtools
OK
API Reference Guide
Appendices
API commands xConfiguration
Configurations are device settings, such as device name and network settings. These are persistent across boots. Refer to
.
xCommand
Commands instruct the device to execute actions, such as to dial a number or to search the phone book.
Refer to “Commands” on page 79
.
xStatus
A status contains the current state of the device, such as connected calls, the status of the gatekeeper registration, connected inputs and output sources .
Refer to
xFeedback
The Feedback commands are used to specify what parts of the configuration and status hierarchies to monitor. Feedback is only issued on the RS-232, Telnet or SSH session for which it is specified. If you are connecting to the device with multiple sessions, you have to define feedback individually for each session. Refer to
“Feedback mechanism” on page 83
.
xPreferences
The xPreferences command is used to set preferences for the RS-232, Telnet and SSH sessions.
Refer to
.
Echo <on/off>
If echo is set to On the key inputs are displayed when entering text in a command line interface.
If echo is set to Off user input is not displayed when entering text in a command line interface.
xEvent
The xEvent command returns information on which events are
available for feedback. Refer to “Events” on page 82 .
xGetxml
The xGetxml request returns an XML document based on the location parameter attached to the request. The elements
(or a complete document) matching the expression will be returned. Refer to
“Feedback mechanism” on page 83
.
Other commands
Systemtools
The systemtools commands are a set of command line tools for administrative control and diagnostics. The commands can be used for advanced troubleshooting together with
Cisco technical support. Systemtools are not a part of the programming API. Refer to
“The SystemTools commands” on page 535
.
Log
The log command is used to enable advanced logs. It is only used for debugging the device.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 77 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand
Command line shortcuts
If your client supports it, there are some timesaving shortcuts you can use:
• Tab-completion to complete the commands and arguments.
• Arrow up and arrow down keys to navigate your command history.
• <CTRL-a>: Jump to the beginning of the line.
• <CTRL-e>: Jump to the end of the line.
• <CTRL-r>: Incremental command history search.
• <CTRL-w>: Erase the current line.
Searching
You can use // to search for elements anywhere in the status or configuration hierarchy (Example 1).
You can also combine multiple // ’s (Example 2).
NOTE: The search shortcuts work well for inspecting the
API, but should not be used in applications. We recommend that you always use the complete paths to avoid command ambiguity when upgrading to newer firmware releases.
Example 1:
List all configurations that include words that starts with OUT and HDMI: xconfiguration //out//hdmi
*c xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI 1 Level: 0
*c xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI 1 Mode: On
*c xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI 2 Level: 0
*c xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI 2 Mode: Off
** end
Example 2:
Get the resolution width of all connected sources for both inputs and outputs: xStatus //vid//res//wid
*s Video Input Source 1 Resolution Width: 1920
*s Video Input Source 2 Resolution Width: 0
*s Video Input Source 3 Resolution Width: 0
*s Video Input Source 4 Resolution Width: 0
*s Video Output Connector 1 Resolution Width: 1920
*s Video Output Connector 2 Resolution Width: 1280
*s Video Output Connector 3 Resolution Width: 1280
** end xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Value types and formats
The device supports the following value types:
• Integer values: <x..y>
Defines the valid range for an integer input. x = min value, y = max value.
• Literal values: <X/Y/../Z>
Defines the possible values for a given configuration.
• String values: <S: x, y>
Defines that the valid input for this configuration is a string with minimum length of x and maximum length of y characters. Strings can have rules that further specify their format and length.
Input values that contain spaces need to be quoted
Any values for configurations and commands containing spaces must be enclosed in quotes. Quotes are not necessary for values without spaces.
Example:
Correct: xCommand dial number: “my number contains spaces”
Correct: xCommand dial number: 12345
Incorrect: xCommand dial number: my number contains spaces
Case sensitivity
All commands are case-insensitive. All of the following commands will work.
XCOMMAND DIAL NUMBER: [email protected]
xcommand dial number: [email protected]
xCommand Dial Number: [email protected]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 78 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Commands
Commands instruct the device to execute actions, such as to dial a number or to search the phone book. All commands start with the prefix xCommand followed by a command path.
Writing xCommand ?
on the command line will list all the top level commands.
To view the complete list of commands and their parameters, write xCommand ??
on the command line.
Command arguments are key-value pairs.
When issuing a xCommand, the command consists of one argument and one required parameter. In this document the command usage is described for all xCommands, with both required and optional parameters. The optional parameters are in brackets.
Example: xCommand Dial Number: 123 xCommand is the command prefix. The command to be executed is Dial.
The example contains one argument, Number: 123. Number is the key and 123 is its value. The key/value pair is separated with ‘:’.
Configurations
Configurations are device settings that are persistent across boots. Like commands, also configurations are structured in a hierarchy.
Writing xConfiguration ?
on the command line lists all the top level configurations.
Writing xConfiguration ??
lists all configurations and their value spaces.
Writing xConfiguration lists all configurations and their current values. To list out only some of the configurations, write xConfiguration followed by one or more parts of the configuration paths.
Example : Set the H323 Alias ID
Type: xConfiguration H323 Profile 1 H323Alias ID:
Example: Get the H323 Alias ID
Type: xConfiguration H323 Profile 1 H323Alias ID
Result:
*c xConfiguration H323 Profile 1 H323Alias ID:
**end
Status
A status contains the current state of the device, such as connected calls, the status of the gatekeeper registration, connected inputs and output sources.
Writing xStatus ?
on the command line lists all top level statuses.
Writing xStatus lists all statuses and their current values.
To list out only some of the statuses, write xstatus followed by the relevant part of the status path (address expression): xStatus <address expression>
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 79 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Multiline commands
Multiline commands are commands that support larger amounts of data as input than the single line commands.
Typical use for these commands is to allow for provisioning of in-room control definitions, branding images
(base64 encoded), macros, welcome banners, and security certificates.
To issue a multiline command, you start issuing it like any other xAPI command. However, once you enter the command, you have set the API into an input mode where anything you issue on the API after this is treated as input to that command, including line breaks. You now enter the payload for this command in accordance to the input format expected by this command
When done, finish with a line break(“\n”) and a separate line containing just a period ending with a line break (“.\n”). The command will now be executed, and you get a command result with an OK or ERROR depending on the command being executed successfully or not.
The commands that require multiline input format are marked as such in the command descriptions in this guide.
The multiline commands are marked as multiline in xCommand overview section in this guide. xConfiguration xCommand
Example: Set up welcome banner text xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set
Hello!
This is the second line of text.
This is the third.
.
Thank you!
OK
*r WelcomeBannerSetResult (status=OK):
** end xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 80 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Synchronous API calls
The API works asynchronously. This means that there is no guarantee that command responses arrive in the same order as the commands were issued. The device may also respond with feedback between your request and the response, in form of status changes or events, due to changes on the device.
For some applications it might be crucial to match requests with responses. The API therefore supports a responsetagging mechanism.
This mechanism works with all command types: xcommand, xconfiguration, and xstatus. A typical use of this would be to create a command queue in your application and assign unique IDs to every command sent to the device. A listener then listens to all feedback from the device and matches the ID on the response with the corresponding ID in the command queue. This enables matching the original request with the specific response.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
Example: xcommand Video Layout Add | resultId=”mytag _ 1”
OK
*r VideoLayoutAddResult (status=OK):
LayoutId: 1
** resultId: “mytag _ 1”
** end
In XML mode the resultId is added as an attribute to the top-level XmlDoc tag: xgetxml /Configuration/Video/Layout/Scaling | resultId=”mytag _ 2”
<XmlDoc resultId=”mytag _ 2”>
<Configuration item=”1”>
<Video item=”1”>
<Layout item=”1”>
<Scaling item=”1” valueSpaceRef=”...”>Off</Scaling>
</Layout>
</Video>
</Configuration>
</XmlDoc>
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 81 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Events
Event returns information about the events that are available for feedback. This overview presents examples of some the events that are available on the API.
To get an overview of the supported events:
• xEvent - Lists the top level events
• xEvent <top level category> - List all of the available events in that category
• xEvent * - Lists all available events on that device
The result for events depends on the state of the device.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Example 1: Outgoing Call Indication
Outgoing Call Indication is an event reported when an outgoing call is about to be dialled. Returns the CallId the call has been assigned.
*e OutgoingCallIndication CallId: x
** end
Example 2: Call Disconnect
Call Disconnect is an event reported when a call is disconnected. Returns the CallId of the disconnected call and reason for the call’s disconnection.
*e CallDisconnect CallId: x CauseValue: 0
CauseString: “” CauseType: LocalDisconnect
OrigCallDirection: “outgoing”
** end
Example 3: Call Successful
Call Successful is an event reported when a call is connected successfully, that is when all channels are up and established.
*e CallSuccessful CallId: 132 Protocol: “h223”
Direction: “outgoing” CallRate: 768 RemoteURI:
“h223:[email protected]” EncryptionIn:
“Off” EncryptionOut: “Off”
** end
Example 4: FECC Action request
FECC Action request is an event reported when far end is sending FECC commands.
*e FeccActionInd Id: 132 Req: 1 Pan: 1 PanRight:
1 Tilt: 0 TiltUp: 0 Zoom: 0 ZoomIn: 0 Focus: 0
FocusIn: 0 Timeout: 300 VideoSrc: 0 m: 0
** end
Example 5: TString message received
TString message received is an event reported when far end has sent a TString message.
*e TString CallId: 132 Message: “ee”
** end
Example 6: SString message received
SString message received is an event reported when far end has sent a SString message.
*e SString String: “ee” Id: 132
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 82 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand
Feedback mechanism
To build solutions that can reliably keep the state between your application and the device synchronized, you can set up a notification system to report the changes in the state of the device.
The API supports notifications on the following:
• Configuration changes
• Status changes
• Event notifications
These notifications will not be sent unless you have explicitly told the device to do so. You can subscribe to the feedback by registering feedback expressions. How you register feedback expressions varies according to the connection method used.
When using HTTP, the method of handling feedback differs
information.
WARNING: A device may give very much feedback, especially when calls are connected and disconnected.
Do only subscribe to the feedback you need.
Never register for all status feedback by issuing xFeedback register /Status. This may give the control application too much data to handle, which may lead to sluggish or unpredictable behavior.
Feedback expressions
The expression used when registering for feedback is a variant of the XPath language. The XPath language describes a way to select nodes from an XML/JSON document. The CE software contains three main feedback documents.
Document
Status
Configuration
Event
API command xStatus xConfiguration xEvent
Path
/Status
/Configuration
/Event
The syntax for feedback registering is: xFeedback register <path>
Never register for all status feedback by issuing xFeedback register /Status.
It is safe to register for all configuration changes using xFeedback register /Configuration, as configuration changes will most likely not occur that often.
By going through some examples, we can see how this information can be used to build feedback expressions. A good way to verify the expressions is to point your browser to http://<ip-address>/getxml?location=path or to execute xgetxml <path> from the terminal, and check that the output matches the nodes you want feedback on.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Example 1: Microphones Mute status
Terminal query xStatus Audio Microphones Mute
*s Audio Microphones Mute: Off
** end
Equivalent feedback expression xFeedback register /Status/Audio/Microphones/Mute
Example 2: Name of all video input connectors
Terminal query xConfiguration Video Input Connector Name
*c xConfiguration Video Input Connector 1 Name:
“NameA”
*c xConfiguration Video Input Connector 2 Name:
“NameB”
*c xConfiguration Video Input Connector 3 Name:
“NameC”
*c xConfiguration Video Input Connector 4 Name:
“NameD”
*c xConfiguration Video Input Connector 5 Name:
“NameE”
** end
Equivalent feedback expression xFeedback register /Configuration/Video/Input/
Connector/Name
Example 3: Name of v ideo input connector 3
Terminal query xConfiguration Video Input Connector 3 Name
*c xConfiguration Video Input Connector 3 Name:
“NameC”
** end
Equivalent feedback expression xFeedback register /Configuration/Video/Input/
Connector[@item=’3’]/Name
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 83 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Terminal connections
Managing feedback subscriptions
To register, list and deregister feedback expressions you use the command xFeedback and its corresponding sub commands.
The registered expressions are only valid for the currently active connection. If you open two Telnet sessions and register to get feedback in one session, you do not receive feedback in the other session. This also means that if you disconnect from a session, you have to re-register all expressions after reconnecting.
You can register up to 38 expressions.
Feedback output
The feedback output is exactly the same as you get when querying the device using the xConfiguration and xStatus commands. E.g., if you issue the command xStatus Standby
Active on the command line the result is:
*s Standby Active: On
** end
If you have registered for feedback on status changes the feedback you get when the device goes to standby-mode will be exactly the same:
*s Standby Active: On
** end
This means that when you are programming against the device you only need to handle one format.
Example: Managing feedback subscriptions
A: Register feedback expressions.
Write in:
Result: xFeedback register /Status/Audio
** end
OK
Write in: xFeedback register /Event/CallDisconnect
Result: ** end
OK
Write in: xFeedback register /Configuration/Video/
MainVideoSource
Result: ** end
OK
B: List out currently registered expressions.
Write in:
Result: xFeedback list
/Configuration/Video/MainVideoSource
/Event/CallDisconnect
/Status/Audio
** end
OK
C: Deregister feedback expressions.
Write in:
Result: xFeedback deregister /Event/CallDisconnect
** end
OK
Write in:
Result: xFeedback deregister /Status/Audio
** end
OK
D: List the new feedback expressions.
Write in: xFeedback list
Result: /Configuration/Video/MainVideoSource
** end
OK
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 84 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Using HTTP
The device supports sending commands and configurations over HTTP and HTTPS. It is also possible to retrieve configurations and statuses this way. This interface exposes the same API as the command line, but in XML format.
HTTP XMLAPI Authentication
Access to the XMLAPI requires the user to authenticate using
HTTP Basic Access Authentication as a user with ‘ADMIN’ role. Unauthenticated requests prompt a 401 HTTP response containing a Basic Access Authentication challenge. How to use HTTP Basic Access Authentication varies according to the HTTP library or tool that you are using.
If your application will be issuing multiple commands through the API, we highly recommend that you use Session
Authentication (see below). The standard basic authentication does a full re-authentication per request, which may affect the performance of your application.
HTTP XMLAPI Session Authentication
Authenticating with your username and password combination for each API request might introduce too much latency for some use-cases. To mitigate this, the API supports a session-based authentication mechanism.
To open a session, issue a POST to http://<ip-address>/ xmlapi/session/begin with Basic Access Authentication. The response sets a SessionId-cookie that can be used with subsequent requests.
Note that when using API Session Authentication, it is important to explicitly close the session when you are done. Failing to do so may cause the device to run out of sessions, as there are a limited number of concurrent sessions available, and they do not time out automatically.
URL cheat sheet
The following table contains the main URLs used when accessing the API over HTTP.
Method
GET
GET
GET
GET
GET
POST
URL http://<ip-address>/status.xml
http://<ip-address>/configuration.xml
http://<ip-address>/command.xml
http://<ip-address>/valuespace.xml
http://<ip-address>/getxml?location=<path> http://<ip-address>/putxml
Description
Complete status document
Complete configuration document
Complete command document
Complete valuespace document
Retrieve document based on a path
Configurations and commands in HTTP body
Example : Starting a HTTP XMLAPI session
Request:
POST /xmlapi/session/begin HTTP/1.1
Authorization: Basic <Base64 encoded authentication string>
Response:
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Server: nginx/1.8.0
Connection: keep-alive
Set-Cookie: SessionId=f08102c8ce5aaf8fba23a7238 cc2ef464b990e18bfbb7fb048820c0e28955c54; Path=/;
HttpOnly
This session counts toward the device’s concurrent sessions limit.
With an open session, provide the SessionId cookie to following requests. Your tool/library may do this automatically.
E xampl e: Using a HTTP XMLAPI session
Request:
GET /configuration.xml HTTP/1.1
Cookie: SessionId=f08102c8ce5aaf8fba23a7238cc2ef46
4b990e18bfbb7fb048820c0e28955c54
Response:
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Server: nginx/1.8.0
Content-Type: text/xml; charset=UTF-8
Content-Length: 43549
Connection: keep-alive
<?xml version=”1.0”?>
<Configuration product=”Cisco Codec” version=”ce8.2.0” apiVersion=”4”> ...
</Configuration>
To close a session after use, issue a POST to http://<ipaddress>/xmlapi/session/end with the provided cookie.
E xample : Closing a HTTP XMLAPI session
Request:
POST /xmlapi/session/end HTTP/1.1
Cookie: SessionId=f08102c8ce5aaf8fba23a7238cc2ef46
4b990e18bfbb7fb048820c0e28955c54
Response:
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Server: nginx/1.8.0
Connection: keep-alive
Set-Cookie: SessionId=; Max-Age=0; Path=/;
HttpOnly
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 85 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Getting status and configurations
Example 1: Get all status entries on the device http://<ip-address>/getxml?location=/Status
Example 2: Get just the audio statuses of the device http://<ip-address>/getxml?location=/Status/Audio
Example 3: Get all configurations of the device http://<ip-address>/getxml?location=/Configuration
Example 4: Get all video configurations of the device http://<ip-address>/getxml?location=/
Configuration/Video xConfiguration xCommand
Sending commands and configurations
Using HTTP POST
When sending configurations and commands to the device, it is important that the HTTP header Content-Type is set to text/xml, i.e. Content-Type: text/xml . The body of the POST should contain the XML content.
Example 1: Changing the device name
Request
POST /putxml HTTP/1.1
Content-Type: text/xml
<Configuration>
<SystemUnit>
<Name>newName</Name>
</SystemUnit>
</Configuration>
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
Example 2: Setting the camera position
Request
POST /putxml HTTP/1.1
Content-Type: text/xml
<Command>
<Camera>
<PositionSet command=”True”>
<CameraId>1</CameraId>
<Pan>200</Pan>
<Tilt>200</Tilt>
</PositionSet>
</Camera>
</Command>
Response
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Content-Type: text/xml
Content-Length: 91
<?xml version=”1.0”?>
<Command>
<CameraPositionSetResult item=”1” status=”OK”/>
</Command>
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 86 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Feedback from the device over HTTP
You can get the device to post http feedback messages
(also known as webhooks) on changes to the API state, e.g. statuses, events and configuration updates. The HTTP Post feedback messages will be sent to the specified ServerURL.
You can choose between events being posted in either XML or JSON format. You can subscribe to changes on multiple parts of the API by register up to 15 different feedback expressions.
Registering for feedback
The command for registering is xCommand HttpFeedback
Register . The syntax for this command and its arguments are described in this section.
HttpFeedback Register syntax: xCommand HttpFeedback Register
FeedbackSlot: <1..4>
ServerUrl(r): <S: 1, 2048>
Format: <XML/JSON>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
Expression: <S: 1, 255>
HttpFeedback Register arguments:
FeedbackSlot: The device can register up to 4 slots of servers requesting HTTP feedback. Set the registering to one of them.
NOTE: Avoid using FeedbackSlot 3 in an environment where
Cisco TelePresence Management Suite (TMS) is used as
TMS uses this feedback slot to register its expressions.
ServerUrl: The URL to the HTTP server where you want the device to post the HTTP feedback messages to.
Format: Set the format for the feedback from the HTTP server to XML or JSON.
Expression 1-15: The XPath expression specifies which parts of the Status, Configuration or Event documents are monitored. You can have from 1 to 15 XPath expressions
Register the expressions you want to receive feedback
on. See “Feedback mechanism” on page 83 for more
information about the expression formats.
Example: Registering feedback on configuration changes, disconnect events and call status changes.
POST /putxml HTTP/1.1
Content-Type: text/xml
<Command>
<HttpFeedback>
<Register command=”True”>
<FeedbackSlot>1</FeedbackSlot>
<ServerUrl>http://127.0.0.1/
myhttppostscripturl</ServerUrl>
<Format>XML</Format>
<Expression item=”1”>/Configuration</
Expression>
<Expression item=”2”>/Event/
CallDisconnect</Expression>
<Expression item=”3”>/Status/Call</
Expression>
</Register>
</HttpFeedback>
</Command>
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 87
Feedback output
When the device notifies the registered HTTP server about changes, the body contains the same XML as when polling.
There is however one small difference. The root-node contains an Identification node with children that specify the device from which the notification originated. This means that you can handle multiple devices with a single HTTP server
URI.
Example: Audio volume changed.
<Configuration xmlns=”http://www.company.com/XML/
CUIL/2.0”>
<Identification>
<SystemName>My Device Name</SystemName>
<MACAddress>00:00:de:ad:be:ef</MACAddress>
<IPAddress>192.168.1.100</IPAddress>
<ProductType>Cisco Codec</ProductType>
<ProductID>Cisco Codec SX80</ProductID>
<SWVersion>CE8.3.0.199465</SWVersion>
<HWBoard>101401-5 [08]</HWBoard>
<SerialNumber>PH0000000</SerialNumber>
</Identification>
<Audio item=”1”>
<Volume item=”1”>60</Volume>
</Audio>
</Configuration>
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Translating from terminal mode to XML
Translating commands
The XML commands maintain the same structure as the terminal commands, but they use a parent-child relationship to describe the hierarchy. You can see this structure in the examples below.
Example 1 : Setting up a call
Terminal xCommand Dial Number: “12345” Protocol: H323
XML
<Command>
<Dial command=”True”>
<Number>12345</Number>
<Protocol>H323</Protocol>
</Dial>
</Command>
Example 2: Assigning volume level
Terminal xCommand Audio Volume Set Level: 50
XML
<Command>
<Audio>
<Volume>
<Set command=”True”>
<Level>50</Level>
</Set>
</Volume>
</Audio>
</Command> xConfiguration xCommand
Translating configurations
Translating from xConfiguration to XML is similar to commands, but with the addition of a special attribute item=”NN” for specifying the index in arrays.
Example: Configuring the input source type for video input connector 2
Terminal xConfiguration Video Input Connector 2
InputSourceType: camera
XML
<Configuration>
<Video>
<Input>
<Connector item=”2”>
<InputSourceType>camera</
InputSourceType>
</Connector>
</Input>
</Video>
</Configuration> xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 88 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction
Dos and don’ts
Here are some best practices when programming the Cisco
DX, MX, SX, and Room series and Webex Board API.
AVOID remote control emulation
The use of xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Click and xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Press commands is highly discouraged. The commands are still available in the
API, but we recommend the use of direct commands, as this ensures backwards compatibility in your integrations.
Program against the device, not the on-screen-display.
DO use complete commands
You should always use complete commands when programming, i.e. always use xConfiguration Video instead of xconf vid. The shortcuts can be used for searches in the API on the command line, but not for programming. The reason for this is that you might end up with ambiguous code when additional commands are added to the API.
DO NOT subscribe to unnecessary feedback
Subscribing to too much feedback may congest the control application. Although the amount of feedback may seem fine in the current version, the amount of feedback may grow in future releases.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 89 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Chapter 3
xConfiguration commands
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 90
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Description of the xConfiguration commands
In this chapter, you can find a complete list of the xConfiguration commands.
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 91 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 92 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 93 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 94 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 95 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 96 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 97 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Audio configuration
xConfiguration Audio DefaultVolume
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the default volume for the speakers. The volume is set to this value when you switch on or restart the video conferencing device. Use the controls on the user interface to change the volume while it is running. You may also use API commands (xCommand Audio Volume) to change the volume while the device is running, and to reset to default value.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio DefaultVolume: DefaultVolume where
DefaultVolume :
Integer (0..100)
Range: Select a value between 1 and 100. This corresponds to the dB range from -34.5 dB to 15 dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. If set to 0 the audio is switched off.
Default value:
50 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
70 [ Boards ]
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Input ARC [n] Mode
Applies to:
CodecPlus CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Each HDMI output has an associated audio return channel (ARC). You can use the ARC to send audio from a screen or TV, which is connected to the HDMI ouput, to the video conferencing device. You can decide for each HDMI output connector (n) separately, whether or not to allow audio transmission.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input ARC [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the ARC input.
Range: 1..1
[ CodecPlus ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPro ]
Range: 3..3 for Room 70 Dual G2; 2..3 for Room 70 Single G2 [ Room70G2 ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the ARC channel of HDMI output n (audio is not sent to the video conferencing device).
On: Enable the ARC channel of HDMI output n (audio is sent to the video conferencing device).
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 98 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input HDMI [n] Level
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input HDMI [n] Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the HDMI input.
Range: 1..3
[ SX80 ]
Range: 2..3 for single camera devices; 3..3 for dual camera devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 2..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..5
[ CodecPro ]
Range: 1..1
[ RoomKit RoomKitMini DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ Room55 ]
Range: 2..5
[ Room70G2 ]
Level :
Integer (-24..0)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Default value:
0 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define if the audio on the HDMI input connector shall be enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the HDMI input.
Range: 1..3
[ SX80 ]
Range: 2..3 for single camera devices; 3..3 for dual camera devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 2..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..5
[ CodecPro ]
Range: 1..1
[ RoomKit RoomKitMini DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ Room55 ]
Range: 2..5
[ Room70G2 ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable audio on the HDMI input.
On: Enable audio on the HDMI input.
Default value:
On [ MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 DeskPro ]
HDMI [1..2]: Off HDMI [3]: On [ SX80 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 99 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Use this setting to decide whether to stop the audio playback of a connected presentation source if that presentation source is not currently shown on-screen, or to always playback the audio as long as the presentation source is connected.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo:
MuteOnInactiveVideo where n : Unique ID that identifies the HDMI input.
Range: 1..3
[ SX80 ]
Range: 2..3 for single camera devices; 3..3 for dual camera devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 2..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..5
[ CodecPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ Room55 ]
Range: 2..5
[ Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ RoomKit RoomKitMini ]
MuteOnInactiveVideo :
Off/On
Off: Audio is played, locally and to far end, as long as a presentation source is connected; you do not have to present the HDMI input source.
On: Audio is played, locally and to far end, only when the connected presentation source is shown on-screen.
Default value:
On [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
HDMI [1,2]: Off HDMI [3,4,5]: On [ CodecPro ]
HDMI [2]: Off HDMI [3,4,5]: On [ Room70G2 ] xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer ID
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Select the equalizer ID of the audio source that is connected to the line input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer ID: ID where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
ID :
Range: 1..4
Integer (1..8)
Set the equalizer ID.
Default value:
1 xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer Mode
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the line input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
Range: 1..4
Mode :
Off/On
Off: No equalizer.
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio source that is connected to the line input.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 100 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is presented or not.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo:
MuteOnInactiveVideo where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
Range: 1..4
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX20 ]
MuteOnInactiveVideo :
Off/On
Off: The audio source is not associated with a video source. The audio will be played locally and to far end regardless of whether the video source is presented.
On: The audio source is associated with a video source. The audio will be played (locally and to far end) when the associated video source is presented. The audio will be muted when the video source is not presented.
Default value:
Line [1, 2]: On Line [3, 4]: Off [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
On [ SX20 ]
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The audio source can be associated with a video source on the video input connector.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource:
VideoInputSource where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
Range: 1..4
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX20 ]
VideoInputSource :
1/2/3/4 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
1/2 [ SX20 ]
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Default value:
Line [1, 2]: 4 Line [3, 4]: 1 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
2 [ SX20 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 101 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Channel
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether the audio source on the line input is a mono signal or part of a multichannel signal.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Channel: Channel where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
Range: 1..4
Channel :
Left/Mono/Right
Left: The Audio Line input signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Mono: The Audio Line input signal is a mono signal.
Right: The Audio Line input signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Default value:
Left
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Level
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the gain on the Line input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the output level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
The maximum input level with 0 dB gain is 22 dBu.
Example: If your audio source has a maximum output level of 8 dBu, then you should set the gain to 22 dBu - 8 dBu = 14 dB.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
Range: 1..4
Level :
Integer (0..24)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Default value:
10
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 102 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the mode for the audio input line.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Line [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line input.
Range: 1..4
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the Audio Line input.
On: Enable the Audio Line input.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Channel
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether the signal on the microphone input is a mono signal or part of a multichannel signal.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Channel: Channel where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
Channel :
Left/Mono/Right
Left: The microphone input signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Mono: The microphone input signal is a mono signal.
Right: The microphone input signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Default value:
Mono
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 103 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The echo canceller continuously adjusts itself to the audio characteristics of the room, and compensates for any changes it detects in the audio environment. If the changes in the audio conditions are significant, the echo canceller may take a second or two to re-adjust.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 2..2
[ SX10 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..3
[ RoomKit Room55 ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Turn off the echo control. Recommended if external echo cancellation or playback equipment is used.
On: Turn on the echo control. Recommended, in general, to prevent the far end from hearing their own audio. Once selected, echo cancellation is active at all times.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Dereverberation
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The video conferencing device has built-in signal processing to reduce the effect of room reverberation. Dereverberation requires that Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Dereverberation:
Dereverberation where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 2..2
[ SX10 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..3
[ RoomKit Room55 ]
Dereverberation :
Off/On
Off: Turn off the dereverberation.
On: Turn on the dereverberation.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 104 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl NoiseReduction
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The video conferencing device has built-in noise reduction, which reduces stationary background noise, for example noise from air-conditioning systems, cooling fans etc. In addition, a high pass filter (Humfilter) reduces very low frequency noise. Noise reduction requires that Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode is enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl NoiseReduction:
NoiseReduction where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 2..2
[ SX10 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..3
[ RoomKit Room55 ]
NoiseReduction :
Off/On
Off: Turn off the noise reduction.
On: Turn on the noise reduction. Recommended in the presence of low frequency noise.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer ID
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Select the equalizer ID of the source that is connected to the microphone input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer ID: ID where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
ID :
Range: 1..8
Integer (1..8)
Set the equalizer ID.
Default value:
1 xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer Mode
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the equalizer mode for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
Mode :
Off/On
Off: No equalizer.
On: Enable the equalizer for the source that is connected to the microphone input.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 105 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Level
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro
Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the gain on the Microphone input connector. The gain should be adjusted to suit the output level of the connected audio source. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
If the gain is set too high, the audio signal will be clipped. If the gain is set too low, the audio signal-to-noise ratio will be degraded; however, this is usually preferable to clipping.
Note that unprocessed speech signals typically contain significant level variations, making it very important to allow for sufficient signal headroom.
The maximum input level with 0 dB gain differs depending on the product: -18 dBu (SX10, SX20,
MX200G2/MX300G2, Room Kit, Codec Plus, Room 55, Room 70, Room 55 Dual), 22 dBu
(SX80, MX700/MX800), 24 dBu (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2).
Example: If your microphone has a maximum output level of -44 dBu, and it is connected to an
SX80, then you should set the gain to 22 dBu - (-44 dBu) = 66 dB.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 2..2
[ SX10 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..3
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit Room55 ]
Level :
Integer (0..26) [ RoomKit Room55 ]
Integer (0..24) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Integer (0..70) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Default value:
14 [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
17 [ SX10 ]
58 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ] xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro
Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Disable or enable audio on the microphone connector.
SX10, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, Room 55: Microphone [1] is the device's internal microphone.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX10 SX20 ]
Range: 1..3
[ RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..1
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the audio input microphone connector.
On: Enable the audio input microphone connector.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 106 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Type
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The microphone connectors are intended for electret type microphones. The microphone connector can be set to Line or Microphone type. The pre-amplification gain is fully determined by the Audio Input Microphone Level setting. There is no limitation of the adjustment range caused by the chosen type.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] Type: Type where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
Type :
Line/Microphone
Microphone: Select Microphone if your input source requires 48 V phantom power to operate.
Line: Select Line if 48 V phantom power is not required or desired for correct operation.
Default value:
Microphone xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] PhantomPower
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether or not to have phantom power (48 V +/- 1 V) on the microphone input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] PhantomPower: PhantomPower where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
PhantomPower :
Off/On
Off: Disable the phantom power on the microphone input. Use this when connecting to equipment that do not need phantom power, such as external mixers.
On: Enable the phantom power on the microphone input. Use this when connecting directly to microphones that require phantom power, including the Cisco Table
Microphone and Cisco Ceiling Microphone.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 107 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation
MuteOnInactiveVideo
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The microphone can be associated with a video source on the video input connector, and you can determine whether to play or mute audio depending on whether the video source is presented or not. By default, audio is not muted.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo:
MuteOnInactiveVideo where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
MuteOnInactiveVideo :
Off/On
Off: No video source is associated.
On: A video source is associated, and the audio will be muted if the associated video source is not displayed.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation
VideoInputSource
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource:
VideoInputSource where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
VideoInputSource :
1/2/3/4 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
1/2/3/4/5/6 [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select the video input connector to associate the audio source with.
Default value:
1
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 108 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input MicrophoneMode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting does not apply to DX70.
If the microphone mode is Focused, the microphones can be combined to focus sound sensitivity. As a result, the noise in the room is suppressed, and you can be heard better when sitting right in front of the device. The voice of people not sitting right in front of the device will be suppressed.
If the microphone mode is Wide, the device behaves like any other device. The voice of people sitting beside you will be heard, and also more noise from the room.
We recommend that you use Focused mode when you are the only speaker. Use Wide mode when several speakers are in front of the device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input MicrophoneMode: MicrophoneMode where
MicrophoneMode :
Focused/Wide
Focused: Focused sound sensitivity, suppressing sound from sources that are not right in front of the device.
Wide: Default microphone operation with normal sound sensitivity.
Default value:
Wide [ DX70/DX80 ]
Focused [ DeskPro ] xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Input USBC[n] Level
Applies to:
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the USB-C audio level.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input USBC[n] Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the USBC input.
Range: 1..1
Level :
Integer (-24..0)
The audio level, between -24 and 0 decibels.
Default value:
0 xConfiguration Audio Input USBC[n] Mode
Applies to: DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the USB-C audio mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input USBC[n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the USBC input.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Off/On
On: Allow audio from the USB-C.
Off: Do not allow any audio from the USB-C.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 109
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Input WebView[n] Mode
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the WebView mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Input WebView[n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the WebView input.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Off/On
On: Allow audio from the web browser.
Off: Do not allow any audio to be played from the web browser.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The device can detect clicking noise from a keyboard and automatically attenuate the microphone signal. This is useful when a meeting participant starts typing on the keyboard, because the noise can disturb the other participants. If the participant types on the keyboard and speaks at the same time the microphone signal will not be attenuated. Requires that the Audio
KeyClickDetector Enabled setting is set to On.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate: Attenuate where
Attenuate :
False/True
False: The attenuation of the microphone signal is disabled.
True: The device attenuates the microphone signal if clicking noise from keyboards is detected. If voice or voice + keyboard clicks are detected the microphone signal is not attenuated.
Default value:
True
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 110 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The device can detect clicking noise from a keyboard and automatically attenuate the microphone signal. This is useful when a meeting participant starts typing on the keyboard, because the noise can disturb other participants. To enable attenuation on the microphone signal, set the Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate to On.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled: Enabled where
Enabled :
False/True
False: The key click detection is disabled.
True: The device will detect clicking noise from keyboards.
Default value:
True xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the microphone mute behavior on the device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Microphones Mute Enabled: Enabled where
Enabled :
True/InCallOnly
True: Muting of audio is always available. In general, the microphone mute LED will not be lit outside of call, but you can still mute using the API commands.
InCallOnly: Muting of audio is only available when the device is in a call. When Idle, it is not possible to mute the microphone. This is useful when an external telephone service/ audio system is connected via the device and is to be available when the device is not in a call. When set to InCallOnly this will prevent the audio-system from being muted by mistake.
Default value:
True
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 111 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Microphones PhantomPower
Applies to:
SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define whether or not to have phantom power (11 V +/- 1 V) on the microphone input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Microphones PhantomPower: PhantomPower where
PhantomPower :
Off/On
Off: Disable the phantom power on the microphone input. Use this when connecting to equipment that do not need phantom power, such as external mixers.
On: Enable the phantom power on the microphone input. Use this when connecting directly to microphones that require phantom power, including the Cisco Table
Microphone and Cisco Ceiling Microphone.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each microphone. The signals from all microphones with Mode = On will be mixed and fed to the selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs. Also consult the Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone input.
Range: 1..8
Mode :
Off/On
On: The microphone signal will be fed to the selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs, as well as to the far end.
Off: The microphone signal will be sent only to the far end. It will not be fed to the selected MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 112 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the microphone reinforcement mode individually on each line output. If Mode = On, the line output will add the microphone reinforcement mix to its ordinary output signal. Also consult the
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the microphone output.
Range: 1..4
Mode :
Off/On
On: This output will deliver far end audio, local presentation audio and the microphone reinforcement mix.
Off: This output will deliver far end audio and local presentation audio.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The gain (in dB) that will be applied to the mixed microphone signal that is fed to the selected
MicrophoneReinforcement outputs.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain: Gain where
Gain :
Integer (-54..15)
Use this gain to adjust the level of microphone signal that should be fed to the local output.
The value -54 means "Off", and no signal will be fed from the microphone to the output.
Default value:
-54 xConfiguration Audio Output ARC [n] Delay DelayMs
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
To obtain lip-synchronization, you can configure each ARC output with an extra delay that compensates for delay in other connected devices, for example TVs and external loudspeakers.
The delay that you set here is either fixed or relative to the delay measured on or reported by an external monitor, as defined in the Audio Output ARC [n] Delay Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output ARC [n] Delay DelayMs: DelayMs where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio ARC output.
Range: 1..1
DelayMs :
Integer (0..290)
The delay in milliseconds.
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 113 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Output ARC [n] Delay Mode
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
You may add extra delay to an audio ARC output with the Audio Output ARC [n] Delay DelayMs setting. The extra delay added is either a fixed number of milliseconds, or a number of milliseconds relative to the detected delay on or reported by an external monitor.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output ARC [n] Delay Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio ARC output.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Fixed/RelativeToHDMI
Fixed: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be a fixed number of millisecond.
RelativeToHDMI: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be relative to the detected delay on or reported by an external monitor. The actual delay is detected-delay +
DelayMs. The Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] DelayMs status reports the actual delay.
Default value:
RelativeToHDMI [ CodecPro ]
Fixed [ Room70G2 ] xConfiguration Audio Output ARC [n] Mode
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to enable the audio return channel (ARC) on the HDMI [n] input connector. The ARC output must be enabled if you want audio playback through the Quad Camera.
On Room 70 G2, the Quad Camera is a part of the integrated loudspeaker system. We recommend to leave the ARC output enabled. If you want to disable the complete integrated loudspeaker system, use the Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output ARC [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio ARC output.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the ARC output on the HDMI input.
On: Enable the ARC output on the HDMI input.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 114 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Output ConnectorSetup
Applies to:
CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
You can choose whether to set up the audio inputs and outputs manually, or to let the video conferencing device do it automatically based on the type of camera you have and which screens are connected.
In Auto mode, you cannot add, update, delete or connect audio inputs and outputs manually.
Therefore the following API commands do not have any effect: xCommand Audio Setup *, xCommand Audio LocalInput *, and xCommand Audio LocalOutput *.
When going from Manual to Auto mode: The existing Audio setup is cleared (xCommand Audio
Setup Clear), and the input and output groups are set up according to product defaults. The
Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode and Audio Output ARC [1] Mode settings are set to their default value. For Codec Pro automatic delay measurement is enabled.
When going from Auto to Manual mode: The HDMI and ARC output connectors are connected to the default groups. The Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode and Audio Output ARC [1] Mode settings are not changed. For Codec Pro delay measurement is stopped.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output ConnectorSetup: ConnectorSetup where
ConnectorSetup :
Auto/Manual
Auto: For Code Pro, the video conferencing device will play audio either through the camera, or through a screen that is connected to one of the HDMI outputs. The video conferencing device chooses to play the audio on the first available device in the following list:
1. A Quad Camera that has camera control connected to one of the camera control connectors of the video conferencing device (Ethernet 2 or 3), and HDMI connected to the camera input of the video conferencing device (HDMI 1 input). Additionally, the Audio
Output ARC [1] Mode and Video Input Connector [1] CEC Mode settings must be On. The audio return channel (ARC) on the HDMI 1 input is used to play audio through the camera.
2. A screen that is connected to the HDMI 1 output, provided that the Audio Output HDMI
[1] Mode setting is On.
3. A screen that is connected to the HDMI 2 output, provided that the Audio Output HDMI
[2] Mode setting is On.
4. A screen that is connected to the HDMI 3 output, provided that the Audio Output HDMI
[3] Mode setting is On.
When audio is played out through the Quad Camera, the video conferencing device will measure the delay between a screen and the camera, so that it can synchronize the audio
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 115
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus on the camera with the video on screen (lip-synchronization). In order to measure the delay, the video conferencing device sends a signal to the screen, and the screen sends the signal back to the video conferencing device using the audio return channel. The first screen in the list above that supports CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), and has the
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode set to On, is used for the delay measurements.
When audio is played out through a screen, additional lip-synchronization delay is the responsibility of the screen. The video conferencing device will not add any delay.
For Room 70 G2, the video conferencing device will play audio through its integrated loudspeaker system, provided that Audio Output ARC [1] Mode and Audio Output
InternalSpeaker Mode is On, and Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode is On for the integrated screen(s). Automatic delay measurement is not necessary, because the relationship between the integrated loudspeaker system and screen(s) is known.
Manual: You must set up the audio inputs and outputs manually using the Audio Console application or the API (xCommand Audio LocalInput *, and xCommand Audio LocalOutput
*).
For Room 70 G2, external screen(s) may be used for audio output if the connectors are explicitly added using the Audio Console application or the API (xCommand Audio
LocalOutput *). In that case, the external screens will play a stereo down mix of the audio that is played on the built-in loudspeaker system. Ultrasound signals will not play through external screens or line outputs; only through the integrated loudspeaker system.
Default value:
Auto
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay DelayMs
Applies to:
CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
To obtain lip-synchronization, you can configure each HDMI output with an extra delay that compensates for delay in other connected devices, for example TVs and external loudspeakers.
The delay that you set here is either fixed or relative to the delay measured on or reported by an external monitor, as defined in the Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay DelayMs: DelayMs where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..3
DelayMs :
Integer (0..290)
The delay in milliseconds.
Default value:
0 xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay Mode
Applies to:
CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
You may add extra delay to an audio hdmi output with the Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay DelayMs setting. The extra delay added is either a fixed number of milliseconds, or a number of milliseconds relative to the detected delay on or reported by an external monitor.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..3
Mode :
Fixed/RelativeToHDMI
Fixed: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be a fixed number of millisecond.
RelativeToHDMI: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be relative to the detected delay on or reported by an external monitor. The actual delay is detected-delay +
DelayMs. The Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] DelayMs status reports the actual delay.
Default value:
Fixed
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 116 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Level
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the gain on the HDMI input connector. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the HDMI output.
Range: 1..3
[ Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX80 ]
Range: 1..1 for single screen devices; 1..2 for dual screen devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Level :
Integer (-24..0)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Default value:
0
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define if the audio channel on this HDMI output connector shall be enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the HDMI output.
Range: 1..1
[ CodecPlus ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX80 ]
Range: 1..1 for single screen devices; 1..2 for dual screen devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The connector will not be used for audio out.
On: The connector can be used for audio out. For Codec Pro and Room 70 G2 it depends on the Audio Output ConnectorSetup setting.
Default value:
Room 70 Dual G2: HDMI 1,2: On HDMI 3: Off
Room 70 Single G2: HDMI 1: On HDMI 2,3: Off [ Room70G2 ]
On [ MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro ]
HDMI 1: On HDMI 2: Off [ SX80 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 117 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode
Applies to:
MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define whether or not to use the camera's integrated speakers. Codec Plus must be connected to a Quad Camera for this setting to apply.
For Room 70 G2, MX700, and MX800, the Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode settings for the integrated monitor(s) must be set to On in order to play any audio on the integrated speakers.
For Room 70 G2, also the Audio Output ARC 1 Mode setting must be On.
For all products except Codec Plus, MX300 G2, and MX200 G2, you can limit the use of the integrated speakers to play only ultrasound.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On/UltrasoundOnly [ MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Off/On [ MX200G2/MX300G2 CodecPlus ]
Off: Disable the device's integrated speakers.
On: Enable the device's integrated speakers.
UltrasoundOnly: Enable the device's integrated speakers only for ultrasound.
Default value:
On xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Channel
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether the Audio Line output is a mono signal or part of a multichannel signal.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Channel: Channel where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
Channel :
Left/Mono/Right
Left: The Audio Line output signal is the left channel of a stereo signal.
Mono: The Audio Line output signal is a mono signal.
Right: The Audio Line output signal is the right channel of a stereo signal.
Default value:
Line [1,3,5]: Left Line [2,4,6]: Right
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 118 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Delay DelayMs
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
To obtain lip-synchronization, you can configure each audio line output with an extra delay that compensates for delay in other connected devices, for example TVs and external loudspeakers. The delay that you set here is either fixed or relative to the delay on the HDMI output, as defined in the Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Delay DelayMs: DelayMs where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 ]
DelayMs :
Integer (0..290)
The delay in milliseconds.
Default value:
0 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
You may add extra delay to an audio line output with the Audio Output Line [n] Delay DelayMs setting. The extra delay added is either a fixed number of milliseconds, or a number of milliseconds relative to the detected delay on the HDMI output (typically introduced by the connected
TV).
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 ]
Mode :
Fixed/RelativeToHDMI
Fixed: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be a fixed number of millisecond.
RelativeToHDMI: Any extra delay (DelayMs) added to the output, will be relative to the detected delay on the HDMI output. The actual delay is HDMI-delay + DelayMs. The Audio
Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs status reports the actual delay.
Default value:
Fixed [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70G2 ]
RelativeToHDMI [ SX10 SX20 CodecPro ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 119 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer ID
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Select the equalizer ID for the audio source that is connected to the output line.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer ID: ID where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
ID :
Integer (1..8)
Set the equalizer ID.
Default value:
1 xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer Mode
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the equalizer mode for the audio source that is connected to the line output.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
Mode :
Off/On
Off: No equalizer.
On: Enable the equalizer for the audio line output.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 120
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Level
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the gain on the Line output connector. The gain should be adjusted to fit the audio input level of the connected device. The gain can be tuned in steps of 1 dB.
The maximum output level with 0 dB gain differs depending on the product: 22 dBu (SX80,
MX700/MX800), 8 dBu (Room 70, Room 55 Dual), 18 dBu (Codec Pro, Room 70 G2).
Example: If the audio device that is connected to an SX80 has max input level 10 dBu, then you should set the gain to 10 dBu - 22 dBu = -12 dB.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ Room70/Room55D ]
Level :
Integer (-24..0)
Range: Select the gain in decibel (dB).
Default value:
-10 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
0 [ CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the mode for the audio line output.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..6
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the audio line output.
On: Enable the audio line output.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] OutputType
Applies to:
RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The output type should be set to match the connected device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Output Line [n] OutputType: OutputType where n : Unique ID that identifies the audio line output.
Range: 1..1
OutputType :
LineOut/Loudspeaker/Recorder/Subwoofer [ RoomKit ]
LineOut/Loudspeaker/Recorder [ CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Loudspeaker: Use Loudspeaker if a loudspeaker is connected to the line output. In this mode, the output level on that connector follows the master volume control, and the output signal includes all system sounds (ringtones, webex assistant etc.).
Recorder: Use Recorder if a recorder is connected to the line output. In this mode, the output level is fixed, and system sounds are not included. What is included is the sound from local presentation sources, the local microphones as well as any far end sources.
Subwoofer: Use Subwoofer if a subwoofer is connected to the line output. In this mode the bass is sent to LineOut and the rest of the audio range is played on the internal speaker.
LineOut: Use LineOut for other devices. In this mode, the internal speaker will play full range audio. The output level is fixed, and system sounds are not included. What is included is the sound from local presentation sources, as well as any far end sources.
Default value:
Loudspeaker [ RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 ]
LineOut [ Room70/Room55D ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 121 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define which ringtone to use for incoming calls.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone: RingTone where
RingTone :
Sunrise/Mischief/Ripples/Reflections/Vibes/Delight/Evolve/Playful/Ascent/Calculation/
Mellow/Ringer
Select a ringtone from the list.
Default value:
Sunrise [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Waves [ Boards ] xConfiguration Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting applies to the Intelligent Proximity feature. Set the maximum volume of the ultrasound pairing messages.
The Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume and Proximity Mode settings only affect ultrasound pairing messages. See the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector and Standby
WakeupOnMotionDetection settings for information about the use of ultrasound in presence and motion detection.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume: MaxVolume where
MaxVolume :
Integer (0..90) [ SX20 SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro ]
Integer (0..70) [ DX70/DX80 SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
Select a value in the specified range. If set to 0, ultrasound pairing messages are not emitted.
Default value:
70 xConfiguration Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the ring volume for incoming calls.
USAGE: xConfiguration Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume: RingVolume where
RingVolume :
Integer (0..100)
Range: The value goes in steps of 5 from 0 to 100 (from -34.5 dB to 15 dB). Volume 0 =
Off.
Default value:
50 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
40 [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
30 [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 122 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
BYOD configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
CallHistory configuration
xConfiguration BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled
Applies to:
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Use this setting to enable or disable the Touch redirect feature. Touch redirect enables you to control your laptop from the touch screen of the borad or video device. You must connect the laptop to the device with an HDMI cable (wired sharing) and a USB-C cable. You can use either a USB-C to USB-C cable or a USB-C to USB-A cable from the device to the laptop.
This feature is not available on the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and 70, not
S-series).
USAGE: xConfiguration BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled: Enabled where
Enabled :
False/True
False: Touch redirect is disabled.
True: Touch redirect is enabled.
Default value:
True xConfiguration CallHistory Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Determine whether or not information about calls that are placed or received are stored, including missed calls and calls that are not answered (call history). This determines whether or not the calls appear in the Recents list in the user interfaces.
USAGE: xConfiguration CallHistory Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: New entries are not added to the call history.
On: New entries are stored in the call history list.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 123 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Cameras configuration
xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] AssignedSerialNumber
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The camera ID is the number n in Camera [n]. By default, the camera ID is assigned automatically to a camera. If EDID information is not passed on from the camera to the video conferencing device, the camera ID is not persistent after a reboot. This means that a camera may get a new camera ID when the video conferencing device is restarted.
You should use the Cameras Camera AssignedSerialNumber setting to cater for configurations where the video conferencing device does not receive EDID information from multiple cameras.
This setting allows you to manually assign a camera ID to a camera by associating the camera
ID with the camera's serial number. The setting is persistent until the video conferencing device is factory reset.
Typical situations where the video conferencing device does not receive EDID information are: when you connect a Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera using 3G-SDI; when you connect a Cisco TelePresence Precision 40 (Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 1080p4xS2) camera; when you use an HDMI repeater that does not pass on EDID information.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] AssignedSerialNumber: " AssignedSerialNumber " where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
AssignedSerialNumber :
String (0, 20)
The camera's serial number.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Cameras Background Enabled
Applies to:
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Enable or disable the Camera Background feature.
This must be enabled to allow the "xConfiguration Cameras Background Set Mode" to take effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Background Enabled: Enabled where
Enabled :
False/True
True: Enable camera background.
False: Disable camera background.
Default value:
False
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 124 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This configuration turns backlight compensation on or off. Backlight compensation is useful when there is much light behind the persons in the room. Without compensation the persons will easily appear very dark to the far end.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode: DefaultMode where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
DefaultMode :
Off/On
Off: Turn off the camera backlight compensation.
On: Turn on the camera backlight compensation.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the camera brightness mode.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Mode :
Auto/Manual
Auto: The camera brightness is automatically set by the device.
Manual: Enable manual control of the camera brightness. The brightness level is set using the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel setting.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 125 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the brightness level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode to be set to
Manual.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel: DefaultLevel where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
DefaultLevel :
Integer (1..31)
The brightness level.
Default value:
20 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Flip
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
With Flip mode (vertical flip) you can flip the image upside down. Flipping applies both to the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Flip: Flip where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..7 for single camera devices; 3..7 for dual camera devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 ]
Flip :
Auto/Off/On [ SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro ]
Auto [ SX10 ]
Auto: If the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image is automatically flipped. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside down or not, the image is not changed.
Off: Display the image on screen the normal way.
On: Display the image flipped upside down. This setting is used when a camera is mounted upside down, but cannot automatically detect which way it is mounted.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 126 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the camera focus mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 2..7 for single camera devices; 3..7 for dual camera devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Mode :
Auto/AutoLimited/Manual [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus ]
Auto/Manual [ CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Auto: The auto focus works differently for different products. For Room 55 Dual, Room
70, Room 70 G2, and when using the Cisco Quad Camera with a codec (SX80 or Codec
Plus), the camera will do single shot auto focusing once a call is connected, and when the view has changed. For SX10, SX20, MX200 G2, MX300 G2 and SX80 with a Cisco
TelePresence Precision 40 or Cisco TelePresence PrecisionHD 12x camera, the camera will do single shot auto focusing once a call is connected, as well as after a pan, tilt, or zoom. For MX700/MX800 and when using a Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera with a codec (SX80 or Codec Plus), the camera will do continuous auto focusing. It will run auto focus once a call is connected, after pan, tilt, or zoom, and generally when the camera identifies a change in the scene.
AutoLimited: This mode only applies when using a Cisco TelePresence Precision 60 camera with a codec (SX80 or Codec Plus), and to MX700/MX800. In most cases this mode will operate the same way as auto focus. In some cases auto-limited will reduce the focus hunting that may occur. Problematic scenes have large areas with no or low contrast, for instance a painted wall with no details, or maybe a partly empty whiteboard.
There's a slightly higher chance of background focus with this mode, compared to auto focus.
Manual: Turn the auto focus off and adjust the camera focus manually.
Default value:
Auto xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting enables gamma corrections. Gamma describes the nonlinear relationship between image pixels and monitor brightness.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Mode :
Auto/Manual
Auto: Auto is the default and the recommended setting.
Manual: In manual mode the gamma value is changed with the gamma level setting, ref.
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 127 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
By setting the Gamma Level you can select which gamma correction table to use. This setting may be useful in difficult lighting conditions, where changes to the brightness setting does not provide satisfactory results. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode to be set to
Manual.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Level :
Integer (0..7)
Define the gamma level.
Default value:
0 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Mirror
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
With Mirror mode (horizontal flip) you can mirror the image on screen. Mirroring applies both to the self-view and the video that is transmitted to the far end. Mirroring is automatically disabled when speaker tracking is on.
This setting is not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55
Dual, Room 70, and Room 70 G2.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Mirror: Mirror where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 2..7 for single camera devices; 3..7 for dual camera devices [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Mirror :
Auto/Off/On [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 ]
Off/On [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Auto: If the camera detects that it is mounted upside down, the image is automatically mirrored. If the camera cannot auto-detect whether it is mounted upside down or not, the image is not changed. MX700/MX800 integrated cameras: Always display the image as other people see you.
Off: Display the image as other people see you. MX200 G2, MX700/MX800 integrated cameras: Display the image as you see yourself in a mirror.
On: Display the image as you see yourself in a mirror. MX200 G2, MX700/MX800 integrated cameras: Display the image as other people see you.
Default value:
Auto [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
MX300G2: Off MX200G2: On [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 128 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the camera white balance mode.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Mode :
Auto/Manual
Auto: The camera will continuously adjust the white balance depending on the camera view.
Manual: Enables manual control of the camera white balance. The white balance level is set using the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level setting.
Default value:
Auto xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the white balance level. Requires the Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode to be set to manual.
Not applicable for the Cisco Quad Camera and the integrated camera of Room 55 Dual, Room
70, and Room 70 G2. These cameras automatically adjust themselves based on the room lighting conditions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level: Level where n : Unique ID that identifies the camera.
Range: 1..7
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Level :
Integer (1..16)
The white balance level.
Default value:
1
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 129 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Cameras Camera Framerate
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55
Requires user role: ADMIN
As default, the camera outputs 30 frames per second. This allows for good quality both in close-ups and overview pictures for normal bandwidths and lighting conditions. If the conditions are better, a 60 frames per second output from the camera may give a better overall quality.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Camera Framerate: Framerate where
Framerate :
30/60
30: The camera outputs 30 frames per second.
60: The camera outputs 60 frames per second.
Default value:
30
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
The current position (pan and tilt), zoom and focus are stored with a preset. Use this setting to determine if the camera should refocus or use the focus value that is stored with the preset.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus: TriggerAutofocus where
TriggerAutofocus :
Auto/Off/On
Auto: Whether the camera refocuses or not when selecting a preset, depends on the camera type.
Off: The focus value that is stored with the preset will be used. The camera will not refocus when selecting a preset.
On: The camera will refocus when selecting a preset. The focus value that is stored with the preset may be overridden.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 130 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting applies only when using a camera with support for speaker tracking or best overview.
Cisco Quad Camera: Speaker tracking uses automatic camera framing to select the best camera view based on where people are in the room. The Quad Camera uses an audio tracking technique that finds and captures a close-up of the active speaker.
Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 Camera: The dual camera assembly consists of two cameras and uses an audio tracking technique that finds and captures a close-up of the active speaker. When a change of speaker is detected, the video conferencing device can switch automatically between the two cameras to always show the best camera view. Refer to the
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode setting for different switching modes.
Video conferencing devices with a built-in speakertrack camera (Room Kit, Room 55, Room
55 Dual, Room 70, Room 70 G2, Boards): Speaker tracking uses automatic camera framing to select the best camera view based on where people are in the room. The camera uses an audio tracking technique that finds and captures a close-up of the active speaker.
Video conferencing devices with a camera that supports Best overview, but not speaker tracking (Room Kit Mini): Best overview uses automatic camera framing to select the best camera view based on where people are in the room.
MX700 and MX800 with a dual camera (speaker tracking): The dual camera assembly consists of two cameras and uses an audio tracking technique that finds and captures a close-up of the active speaker. When a change of speaker is detected, the video conferencing device can switch automatically between the two cameras to always show the best camera view. Refer to the Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode setting for different switching modes.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/Off
Auto: Speaker tracking (not supported on Room Kit Mini) and best overview (not supported on SX80 and MX700/MX800) is switched on. The device will detect people in the room and automatically select the best camera framing. Users can switch the feature on or off instantly in the camera control panel on the Touch controller, but the feature is switched back on after each call so that the device is ready for the next user.
Off: Speaker tracking (not supported on Room Kit Mini) and best overview (not supported on SX80 and MX700/MX800) is switched off. If you have a Cisco TelePresence
SpeakerTrack 60 Camera, or MX700/MX800 with a dual camera (speaker tracking), the two cameras will operate as individual cameras.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
This setting applies only when the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto.
When the closeup functionality is turned on, the device will detect that a person is speaking and select the best framing to cover that person. This is called a closeup and may not include all the persons in the room. If you want all the persons in the room to be in the picture at all times you can turn off the closeup functionality.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup: Closeup where
Closeup :
Auto/Off/On
Auto: The bahvior depends on the device type. Boards will keep all the persons in the room in the camera framing at all times, while other devices will zoom in on the person speaking.
Off: The device will keep all the persons in the room in the camera framing at all times.
On: The device will zoom in on the person speaking.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 131 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The speaker tracking algorithm can react to changes in two modes, one faster than the other.
The mode determines when the camera view will change to a new speaker.
This setting applies only to MX700/MX800 with dual camera (speaker tracking), and to codecs with a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera. Also, the Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode must be set to Auto.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode: TrackingMode where
TrackingMode :
Auto/Conservative
Auto: This is the normal tracking mode.
Conservative: The camera view will change to a new speaker later than in normal tracking mode.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting applies only when a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera is connected to the video conferencing device.
Define whether to automatically detect or manually configure which video input each individual camera is connected to. You should choose manual configuration in situations where the video conferencing device does not receive EDID information from the cameras. Typically, this will be when you use HDMI repeaters that do not pass on EDID information.
MX700, MX800: Not applicable in this version.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/Manual [ SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro ]
Auto: Automatically detect which video inputs the cameras are connected to.
Manual: Manually define which video inputs the cameras are connected to. Use the
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft and Cameras SpeakerTrack
ConnectorDetection CameraRight settings.
Default value:
Auto [ SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 132 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the number of the video input that SpeakerTrack 60's left camera is connected to.
This setting applies only when a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera is connected to the video conferencing device. Furthermore, Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode must be set to Manual.
MX700, MX800: Not applicable in this version.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft: CameraLeft where
CameraLeft :
Integer (1..5) [ SX80 CodecPro ]
Integer (1..3) [ CodecPlus ]
Set a valid video input number. For example, set to 1 if the left camera is connected to video input 1.
Default value:
1 [ SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro ] xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the number of the video input that SpeakerTrack 60's right camera is connected to.
This setting applies only when a Cisco TelePresence SpeakerTrack 60 camera is connected to the video conferencing device. Furthermore, Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode must be set to Manual.
MX700, MX800: Not applicable in this version.
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight: CameraRight where
CameraRight :
Integer (1..5) [ SX80 CodecPro ]
Integer (1..3) [ CodecPlus ]
Set a valid video input number. For example, set to 2 if the right camera is connected to video input 2.
Default value:
2 [ SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 133 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The Snap to Whiteboard feature extends the speaker tracking functionality, thus you need a camera that supports speaker tracking. When a presenter is standing next to the whiteboard, the camera will capture both the presenter and the whiteboard if the Snap to Whiteboard feature is enabled. If the feature is disabled, only the presenter will be captured. The Snap to
Whiteboard feature is set up from the Touch controller or web interface.
SX80, Codec Plus, Codec Pro: Applies only when the connected camera supports speaker tracking.
MX700, MX800: Applies only when the device has a dual camera (speaker tracking).
USAGE: xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is disabled.
On: The Snap to Whiteboard feature is enabled.
Default value:
Off xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Conference configuration
xConfiguration Conference AutoAnswer Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the auto answer mode. Use the Conference AutoAnswer Delay setting if you want the device to wait a number of seconds before answering the call, and use the Conference
AutoAnswer Mute setting if you want your microphone to be muted when the call is answered.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference AutoAnswer Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: You can answer incoming calls manually from the devices user interface.
On: The device automatically answers incoming calls, except if you are already in a call.
You can answer or decline incoming calls manually when you are already engaged in a call.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 134 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Conference AutoAnswer Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define if the microphone shall be muted when an incoming call is automatically answered.
Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference AutoAnswer Mute: Mute where
Mute :
Off/On
Off: The incoming call will not be muted.
On: The incoming call will be muted when automatically answered.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Conference AutoAnswer Delay
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define how long (in seconds) an incoming call has to wait before it is answered automatically by the device. Requires that AutoAnswer Mode is switched on.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference AutoAnswer Delay: Delay where
Delay :
Integer (0..50)
The auto answer delay (seconds).
Default value:
0 xConfiguration Conference DefaultCall Protocol
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the Default Call Protocol to be used when placing calls from the device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference DefaultCall Protocol: Protocol where
Protocol :
Auto/H320/H323/Sip/Spark
Auto: Enables auto-selection of the call protocol based on which protocols are available.
If multiple protocols are available, the order of priority is: 1) SIP; 2) H323; 3) H320. If the device cannot register, the auto-selection chooses H323.
H320: All calls are set up as H.320 calls (only applicable if used with Cisco TelePresence
ISDN Link).
H323: All calls are set up as H.323 calls.
Sip: All calls are set up as SIP calls.
Spark: Reserved for Webex registered devices. Do not use.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 135 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Conference DefaultCall Rate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the Default Call Rate to be used when placing calls from the device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference DefaultCall Rate: Rate where
Rate :
Integer (64..6000) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (64..10000) [ Boards ]
Integer (64..3072) [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
The default call rate (kbps).
Default value:
6000 [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
10000 [ Boards ]
3072 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting determines the default duration of a Do Not Disturb session, i.e. the period when incoming calls are rejected and registered as missed calls. The session can be terminated earlier by using the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout: DefaultTimeout where
DefaultTimeout :
Integer (1..1440)
The number of minutes (maximum 1440 minutes = 24 hours) before the Do Not Disturb session times out automatically.
Default value:
60
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 136 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Conference Encryption Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the conference encryption mode. A padlock with the text "Encryption On" or
"Encryption Off" displays on screen for a few seconds when the conference starts.
All except SX20: NOTE: If the Encryption Option Key is not installed on the device, the encryption mode is always Off.
SX20: NOTE: If the CE-NC software (no crypto) is installed on the device, the encryption mode is always Off.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference Encryption Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On/BestEffort
Off: The device will not use encryption.
On: The device will only allow calls that are encrypted.
BestEffort: The device will use encryption whenever possible.
> In Point to point calls: If the far end device supports encryption (AES-128), the call will be encrypted. If not, the call will proceed without encryption.
> In MultiSite calls: In order to have encrypted MultiSite conferences, all sites must support encryption. If not, the conference will be unencrypted.
Default value:
BestEffort xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Conference FarEndControl Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Lets you decide if the remote side (far end) should be allowed to select your video sources and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference FarEndControl Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The far end is not allowed to select your video sources or to control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom).
On: Allows the far end to be able to select your video sources and control your local camera (pan, tilt, zoom). You will still be able to control your camera and select your video sources as normal.
Default value:
On xConfiguration Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the far end control (H.224) signal capability mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability: SignalCapability where
SignalCapability :
Off/On
Off: Disable the far end control signal capability.
On: Enable the far end control signal capability.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 137 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Conference FarEndMessage Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Toggle whether it is allowed to send data between two devices in a point-to-point call, for use with control systems or macros. Works with SIP calls only. This setting will enable/disable the use of the xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send command.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference FarEndMessage Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: It is not possible to send messages between two devices.
On: It is possible to send messages between two devices in a point-to-point call.
Default value:
Off
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Conference MaxReceiveCallRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum receive bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls. Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active calls.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference MaxReceiveCallRate: MaxReceiveCallRate where
MaxReceiveCallRate :
Integer (64..6000) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (64..10000) [ Boards ]
Integer (64..3072) [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
Default value:
6000 [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
10000 [ Boards ]
3072 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 138 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Conference MaxTransmitCallRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum transmit bit rate to be used when placing or receiving calls. Note that this is the maximum bit rate for each individual call; use the Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate setting to set the aggregated maximum for all simultaneous active calls.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference MaxTransmitCallRate: MaxTransmitCallRate where
MaxTransmitCallRate :
Integer (64..6000) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (64..3072) [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
The maximum transmitt call rate (kbps).
Default value:
6000 [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
3072 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ] xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum overall receive bit rate allowed.
This configuration applies when using a device's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference. The bit rate will be divided fairly among all active calls at any time.
This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or down-speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed. The maximum receive bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
MaxReceiveCallRate setting.
DX70, DX80, and SX10 do not support multiple simultaneous calls, so the total receive call rate will be the same as the receive bit rate for one call (ref. Conference MaxReceiveCallRate setting).
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate: MaxTotalReceiveCallRate where
MaxTotalReceiveCallRate :
Integer (64..6000) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Integer (64..10000) [ Boards ]
Integer (64..15000) [ CodecPro Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (64..3072) [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
The maximum receive call rate (kbps).
Default value:
6000 [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55
Room70/Room55D ]
10000 [ Boards ]
15000 [ CodecPro Room70G2 DeskPro ]
3072 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 139 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum overall transmit bit rate allowed.
This configuration applies when using a device's built-in MultiSite feature (optional) to host a multipoint video conference. The bit rate will be divided fairly among all active calls at any time.
This means that the individual calls will be up-speeded or down-speeded as appropriate when someone leaves or enters a multipoint conference, or when a call is put on hold (suspended) or resumed. The maximum transmit bit rate for each individual call is defined in the Conference
MaxTransmitCallRate setting.
DX70, DX80, SX10: This product does not support multiple simultaneous calls, so the total transmit call rate will be the same as the transmit bit rate for one call (ref. Conference
MaxTransmitCallRate setting).
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate: MaxTotalTransmitCallRate where
MaxTotalTransmitCallRate :
Integer (64..6000) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D Boards ]
Integer (64..15000) [ CodecPro Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (64..3072) [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
The maximum transmit call rate (kbps).
Default value:
6000 [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55
Room70/Room55D Boards ]
15000 [ CodecPro Room70G2 DeskPro ]
3072 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ] xConfiguration Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define if the microphones shall be unmuted automatically when all calls are disconnected. In a meeting room or other shared resources this may be done to prepare the device for the next user.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: If muted during a call, let the microphones remain muted after the call is disconnected.
On: Unmute the microphones after the call is disconnected.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 140 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Conference Multipoint Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define how to expand a point-to-point video call (a call involving only two parties) into a multipoint conference with more participants (ad hoc conferences). Both the built-in MultiSite feature, which relies only on local resources, and different solutions based on centralized infrastructure
(multipoint control units – MCUs) are available.
The MultiSite feature is an upgrade option and may not be available on all devices. The MultiSite option key must be installed on the device. The MultiSite feature is not available at all for SX10,
DX70, and DX80.
If registered to a Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server (VCS), the device can use
MultiSite when calling other video devices. If registered to a Cisco Unified Communications
Manager (CUCM) version 8.6.2 or newer, the device can use either a CUCM conference bridge, or the device's own built-in MultiSite feature. Which option to use, is set-up by CUCM.
In either case, multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote Add).
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference Multipoint Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/CUCMMediaResourceGroupList/MultiSite/Off [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/
MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards ]
Auto/CUCMMediaResourceGroupList [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
Auto: The multipoint method is selected automatically.
Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature, provided that the
MultiSite option key is installed on the device, and that you are calling another video device (not an MCU). Only the MultiSite host can add participants. This prevents cascaded conferences. If the device doesn't have the MultiSite option key, you cannot call more than one video device on video. All products except SX10, DX70, and DX80 may add one extra participant on audio-only.
Regardless of the MultiSite option key, multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote
Add).
CUCMMediaResourceGroupList: Multiparty conferences are hosted by the CUCM configured conference bridge. This setting is provisioned by CUCM in a CUCM environment, and should never be set manually by the user.
MultiSite: Multiparty conferences are set up using the built-in MultiSite feature, provided that the MultiSite option key is installed on the device. If the device doesn't have the
MultiSite option key, you cannot call more than one device on video. You may add one extra device on audio-only.
Off: You cannot call more than one device on video, but you may add one extra device on audio-only. Multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote Add).
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration Conference MultiStream Mode
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
The device supports multistream video for conferences.
USAGE: xConfiguration Conference MultiStream Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/Off
Auto: Multistream will be used when the conference infrastructure supports the feature.
Minimum versions required: CMS 2.2, CUCM 11.5, VCS X8.7.
Off: Multistream is disabled.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 141 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
FacilityService configuration
xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Up to five different facility services can be supported simultaneously. With this setting you can select what kind of services they are. A facility service is not available unless both the
FacilityService Service [n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface. They are not available for devices that use a remote control.
USAGE: xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] Type: Type where n : Unique ID that identifies the service.
Range: 1..5
Type :
Catering/Concierge/Emergency/Helpdesk/Security/Transportation/Other
Catering: Select this option for catering services.
Concierge: Select this option for concierge services.
Emergency: Select this option for emergency services.
Helpdesk: Select this option for helpdesk services.
Security: Select this option for security services.
Transportation: Select this option for transportation services.
Other: Select this option for services not covered by the other options.
Default value:
Helpdesk xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the name of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported.
A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n] Name and the
FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. The name will show on the facility service call button, which appears when you tap the question mark icon in the top bar. Facility services are available from the user interface. They are not available for devices that use a remote control.
USAGE: xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] Name: " Name " where n : Unique ID that identifies the service.
Range: 1..5
Name :
String (0, 1024)
The name of the facility service.
Default value:
Service 1: "Live Support" Other services: ""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 142 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] Number
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the number (URI or phone number) of the facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported. A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service
[n] Name and the FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface. They are not available for devices that use a remote control.
USAGE: xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] Number: " Number " where n : Unique ID that identifies the service.
Range: 1..5
Number :
String (0, 1024)
The number (URI or phone number) of the facility service.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] CallType
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the call type for each facility service. Up to five different facility services are supported.
A facility service is not available unless both the FacilityService Service [n] Name and the
FacilityService Service [n] Number settings are properly set. Facility services are available from the user interface. They are not available for devices that use a remote control.
USAGE: xConfiguration FacilityService Service [n] CallType: CallType where n : Unique ID that identifies the service.
Range: 1..5
CallType :
Audio/Video
Audio: Select this option for audio calls.
Video: Select this option for video calls.
Default value:
Video
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 143 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
GPIO configuration
xConfiguration GPIO Pin [n] Mode
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The four GPIO pins are configured individually. The state can be retrieved by xStatus GPIO Pin
[1..4] State. The default pin state is High (+12 V). When activated as an output, a pin is set to 0
V (Low); when deactivated, it is set to +12 V (High). To activate a pin as an input, the voltage on the pin must be pulled down to 0 V; to deactivate it, raise the voltage to +12 V.
USAGE: xConfiguration GPIO Pin [n] Mode: Mode where n : GPIO pin number.
Range: 1..4
Mode :
InputAcceptAllCalls/InputDisconnectAllCalls/InputMuteMicrophones/InputNoAction/
OutputAllCallsEncrypted/OutputInCall/OutputManualState/OutputMicrophonesMuted/
OutputPresentationOn/OutputStandbyActive
InputAcceptAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Accept command, which accepts all incoming calls, will be issued.
InputDisconnectAllCalls: When the pin is activated, the xCommand Call Disconnect command, which disconnects all calls, will be issued.
InputMuteMicrophones: When the pin is activated, the microphones will be muted. When deactivated, the microphones will be unmuted.
InputNoAction: The pin state can be set, but no operation is performed.
OutputAllCallsEncrypted: The pin is activated when all calls are encrypted, and deactivated when one or more calls are not encrypted.
OutputInCall: The pin is activated when in call, and deactivated when not in call.
OutputManualState: The pin state can be set by xCommand GPIO ManualState Set PinX:
High/Low. It is set to +12 V or 0 V, respectively.
OutputMicrophonesMuted: The pin is activated when microphones are muted, and deactivated when not muted.
OutputPresentationOn: The pin is activated when presentation is active, and deactivated when presentation is not active.
OutputStandbyActive: The pin is activated when the device is in standby mode, and deactivated when no longer in standby.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 144 xCommand
Default value:
InputNoAction xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
H323 configuration
xConfiguration H323 Authentication Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the authenticatin mode for the H.323 profile.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 Authentication Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The device will not try to authenticate itself to a H.323 Gatekeeper, but will still try a normal registration.
On: If an H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that it requires authentication, the device will try to authenticate itself to the gatekeeper. Requires the H323 Authentication LoginName and H323 Authentication Password settings to be defined on both the device and the
Gatekeeper.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration H323 Authentication LoginName
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
The device sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way authentication from the device to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the device is authenticated to the gatekeeper. If the
H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the device will still try to register.
Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 Authentication LoginName: " LoginName " where
LoginName :
String (0, 50)
The authentication login name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 145 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration H323 Authentication Password
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
The device sends the H323 Authentication Login Name and the H323 Authentication Password to an H.323 Gatekeeper for authentication. The authentication is a one way authentication from the device to the H.323 Gatekeeper, i.e. the device is authenticated to the gatekeeper. If the
H.323 Gatekeeper indicates that no authentication is required, the device will still try to register.
Requires the H.323 Authentication Mode to be enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 Authentication Password: " Password " where
Password :
String (0, 50)
The authentication password.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration H323 CallSetup Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Defines whether to use a Gatekeeper or Direct calling when establishing H.323 calls.
Direct H.323 calls can be made also when H323 CallSetup Mode is set to Gatekeeper.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 CallSetup Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Direct/Gatekeeper
Direct: You can only make an H.323 call by dialing an IP address directly.
Gatekeeper: The device uses a Gatekeeper to make an H.323 call. When choosing this option, the H323 Gatekeeper Address must also be configured.
Default value:
Gatekeeper
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 146 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration H323 Encryption KeySize
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the minimum or maximum key size for the Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, which is used when establishing the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption key.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 Encryption KeySize: KeySize where
KeySize :
Max1024bit/Min1024bit/Min2048bit
Max1024bit: The maximum size is 1024 bit.
Min1024bit: The minimum size is 1024 bit.
Min2048bit: The minimum size is 2048 bit.
Default value:
Min1024bit xConfiguration H323 H323Alias E164
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
The H.323 Alias E.164 defines the address of the device, according to the numbering plan implemented in the H.323 Gatekeeper. The E.164 alias is equivalent to a telephone number, sometimes combined with access codes.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 H323Alias E164: " E164 " where
E164 :
String (0, 30)
The H.323 Alias E.164 address. Valid characters are 0-9, * and #.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration H323 Gatekeeper Address
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the IP address of the Gatekeeper. Requires H323 CallSetup Mode to be set to
Gatekeeper.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 Gatekeeper Address: " Address " where
Address :
String (0, 255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration H323 H323Alias ID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the H.323 Alias ID, which is used to address the device on a H.323 Gatekeeper and will be displayed in the call lists.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 H323Alias ID: " ID " where
ID :
String (0, 49)
The H.323 Alias ID. Example: "[email protected]", "My H.323 Alias ID"
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 147 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration H323 NAT Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
The firewall traversal technology creates a secure path through the firewall barrier, and enables proper exchange of audio/video data when connected to an external video conferencing device
(when the IP traffic goes through a NAT router). NOTE: NAT does not work in conjunction with gatekeepers.
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 NAT Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/Off/On
Auto: The device will determine if the H323 NAT Address or the real IP address should be used in signaling. This makes it possible to place calls to devices on the LAN as well as devices on the WAN. If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, the real IP address will be used.
Off: The device will signal the real IP address.
On: The device will signal the configured H323 NAT Address instead of its real IP address in Q.931 and H.245. The NAT server address will be shown in the startup-menu as: "My
IP Address: 10.0.2.1". If the H323 NAT Address is wrong or not set, H.323 calls cannot be set up.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration H323 NAT Address
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the external/global IP address to the router with NAT support. Packets sent to the router will then be routed to the video conferencing device. Note that NAT cannot be used when registered to a gatekeeper.
In the router, the following ports must be routed to the video conferencing device's IP address:
* Port 1720
* Port 5555-6555
* Port 2326-2487
USAGE: xConfiguration H323 NAT Address: " Address " where
Address :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 148 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
HttpClient configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration HttpClient Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Allow or prohibit communication with an external HTTP(S) server using HTTP(S) requests and responses.
USAGE: xConfiguration HttpClient Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The video conferencing device cannot communicate with an external HTTP(S) server.
On: The video conferencing device is allowed to communicate with an external HTTP(S) server.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration HttpClient AllowHTTP
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The HttpClient Mode setting is used to allow or prohibit communication with an external
HTTP(S) server. The Mode setting does not distinguish between HTTP and HTTPS. You must use the HttpClient AllowHTTP setting to further allow or prohibit the use of HTTP.
USAGE: xConfiguration HttpClient AllowHTTP: AllowHTTP where
AllowHTTP :
False/True
False: The video conferencing device can communicate only over HTTPS.
True: The video conferencing device can communicate over both HTTPS and HTTP.
Default value:
True
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 149 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
You can choose whether or not to allow the video conferencing device to communicate with a server over HTTPS without checking the server's certificate first.
Even if the device is allowed to skip the certificate validation process, it doesn't automatically do it. You must specifically set the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter in each xCommand
HttpClient command for data to be exchanged with the server without certificate validation.
USAGE: xConfiguration HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS: AllowInsecureHTTPS where
AllowInsecureHTTPS :
False/True
False: The device always checks that the HTTPS server has a valid certificate. No communication with the server takes place if the certificate validation fails.
True: The device is allowed to skip the certificate validation process before communicating with the server.
Default value:
False
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration HttpClient UseHttpProxy
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
There are several UseHttpProxy settings that specify if a service shall communicate via an
HTTP proxy or not. The HttpClient UseHttpProxy setting applies to macros and arbitrary
HTTP(S) requests using the HttpClient commands.
For this setting to have any effect, a proxy server for HTTP, HTTPS, and WebSocket traffic must be set up using the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy settings.
USAGE: xConfiguration HttpClient UseHttpProxy: UseHttpProxy where
UseHttpProxy :
Off/On
Off: Set up communication directly with the server (not using a proxy).
On: Set up communication via proxy.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 150 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
HttpFeedback configuration
xConfiguration HttpFeedback TlsVerify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to an HTTPS server for arbitrary HTTPS communication (refer to the HttpClient Post/Put/Patch/Get/Delete commands).
For phone book, provisioning, and external logging servers, see the Phonebook Server 1
TlsVerify, Provisioning TlsVerify, and Logging External TlsVerify settings.
Before establishing a connection between the device and the HTTPS server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.
In general, the minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the HTTPS connection is 1.1.
There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) For compatibility reasons, the minimum TLS version is
1.0 for devices that are registered to CUCM. 2) Devices registered to the Webex cloud service always use version 1.2.
Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from
CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the old NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting was not explicitly set to On.
USAGE: xConfiguration HttpFeedback TlsVerify: TlsVerify where
TlsVerify :
Off/On
Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the HTTPS server.
On: The device checks if the certificate of the HTTPS server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.
Default value:
On xConfiguration HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
There are several UseHttpProxy settings that specify if a service shall communicate via an
HTTP proxy or not. The HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy setting applies to feedback sent from the video device.
For this setting to have any effect, a proxy server for HTTP, HTTPS, and WebSocket traffic must be set up using the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy settings.
USAGE: xConfiguration HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy: UseHttpProxy where
UseHttpProxy :
Off/On
Off: Set up communication directly with the server (not using a proxy).
On: Set up communication via proxy.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 151 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Logging configuration
xConfiguration Logging External Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Determine whether or not to store the device logs on a remote syslog server. This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.
You must enter the address of the remote server in the Logging External Server Address setting. Unless otherwise specified in the Logging External Server Port setting, the standard syslog port is used.
USAGE: xConfiguration Logging External Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Device logs will not be stored on the remote syslog server.
On: Device logs will be stored on the remote syslog server.
Default value:
Off xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Logging External Protocol
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Determine which protocol to use toward the remote logging server. You can use either the syslog protocol over TLS (Transport Layer Security), or the syslog protocol in plaintext. For details about the syslog protocol, see RFC 5424.
USAGE: xConfiguration Logging External Protocol: Protocol where
Protocol :
Syslog/SyslogTLS
Syslog: Syslog protocol in plain text.
SyslogTLS: Syslog protocol over TLS.
Default value:
SyslogTLS xConfiguration Logging External Server Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The address of the remote syslog server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Logging External Server Address: " Address " where
Address :
String (0, 255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 152 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Logging External Server Port
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The port that the remote syslog server listens for messages on. If set to 0, the device will use the standard syslog port. The standard syslog port is 514 for syslog, and 6514 for syslog over
TLS.
USAGE: xConfiguration Logging External Server Port: Port where
Port :
Integer (0..65535)
The number of the port that the remote syslog server is using. 0 means that the device uses the standard syslog port.
Default value:
514
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Logging External TlsVerify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to a remote syslog server. It applies to both regular logging (refer to the Logging External Mode setting) and audit logging
(refer to the Security Audit Logging Mode setting).
Before establishing a connection between the device and the syslog server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.
The minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the syslog connection is 1.1.
USAGE: xConfiguration Logging External TlsVerify: TlsVerify where
TlsVerify :
Off/On
Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the syslog server.
On: The device checks if the certificate of the syslog server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 153 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Logging Internal Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Determine whether or not to store the system logs on the device (local files). These are the files that you get when you download the log bundles from the device. This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.
USAGE: xConfiguration Logging Internal Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: System logs will not be stored on the device.
On: System logs will be stored on the device.
Default value:
On
Macros configuration
xConfiguration Macros Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Macros allow you to write snippets of JavaScript code that can automate parts of your video conferencing device, thus creating custom behavior. Use of macros is disabled by default, but the first time you open the Macro Editor you will be asked whether to enable use of macros on the device. Use this setting when you want to manually enable, or to permanently disable the use of macros on the device. You can disable the use of macros within the Macro Editor. But this will not permanently disable macros from running, because every time the device is reset the macros will be re-enabled automatically.
USAGE: xConfiguration Macros Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Permanently disable the use of macros on this device.
On: Enable the use of macros on this device.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 154 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Macros AutoStart
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
All the macros run in a single process on the video conferencing device, called the macro runtime. It should be running by default, but you can choose to stop and start it manually. If you restart the device, the runtime will automatically start again if auto start is enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration Macros AutoStart: AutoStart where
AutoStart :
Off/On
Off: The macro runtime will not start automatically after a restart of the device.
On: The macro runtime will start automatically after a restart of the device.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Macros UnresponsiveTimeout
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Macros are continuously monitored to detect unresponsive code. Unresponsive macros are typically a sign of a programming error, but occasionally it might be due to limited system resources. Increasing the value allows macros to run for longer without being terminated, while decreasing the value ensures that faulty macros do not consume system resources.
USAGE: xConfiguration Macros UnresponsiveTimeout: UnresponsiveTimeout where
UnresponsiveTimeout :
Integer (0..65535)
Set the number of seconds before terminating an unresponsive macro. The value 0 disables the check altogether.
Default value:
5 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
10 [ DX70/DX80 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 155 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Network configuration
xConfiguration Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Domain Name System Security extensions (DNSSEC) is a set of extensions to DNS. It is used to authenticate DNS replies for zones that are signed. It will still allow unsigned zones.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode: Mode where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable Domain Name System Security Extensions.
On: Enable Domain Name System Security Extensions.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Network [n] DNS Domain Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.
Example: If the DNS Domain Name is "company.com" and the name to lookup is
"MyVideoSystem", this will result in the DNS lookup "MyVideoSystem.company.com".
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] DNS Domain Name: " Name " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Name :
String (0, 64)
The DNS domain name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 156 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the network addresses for DNS servers. Up to three addresses may be specified. If the network addresses are unknown, contact your administrator or Internet Service Provider.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address: " Address " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
m : Index that identifies the DNS server. Maximum three DNS servers are allowed.
Range: 1..3
Address :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Default value:
"" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The device can be connected to an IEEE 802.1X LAN network, with a port-based network access control that is used to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode: Mode where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The 802.1X authentication is disabled.
On: The 802.1X authentication is enabled.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 157 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Verification of the server-side certificate of an IEEE802.1x connection against the certificates in the local CA-list when TLS is used. The CA-list must be uploaded to the video conferencing device. This can be done from the web interface.
This setting takes effect only when Network [1] IEEE8021X Eap Tls is enabled (On).
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify: TlsVerify where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
TlsVerify :
Off/On
Off: When set to Off, TLS connections are allowed without verifying the server-side X.509 certificate against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no CA-list has been uploaded to the device.
On: When set to On, the server-side X.509 certificate will be validated against the local
CA-list for all TLS connections. Only servers with a valid certificate will be allowed.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Authentication using a private key/certificate pair during an IEEE802.1x connection. The authentication X.509 certificate must be uploaded to the video conferencing device. This can be done from the web interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate: UseClientCertificate where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
UseClientCertificate :
Off/On
Off: When set to Off client-side authentication is not used (only server-side).
On: When set to On the client (video conferencing device) will perform a mutual authentication TLS handshake with the server.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 158 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the username for 802.1X authentication.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity: " Identity " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Identity :
String (0, 64)
The username for 802.1X authentication.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Password
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the password for 802.1X authentication.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Password: " Password " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Password :
String (0, 50)
The password for 802.1X authentication.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 159
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The 802.1X Anonymous ID string is to be used as unencrypted identity with EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) types that support different tunneled identity, like EAP-PEAP and
EAP-TTLS. If set, the anonymous ID will be used for the initial (unencrypted) EAP Identity
Request.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity: " AnonymousIdentity " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
AnonymousIdentity :
String (0, 64)
The 802.1X Anonymous ID string.
Default value:
""
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the Md5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) mode. This is a Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol that relies on a shared secret. Md5 is a Weak security.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5: Md5 where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Md5 :
Off/On
Off: The EAP-MD5 protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-MD5 protocol is enabled.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) mode. Authenticates LAN clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Funk Software and Certicom. Usually supported by Agere Systems, Proxim and Avaya.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls: Ttls where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Ttls :
Off/On
Off: The EAP-TTLS protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-TTLS protocol is enabled.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 160 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Enable or disable the use of EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) for IEEE802.1x connections. The EAP-TLS protocol, defined in RFC 5216, is considered one of the most secure EAP standards. LAN clients are authenticated using client certificates.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls: Tls where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Tls :
Off/On
Off: The EAP-TLS protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-TLS protocol is enabled.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the Peap (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol) mode. Authenticates LAN clients without the need for client certificates. Developed by Microsoft, Cisco and RSA Security.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap: Peap where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Peap :
Off/On
Off: The EAP-PEAP protocol is disabled.
On: The EAP-PEAP protocol is enabled.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 161 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IPStack
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Select if the device should use IPv4, IPv6, or dual IP stack, on the network interface. NOTE:
After changing this setting you may have to wait up to 30 seconds before it takes effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPStack: IPStack where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
IPStack :
Dual/IPv4/IPv6
Dual: When set to Dual, the network interface can operate on both IP versions at the same time, and can have both an IPv4 and an IPv6 address at the same time.
IPv4: When set to IPv4, the device will use IPv4 on the network interface.
IPv6: When set to IPv6, the device will use IPv6 on the network interface.
Default value:
Dual
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 Assignment
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define how the device will obtain its IPv4 address, subnet mask and gateway address.
When using DHCP for address assignment, the MAC address is used as client identifier in DHCP requests for the SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, and Touch 10. "01" appended by the MAC address is used for the other products.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 Assignment: Assignment where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Assignment :
Static/DHCP
Static: The addresses must be configured manually using the Network IPv4 Address,
Network IPv4 Gateway and Network IPv4 SubnetMask settings (static addresses).
DHCP: The device addresses are automatically assigned by the DHCP server.
Default value:
DHCP
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 162 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the static IPv4 network address for the device. Applicable only when Network IPv4
Assignment is set to Static.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 Address: " Address " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Address :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 Gateway
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the IPv4 network gateway address. Applicable only when the Network IPv4 Assignment is set to Static.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 Gateway: " Gateway " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Gateway :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
Default value:
"" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the IPv4 network subnet mask. Applicable only when the Network IPv4 Assignment is set to Static.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask: " SubnetMask " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
SubnetMask :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 163 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 Assignment
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define how the device will obtain its IPv6 address and the default gateway address.
When using DHCPv6 for address assignment, the MAC address is used as client identifier in DHCP requests for the SX10, SX20, SX80, MX200 G2, MX300 G2, and Touch 10. "01" appended by the MAC address is used for the other products.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 Assignment: Assignment where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Assignment :
Static/DHCPv6/Autoconf
Static: The device and gateway IP addresses must be configured manually using the
Network IPv6 Address and Network IPv6 Gateway settings. The options, for example
NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
DHCPv6: All IPv6 addresses, including options, will be obtained from a DHCPv6 server.
See RFC 3315 for a detailed description. The Network IPv6 DHCPOptions setting will be ignored.
Autoconf: Enable IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration of the IPv6 network interface. See RFC
4862 for a detailed description. The options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, must either be set manually or obtained from a DHCPv6 server. The Network IPv6
DHCPOptions setting determines which method to use.
Default value:
Autoconf xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the static IPv6 network address for the device. Applicable only when the Network IPv6
Assignment is set to Static.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 Address: " Address " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Address :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv6 address including a network mask. Example: 2001:DB8::/48
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 Gateway
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the IPv6 network gateway address. This setting is only applicable when the Network
IPv6 Assignment is set to Static.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 Gateway: " Gateway " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Gateway :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv6 address.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 164 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Retrieve a set of DHCP options, for example NTP and DNS server addresses, from a DHCPv6 server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions: DHCPOptions where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
DHCPOptions :
Off/On
Off: Disable the retrieval of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
On: Enable the retrieval of a selected set of DHCP options from a DHCPv6 server.
Default value:
On xConfiguration Network [n] MTU
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the Ethernet MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) size. The MTU size must be supported by your network infrastructure. The minimum size is 576 for IPv4 and 1280 for IPv6.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] MTU: MTU where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
MTU :
Integer (576..1500)
Set a value for the MTU (bytes).
Default value:
1500 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The QoS (Quality of Service) is a method which handles the priority of audio, video and other data in the network. The QoS settings must be supported by the infrastructure. Diffserv
(Differentiated Services) is a networking architecture that specifies a simple, scalable and coarse-grained mechanism for classifying and managing network traffic. It provides QoS priorities on IP networks.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Mode: Mode where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Off/Diffserv
Off: No QoS method is used.
Diffserv: The Network QoS Diffserv Audio, Network QoS Diffserv Video, Network QoS
Diffserv Data, Network QoS Diffserv Signalling, Network QoS Diffserv ICMPv6 and
Network QoS Diffserv NTP settings are used to prioritize packets.
Default value:
Diffserv
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 165 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting takes effect only if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Audio packets should have in the IP network. The traffic classes recommended in the DiffServ RFCs map to a decimal value between 0 and 63. We recommend you use EF for Audio. EF equals the decimal value 46.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio: Audio where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Audio :
Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the audio packets in the IP network. 0 means "best-effort".
Default value:
46
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting takes effect only if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Video packets should have in the IP network. The packets of the presentation channel (shared content) are also in the Video packet category. The traffic classes recommended in the DiffServ RFCs map to a decimal value between 0 and 63. We recommend you use AF41 for Video. AF41 equals the decimal value 34.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video: Video where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Video :
Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the video packets in the IP network. 0 means "best-effort".
Default value:
34
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 166 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting takes effect only if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Data packets should have in the IP network. The traffic classes recommended in the DiffServ RFCs map to a decimal value between 0 and 63. We recommend you use AF41 for Data. AF41 equals the decimal value 34.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data: Data where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Data :
Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the data packets in the IP network. 0 means "best-effort".
Default value:
34
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting takes effect only if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority Signalling packets that are deemed critical (time-sensitive) for the realtime operation should have in the IP network. The traffic classes recommended in the DiffServ
RFCs map to a decimal value between 0 and 63. We recommend you use CS3 for Signalling.
CS3 equals the decimal value 24.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling: Signalling where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Signalling :
Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the signalling packets in the IP network. 0 means "best-effort".
Default value:
24
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 167 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting takes effect only if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority ICMPv6 packets should have in the IP network. The traffic classes recommended in the DiffServ RFCs map to a decimal value between 0 and 63. We recommend you use 0 for ICMPv6.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6: ICMPv6 where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
ICMPv6 :
Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the ICMPv6 packets in the IP network. 0 means "best effort".
Default value:
0 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting takes effect only if Network QoS Mode is set to Diffserv.
Define which priority NTP packets should have in the IP network. The traffic classes recommended in the DiffServ RFCs map to a decimal value between 0 and 63. We recommend you use 0 for NTP.
The priority set here might be overridden when packets are leaving the network controlled by the local network administrator.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP: NTP where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
NTP :
Integer (0..63)
Set the priority of the NTP packets in the IP network. 0 means "best-effort".
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 168 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define which IP addresses (IPv4/IPv6) are allowed for remote access to the device from HTTP,
HTTPS, SSH or Telnet.
A network mask (IP range) is specified by <ip address>/N, where N is 1-32 for IPv4, and N is
1-128 for IPv6. The /N is a common indication of a network mask where the first N bits are set.
Thus 192.168.0.0/24 would match any address starting with 192.168.0, since these are the first
24 bits in the address. Multiple IP addresses are separated by a white space.
Telnet is only supported by SX Series, MX Series and DX70/DX80.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow: " Allow " where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Allow :
String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address or IPv6 address.
Default value:
"" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] Speed
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the Ethernet link speed. We recommend not to change from the default value, which negotiates with the network to set the speed automatically. If you do not use auto-negotiation, make sure that the speed you choose is supported by the closest switch in your network infrastructure.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] Speed: Speed where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Speed :
Auto/10half/10full/100half/100full [ SX10 ]
Auto/10half/10full/100half/100full/1000full [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/
MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards ]
Auto: Auto-negotiate link speed.
10half: Force link to 10 Mbps half-duplex.
10full: Force link to 10 Mbps full-duplex.
100half: Force link to 100 Mbps half-duplex.
100full: Force link to 100 Mbps full-duplex.
1000full: Force link to 1 Gbps full-duplex.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 169 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the VLAN voice mode. The VLAN Voice Mode will be set to Auto automatically if you have Cisco UCM (Cisco Unified Communications Manager) as provisioning infrastructure. Note that Auto mode will NOT work if the NetworkServices CDP Mode setting is Off.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode: Mode where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
Mode :
Auto/Manual/Off
Auto: The Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), if available, assigns an id to the voice VLAN. If
CDP is not available, VLAN is not enabled.
Manual: The VLAN ID is set manually using the Network VLAN Voice VlanId setting. If CDP is available, the manually set value will be overruled by the value assigned by CDP.
Off: VLAN is not enabled.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the VLAN voice ID. This setting will only take effect if Network VLAN Voice Mode is set to Manual.
USAGE: xConfiguration Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId: VlanId where n : Index that identifies the network.
Range: 1..1
VlanId :
Integer (1..4094)
Set the VLAN voice ID.
Default value:
1
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 170 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
NetworkPort configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
NetworkServices configuration
xConfiguration NetworkPort [n] Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80
Requires user role: ADMIN
The video conferencing device has two network ports. The first network port is for connecting the device to Ethernet LAN. The second network port (also called the computer network port) allows you to connect a computer to the Ethernet LAN via the device. In this way, you only need one network wall socket to support both the video conferencing device and the computer.
If the video conferencing device is used in a public environment we recommend that you disable this network port, to prevent people from connecting a computer to your network through the device.
You have to restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkPort [n] Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the network port.
Range: 2..2
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The computer network port is disabled.
On: The computer network port is available for use.
Default value:
On xConfiguration NetworkServices CDP Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Enable or disable the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) daemon. Enabling CDP will make the device report certain statistics and device identifiers to a CDP-enabled switch. If CDP is disabled, the Network VLAN Voice Mode: Auto setting will not work.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices CDP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The CDP daemon is disabled.
On: The CDP daemon is enabled.
Default value:
On xConfiguration NetworkServices H323 Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define whether the device should be able to place and receive H.323 calls or not.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices H323 Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive H.323 calls.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 171 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define whether or not to allow access to the device using the HTTP or HTTPS (HTTP Secure) protocols. Note that the device's web interface use HTTP or HTTPS. If this setting is switched
Off, you cannot use the web interface.
For additional security (encryption and decryption of requests and pages that are returned by the web server), allow only HTTPS.
Note: The default value is HTTP+HTTPS for devices that have been upgraded to CE9.4 (or later) from an earlier software version, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/HTTP+HTTPS/HTTPS
Off: Access to the device not allowed via HTTP or HTTPS.
HTTP+HTTPS: Access to the device allowed via both HTTP and HTTPS.
HTTPS: Access to the device allowed via HTTPS, but not via HTTP.
Default value:
HTTPS (changed from HTTP+HTTPS to HTTPS in CE9.4) xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This is the username part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName: " LoginName " where
LoginName :
String (0, 80)
The authentication login name.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This is the password part of the credentials for authentication towards the HTTP proxy.
Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password: " Password " where
Password :
String (0, 64)
The authentication password.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 172 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
You can configure to use a proxy server for HTTP, HTTPS, and WebSocket traffic. The HTTP proxy can be set up manually, it can be auto-configured (PACUrl), fully automated (WPAD), or it can be turned off.
If NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is not turned Off, you can further specify which services shall use the proxy in the HttpClient UseHttpProxy, HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy, and
WebEngine UseHttpProxy settings.
Communication with the Cisco Webex cloud will always go via the proxy if NetworkServices
HTTP Proxy Mode is not turned Off.
Regardless of the Proxy Mode, the device will never communicate with CUCM, MRA (CUCM via
Expressway), or TMS via proxy.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Manual/Off/PACUrl/WPAD
Manual: Enter the address of the proxy server in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy
URL setting. Optionally, also add the HTTP proxy login name and password in the
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName/Password settings.
Off: The HTTP proxy mode is turned off.
PACUrl: The HTTP proxy is auto-configured. You must enter the URL for the PAC (Proxy
Auto Configuration) script in the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl setting.
WPAD: With WPAD (Web Proxy Auto Discovery) the HTTP proxy is fully automated and auto-configured.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the URL of the HTTP proxy server. Requires that the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode is set to Manual.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url: " Url " where
Url :
String (0..255)
The URL of the HTTP proxy server.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script. Requires that the NetworkServices
HTTP Proxy Mode is set to PACUrl.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl: " PACUrl " where
PACUrl :
String (0..255)
The URL of the PAC (Proxy Auto Configuration) script.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 173 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion: MinimumTLSVersion where
MinimumTLSVersion :
TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
TLSv1.1: Support of TLS version 1.1 or higher.
TLSv1.2: Support of TLS version 1.2 or higher.
Default value:
TLSv1.1
xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The HTTP Strict Transport Security header lets a web site inform the browser that it should never load the site using HTTP and should automatically convert all attempts to access the site using HTTP to HTTPS requests instead.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity:
StrictTransportSecurity where
StrictTransportSecurity :
Off/On
Off: The HTTP strict transport security feature is disabled.
On: The HTTP strict transport security feature is enabled.
Default value:
Off xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When the video conferencing device connects to an HTTPS client (like a web browser), the client can be asked to present a certificate to the video conferencing device to identify itself.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate:
VerifyClientCertificate where
VerifyClientCertificate :
Off/On
Off: Do not verify client certificates.
On: Requires the client to present a certificate that is signed by a trusted Certificate
Authority (CA). This requires that a list of trusted CAs are uploaded to the device in advance.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 174 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the device's time and date to a reference time server. The time server will be queried regularly for time updates.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/Manual/Off
Auto: The device will use an NTP server for time reference. As default, the server address will be obtained from the network's DHCP server. If a DHCP server is not used, or if the
DHCP server does not provide an NTP server address, the NTP server address that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be used.
Manual: The device will use the NTP server that is specified in the NetworkServices NTP
Server [n] Address setting for time reference.
Off: The device will not use an NTP server. The NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address setting will be ignored.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The address of the NTP server that will be used when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to
Manual, and when NetworkServices NTP Mode is set to Auto and no address is supplied by a
DHCP server.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address: " Address " where n : Unique ID for the NTP server.
Range: 1..3
Address :
String (0, 255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
"0.tandberg.pool.ntp.org"
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 175 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
To make sure that the NTP information comes from a trusted source, the video conferencing device must know the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses. Use the NetworkServices
NTP Server [n] Key and NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId settings for the key and ID respectively.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key: " Key " where n : Unique ID for the NTP server.
Range: 1..3
Key :
String (0, 2045)
The key, which is part of the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses.
Default value:
""
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
To make sure that the NTP information comes from a trusted source, the video conferencing device must know the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses. Use the NetworkServices
NTP Server [n] Key and NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId settings for the key and ID respectively.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId: " KeyId " where n : Unique ID for the NTP server.
Range: 1..3
KeyId :
String (0, 10)
The ID, which is part of the ID/key pair that the NTP source uses.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 176 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose the authentication hash function that the NTP server uses, and that the video conferencing device must use to authenticate the time messages.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn: KeyAlgorithn where n : Unique ID for the NTP server.
Range: 1..3
KeyAlgorithn :
None/SHA1/SHA256
None: The NTP server doesn't use a hash function.
SHA1: The NTP server uses the SHA-1 hash function.
SHA256: The NTP server uses the SHA-256 hash function (from the SHA-2 family of hash functions).
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
You can set up the device to use SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) for sending email from the device to a mail server for relaying. This is required if you want to allow users to send their whiteboards and presentations via email to people inside or outside their organization.
If the device is set up for encrypted communication (see the NetworkServices SMTP Security setting), the device only allows connections where the SMTP server's certificate is validated.
There is no option for ignoring the certificate check.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable SMTP (and email) support.
On: Enable SMTP support for sending email.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration NetworkServices SIP Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define whether the device should be able to place and receive SIP calls or not.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SIP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Disable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
On: Enable the possibility to place and receive SIP calls.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 177 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Server
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
This is the address of the SMTP server.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Server: " Server " where
Server :
String (0, 255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Port
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
This port is used for outgoing emails from the device to the SMTP server.
Set a port number based on the encryption setting (NetworkServices SMTP Security) and the requirements of the SMTP server. Do not use the default value.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Port: Port where
Port :
Integer (0..65535)
The port used for outgoing emails from the device.
Default value:
0 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Username
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
This is the username part of the credentials that are used to authenticate the device with the
SMTP server. This setting may be required by the SMTP server.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Username: " Username " where
Username :
String (0, 80)
A valid username.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Password
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
This is the password part of the credentials that are used to authenticate the device with the
SMTP server. This setting may be required by the SMTP server.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Password: " Password " where
Password :
String (0, 64)
A valid password.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 178 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP From
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
When sending an email message from this device, this is the name of the mailbox that the message is sent from.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP From: " From " where
From :
String (0, 255)
An email address that meets the requirements of the SMTP server.
Default value:
""
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Security
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose if and how to secure the communication between the device and the SMTP server.
This setting is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with
Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SMTP Security: Security where
Security :
None/StartTls/Tls
None: Connect to the SMTP server without encryption.
StartTls: Initially connect to the SMTP server without encryption, and then send a
STARTTLS command to upgrade to an encrypted connection (TLS).
Tls: Connect to the SMTP server over TLS (Transport Layer Security).
Default value:
StartTls
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 179 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used by network management systems to monitor and manage devices such as routers, servers, and switches, that are connected to the
IP network. SNMP exposes management data in the form of variables on the managed devices, which describe the device status and configuration. These variables can then be remotely queried, and sometimes set, by managing applications.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/ReadOnly/ReadWrite
Off: Disable the SNMP network service.
ReadOnly: Enable the SNMP network service for queries only.
ReadWrite: Enable the SNMP network service for both queries and commands.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the name of the SNMP community. The SNMP community name is used to authenticate
SNMP requests. If an SNMP request from a management system does not include a matching community name (case sensitive), the message is dropped and the SNMP agent in the video device will not send a response.
If you have the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite (TMS) you must make sure the same
SNMP community is configured there.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName: " CommunityName " where
CommunityName :
String (0, 50)
The SNMP community name.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define contact information that SNMP servers can use.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact: " SystemContact " where
SystemContact :
String (0, 50)
String that describes the contact information for the video device.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 180 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define location information that SNMP servers can use.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation: " SystemLocation " where
SystemLocation :
String (0, 50)
String that describes the location of the video device.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration NetworkServices SSH Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The SSH (or Secure Shell) protocol can provide secure encrypted communication between the video conferencing device and your local computer.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SSH Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The SSH protocol is disabled.
On: The SSH protocol is enabled.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose the cryptographic algorithm that shall be used for the SSH host key. Choices are
RSA (Rivest–Shamir–Adleman) with 2048 bits keysize, ECDSA (Elliptic Curve Digital Signature
Algorithm) with NIST curve P-384, and EdDSA (Edwards-curve Digital Signature Algorithm) with ed25519 signature schema.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm: HostKeyAlgorithm where
HostKeyAlgorithm :
ECDSA/RSA/ed25519
ECDSA: Use the ECDSA algorithm (nist-384p).
RSA: Use the RSA algorithm (2048 bits).
ed25519: Use the ed25519 algorithm.
Default value:
RSA xConfiguration NetworkServices Telnet Mode
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Telnet is a network protocol used on the Internet or Local Area Network (LAN) connections.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices Telnet Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The Telnet protocol is disabled. This is the factory setting.
On: The Telnet protocol is enabled.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 181 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration NetworkServices UPnP Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Fully disable UPnP (Universal Plug and Play), or enable UPnP for a short time period after the video conferencing device has been switched on or restarted.
The default operation is that UPnP is enabled when you switch on or restart the video conferencing device. Then UPnP is automatically disabled after the timeout period that is defined in the NetworkServices UPnP Timeout setting.
When UPnP is enabled, the device advertises its presence on the network. The advertisement permits a Touch controller to discover video conferencing devices automatically, and you do not need to manually enter the device's IP address in order to pair the Touch controller.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices UPnP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: UPnP is disabled. The video conferencing device does not advertise its presence, and you have to enter the device's IP address manually in order to pair a Touch controller to the device.
On: UPnP is enabled. The video conferencing device advertises its presence until the timeout period expires.
Default value:
On xConfiguration NetworkServices Websocket
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
It is possible to interact with the API of the device over the WebSocket protocol, both the insecure and secure versions (ws and wss). A WebSocket is tied to HTTP, so that also HTTP or HTTPS must be enabled before you can use WebSockets (see the NetworkServices HTTP
Mode setting).
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices Websocket: Websocket where
Websocket :
FollowHTTPService/Off
FollowHTTPService: Communication over the WebSocket protocol is allowed when HTTP or HTTPS is enabled.
Off: Communication over the WebSocket protocol is not allowed.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 182 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration NetworkServices WelcomeText
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose which information the user should see when logging on to the device through SSH or
Telnet.
Telnet is only supported by SX Series, MX Series and DX70/DX80.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices WelcomeText: WelcomeText where
WelcomeText :
Off/On
Off: The welcome text is: Login successful
On: The welcome text is: Welcome to <system name>; Software version; Software release date; Login successful.
Default value:
On
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration NetworkServices Wifi Allowed
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Devices that have a built-in Wi-Fi adapter, can connect to the network either via Ethernet or
Wi-Fi. Both Ethernet and Wi-Fi are allowed by default, and the user can choose which one to use from the user interface. With this setting, the administrator can disable Wi-Fi configuration, so that it cannot be set up from the user interface.
The devices support the following standards: IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE
802.11n, and IEEE 802.11ac (IEEE 802.11ac is not supported on DX70 and DX80). The device supports the following security protocols: WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), EAP-TLS,
EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-MSCHAPv2, EAP-GTC, and open networks (not secured).
If the PID (Product ID), found on the rating label at the rear of the device, contains the letters NR
(No Radio) the device does not support Wi-Fi.
USAGE: xConfiguration NetworkServices Wifi Allowed: Allowed where
Allowed :
False/True
False: Wi-Fi cannot be used. You must connect to the network via Ethernet.
True: Both Ethernet and Wi-Fi are allowed.
Default value:
True
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 183 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Peripherals configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Peripherals InputDevice Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define whether or not to allow the use of a third-party input device, such as a USB keyboard or a wireless remote control with a USB dongle. The input device must advertise itself as a USB keyboard. You must define and implement the actions to be taken as response to key clicks yourself.
USAGE: xConfiguration Peripherals InputDevice Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: A third-party USB input device is not allowed.
On: A third-party USB input device can be used to control certain functions on the video conferencing device.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
In order to use Cisco Touch 10 (touch controller) as user interface for the video conferencing device, Touch 10 must be paired to the device. When Touch 10 is paired via the network (LAN), this is referred to as remote pairing. Remote pairing is allowed by default; you must switch this setting Off if you want to prevent remote pairing.
USAGE: xConfiguration Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing: RemotePairing where
RemotePairing :
Off/On
Off: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is not allowed.
On: Remote pairing of Touch 10 is allowed.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 184 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Peripherals Profile Cameras
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the video conferencing device. This information is used by the device's diagnostics service. If the number of connected cameras does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency.
USAGE: xConfiguration Peripherals Profile Cameras: Cameras where
Cameras :
NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7 [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
0 [ DeskPro ]
NotSet: No camera check is performed.
Minimum1: At least one camera should be connected to the device.
0-7: Select the number of cameras that are expected to be connected to the device.
Default value:
Minimum1 [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
0 [ DeskPro ] xConfiguration Peripherals Profile ControlSystems
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define if a third-party control system, for example Crestron or AMX, is expected to be connected to the video conferencing device. This information is used by the video conferencing device's diagnostics service. If the number of connected control systems does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency. Note that only one third-party control system is supported.
If set to 1, the control system must send heart beats to the video conferencing device using xCommand Peripherals Pair and HeartBeat commands. Failing to do so will cause the video conferenceing device to show a warning that it has lost connectivity to the control system.
USAGE: xConfiguration Peripherals Profile ControlSystems: ControlSystems where
ControlSystems :
1/NotSet [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
NotSet [ DeskPro Boards ]
1: One third-party control system should be connected to the device.
NotSet: No check for a third-party control system is performed.
Default value:
NotSet
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 185 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Peripherals Profile TouchPanels
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the number of Cisco Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the device.
This information is used by the device's diagnostics service. If the number of connected Touch controllers does not match this setting, the diagnostics service will report it as an inconsistency.
USAGE: xConfiguration Peripherals Profile TouchPanels: TouchPanels where
TouchPanels :
NotSet/Minimum1/0/1/2/3/4/5 [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit
RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
0 [ DeskPro ]
NotSet: No touch panel check is performed.
Minimum1: At least one Cisco Touch controller should be connected to the device.
0-5: Select the number of Touch controllers that are expected to be connected to the device. Note that only one Cisco Touch controller is officially supported.
Default value:
NotSet [ SX10 SX20 ]
Minimum1 [ SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
0 [ DeskPro ]
Phonebook configuration
xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] ID
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define a name for the external phone book.
USAGE: xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] ID: " ID " where n : Unique ID that identifies the phonebook server.
ID :
Range: 1..1
String (0, 64)
The name for the external phone book.
Default value:
""
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 186 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] Pagination
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Configure if the phonebook server supports pagination (paging) or not. Pagination means that the server supports consecutive searches, and these searches can be relative to an offset.
This allows the user interface to perform as many consecutive searches as required to get the complete search result.
If Pagination is Disabled the device does a single search and returns a maximum of 100 entries in the search result. It is not possible to scroll to any further search results beyond that.
USAGE: xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] Pagination: Pagination where n : Unique ID that identifies the phonebook server.
Range: 1..1
Pagination :
Disabled/Enabled
Disabled: The phonebook server does not support pagination. The device does a single search, and the maximum number of entries in the search result is 100.
Enabled: The phonebook server supports pagination.
Default value:
Enabled xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] TlsVerify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to an external phone book server via HTTPS.
Before establishing a connection between the device and the HTTPS server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.
In general, the minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the HTTPS connection is 1.1.
There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) For compatibility reasons, the minimum TLS version is
1.0 for devices that are registered to CUCM. 2) Devices registered to the Webex cloud service always use version 1.2.
Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from
CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the old NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting was not explicitly set to On.
USAGE: xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] TlsVerify: TlsVerify where
TlsVerify :
Off/On
Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the HTTPS server.
On: The device checks if the certificate of the HTTPS server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 187 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Select the phonebook server type.
USAGE: xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] Type: Type where n : Unique ID that identifies the phonebook server.
Range: 1..1
Type :
Off/CUCM/Spark/TMS/VCS
Off: Do not use a phonebook.
CUCM: The phonebook is located on the Cisco Unified Communications Manager.
Spark: The phonebook is located in the Cisco Webex cloud service.
TMS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Management Suite server.
VCS: The phonebook is located on the Cisco TelePresence Video Communication Server.
Default value:
Off xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] URL
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the address (URL) to the external phone book server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Phonebook Server [n] URL: " URL " where n : Unique ID that identifies the phonebook server.
Range: 1..1
URL :
String (0..255)
A valid address (URL) to the phone book server.
Default value:
""
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 188 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Provisioning configuration
xConfiguration Provisioning Connectivity
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting controls how the device discovers whether it should request an internal or external configuration from the provisioning server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning Connectivity: Connectivity where
Connectivity :
Internal/External/Auto
Internal: Request internal configuration.
External: Request external configuration.
Auto: Automatically discover using NAPTR queries whether internal or external configurations should be requested. If the NAPTR responses have the "e" flag, external configurations will be requested. Otherwise internal configurations will be requested.
Default value:
Auto xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the IP Address or DNS name of the external manager / provisioning system.
If an External Manager Address (and Path) is configured, the device will send a message to this address when starting up. When receiving this message the external manager / provisioning system can return configurations/commands to the unit as a result.
When using CUCM or TMS provisioning, the DHCP server can be set up to provide the external manager address automatically (DHCP Option 242 for TMS, and DHCP Option 150 for CUCM).
An address set in the Provisioning ExternalManager Address setting will override the address provided by DHCP.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Address: " Address " where
Address :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 189 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Only applicable when the device is provisioned by Cisco Unified Communication Manager
(CUCM) and an alternate CUCM is available for redundancy. Define the address of the alternate
CUCM. If the main CUCM is not available, the device will be provisioned by the alternate CUCM.
When the main CUCM is available again, the device will be provisioned by this CUCM.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress: " AlternateAddress " where
AlternateAddress :
String (0, 64)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Path
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the Path to the external manager / provisioning system. This setting is required when several management services reside on the same server, i.e. share the same External Manager address.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Path: " Path " where
Path :
String (0..255)
A valid path to the external manager or provisioning system.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define whether to use the HTTP (unsecure communication) or HTTPS (secure communication) protocol when sending requests to the external manager / provisioning system.
The selected protocol must be enabled in the NetworkServices HTTP Mode setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol: Protocol where
Protocol :
HTTPS/HTTP
HTTPS: Send requests via HTTPS.
HTTP: Send requests via HTTP.
Default value:
HTTP xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Domain
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the SIP domain for the VCS provisioning server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning ExternalManager Domain: " Domain " where
Domain :
String (0, 64)
A valid domain name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 190 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Provisioning Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
It is possible to configure a device using a provisioning system (external manager). This allows video conferencing network administrators to manage many devices simultaneously. With this setting you choose which type of provisioning system to use. Provisioning can also be switched off. Contact your provisioning system provider/representative for more information.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/Auto/CUCM/Edge/Webex/TMS/VCS
Off: The device is not configured by a provisioning system.
Auto: The provisioning server is automatically selected as set up in the DHCP server.
CUCM: Push configurations to the device from CUCM (Cisco Unified Communications
Manager).
Edge: Push configurations to the device from CUCM (Cisco Unified Communications
Manager). The device connects to CUCM via the Expressway infrastructure. In order to register over Expressway the encryption option key must be installed on the device.
Webex: Push configurations to the device from the Cisco Webex cloud service. In order to register to the Webex cloud service, the encryption option key must be installed on the device.
TMS: Push configurations to the device from TMS (Cisco TelePresence Management
System).
VCS: Push configurations to the device from VCS (Cisco TelePresence Video
Communication Server).
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration Provisioning LoginName
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate the device with the provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning LoginName: " LoginName " where
LoginName :
String (0, 80)
A valid username.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration Provisioning Password
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate the device with the provisioning server. This setting must be used when required by the provisioning server.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning Password: " Password " where
Password :
String (0, 64)
A valid password.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 191 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Provisioning TlsVerify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This setting applies when a video conferencing device connects to a provisioning server via
HTTPS.
Before establishing a connection between the device and the HTTPS server, the device checks if the certificate of the server is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA certificate must be included in the CA list on the device, either pre-installed or manually uploaded using the web interface or API.
In general, the minimum TLS (Transport Layer Security) version for the HTTPS connection is 1.1.
There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) For compatibility reasons, the minimum TLS version is
1.0 for devices that are registered to CUCM. 2) Devices registered to the Webex cloud service always use version 1.2.
Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from
CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the old NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate setting was not explicitly set to On.
The certificate check is always performed, regardless of this setting, if the device is provisioned from the Cisco Webex cloud service or from CUCM via Expressway (also known as MRA or
Edge).
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning TlsVerify: TlsVerify where
TlsVerify :
Off/On
Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the HTTPS server.
On: The device checks if the certificate of the HTTPS server can be trusted. If not, the connection between the device and the server is not established.
Default value:
On xConfiguration Provisioning WebexEdge
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define if the device is linked to Webex Edge for Devices, which gives access to select Webex cloud services.
The setting applies only to devices that are registered to an on-premises service.
USAGE: xConfiguration Provisioning WebexEdge: WebexEdge where
WebexEdge :
Off/On
Off: The device is not linked to Webex Edge for Devices.
On: The device is linked to Webex Edge for Devices.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 192 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Proximity configuration
xConfiguration Proximity Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The Proximity Mode setting has no effect for devices that are registered to the Webex cloud service. To prevent a cloud registered device from sending ultrasound pairing messages, you must set Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume to 0.
For devices registered on-premises, the Proximity Mode setting determines whether the device will emit ultrasound pairing messages or not. When the device emits ultrasound pairing messages, Cisco collaboration clients can detect that they are close to the device.
In order to use a client, at least one of the Proximity services must be enabled (refer to the
Proximity Services settings) as well. In general, Cisco recommends enabling all the Proximity services.
The Proximity Mode and Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume settings only affect ultrasound pairing messages. To stop all ultrasound emissions, the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector and
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection settings must also be switched Off.
USAGE: xConfiguration Proximity Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Cisco collaboration clients cannot detect that they are close to the device, thus
Proximity services cannot be used.
On: Cisco collaboration clients can detect that they are close to the device, and enabled
Proximity services can be used.
Default value:
On [ MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 Boards ]
Off [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro DeskPro ] xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Proximity Services CallControl
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Enable or disable basic call control features on Cisco collaboration clients. When this setting is enabled, you are able to control a call using a Cisco collaboration client (for example dial, mute, adjust volume and hang up). This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and Android).
Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Proximity Services CallControl: CallControl where
CallControl :
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled: Call control from a Cisco collaboration client is enabled.
Disabled: Call control from a Cisco collaboration client is disabled.
Default value:
Disabled xConfiguration Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Enable or disable content sharing from Cisco collaboration clients. When this setting is enabled, you can share content from a Cisco collaboration client wirelessly on the device, e.g. share your laptop screen. This service is supported by laptops (OS X and Windows). Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients: FromClients where
FromClients :
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled: Content sharing from a Cisco collaboration client is enabled.
Disabled: Content sharing from a Cisco collaboration client is disabled.
Default value:
Enabled
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 193 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Enable or disable content sharing to Cisco collaboration clients. When enabled, Cisco collaboration clients will receive the presentation from the device. You can zoom in on details, view previous content and take snapshots. This service is supported by mobile devices (iOS and
Android). Proximity Mode must be On for this setting to take any effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients: ToClients where
ToClients :
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled: Content sharing to a Cisco collaboration client is enabled.
Disabled: Content sharing to a Cisco collaboration client is disabled.
Default value:
Disabled xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
RoomAnalytics configuration
xConfiguration RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The device can estimate the stationary ambient noise level (background noise level) in the room. The result is reported in the RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level dBA status. The status is updated when a new ambient noise level is detected.
USAGE: xConfiguration RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
On: The device regularly estimates the stationary ambient noise level.
Off: The device doesn't estimate the stationary ambient noise level.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 194 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall
Applies to:
SX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
By using face detection, the device has the capability to find how many persons are in the room. By default, the device only counts people when in a call, or when displaying the self-view picture.
Codec Plus, Codec Pro, SX80: Applies only when the device has a Cisco Quad Camera connected. MX700/MX800: Not applicable.
USAGE: xConfiguration RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall: PeopleCountOutOfCall where
PeopleCountOutOfCall :
Off/On [ SX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards ]
Off: The device counts people only when the device is in a call, or when self-view is on.
On: The device counts people as long as the device is not in standby mode. This includes outside of call, even if self-view is off.
Default value:
Off [ SX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards ] xConfiguration RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The device has the capability to find whether or not people are present in the room, and report the result in the RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence status. The feature is based on ultrasound.
Read the status description for more details.
Ultrasound signals for presence detection are not emitted when both this setting AND the Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection setting are switched Off. The Audio Ultrasound
MaxVolume and Proximity Mode settings has no effect on presence detection.
USAGE: xConfiguration RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector: PeoplePresenceDetector where
PeoplePresenceDetector :
Off/On
Off: Information about the presence of people is not reported in the device's status.
On: Information about the presence of people is reported in the device's status.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 195 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Security configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Security Audit Logging Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: AUDIT
Define where to record or transmit the audit logs. The audit logs are sent to a syslog server.
This setting has no effect if the Logging Mode setting is set to Off.
When using the External or ExternalSecure mode you must enter the address of the audit server in the Security Audit Server Address setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Audit Logging Mode: Mode where
Mode :
External/ExternalSecure/Internal/Off
External: The device sends the audit logs to an external syslog server. The syslog server must support UDP.
ExternalSecure: The device sends encrypted audit logs to an external syslog server that is verified by a certificate in the Audit CA list. The Audit CA list file must be uploaded to the device using the web interface. The common_name parameter of a certificate in the
CA list must match the IP address or DNS name of the syslog server, and the secure TCP server must be set up to listen for secure (TLS) TCP Syslog messages.
Internal: The device records the audit logs to internal logs, and rotates logs when they are full.
Off: No audit logging is performed.
Default value:
Internal xConfiguration Security Audit OnError Action
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: AUDIT
Define what happens when the connection to the syslog server is lost. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to ExternalSecure.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Audit OnError Action: Action where
Action :
Halt/Ignore
Halt: If a halt condition is detected the device is rebooted and only the auditor is allowed to operate the unit until the halt condition has passed. When the halt condition has passed the audit logs are re-spooled to the syslog server. Halt conditions are: A network breach
(no physical link), no syslog server running (or incorrect address or port to the syslog server), TLS authentication failed (if in use), local backup (re-spooling) log full.
Ignore: The device will continue its normal operation, and rotate internal logs when full.
When the connection is restored it will again send its audit logs to the syslog server.
Default value:
Ignore xConfiguration Security Audit Server Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: AUDIT
Set the IP address or DNS name of the syslog server that the audit logs are sent to. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to External or ExternalSecure.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Audit Server Address: " Address " where
Address :
String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or DNS name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 196 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Security Audit Server Port
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: AUDIT
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. Define the port of the syslog server that the device shall send its audit logs to. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Server
PortAssignment is set to Manual.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Audit Server Port: Port where
Port :
Integer (0..65535)
Set the audit server port.
Default value:
514
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Security Audit Server PortAssignment
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: AUDIT
The audit logs are sent to a syslog server. You can define how the port number of the external syslog server will be assigned. This setting is only relevant when Security Audit Logging Mode is set to External or ExternalSecure. To see which port number is used you can check the
Security Audit Server Port status. Navigate to Setup > Status on the web interface or; if on a command line interface, run the command xStatus Security Audit Server Port.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Audit Server PortAssignment: PortAssignment where
PortAssignment :
Auto/Manual
Auto: Will use UDP port number 514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
External. Will use TCP port number 6514 when the Security Audit Logging Mode is set to
ExternalSecure.
Manual: Will use the port value defined in the Security Audit Server Port setting.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 197 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Security Fips Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
If required, you can set the device in FIPS mode (Federal Information Processing Standard
(FIPS) Publication 140-3, Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules). While in FIPS mode the remote support user is not available, and Digest access authentication is not supported between the device and an HTTP Proxy, because Digest access authentication is using MD5 cryptographic hashing, which is not allowed in FIPS. This last limitation only affects
Webex registered devices, since an HTTP Proxy is used only for the Webex solution.
You should allow only HTTPS, and do not switch on Telnet, SNMP, or IEEE8021X in FIPS mode
(keep the default values).
For changes to this setting to take full effect, you must restart the device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Fips Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The device is not in FIPS mode.
On: The device is in FIPS mode.
Default value:
Off xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define how long the device will lock out a user after failed login to a web or SSH session.
Restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime: FailedLoginsLockoutTime where
FailedLoginsLockoutTime :
Integer (0..10000)
Set the lockout time (minutes).
Default value:
60 xConfiguration Security Session InactivityTimeout
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define how long the device will accept inactivity from the user before he is automatically logged out from a web, SSH or Telnet session. Restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.
Telnet is only supported by SX Series, MX Series and DX70/DX80.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Session InactivityTimeout: InactivityTimeout where
InactivityTimeout :
Integer (0..10000)
Set the inactivity timeout (minutes); or select 0 when inactivity should not enforce automatic logout.
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 198 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Security Session MaxFailedLogins
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the maximum number of failed login attempts per user for a web or SSH session. If the user exceeded the maximum number of attempts the user will be locked out. 0 means that there is no limit for failed logins.
Restart the device for any change to this setting to take effect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Session MaxFailedLogins: MaxFailedLogins where
MaxFailedLogins :
Integer (0..10)
Set the maximum number of failed login attempts per user.
Default value:
0 xConfiguration Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user is 20 sessions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser: MaxSessionsPerUser where
MaxSessionsPerUser :
Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions per user.
Default value:
20 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Security Session MaxTotalSessions
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total is 20 sessions.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Session MaxTotalSessions: MaxTotalSessions where
MaxTotalSessions :
Integer (1..20)
Set the maximum number of simultaneous sessions in total.
Default value:
20 xConfiguration Security Session ShowLastLogon
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When logging in to the device using SSH or Telnet you will see the UserId, time and date of the last session that did a successful login.
Telnet is only supported by SX Series, MX Series and DX70/DX80.
USAGE: xConfiguration Security Session ShowLastLogon: ShowLastLogon where
ShowLastLogon :
Off/On
On: Show information about the last session.
Off: Do not show information about the last session.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 199 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
SerialPort configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration SerialPort Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Enable/disable the serial port. If the device has more than one serial port, this setting applies to all of them.
This setting is not available for the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and Webex
Board 70).
USAGE: xConfiguration SerialPort Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Serial communication is disabled.
On: Serial communication is enabled.
Default value:
On xConfiguration SerialPort BaudRate
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55
Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the baud rate (data transmission rate) for the serial port. A new baud rate takes effect after a device reboot.
Other connection parameters for the serial port are: Data bits: 8; Parity: None; Stop bits: 1; Flow control: None.
This setting does not have any effect on a dedicated maintenance port (micro USB). The maintenance port always uses the default baud rate.
This setting is not available for the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and Webex
Board 70).
USAGE: xConfiguration SerialPort BaudRate: BaudRate where
BaudRate :
115200 [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro Boards ]
9600/19200/38400/57600/115200 [ SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Choose a baud rate from the list (bits per second).
Default value:
115200 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
38400 [ SX20 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 200 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration SerialPort LoginRequired
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define if login shall be required when connecting to a serial port. If the device has more than one serial port, this setting applies to all of them.
This setting is not available for the first generation of boards (Webex Board 55 and Webex
Board 70).
USAGE: xConfiguration SerialPort LoginRequired: LoginRequired where
LoginRequired :
Off/On
Off: The user can access the device via the serial port without any login.
On: Login is required when connecting to the device via the serial port.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
SIP configuration
xConfiguration SIP ANAT
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
ANAT (Alternative Network Address Types) enables media negotiation for multiple addresses and address types, as specified in RFC 4091.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP ANAT: ANAT where
ANAT :
Off/On
Off: Disable ANAT.
On: Enable ANAT.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration SIP Authentication UserName
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This is the username part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Authentication UserName: " UserName " where
UserName :
String (0, 128)
A valid username.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 201 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration SIP Authentication Password
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This is the password part of the credentials used to authenticate towards the SIP proxy.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Authentication Password: " Password " where
Password :
String (0, 128)
A valid password.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration SIP DefaultTransport
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Select the transport protocol to be used over the LAN.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP DefaultTransport: DefaultTransport where
DefaultTransport :
Auto/TCP/Tls/UDP
TCP: The device will always use TCP as the default transport method.
UDP: The device will always use UDP as the default transport method.
Tls: The device will always use TLS as the default transport method. For TLS connections a SIP CA-list can be uploaded to the device. If no such CA-list is available on the device then anonymous Diffie Hellman will be used.
Auto: The device will try to connect using transport protocols in the following order: TLS,
TCP, UDP.
Default value:
Auto xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration SIP DisplayName
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When configured the incoming call will report the display name instead of the SIP URI.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP DisplayName: " DisplayName " where
DisplayName :
String (0, 550)
The name to be displayed instead of the SIP URI.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration SIP Ice DefaultCandidate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The ICE protocol needs some time to reach a conclusion about which media route to use (up to the first 5 seconds of a call). During this period media for the device will be sent to the Default
Candidate as defined in this setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Ice DefaultCandidate: DefaultCandidate where
DefaultCandidate :
Host/Rflx/Relay
Host: Send media to the device's private IP address.
Rflx: Send media to the device's public IP address, as seen by the TURN server.
Relay: Send media to the IP address and port allocated on the TURN server.
Default value:
Host
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 202 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration SIP Ice Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment, RFC 5245) is a NAT traversal solution that the devices can use to discover the optimized media path. Thus the shortest route for audio and video is always secured between the devices. Initially STUN (Session Traversal Utilities for NAT) messages are exchanged when setting up the media path.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Ice Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Auto/Off/On
Auto: ICE is enabled if a TURN server is provided, otherwise ICE is disabled.
Off: ICE is disabled.
On: ICE is enabled.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration SIP ListenPort
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Turn on or off the listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports. If turned off, the device will only be reachable through a SIP Proxy (CUCM or VCS). As a security measure,
SIP ListenPort should be Off when the device is registered to a SIP Proxy.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP ListenPort: ListenPort where
ListenPort :
Auto/Off/On
Auto: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is automatically turned off if the device is registered to a SIP Proxy; otherwise it is turned on.
Off: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned off.
On: Listening for incoming connections on the SIP TCP/UDP ports is turned on.
Default value:
On [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Auto [ DeskPro Boards ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 203 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration SIP MinimumTLSVersion
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP MinimumTLSVersion: MinimumTLSVersion where
MinimumTLSVersion :
TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
Default value:
TLSv1.0
xConfiguration SIP Proxy [n] Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The Proxy Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy. It is possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP and UDP but another one can be provided.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Proxy [n] Address: " Address " where n : Index that identifies the proxy (maximum 4 proxys can be defined).
Range: 1..4
Address :
String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or DNS name.
Default value:
"" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration SIP TlsVerify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Before establishing a connection over SIP TLS, the device checks if the certificate of the peer is signed by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be included in the CA list that is manually uploaded to the device using the web interface or API. The list of pre-installed certificates is not used to validate certificates for SIP TLS connections.
Note: The value is set to Off for a device that has been upgraded to CE9.9 (or later) from CE9.8 or earlier software versions, provided that the device has not been factory reset after the upgrade, and that the setting was not explicitly set to On.
Use the SIP MinimumTLSVersion setting to specify which TLS versions are allowed.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP TlsVerify: TlsVerify where
TlsVerify :
Off/On
Off: The device doesn't check the certificate of the peer. The SIP TLS connection is established anyway.
On: The device checks if the certificate of the peer can be trusted. If not, the SIP TLS connection is not established.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 204 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration SIP Turn Server
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the address of the TURN (Traversal Using Relay NAT) server. It is used as a media relay fallback and it is also used to discover the device's own public IP address.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Turn Server: " Server " where
Server :
String (0..255)
The preferred format is DNS SRV record (e.g. _turn._udp.<domain>), or it can be a valid
IPv4 or IPv6 address.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration SIP Turn UserName
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the username needed for accessing the TURN server.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Turn UserName: " UserName " where
UserName :
String (0, 128)
A valid username.
Default value:
"" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration SIP Turn Password
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the password needed for accessing the TURN server.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP Turn Password: " Password " where
Password :
String (0, 128)
A valid password.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration SIP URI
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The SIP URI (Uniform Resource Identifier) is the address that is used to identify the device. The
URI is registered and used by the SIP services to route inbound calls to the device. The SIP URI syntax is defined in RFC 3261.
USAGE: xConfiguration SIP URI: " URI " where
URI :
String (0..255)
An address (URI) that is compliant with the SIP URI syntax.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 205 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Standby configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Standby BootAction
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the camera position after a restart of the video conferencing device.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby BootAction: BootAction where
BootAction :
None/DefaultCameraPosition/RestoreCameraPosition
None: No action.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video conferencing device restarts, the camera returns to the position that it had before the restart.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video conferencing device restarts, the camera moves to the factory default position.
Default value:
DefaultCameraPosition [ SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
RestoreCameraPosition [ SX10 SX20 ] xConfiguration Standby Control
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether the device should go into standby mode or not.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Control: Control where
Control :
Off/On
Off: The device will not enter standby mode.
On: The device will enter standby mode when the Standby Delay has timed out.
Default value:
On xConfiguration Standby Delay
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define how long (in minutes) the device shall be in idle mode before it goes into standby mode.
Requires the Standby Control to be enabled.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Delay: Delay where
Delay :
Integer (1..480)
Set the standby delay (minutes).
Default value:
10 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
4 [ Boards ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 206 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Standby Signage Audio
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
By default, a device does not play out audio in digital signage mode even if the web page has audio. You can use this setting to override the default behavior.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Signage Audio: Audio where
Audio :
Off/On
Off: The device does not play out audio with the web page.
On: If the web page has audio, the device plays it out. The volume follows the volume setting of the device.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration Standby Signage InteractionMode
Applies to: RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
By default, a user cannot interact with a digital signage web page. You can use this setting to enable the ability to interact with the web page.
The Interactive mode is not available for Room Kit Mini in general, only when Room Kit Mini is used with Samsung Flip (Webex on Flip).
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Signage InteractionMode: InteractionMode where
InteractionMode :
Interactive/NonInteractive
Interactive: It's possible to interact with the web page.
NonInteractive: It's not possible to interact with the web page.
Default value:
NonInteractive
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 207
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Standby Signage Mode
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Content from a URL (a web page) can replace the traditional half-wake background image and information. This feature is called digital signage. Users can interact with the web page on devices with interactive screens (Webex Boards), for example click on a link or enter text in a form.
The use of digital signage does not prevent the device from entering standby the normal way.
Therefore, the Standby Delay setting determines for how long the digital signage is shown before the device goes into standby.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Signage Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Digital signage is not enabled on the device.
On: Digital signage is enabled and replaces the device's half-wake mode, provided that also the WebEngine Mode setting is On.
Default value:
Off
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Standby Signage RefreshInterval
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
You can use this setting to force a web page to refresh at regular intervals. This is useful for web pages that are not able to refresh themselves. It is not recommended to set a refresh interval with the interactive mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Signage RefreshInterval: RefreshInterval where
RefreshInterval :
Integer (0..1440)
The number of seconds between each web page refresh. The value of 0 means that the web page is never forced to refresh.
Default value:
0 xConfiguration Standby Signage Url
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Set the URL of the web page you want to display on the screen (digital signage). If the length of the URL is 0, the device retains normal half-wake mode. If the URL fails, the device retains normal half-wake mode and a diagnostics message is issued.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby Signage Url: " Url " where
Url :
String (0, 2000)
The URL of the web page.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 208 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Standby StandbyAction
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the camera position when going into standby mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby StandbyAction: StandbyAction where
StandbyAction :
None/PrivacyPosition
None: No action.
PrivacyPosition: When the video conferencing device enters standby, the camera turns to a sideways position for privacy.
Default value:
PrivacyPosition xConfiguration Standby WakeupAction
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the camera position when leaving standby mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby WakeupAction: WakeupAction where
WakeupAction :
None/RestoreCameraPosition/DefaultCameraPosition
None: No action.
RestoreCameraPosition: When the video conferencing device leaves standby, the camera returns to the position that it had before entering standby.
DefaultCameraPosition: When the video conferencing device leaves standby, the camera moves to the factory default position.
Default value:
RestoreCameraPosition
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Automatic wake up on motion detection is a feature that allows the device to detect when people enter the room. The feature is based on ultrasound detection.
Ultrasound signals for motion detection are not emitted when both this setting AND the
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector setting are switched Off. The Audio Ultrasound
MaxVolume and Proximity Mode settings has no effect on motion detection.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection: WakeupOnMotionDetection where
WakeupOnMotionDetection :
Off/On
Off: Wake up on motion detection is disabled.
On: When people walk into the room the device will automatically wake up from standby.
Not applicable for DX70 and SX10.
Default value:
On [ MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
Off [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 CodecPlus CodecPro ]
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Standby PowerSave
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
You can reduce the video conferencing device's power consumption during out-of-office hours with this setting. The Power Save mode is an extension to the regular standby mode.
When the device enters power save mode, power is cut to some of the device's modules, for example the integrated cameras. The video conferencing device and Touch controller behaves like in regular standby. The device wakes up from power save mode when you tap the touch panel.
Waking up the device from power save mode takes longer than waking it up from regular standby, because the cameras must boot. You can make calls right away, but there is no outgoing video until the cameras has completed their boot process.
USAGE: xConfiguration Standby PowerSave: PowerSave where
PowerSave :
Never/OutsideOfficeHours
Never: The device will never go into power save mode; only to regular standby.
OutsideOfficeHours: The device will go into power save mode during out-of-office hours. You must provide the office hours with the following settings: Time WorkWeek
FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time
WorkDay End.
Default value:
Never
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 209 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
SystemUnit configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration SystemUnit Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define the device name. The device name will be sent as the hostname in a DHCP request and when the device is acting as an SNMP Agent.
USAGE: xConfiguration SystemUnit Name: " Name " where
Name :
String (0, 50)
Define the device name.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
If the device crashes, the device can automatically send logs to the Cisco Automatic Crash
Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage only and not available to customers.
USAGE: xConfiguration SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: No logs will be sent to ACR tool.
On: The logs will automatically be sent to ACR tool.
Default value:
Off [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
On [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ] xConfiguration SystemUnit CrashReporting Url
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
If the device crashes, the device can automatically send logs to the Cisco Automatic Crash
Report tool (ACR) for analyses. The ACR tool is for Cisco internal usage only and not available to customers.
USAGE: xConfiguration SystemUnit CrashReporting Url: " Url " where
Url :
String (0..255)
The URL to the Cisco Automatic Crash Report tool (ACR).
Default value:
"" [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
"acr.cisco.com" [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 210 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Time configuration
xConfiguration Time TimeFormat
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the time format.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time TimeFormat: TimeFormat where
TimeFormat :
24H/12H
24H: Set the time format to 24 hours.
12H: Set the time format to 12 hours (AM/PM).
Default value:
24H xConfiguration Time DateFormat
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the date format.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time DateFormat: DateFormat where
DateFormat :
DD_MM_YY/MM_DD_YY/YY_MM_DD
DD_MM_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 30.01.10
MM_DD_YY: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 01.30.10
YY_MM_DD: The date January 30th 2010 will be displayed: 10.01.30
Default value:
DD_MM_YY
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
211 xConfiguration Time Zone
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the time zone for the geographical location of the device. The information in the value space is from the tz database, also called the IANA Time Zone Database.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time Zone: Zone where
Zone :
Africa/Abidjan, Africa/Accra, Africa/Addis_Ababa, Africa/Algiers, Africa/Asmara, Africa/
Asmera, Africa/Bamako, Africa/Bangui, Africa/Banjul, Africa/Bissau, Africa/Blantyre, Africa/
Brazzaville, Africa/Bujumbura, Africa/Cairo, Africa/Casablanca, Africa/Ceuta, Africa/
Conakry, Africa/Dakar, Africa/Dar_es_Salaam, Africa/Djibouti, Africa/Douala, Africa/
El_Aaiun, Africa/Freetown, Africa/Gaborone, Africa/Harare, Africa/Johannesburg, Africa/
Juba, Africa/Kampala, Africa/Khartoum, Africa/Kigali, Africa/Kinshasa, Africa/Lagos, Africa/
Libreville, Africa/Lome, Africa/Luanda, Africa/Lubumbashi, Africa/Lusaka, Africa/Malabo,
Africa/Maputo, Africa/Maseru, Africa/Mbabane, Africa/Mogadishu, Africa/Monrovia, Africa/
Nairobi, Africa/Ndjamena, Africa/Niamey, Africa/Nouakchott, Africa/Ouagadougou, Africa/
Porto-Novo, Africa/Sao_Tome, Africa/Timbuktu, Africa/Tripoli, Africa/Tunis, Africa/
Windhoek, America/Adak, America/Anchorage, America/Anguilla, America/Antigua,
America/Araguaina, America/Argentina/Buenos_Aires, America/Argentina/Catamarca,
America/Argentina/ComodRivadavia, America/Argentina/Cordoba, America/Argentina/
Jujuy, America/Argentina/La_Rioja, America/Argentina/Mendoza, America/Argentina/
Rio_Gallegos, America/Argentina/Salta, America/Argentina/San_Juan, America/Argentina/
San_Luis, America/Argentina/Tucuman, America/Argentina/Ushuaia, America/Aruba,
America/Asuncion, America/Atikokan, America/Atka, America/Bahia, America/Bahia_
Banderas, America/Barbados, America/Belem, America/Belize, America/Blanc-Sablon,
America/Boa_Vista, America/Bogota, America/Boise, America/Buenos_Aires, America/
Cambridge_Bay, America/Campo_Grande, America/Cancun, America/Caracas, America/
Catamarca, America/Cayenne, America/Cayman, America/Chicago, America/Chihuahua,
America/Coral_Harbour, America/Cordoba, America/Costa_Rica, America/Creston,
America/Cuiaba, America/Curacao, America/Danmarkshavn, America/Dawson, America/
Dawson_Creek, America/Denver, America/Detroit, America/Dominica, America/Edmonton,
America/Eirunepe, America/El_Salvador, America/Ensenada, America/Fort_Nelson,
America/Fort_Wayne, America/Fortaleza, America/Glace_Bay, America/Godthab, America/
Goose_Bay, America/Grand_Turk, America/Grenada, America/Guadeloupe, America/
Guatemala, America/Guayaquil, America/Guyana, America/Halifax, America/Havana,
America/Hermosillo, America/Indiana/Indianapolis, America/Indiana/Knox, America/
Indiana/Marengo, America/Indiana/Petersburg, America/Indiana/Tell_City, America/
Indiana/Vevay, America/Indiana/Vincennes, America/Indiana/Winamac, America/
Indianapolis, America/Inuvik, America/Iqaluit, America/Jamaica, America/Jujuy, America/
Juneau, America/Kentucky/Louisville, America/Kentucky/Monticello, America/Knox_IN,
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
America/Kralendijk, America/La_Paz, America/Lima, America/Los_Angeles, America/
Louisville, America/Lower_Princes, America/Maceio, America/Managua, America/Manaus,
America/Marigot, America/Martinique, America/Matamoros, America/Mazatlan, America/
Mendoza, America/Menominee, America/Merida, America/Metlakatla, America/Mexico_
City, America/Miquelon, America/Moncton, America/Monterrey, America/Montevideo,
America/Montreal, America/Montserrat, America/Nassau, America/New_York, America/
Nipigon, America/Nome, America/Noronha, America/North_Dakota/Beulah, America/
North_Dakota/Center, America/North_Dakota/New_Salem, America/Ojinaga, America/
Panama, America/Pangnirtung, America/Paramaribo, America/Phoenix, America/Port-au-
Prince, America/Port_of_Spain, America/Porto_Acre, America/Porto_Velho, America/
Puerto_Rico, America/Rainy_River, America/Rankin_Inlet, America/Recife, America/Regina,
America/Resolute, America/Rio_Branco, America/Rosario, America/Santa_Isabel,
America/Santarem, America/Santiago, America/Santo_Domingo, America/Sao_Paulo,
America/Scoresbysund, America/Shiprock, America/Sitka, America/St_Barthelemy,
America/St_Johns, America/St_Kitts, America/St_Lucia, America/St_Thomas, America/
St_Vincent, America/Swift_Current, America/Tegucigalpa, America/Thule, America/
Thunder_Bay, America/Tijuana, America/Toronto, America/Tortola, America/Vancouver,
America/Virgin, America/Whitehorse, America/Winnipeg, America/Yakutat, America/
Yellowknife, Antarctica/Casey, Antarctica/Davis, Antarctica/DumontDUrville, Antarctica/
Macquarie, Antarctica/Mawson, Antarctica/McMurdo, Antarctica/Palmer, Antarctica/
Rothera, Antarctica/South_Pole, Antarctica/Syowa, Antarctica/Troll, Antarctica/Vostok,
Arctic/Longyearbyen, Asia/Aden, Asia/Almaty, Asia/Amman, Asia/Anadyr, Asia/Aqtau, Asia/
Aqtobe, Asia/Ashgabat, Asia/Ashkhabad, Asia/Baghdad, Asia/Bahrain, Asia/Baku, Asia/
Bangkok, Asia/Barnaul, Asia/Beirut, Asia/Bishkek, Asia/Brunei, Asia/Calcutta, Asia/Chita,
Asia/Choibalsan, Asia/Chongqing, Asia/Chungking, Asia/Colombo, Asia/Dacca, Asia/
Damascus, Asia/Dhaka, Asia/Dili, Asia/Dubai, Asia/Dushanbe, Asia/Gaza, Asia/Harbin, Asia/
Hebron, Asia/Ho_Chi_Minh, Asia/Hong_Kong, Asia/Hovd, Asia/Irkutsk, Asia/Istanbul, Asia/
Jakarta, Asia/Jayapura, Asia/Jerusalem, Asia/Kabul, Asia/Kamchatka, Asia/Karachi, Asia/
Kashgar, Asia/Kathmandu, Asia/Katmandu, Asia/Khandyga, Asia/Kolkata, Asia/Krasnoyarsk,
Asia/Kuala_Lumpur, Asia/Kuching, Asia/Kuwait, Asia/Macao, Asia/Macau, Asia/Magadan,
Asia/Makassar, Asia/Manila, Asia/Muscat, Asia/Nicosia, Asia/Novokuznetsk, Asia/
Novosibirsk, Asia/Omsk, Asia/Oral, Asia/Phnom_Penh, Asia/Pontianak, Asia/Pyongyang,
Asia/Qatar, Asia/Qyzylorda, Asia/Rangoon, Asia/Riyadh, Asia/Saigon, Asia/Sakhalin, Asia/
Samarkand, Asia/Seoul, Asia/Shanghai, Asia/Singapore, Asia/Srednekolymsk, Asia/Taipei,
Asia/Tashkent, Asia/Tbilisi, Asia/Tehran, Asia/Tel_Aviv, Asia/Thimbu, Asia/Thimphu, Asia/
Tokyo, Asia/Tomsk, Asia/Ujung_Pandang, Asia/Ulaanbaatar, Asia/Ulan_Bator, Asia/Urumqi,
Asia/Ust-Nera, Asia/Vientiane, Asia/Vladivostok, Asia/Yakutsk, Asia/Yekaterinburg, Asia/
Yerevan, Atlantic/Azores, Atlantic/Bermuda, Atlantic/Canary, Atlantic/Cape_Verde, Atlantic/
Faeroe, Atlantic/Faroe, Atlantic/Jan_Mayen, Atlantic/Madeira, Atlantic/Reykjavik, Atlantic/
South_Georgia, Atlantic/St_Helena, Atlantic/Stanley, Australia/ACT, Australia/Adelaide,
Australia/Brisbane, Australia/Broken_Hill, Australia/Canberra, Australia/Currie, Australia/
Darwin, Australia/Eucla, Australia/Hobart, Australia/LHI, Australia/Lindeman, Australia/
Lord_Howe, Australia/Melbourne, Australia/NSW, Australia/North, Australia/Perth,
Australia/Queensland, Australia/South, Australia/Sydney, Australia/Tasmania, Australia/
Victoria, Australia/West, Australia/Yancowinna, Brazil/Acre, Brazil/DeNoronha, Brazil/East,
Brazil/West, CET, CST6CDT, Canada/Atlantic, Canada/Central, Canada/East-Saskatchewan,
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 212 xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Canada/Eastern, Canada/Mountain, Canada/Newfoundland, Canada/Pacific, Canada/
Saskatchewan, Canada/Yukon, Chile/Continental, Chile/EasterIsland, Cuba, EET, EST,
EST5EDT, Egypt, Eire, Etc/GMT, Etc/GMT+0, Etc/GMT+1, Etc/GMT+10, Etc/GMT+11, Etc/
GMT+12, Etc/GMT+2, Etc/GMT+3, Etc/GMT+4, Etc/GMT+5, Etc/GMT+6, Etc/GMT+7, Etc/
GMT+8, Etc/GMT+9, Etc/GMT-0, Etc/GMT-1, Etc/GMT-10, Etc/GMT-11, Etc/GMT-12, Etc/
GMT-13, Etc/GMT-14, Etc/GMT-2, Etc/GMT-3, Etc/GMT-4, Etc/GMT-5, Etc/GMT-6, Etc/
GMT-7, Etc/GMT-8, Etc/GMT-9, Etc/GMT0, Etc/Greenwich, Etc/UCT, Etc/UTC, Etc/Universal,
Etc/Zulu, Europe/Amsterdam, Europe/Andorra, Europe/Astrakhan, Europe/Athens, Europe/
Belfast, Europe/Belgrade, Europe/Berlin, Europe/Bratislava, Europe/Brussels, Europe/
Bucharest, Europe/Budapest, Europe/Busingen, Europe/Chisinau, Europe/Copenhagen,
Europe/Dublin, Europe/Gibraltar, Europe/Guernsey, Europe/Helsinki, Europe/Isle_of_Man,
Europe/Istanbul, Europe/Jersey, Europe/Kaliningrad, Europe/Kiev, Europe/Kirov, Europe/
Lisbon, Europe/Ljubljana, Europe/London, Europe/Luxembourg, Europe/Madrid, Europe/
Malta, Europe/Mariehamn, Europe/Minsk, Europe/Monaco, Europe/Moscow, Europe/
Nicosia, Europe/Oslo, Europe/Paris, Europe/Podgorica, Europe/Prague, Europe/Riga,
Europe/Rome, Europe/Samara, Europe/San_Marino, Europe/Sarajevo, Europe/Simferopol,
Europe/Skopje, Europe/Sofia, Europe/Stockholm, Europe/Tallinn, Europe/Tirane, Europe/
Tiraspol, Europe/Ulyanovsk, Europe/Uzhgorod, Europe/Vaduz, Europe/Vatican, Europe/
Vienna, Europe/Vilnius, Europe/Volgograd, Europe/Warsaw, Europe/Zagreb, Europe/
Zaporozhye, Europe/Zurich, GB, GB-Eire, GMT, GMT+0, GMT-0, GMT0, Greenwich, HST,
Hongkong, Iceland, Indian/Antananarivo, Indian/Chagos, Indian/Christmas, Indian/Cocos,
Indian/Comoro, Indian/Kerguelen, Indian/Mahe, Indian/Maldives, Indian/Mauritius, Indian/
Mayotte, Indian/Reunion, Iran, Israel, Jamaica, Japan, Kwajalein, Libya, MET, MST,
MST7MDT, Mexico/BajaNorte, Mexico/BajaSur, Mexico/General, NZ, NZ-CHAT, Navajo,
PRC, PST8PDT, Pacific/Apia, Pacific/Auckland, Pacific/Bougainville, Pacific/Chatham,
Pacific/Chuuk, Pacific/Easter, Pacific/Efate, Pacific/Enderbury, Pacific/Fakaofo, Pacific/Fiji,
Pacific/Funafuti, Pacific/Galapagos, Pacific/Gambier, Pacific/Guadalcanal, Pacific/Guam,
Pacific/Honolulu, Pacific/Johnston, Pacific/Kiritimati, Pacific/Kosrae, Pacific/Kwajalein,
Pacific/Majuro, Pacific/Marquesas, Pacific/Midway, Pacific/Nauru, Pacific/Niue, Pacific/
Norfolk, Pacific/Noumea, Pacific/Pago_Pago, Pacific/Palau, Pacific/Pitcairn, Pacific/
Pohnpei, Pacific/Ponape, Pacific/Port_Moresby, Pacific/Rarotonga, Pacific/Saipan, Pacific/
Samoa, Pacific/Tahiti, Pacific/Tarawa, Pacific/Tongatapu, Pacific/Truk, Pacific/Wake,
Pacific/Wallis, Pacific/Yap, Poland, Portugal, ROC, ROK, Singapore, Turkey, UCT, US/
Alaska, US/Aleutian, US/Arizona, US/Central, US/East-Indiana, US/Eastern, US/Hawaii, US/
Indiana-Starke, US/Michigan, US/Mountain, US/Pacific, US/Pacific-New, US/Samoa, UTC,
Universal, W-SU, WET, Zulu
Select a time zone from the list.
Default value:
Etc/UTC
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Time WorkDay Start
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time WorkDay Start: " Start " where
Start :
String (5, 5)
The working day start time, using the 24-hour clock.
Default value:
"07:00" xConfiguration Time WorkDay End
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time WorkDay End: " End " where
End :
String (5, 5)
The working day end time, using the 24-hour clock.
Default value:
"18:00" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek: FirstDayOfWeek where
FirstDayOfWeek :
Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday
The first day of the working week.
Default value:
Monday xConfiguration Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek, Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek, Time WorkDay Start, and Time WorkDay End settings are available so that you can specify when the regular working hours are, and thereby also find the out-of-office hours.
Knowing the out-of-office hours is required if you want to use the power save mode, which is set up using the Standby PowerSave setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek: LastDayOfWeek where
LastDayOfWeek :
Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday
The last day of the working week.
Default value:
Friday
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 213 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
UserInterface configuration
xConfiguration UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
You can enable an incoming call notification with amplified visuals. The screen and Touch 10 will flash red/white approximately once every second (1.75 Hz) to make it easier for hearing impaired users to notice an incoming call. If the device is already in a call the screen will not flash as this will disturb the on-going call, instead you will get a normal notification on screen and touch panel.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification:
IncomingCallNotification where
IncomingCallNotification :
AmplifiedVisuals/Default
AmplifiedVisuals: Enable the amplified visuals on screen and touch panel when the device receives a call.
Default: Enable the default behavior with a notification on screen and touch panel.
Default value:
Default xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface Bookings Visibility Title
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Sets the meeting details to private. “Schedule meeting” will be displayed as the title of the meeting.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Bookings Visibility Title: Title where
Title :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: The title of the meeting is public and will be displayed on the user interface.
Hidden: The title of the meeting will be hidden and "Schedule meeting" will be displayed on the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
If the device is set up with branding customizations, this setting affects the colors of the logo that is shown when the device is awake. You can choose whether you want to show the logo in full color, or reduce the opacity of the logo so that it blends in more naturally with the background and other elements on the screen.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors: Colors where
Colors :
Auto/Native
Auto: The opacity of the logo is reduced.
Native: The logo has full colors.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 214 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface ContactInfo Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose which type of contact information to show in the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface ContactInfo Type: Type where
Type :
Auto/DisplayName/E164Alias/H320Number/H323Id/IPv4/IPv6/None/SipUri/SystemName
Auto: Show the address which another device should dial to reach this video conferencing device. The address depends on the default call protocol and device registration.
None: Do not show any contact information.
IPv4: Show the device's IPv4 address.
IPv6: Show the device's IPv6 address.
H323Id: Show the device's H.323 ID (refer to the H323 H323Alias ID setting).
H320Number: Show the device's H.320 number as contact information (only supported if used with Cisco TelePresence ISDN Link).
E164Alias: Show the device's H.323 E164 Alias as contact information (refer to the H323
H323Alias E164 setting).
SipUri: Show the device's SIP URI (refer to the SIP URI setting).
SystemName: Show the device's name (refer to the SystemUnit Name setting).
DisplayName: Show the device's display name (refer to the SIP DisplayName setting).
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface CustomMessage
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
A custom message can be displayed, in the lower left side of the screen, in awake mode.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface CustomMessage: " CustomMessage " where
CustomMessage :
String (0, 128)
Add a custom message. Add an empty string to remove a custom message.
Default value:
"" xConfiguration UserInterface Diagnostics Notifications
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Hide or show diagnostics notifications on the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Diagnostics Notifications: Notifications where
Notifications :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: The diagnostics notifications will be displayed on the user interface.
Hidden: The diagnostics notifications will not be displayed on the user interface.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 215 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface KeyTones Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
You can configure the device to make a keyboard click sound effect (key tone) when typing text or numbers in the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface KeyTones Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: There is no key tone sound effect.
On: The key tone sound effect is turned on.
Default value:
Off [ DX70/DX80 DeskPro Boards ]
On [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ] xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call Keypad
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default in-call Keypad button from the user interface.
This button opens a keypad, which for example can be used for DTMF input.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call Keypad: Keypad where
Keypad :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call End
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default End Call button from the user interface. The setting removes only the button, not its functionality as such.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call End: End where
End :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default Hold, Transfer, and Resume in-call buttons from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls: MidCallControls where
MidCallControls :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default buttons in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default buttons from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 216 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call JoinWebex
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default Join Webex button from the user interface.
The button allows users to dial into a Webex meeting using just the Webex meeting number, no domain is required. However, for this to work, you must set up the infrastructure to allow calls to be routed to *@webex.com.
The Join Webex button is not available if you are controlling the device with a remote control.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call JoinWebex: JoinWebex where
JoinWebex :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default Call button (including the directory, favorites, and recent calls lists) and the default in-call Add participant button from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call Start: Start where
Start :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default buttons in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default buttons from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call VideoMute
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to show the default "Turn video off" button in the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Call VideoMute: VideoMute where
VideoMute :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the "Turn video off" button in the user interface if this feature is supported in the ongoing call.
Hidden: The "Turn video off" button is never shown in the user interface.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 217 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration UserInterface Features HideAll
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove all default buttons from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons, not their functionality as such.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features HideAll: HideAll where
HideAll :
False/True
False: Shows all default buttons in the user interface.
True: Removes all default buttons from the user interface.
Default value:
False xConfiguration UserInterface Features Share Start
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default buttons and other UI elements for sharing and previewing content, both in call and out of call, from the user interface. The setting removes only the buttons and UI elements, not their functionality as such. You can share content using
Proximity or the Cisco Webex Teams app still.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Share Start: Start where
Start :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default buttons and UI elements in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default buttons and UI elements from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Choose whether or not to remove the default Whiteboard button from the user interface. The setting removes only the button, not its functionality as such. This setting only applies to Cisco
Webex registered devices.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start: Start where
Start :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the default button in the user interface.
Hidden: Removes the default button from the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Language
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Select the language to be used in the user interface. If the language is not supported, the default language (English) will be used.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Language: Language where
Language :
Arabic/Catalan/ChineseSimplified/ChineseTraditional/Czech/Danish/Dutch/English/
EnglishUK/Finnish/French/FrenchCanadian/German/Hebrew/Hungarian/Italian/Japanese/
Korean/Norwegian/Polish/Portuguese/PortugueseBrazilian/Russian/Spanish/SpanishLatin/
Swedish/Turkish
Select a language from the list.
Default value:
English
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 218 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define for how long the encryption indicator is shown on screen. The icon for encrypted calls is a locked padlock.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator: EncryptionIndicator where
EncryptionIndicator :
Auto/AlwaysOn/AlwaysOff
Auto: If the call is encrypted, a "Call is encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
If the call is not encrypted, a "Call is not encrypted" notification is shown for 5 seconds.
No encryption indicator icon is shown.
AlwaysOn: The “Call is encrypted” notification is shown for 5 seconds. Then, an encryption indicator icon is shown for the rest of the call.
AlwaysOff: The encryption indicator is never displayed on screen.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
A custom message can be displayed in the middle of the main screen when the device is in the half wake state. The custom message will replace the default message, which gives instructions how to start using the device. You can also delete the default message, without adding a custom message.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage: " HalfwakeMessage " where
HalfwakeMessage :
String (0, 128)
The custom message. An empty string: Restore the default message. A space only: There will be no message at all.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 219 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface OSD Output
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define on which monitor on-screen information and indicators (OSD) should be displayed. If the device is controlled with a remote control also the on-screen menus appear on this monitor.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface OSD Output: Output where
Output :
1 [ SX10 Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Auto/1/2 [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Auto/1/2/3 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Auto [ DX70/DX80 RoomKitMini ]
Auto: For devices with integrated screen, the on-screen information and indicators are sent to the integrated screen. If the device has two integrated screens, the left monitor is used.
For devices without integrated screens, the device detects when a monitor is connected to a video output, and sends the on-screen information and indicators to the first monitor you connect. If you have a multi-monitor setup, and all monitors are connected before switching on the device, the on-screen information and indicators are sent to the video output with the lowest number, starting with Output Connector 1 (HDMI 1).
1..n: The device sends the on-screen information and indicators to the specified output.
Choose n to send the on-screen information and indicators to the device's Output
Connector n.
For devices with integrated screens, the lowest numbers refer to the integrated screens.
Default value:
1 [ SX10 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room55 Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
Auto [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ] xConfiguration UserInterface Phonebook Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting determines if a user is allowed to add or change a contact in the Directory and
Favorites list from the user interface of the device.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Phonebook Mode: Mode where
Mode :
ReadOnly/ReadWrite
ReadOnly: You neither can add a contact to the Favorites list, edit a contact in the
Favorites list, nor edit any contact from the Directory or Favorites list before calling.
ReadWrite: You are able to add a contact to the Favorites list, edit a contact in the
Favorites list, and edit a contact from the Directory or Favorites list before calling.
Default value:
ReadWrite xConfiguration UserInterface Proximity Notifications
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Configure the display of proximity notifications on the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Proximity Notifications: Notifications where
Notifications :
Auto/Off/On
Auto: Allow the system to automatically determine when to display proximity notifications.
Off: Proximity notifications will not be shown on the user interface.
On: All proximity notifications will be shown on the user interface.
Default value:
Auto
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 220 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface Security Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This setting allows you to prevent important device information from being exposed in the user interface (drop down menu and Settings panel), for example the contact information and IP addresses of the video conferencing device, touch controller, and UCM/VCS registrars. It is important to note that such information is not hidden when navigating further into the Settings panel.
If you want to fully prevent that people without administrator rights can see the contact information, IP addresses, MAC address, serial number, and software version, you must also set the
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode to Locked, and of course have a passphrase for all user accounts with administrator rights.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Security Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Normal/Strong
Normal: IP addresses and other device information are shown on the user interface.
Strong: Contact information and IP addresses are not displayed on the user interface
(drop down menu and Settings panel).
Default value:
Normal xConfiguration UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The Settings panel in the user interface (Touch 10 or on-screen) can be protected by the device's admin password. If this password is blank, anyone can access the settings in the
Settings panel, and for example factory reset the device. If authentication is enabled, all settings that require authentication have a padlock icon. You will be prompted to enter the administrator's username and passphrase when you select the setting. Some settings do not require authentication, they do not have a padlock icon.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Locked/Unlocked
Locked: Authentication with administrator's username and passphrase is required.
Unlocked: No authentication is required.
Default value:
Unlocked
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 221 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose whether or not to show the device name (or contact information) and the associated drop down menu and Settings panel on the user interface.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility: Visibility where
Visibility :
Auto/Hidden
Auto: Shows the device name with drop down menu and Settings panel on the user interface.
Hidden: Doesn't show the device name with drop down menu and Settings panel on the user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface SoundEffects Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
You can configure the device to make a sound effect, e.g. when someone connects a laptop or mobile through Proximity.
The keyboard click sound effect when typing text is not affected by this setting (refer to the
UserInterface Keytones Mode setting).
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface SoundEffects Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: There are no sound effects.
On: The sound effects are switched on.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface UsbPromotion
Applies to:
RoomKitMini
Requires user role: ADMIN
Choose whether or not to show on the halfwake screen, a text that informs you that you can use the device as a USB camera.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface UsbPromotion: UsbPromotion where
UsbPromotion :
Off/On
Off: The USB camera information text is not shown.
On: The USB camera information text is shown.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 222 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserInterface WebcamOnlyMode
Applies to:
RoomKitMini
Requires user role: ADMIN
This device can be used as a web camera, and as a normal video conferencing device. It can be used as a web camera even if it is not registered to any on-premise or cloud call service
(such as CUCM, VCS, and Webex).
This setting determines if the user interface shall be adapted to a web camera only scenario when the video conferencing device is not registered.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface WebcamOnlyMode: WebcamOnlyMode where
WebcamOnlyMode :
Auto/Off
Auto: If the device is registered to a call service, the full user interface will be shown. If the device is not registered, and therefore cannot be used for calling, irrelevant user interface elements are removed.
Off: The device will always show the full user interface.
Default value:
Auto xConfiguration UserInterface Whiteboard ActivityIndicators
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Activity indicators let you see who is drawing and annotating in a call.
The avatars of the participants or the initials of the device are displayed when someone is interacting with the whiteboard, so you can follow who is drawing or annotating.
Applies only to cloud-registered devices.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserInterface Whiteboard ActivityIndicators: ActivityIndicators where
ActivityIndicators :
Off/On
On: Enables activity indicators.
Off: Disables activity indicators.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 223 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
UserManagement configuration
xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The LDAP filter is used to determine which users should be granted administrator privileges.
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter: " Filter " where
Filter :
String (0, 1024)
Refer to the LDAP specification for the syntax of this string. Example:
"(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com)
(sAMAccountName=username))"
Default value:
"" xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Admin Group
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Members of this AD (Active Directory) group will be given administrator access. This setting is a shorthand for saying (memberOf:1.2.840.113556.1.4.1941:=<group name>).
You always have to set either an LDAP Admin Group or an LDAP Admin Filter. An LDAP
Admin Filter takes precedence, so if the UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter is set, the
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group setting is ignored.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Admin Group: " Group " where
Group :
String (0..255)
The distinguished name of the AD group. Example: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company, DC=com"
Default value:
"" xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Attribute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The attribute used to map to the provided username. If not set, sAMAccountName is used.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Attribute: " Attribute " where
Attribute :
String (0..255)
The attribute name.
Default value:
""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 224 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP BaseDN
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The distinguishing name of the entry at which to start a search (base).
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: " BaseDN " where
BaseDN :
String (0..255)
The distinguishing name of the base. Example: "DC=company, DC=com"
Default value:
"" xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Encryption
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Define how to secure the communication between the device and the LDAP server. You can override the port number by using the UserManagement LDAP Server Port setting.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Encryption: Encryption where
Encryption :
LDAPS/None/STARTTLS
LDAPS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 636 over TLS (Transport Layer Security).
None: Connect to the LDAP server on port 389 with no encryption.
STARTTLS: Connect to the LDAP server on port 389, then send a STARTTLS command to upgrade to an encrypted connection (TLS).
Default value:
LDAPS
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set the lowest version of the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol that is allowed.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion: MinimumTLSVersion where
MinimumTLSVersion :
TLSv1.0/TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2
TLSv1.0: Support TLS version 1.0 or higher.
TLSv1.1: Support TLS version 1.1 or higher.
TLSv1.2: Support TLS version 1.2 or higher.
Default value:
TLSv1.2
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 225 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
The device supports the use of an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server as a central place to store and validate usernames and passwords. Use this setting to configure whether or not to use LDAP authentication. Our implementation is tested for the Microsoft
Active Directory (AD) service.
If you switch on LDAP Mode, make sure to configure the other UserManagement LDAP settings to suit your setup. Here is a few examples.
Example 1:
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Group: "CN=admin group, OU=company groups, DC=company,
DC=com"
Example 2:
- UserManagement LDAP Mode: On
- UserManagement LDAP Address: "192.0.2.20"
- UserManagement LDAP BaseDN: "DC=company, DC=com"
- UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter: "(|(memberof=CN=admin group, OU=company groups,
DC=company, DC=com)(sAMAccountName=username))"
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: LDAP authentication is not allowed.
On: LDAP authentication is allowed.
Default value:
Off xCommand xStatus xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Server Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set the IP address or hostname of the LDAP server.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Server Address: " Address " where
Address :
String (0..255)
A valid IPv4 address, IPv6 address or hostname.
Default value:
""
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Server Port
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set the port to connect to the LDAP server on. If set to 0, use the default for the selected protocol (see the UserManagement LDAP Encryption setting).
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP Server Port: Port where
Port :
Integer (0..65535)
The LDAP server port number.
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 226 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When the device connects to an LDAP server, the server will identify itself to the device by presenting its certificate. Use this setting to determine whether or not the device will verify the server certificate.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate:
VerifyServerCertificate where
VerifyServerCertificate :
Off/On
Off: The device will not verify the LDAP server's certificate.
On: The device must verify that the LDAP server's certificate is signed by a trusted
Certificate Authority (CA). The CA must be on the list of trusted CAs that are uploaded to the device in advance. Use the device's web interface to manage the list of trusted CAs
(see more details in the administrator guide).
Default value:
On xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumDigits
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the minimum number of numerical characters (0..9) in the password.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumDigits:
MinimumDigits where
MinimumDigits :
Integer (0..4)
The minimum number of numerical characters. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 227 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumLength
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the minimum number of characters in the password.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumLength:
MinimumLength where
MinimumLength :
Integer (0..256)
The minimum number of characters. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
8 xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity
MinimumLowercase
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the minimum number of lower-case letters in the password.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumLowercase:
MinimumLowercase where
MinimumLowercase :
Integer (0..4)
The minimum number of lower-case characters. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 228 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity
MinimumSpecial
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the minimum number of special characters in the password.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumSpecial:
MinimumSpecial where
MinimumSpecial :
Integer (0..4)
The minimum number of special characters. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
0
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity
MinimumUppercase
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the minimum number of upper-case letters in the password.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumUppercase:
MinimumUppercase where
MinimumUppercase :
Integer (0..4)
The minimum number of upper-case characters. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 229 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy MaxLifetime
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the maximum number of days before a password becomes invalid.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy MaxLifetime: MaxLifetime where
MaxLifetime :
Integer (0..7300)
The minimum number of days. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
0
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy ReuseLimit
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
When signing in to the device as a local user, the password must follow the rules set by the
UserManagement PasswordPolicy settings. These settings replace the “systemtools securitysetting” command that was available in software versions older than CE9.10.
A new password rule will not apply to existing passwords but will take effect on the next password change.
This setting specifies the reuse limit (n), which means that a user cannot change to either of their previous n passwords.
USAGE: xConfiguration UserManagement PasswordPolicy ReuseLimit: ReuseLimit where
ReuseLimit :
Integer (0..24)
The minimum number of passwords. 0 means no restrictions.
Default value:
12
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 230 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Video configuration
xConfiguration Video DefaultMainSource
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define the default input source for main video in calls. The main video is played on this source when you switch on or restart the video conferencing device. Use the Video Input
SetMainVideoSource command to change to another source while the device is running.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video DefaultMainSource: DefaultMainSource where
DefaultMainSource :
1/2/3/4/5/6 [ CodecPro ]
1/2/3/4 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70G2 ]
1/2 [ SX20 ]
1 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 RoomKitMini Boards ]
1/2/3 [ MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
The default source for main video.
Default value:
1
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The camera ID is a unique identifier of the camera that is connected to this video input.
For devices with more than one camera you can use the xStatus Camera API command to see the IDs of the different cameras.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId: CameraId where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ SX10 CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 1..5
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
CameraId :
1/2/3/4/5/6/7 [ CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
1 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Connector 1,2,3,4: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7 Connector 5: 1 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
For devices with more than one camera, select the ID of the camera. For devices with one camera the value is fixed and cannot be changed.
Default value:
Connector n: n [ CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
1 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Connector n: n Connector 5: 1 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 231 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define whether the camera on this video input connector can be controlled or not. Some connectors cannot be controlled (Off is the only available value).
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ SX10 CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 1..5
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Mode :
Off/On [ CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Off [ DX70/DX80 ]
Connector 1: Off/On Connector 2,3,4: Off [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Connector 1: Off/On Connector 2,3: Off [ SX10 Room55 DeskPro ]
Connector 1: Off/On Connector 2: Off [ SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Connector 1,2,3,4: Off/On Connector 5: Off [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Off: Disable camera control.
On: Enable camera control.
Default value:
On [ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Connector 1,2,3,4,5: On Connector 6: Off [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Off [ DX70/DX80 ]
Connector 1: On Connector 2,3,4: Off [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Connector 1: On Connector 2,3: Off [ SX10 Room55 DeskPro ]
Connector 1: On Connector 2: Off [ SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Connector 1,2,3: On Connector 4,5: Off [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The video input (HDMI) supports Consumer Electronics Control (CEC). When this setting is enabled, information about the connected device (for example device type and device name) is available in the video conferencing device status (Video Input Connector[n] ConnectedDevice
CEC [n]), provided that the connected device also supports CEC.
If you have Cisco Quad Camera, do not switch off CEC on that connector because then there will be no sound on the speakers on the camera. CEC is required for HDMI ARC (Audio Return
Channel), which is the channel used for sending audio from the video conferencing device to the camera.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..5
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..3
[ Room55 DeskPro ]
Range: 2..2
[ RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Mode :
Off/On [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
Connector 1: On Other connectors: Off/On [ Room70/Room55D ]
Off: CEC is disabled.
On: CEC is enabled.
Default value:
On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 232 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] DviType
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
The official DVI standard supports both digital and analog signals. In most cases the default
AutoDetect setting can detect whether the signal is analog RGB or digital. However, in some rare cases when DVI-I cables are used (these cables can carry both the analog and digital signals) the auto detection fails. This setting makes it possible to override the AutoDetect and select the correct DVI video input.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] DviType: DviType where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 4..4
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 2..2
[ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
DviType :
AutoDetect/Digital/AnalogRGB/AnalogYPbPr
AutoDetect: Set to AutoDetect to automatically detect if the signal is analog RGB or digital.
Digital: Set to Digital to force the DVI video input to Digital when using DVI-I cables with both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
AnalogRGB: Set to AnalogRGB to force the DVI video input to AnalogRGB when using
DVI-I cables with both analog and digital pins and AutoDetect fails.
AnalogYPbPr: Set to AnalogYPbPr to force the DVI video input to AnalogYPbPr, as the component (YPbPr) signal cannot be auto detected.
Default value:
AutoDetect xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] HDCP Mode
Applies to:
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
One of the video conferencing device's HDMI inputs can be configured to support HDCP protected content (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection, version 1.4). This allows customers to re-purpose a video conferencing device's screen by connecting devices such as a
Google ChromeCast, an AppleTV, or an HDTV decoder. This type of content cannot be shared while in a call.
When the input connector is configured to support HDCP, it is reserved for this type of content.
This means that you can't share any content from this specific connector while in a call, regardless of what is connected, nor can you take web snapshots of this source.
The screens, on which the protected content is displayed, must support HDCP. For Codec Plus,
Room 70 (Single and Dual), and Room 55 Dual, the protected content is always displayed on the screen that is connected to output connector 1; for Codec Pro and Room 70 G2 (Single and Dual), it's displayed on screens connected to output connector 1 and 2; and for Room 55, it's displayed on the integrated screen. The integrated screens of devices in the Room Series support HDCP.
Note: If you have connected an external screen to Room 55 (not Room 55 Dual), you cannot display HDCP content, not even on the integrated screen.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] HDCP Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..5
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 2..3
[ Room55 ]
Mode :
Connector 1,3: Off, Connector 2: Off/On [ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Connector 1,2,3,4: Off, Connector 5: Off/On [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 2: Off, Connector 3: Off/On [ Room55 ]
Off: Disable support for HDCP protected content on this video input connector.
On: Enable support for HDCP protected content this video input connector.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 233 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Select which type of input source is connected to the video input.
If the device has an integrated camera, Connector 1 refers to the integrated camera; if the device has two integrated cameras (dual camera), Connector 1 and Connector 2 refers to the integrated cameras.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType: InputSourceType where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ SX10 CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 1..5
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
InputSourceType :
PC/camera/document_camera/mediaplayer/whiteboard/other [ SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/
MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: camera Connector 2: PC/camera/document_camera/mediaplayer/whiteboard/other [ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Connector 1: camera Other connectors: PC/camera/document_camera/mediaplayer/ whiteboard/other [ SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2 Room55 DeskPro ]
PC: Use this when a computer is connected to the video input.
camera: Use this when a camera is connected to the video input.
document_camera: Use this when a document camera is connected to the video input.
mediaplayer: Use this when a media player is connected to the video input.
whiteboard: Use this when a whiteboard camera is connected to the video input.
other: Use this when the other options do not match.
Default value:
Connector 1,2,6: camera Connector 3,4,5: PC [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: camera Other connectors: PC [ SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2 CodecPlus Room55
Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Connector 1: camera Connector 2: PC [ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Connector 1,2: camera Connector 3,4: PC Connector 5: other [ SX80 MX700/MX800/ xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
MX800D ] xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] Name
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define a name for the video input connector.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] Name: " Name " where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ SX10 CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 1..5
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Name :
String (0, 50)
Name for the video input connector.
Default value:
Connector 1: "Camera 1" Connector 2: "Camera 2" Connector 3: "PC 1 (HDMI)"
Connector 4: "PC 2 (HDMI)" Connector 5: "PC 3 (HDMI)" Connector 6: "Camera
3 (SDI)" [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: "Camera" Connector 2: "PC 1 (HDMI)" Connector 3: "PC 2 (HDMI)" [
CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Connector 1: "Camera" Connector 2,3: "" [ Room55 ]
Connector 1: "Camera" Connector 2: "PC" [ RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Connector 1: "Camera" Connector 2: "PC (USB-C)" Connector 3: "PC (HDMI)" [
DeskPro ]
Connector n: "" [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Connector 1: "Camera 1" Connector 2: "" for single camera devices, "Camera 2" for dual camera devices Connector 3: "PC (HDMI)" Connector 4: "PC (VGA)"
Connector 5: "" [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 234 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] PreferredResolution
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the preferred screen resolution and refresh rate that the video conferencing device advertises to the input sources that are connected via HDMI (for example a laptop). The logic for selection of the resolution on the source side will choose this resolution and refresh rate automatically, unless it is overridden manually by the source device (for example the laptop's display configuration software).
Note that larger formats than 1920_1080_60 use much more data, and requires a presentation cable (or adapter) that is qualified for at least HDMI 1.4b data rates.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] PreferredResolution:
PreferredResolution where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..5
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 2..3
[ Room55 DeskPro ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..2
[ RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
PreferredResolution :
Connector 1,2: 1920_1080_60 Connector 3,4,5: 1920_1080_60/2560_1440_60/3840_2
160_30 [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: 1920_1080_60 Connector 2,3 : 1920_1080_60/2560_1440_60/3840_216
0_30 [ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
1920_1080_60/2560_1440_60/3840_2160_30 [ RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 Boards ]
1920_1080_60/2560_1440_60/3840_2160_30/3840_2160_60 [ DeskPro ]
1920_1080_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
2560_1440_60: The resolution is 2560 x 1440, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
3840_2160_30: The resolution is 3840 x 2160, and the refresh rate is 30 Hz.
3840_2160_60: The resolution is 3840 x 2160, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
Default value:
1920_1080_60 [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
3840_2160_60 [ DeskPro ]
1920_1080_60 [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D Boards ] xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define how the video conferencing device will behave when you connect a presentation source to the video input. If the device is in standby mode, it will wake up when you connect a presentation source. Sharing the presentation with the far end requires additional action (select Share on the user interface) except when this setting is set to AutoShare.
For devices with more than one camera: Any input source can be used as a presentation source; normally, the main camera will not be used as a presentation source.
For devices with an integrated camera: The integrated camera is not available as a presentation source.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection:
PresentationSelection where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..2
[ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 2..3
[ SX10 Room55 DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 1..4
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 2..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
PresentationSelection :
AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit
RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
Connector 1: Manual Connector 2: AutoShare/Desktop/Manual/OnConnect for single camera devices, and Manual for dual camera devices Connector 3,4: AutoShare/
Desktop/Manual/OnConnect [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
AutoShare: While in a call, the content on the video input will automatically be presented to the far end as well as on the local screen when you connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). You do not have to select Share on the user interface. If a presentation source is already connected when you make or answer a call, you have to manually select
Share on the user interface.
Desktop: The content on the video input will be presented on the screen when you connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 235 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). This applies both when idle and in a call. Also, the content on the video input will stay on the screen when you leave the call, provided that it was the active input at the time of leaving.
Manual: The content on the video input will not be presented on the screen until you select Share from the user interface.
OnConnect: The content on the video input will be presented on screen when you connect the cable, or when the source is activated otherwise (for example when a connected computer wakes up from sleep mode). Otherwise, the behavior is the same as in manual mode.
Default value:
Connector 1,2,6: Manual Connector 3,4,5: OnConnect [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: Manual Other connectors: OnConnect [ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Desktop [ DX70/DX80 DeskPro ]
OnConnect [ SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 ]
AutoShare [ Boards ]
Connector 1,2: Manual Connector 3,4: OnConnect [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Connector 1: Manual Connector 2: OnConnect [ SX20 ] xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] Quality
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
When encoding and transmitting video there is a trade-off between high resolution and high frame rate. For some video sources it is more important to transmit high frame rate than high resolution and vice versa. This setting specifies whether to give priority to high frame rate or to high resolution.
If a Quad Camera, SpeakerTrack 60 camera, or Precision 60 camera is detected by the device this setting is automatically set to Motion. If a user changes this setting manually, it will be set back to Motion after a restart or a camera reconnect.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] Quality: Quality where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..2
[ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 2..3
[ SX10 Room55 DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 1..5
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 2..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Quality :
Motion/Sharpness
Motion: Gives the highest possible frame rate. Used when there is a need for higher frame rates, typically when a large number of participants are present or when there is a lot of motion in the picture.
Sharpness: Gives the highest possible resolution. Used when you want the highest quality of detailed images and graphics.
Default value:
Connector 1,2,6: Motion Connector 3,4,5: Sharpness [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: Motion Connector 2,3: Sharpness [ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Sharpness [ DX70/DX80 SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Connector 1: Motion Connector 2: Sharpness [ SX20 ]
Connector 1,2,5: Motion Connector 3,4: Sharpness [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 236 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] Visibility
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the visibility of the video input connector in the menus on the user interface.
For devices with an integrated camera: Connector 1 is the device's integrated camera and is not available as a presentation source.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Input Connector [n] Visibility: Visibility where n : Unique ID that identifies the video input connector.
Range: 1..6
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..3
[ SX10 CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 1..5
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Range: 1..4
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Visibility :
Always/IfSignal/Never [ SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: Never Connector 2: Always/IfSignal/Never [ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini
Boards ]
Connector 1: Never Other connectors: Always/IfSignal/Never [ SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2
DeskPro ]
Always: The menu selection for the video input connector will always be visible on the user interface.
IfSignal: Yhe menu selection for the video input connector will only be visible when something is connected to the video input.
Never: The input source is not expected to be used as a presentation source, and will not show up on the user interface.
Default value:
Connector 1: Never Other connectors: IfSignal [ CodecPro Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Connector 1: Never Other connectors: Always [ CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Connector 1: Never Connector 2: Always [ RoomKit RoomKitMini ]
Connector 1: Never Connector 2: IfSignal [ DX70/DX80 Boards ]
Connector 1: Never Connector 2: Always Connector 3: IfSignal [ SX10 ]
Connector 1: Never Connector 2: Always Connector 3,4: IfSignal [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 237
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
Connector 1,2,3: IfSignal Connector 4: Always Connector 5: Never [ SX80 MX700/
MX800/MX800D ]
Connector 1: IfSignal Connector 2: Always [ SX20 ]
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Monitors
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
A monitor role is assigned to each screen/output. The monitor role for DX70, DX80, and SX10, which only support one screen, is First. The monitor role for the integrated screen of MX200
G2 and MX300 G2 is First; the monitor role for the optional external screen is Second. For the other products the monitor role is set using the Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole setting.
The monitor role decides which layout (call participants and presentation) will appear on a screen. Screens with different monitor roles will have different layouts; screens with the same monitor role will get the same layout (except for SX20). SX20 does not support the same layout on two screens.
The monitor layout mode that is set in the Video Monitors setting should reflect the number of different layouts you want in your room setup. Note that some screens can be reserved for presentations.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Monitors: Monitors where
Monitors :
Auto/Single/Dual/DualPresentationOnly [ SX20 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D
DeskPro ]
Auto/Single/Dual/DualPresentationOnly/TriplePresentationOnly/Triple [ SX80 MX700/MX800/
MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Auto/DualPresentationOnly [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Single [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
Auto: The number of screens connected to the device is automatically detected, and the layout is distributed on the screens according to the monitor role.
Single: The layout is shown on the device's screen. If the device has more than one screen, the same layout is shown on all screens (except for SX20). For SX20 with two screens, one of them will be disabled.
Dual: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First and Second. If a presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with monitor role First, and the presentation is shown on screens with monitor role Second.
DualPresentationOnly: All participants in the call are shown on screens with monitor role
First. If a presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on screens with monitor role Second.
Triple: The layout is distributed on screens with monitor role First, Second and Third.
Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First, and finally Third. If a
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 238
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus presentation is part of the layout, all participants in the call are shown on screens with monitor role First and Second, and the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor role Third.
TriplePresentationOnly: All participants in the call are distributed on screens with monitor role First and Second. Screens with monitor role Second are used first, then First. If a presentation is part of the layout, the presentation is shown on the screen with monitor role Third.
Default value:
Auto [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55
Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Single [ DX70/DX80 SX10 ]
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This video output (HDMI) supports Consumer Electronics Control (CEC).
When this setting is On, the video conferencing device will use CEC to set the screen in standby when the device itself enters standby. Likewise the device will wake up the screen when the device itself wakes up from standby.
The active video input on a screen is sometimes changed by a user. When a call is started the device detects if the active video input has been switched to another input on the screen.
The device then switches the input back so the device is the active video input source (not supported by SX20, SX80, and MX series).
If the device is not the active input source when the device goes into standby the screen will not be set to standby (not supported by SX20, SX80, and MX series).
It's a prerequisite that the screen that is connected to the output is CEC compatible and that
CEC is enabled on the screen.
Note that the different manufacturers uses different marketing names for CEC, for example
Anynet+ (Samsung); Aquos Link (Sharp); BRAVIA Sync (Sony); HDMI-CEC (Hitachi); Kuro Link
(Pioneer); CE-Link and Regza Link (Toshiba); RIHD (Onkyo); HDAVI Control, EZ-Sync, VIERA Link
(Panasonic); EasyLink (Philips); and NetCommand for HDMI (Mitsubishi).
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode: Mode where n : Unique ID that identifies the video output connector.
Range: 1..3
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 RoomKitMini ]
Range: 2..2
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 Room55 DeskPro ]
Range: 2..2 for MX800 Single; not available for MX700 and MX800 Dual [ MX700/MX800/
MX800D ]
Range: 2..2 for Room 70 Single; not available for Room 70 Dual [ Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 SX80 RoomKit CodecPlus ]
Mode :
Off/On
Off: CEC is disabled.
On: CEC is enabled.
Default value:
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 239
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
On [ SX10 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 DeskPro ]
Off [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55
Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
HorizontalOffset and VerticalOffset settings are associated with each video output. These settings are used to signal the relative position of the displays that are connected to these outputs.
HorizontalOffset = "0" and VerticalOffset = "0" indicates that the display is positioned in center, both horizontally and vertically. A negative horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is left of center, and a positive horizontal offset indicates that the monitor is right of center. A negative vertical offset indicates that the monitor is below center, and a positive vertical offset indicates that the monitor is above center. The magnitude of the offset indicates how far the display is from center (relative to other displays).
Example: You have two screens side by side. The left screen is on Connector 1 and the right screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = "0", VerticalOffset = "0"
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = "1", VerticalOffset = "0"
Example: You have two screens, one below the other. The upper screen is on Connector 1 and the lower screen on Connector 2. Then the following settings will apply:
Video Output Connector 1 Location: HorizontalOffset = "0", VerticalOffset = "0"
Video Output Connector 2 Location: HorizontalOffset = "0", VerticalOffset = "-1"
MX200 G2, MX300 G2, and Room 55: The integrated screen (Connector 1) has
HorizontalOffset = "0" and VerticalOffset = "0" (implicit, not configurable).
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset:
" HorizontalOffset " where n : Unique ID that identifies the video output connector.
Range: 1..3
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 RoomKit CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 2..2
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 Room55 DeskPro ]
HorizontalOffset :
String (1, 12)
The string represents a decimal number between -100.0 and 100.0 (these numbers included). Input strings that complies with the std::stof function in the C++ <string> library are accepted. This means that you can use either decimal notation or E-notation, for example "12", "12.0", "1.2e1", "1.2E1", "-0.12", "-12e-2". Leading whitespace characters
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 240
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus are discarded, and the decimal point is "."
Default value:
Connector 1: "-1" Connector 2: "0" Connector 3: "1" [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D
CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: "0" Connector 2: "1" [ SX20 RoomKit CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Connector 2: "1" [ MX200G2/MX300G2 Room55 ]
1 []
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55
Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
The monitor role describes which video streams will be shown on the screen connected to this video output. Together the Video Monitors setting and the MonitorRole settings for all outputs define which layout (video streams) will be shown on each screen.
This setting is not applicable for Room Kit Mini, since it supports only one screen.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole: MonitorRole where n : Unique ID that identifies the video output connector.
Range: 1..3
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 2..2
[ Room55 DeskPro ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 RoomKit CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Range: 1..1
[ RoomKitMini ]
MonitorRole :
Auto/First/Second/PresentationOnly [ SX20 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Auto/First/Second/Third/PresentationOnly/Recorder [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro
Room70G2 ]
Auto: The device will detect when a screen is connected, and a monitor role (First,
Second, Third) that corresponds with the Video Monitors setting will be assigned automatically.
First/Second/Third: Define the role of the screen in a multi-screen setup. In a singlescreen setup, there is no difference between First, Second and Third.
PresentationOnly: Show presentation video stream if active, and nothing else. Screens/ outputs with this monitor role are ignored by the Video Monitors setting.
Recorder: Show all participants, including the local main video (self-view). If active, also show the presentation. Screens/outputs with this monitor role are ignored by the Video
Monitors setting.
Default value:
Auto [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Dual: Connector 1,2: Auto; Single: Connector 1: Auto Connector 2:
PresentationOnly [ Room70/Room55D ]
Connector 1: First Connector 2: Second [ SX20 ] xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] OverscanLevel
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Some monitors may not present the entire image that they receive. This means that the outer parts of the image that is sent from the device may be cut off when displayed on the monitor.
Use this setting to instruct the device not to use the outer part of the available frame. This part might be cut off by the monitor. Both the video and messages on screen will be scaled in this case.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] OverscanLevel: OverscanLevel where n : Unique ID that identifies the video output connector.
Range: 1..1
[ SX10 ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 ]
Range: 2..2
[ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
OverscanLevel :
None/Medium/High
None: The device will use all of the output resolution.
Medium: The device will not use the outer 3% of the output resolution.
High: The device will not use the outer 6% of the output resolution.
Default value:
None
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 241 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] Resolution
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Define the resolution and refresh rate for the connected screen.
The formats larger than 1920_1200_60 requires use of high quality display cables. For guaranteed operation, use display cables that are pre-qualified from Cisco for use at 3840_2160_60, or use a cable that has passed the "Premium HDMI certification" program.
Some UHD TVs/displays only enable 3840_2160_30 (30 Hz) and not 3840_2160_60 (60 Hz) as their default configuration. In such cases the corresponding setting on the TV/display must be reconfigured to allow 3840_2160_60 for the HDMI input where the device is connected.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Output Connector [n] Resolution: Resolution where n : Unique ID that identifies the video output connector.
Range: 1..1
[ DX70/DX80 SX10 RoomKitMini Boards ]
Range: 1..2
[ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Range: 1..3
[ SX80 CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Range: 2..3 for MX800 Single; not available for MX700 and MX800 Dual [ MX700/MX800/
MX800D ]
Resolution :
Connector 1,2: Auto/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60/1920_1200_50/1920_1200_60/25
60_1440_60/3840_2160_30/3840_2160_60 Connector 3: Auto/1920_1080_50/192
0_1080_60/1920_1200_50/1920_1200_60/2560_1440_60/3840_2160_30 [ CodecPro
Room70G2 ]
1920_1080_60 [ DX70/DX80 ]
3840_2160_60 [ Boards ]
Connector 1: 3840_2160_60 Connector 2: Auto/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60/1920_1
200_50/1920_1200_60/2560_1440_60/3840_2160_30/3840_2160_60 [ Room55 DeskPro ]
Auto/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60/1920_1200_50/1920_1200_60/2560_1440_60/384
0_2160_30/3840_2160_60 [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
Connector n: Auto [ SX10 ]
Connector n: Auto/1280_720_50/1280_720_60/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60 [ SX20 ]
Connector n: Auto/1280_720_50/1280_720_60/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60/1920_12
00_50/1920_1200_60 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Connector 1: 1920_1080_60 Connector 2: Auto/1024_768_60/1280_1024_60/1280_72
0_50/1280_720_60/1920_1080_50/1920_1080_60/1280_768_60/1360_768_60/1366_
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 242
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus
768_60 [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Auto: The device will automatically try to set the optimal resolution based on negotiation with the connected monitor.
1280_720_50: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
1280_720_60: The resolution is 1280 x 720, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
1920_1080_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
1920_1080_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1080, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
1920_1200_50: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 50 Hz.
1920_1200_60: The resolution is 1920 x 1200, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
2560_1440_60: The resolution is 2560 x 1440, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
3840_2160_30: The resolution is 3840 x 2160, and the refresh rate is 30 Hz.
3840_2160_60: The resolution is 3840 x 2160, and the refresh rate is 60 Hz.
Default value:
1920_1080_60 [ DX70/DX80 ]
3840_2160_60 [ DeskPro Boards ]
Connector 1: 3840_2160_60 Connector 2: Auto [ Room55 ]
Connector n: Auto [ SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Connector 1: 1920_1080_60 Connector 2: Auto [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Presentation DefaultSource
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define which video input source to use as a default presentation source. This setting may be used by the API and third-party user interfaces. It is not relevant when using the user interfaces provided by Cisco.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Presentation DefaultSource: DefaultSource where
DefaultSource :
1/2/3/4/5 [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
1/2/3/4 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
1/2/3 [ CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
1/2 [ SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
2 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
The video input source to use as default presentation source.
Default value:
3 [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
2 [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55 Room70/
Room55D DeskPro Boards ] xConfiguration Video Presentation Priority
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Determine how to distribute the bandwidth between the presentation channel and the main video channel.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Presentation Priority: Priority where
Priority :
Equal/High/Low
Equal: The available bandwidth is shared equally between the presentation channel and the main video channel.
High: The presentation channel is assigned a larger portion of the available bandwidth at the expense of the main video channel.
Low: The main video channel is assigned a larger portion of the available bandwidth at the expense of the presentation channel.
Default value:
Equal
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 243 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode: FullscreenMode where
FullscreenMode :
Off/Current/On
Off: Self-view will be shown as a PiP.
Current: The size of the self-view picture will be kept unchanged when leaving a call, i.e. if it was a PiP during the call, it remains a PiP after the call; if it was fullscreen during the call, it remains fullscreen after the call.
On: The self-view picture will be shown in fullscreen.
Default value:
Current xConfiguration Video Selfview Default Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define if the main video source (self-view) shall be displayed on screen after a call. The position and size of the self-view window is determined by the Video Selfview Default PIPPosition and the Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode settings respectively.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview Default Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/Current/On
Off: Self-view is switched off when leaving a call.
Current: Self-view is left as is, i.e. if it was on during the call, it remains on after the call; if it was off during the call, it remains off after the call.
On: Self-view is switched on when leaving a call.
Default value:
Current
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 244 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define which screen/output to display the main video source (self-view) after a call. The value reflects the monitor roles of the different outputs.
A monitor role is assigned to each screen. The monitor role for DX70 and DX80 is First (no support for an external screen). The monitor role for the integrated screen of MX200 G2 and
MX300 G2 is First; the monitor role for the optional external screen is Second. For the other products the monitor role is set using the Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole setting.
The OnMonitorRole setting applies both when self-view is displayed in full screen, and when it is displayed as picture-in-picture (PiP).
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole: OnMonitorRole where
OnMonitorRole :
Current/First/Second [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55 Room70/
Room55D DeskPro Boards ]
Current/First/Second/Third [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
First [ DX70/DX80 ]
Current: When leaving a call, the self-view picture will be retained on the same output as it was during the call.
First: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with monitor role First.
Second: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with monitor role Second.
Third: The self-view picture will be shown on outputs with monitor role Third.
Default value:
Current [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ]
First [ DX70/DX80 ] xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Selfview Default PIPPosition
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Define the position on screen of the small self-view picture-in-picture (PiP) after a call. The setting only takes effect when self-view is switched on (see the Video Selfview Default Mode setting) and fullscreen view is switched off (see the Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode setting).
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview Default PIPPosition: PIPPosition where
PIPPosition :
Current/UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/
LowerRight
Current: The position of the self-view PiP will be kept unchanged when leaving a call.
UpperLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper left corner of the screen.
UpperCenter: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper center position.
UpperRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
CenterLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the center left position.
CentreRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the center right position.
LowerLeft: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower left corner of the screen.
LowerRight: The self-view PiP will appear in the lower right corner of the screen.
Default value:
Current [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
LowerRight [ Boards ]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 245 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration Video Selfview Mirrored
Applies to:
DX70/DX80
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
You can configure the device to show the self-view image the way other people see you, or as you would see yourself in a mirror.
This setting has no effect on the video that is sent to the far end.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview Mirrored: Mirrored where
Mirrored :
Off/On
Off: Display the self-view image as other people see you.
On: Display the self-view image as you see yourself in a mirror.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration Video Selfview OnCall Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting is used to switch on self-view for a short while when setting up a call. The Video
Selfview OnCall Duration setting determines for how long it remains on. This applies when selfview in general is switched off.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview OnCall Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: Self-view is not shown automatically during call setup.
On: Self-view is shown automatically during call setup.
Default value:
On [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Off [ Boards ] xConfiguration Video Selfview OnCall Duration
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This setting only has an effect when the Video Selfview OnCall Mode setting is switched On. In this case, the number of seconds set here determines for how long self-view is shown before it is automatically switched off.
USAGE: xConfiguration Video Selfview OnCall Duration: Duration where
Duration :
Integer (1..60)
Range: Choose for how long self-view remains on. The valid range is between 1 and 60 seconds.
Default value:
10
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 246 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
WebEngine configuration
xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xConfiguration WebEngine Mode
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
The web engine is a prerequisite for features that use the device's web view, for example digital signage and web apps.
USAGE: xConfiguration WebEngine Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/On
Off: The web engine is disabled.
On: The web engine is enabled.
Default value:
Off xConfiguration WebEngine RemoteDebugging
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
If you encounter a problem with a web page, it can be a good idea to turn on remote debugging. Remote debugging lets you access the Chrome developer console and identify potential issues with a web page. When enabled, a banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, warning the users that they may be monitored. The banner also shows the URL that you can enter in your local Chrome browser to open the developer console.
Make sure to turn off remote debugging after use.
USAGE: xConfiguration WebEngine RemoteDebugging: RemoteDebugging where
RemoteDebugging :
Off/On
Off: Remote debugging is switched off.
On: Remote debugging is switched on.
Default value:
Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 247 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration WebEngine UseHttpProxy
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
There are several UseHttpProxy settings that specify if a service shall communicate via an
HTTP proxy or not. The WebEngine UseHttpProxy setting applies all web view based features, such as digital signage, API-driven web views, and web apps.
For this setting to have any effect, a proxy server for HTTP, HTTPS, and WebSocket traffic must be set up using the NetworkServices HTTP Proxy settings.
USAGE: xConfiguration WebEngine UseHttpProxy: UseHttpProxy where
UseHttpProxy :
Off/On
Off: Set up communication directly with the server (not using a proxy).
On: Set up communication via proxy.
Default value:
On xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 248 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Chapter 4
xCommand commands
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 249 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Description of the xCommand commands
In this chapter, you can find a complete list of all xCommand type commands with parameters.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 250 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 251 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 252 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 253 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 254 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 255 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Audio commands
The xCommand Audio LocalInput, xCommand Audio LocalOutput, xCommand Audio
RemoteOutput commands are mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console application, which currently is available for SX80 and Codec Pro. Audio Console provides a graphical interface for the setup and configuration of audio chains.
An audio chain consists of a physical input connector that is assigned to a virtual local input, which in turn is connected to a virtual local output, to which a physical output connector is assigned. The commands listed above define the logical connection between the physical connectors and the virtual input and outputs, and also how the virtual inputs impose such things as gain, equalization and channel mixing to the signal.
When a call is made, the remote (from the far end) input signal is automatically added to all local outputs. Likewise, all local inputs are automatically added to the remote (to the far end) output gate.
Remember that xCommands are not persistent over a reboot. Therefore you have to include the commands in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the audio chain configuration persistent. A startup script is automatically generated and activated if you use Audio
Console to set up the audio chains.
For more information about startup scripts, macros and Audio Console see the Administrator
Guide and Customization Guide for the device.
xCommand Audio Diagnostics Advanced Run
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command sends out a noise signal sequentially on all audio output connectors and measures the room impulse response (RIR) between the output and the microphones. If a RIR is detected, the detected number of microphones (input), the detected number of output connectors, and the detected delay between the output and input is reported back.
Example: xCommand Audio Diagnostics Advanced Run Volume: 50 MeasurementLength: 1
Result returned ->
OK
*r AdvancedRunResult (status=OK):
*r AdvancedRunResult HdmiSpeakersDelay: "100 ms"
*r AdvancedRunResult NumHdmiSpeakersDetected: 2
*r AdvancedRunResult NumMicsDetected: 1
** end
USAGE: xCommand Audio Diagnostics Advanced Run [Channel: Channel ] [MeasurementLength:
MeasurementLength ] [Output: Output ] [Volume: Volume ] where
Channel :
Integer (0..13)
The channel number, from left to right, of the selected output.
Default value: 0
MeasurementLength :
Integer (1..100)
The length of the measurement in number of seconds. In a noisy environment a longer measurement duration will give a more reliable and robust result.
Default value: 3
Output :
HDMI/Line/Internal/Headset/All
The output where the test signal should be directed.
HDMI: Measure the room impulse response (RIR) of the device connected to the HDMI output.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 256 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Line: Measure the RIR of the device connected to the Line output (only available on video conferencing devices that have a Line output).
Internal: Measure the RIR of the internal loudspeaker (only available on video conferencing devices that have an internal loudspeaker).
Headset: Measure the RIR of the headset (only available on video conferencing devices that have a headset).
All: Measure the RIR on all outputs.
Default value: All
Volume :
Integer (0..50)
The volume of the test signal. In a noisy environment a higher volume gives more reliable and robust results.
Default value: 20 xCommand Audio Diagnostics MeasureDelay
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command measures the audio delay/latency in a device that is connected to the video conferencing device. A typical use case it to measure the delay in a TV connected to the video conferencing device via the HDMI connector. If the delay in a TV is too high, the real-time experience of a video call will be substantially degraded. If the delay is more than 50 ms we recommend the user to find a TV setting that has shorter delay. Typical TV settings that can reduce the delay are: Gaming Mode and PC Mode.
This command will measure the delay between output and input (microphone). This means that if you are using an external acoustic echo canceller or audio mixer, this command will also measure the delay of these devices.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Diagnostics MeasureDelay [MeasurementLength: MeasurementLength ]
[Output: Output ] [Volume: Volume ] where
MeasurementLength :
Integer (1..100)
The length of the measurement in number of seconds. In a noisy environment a longer measurement duration will give a more reliable and robust result.
Default value: 6
Output :
HDMI/Line/Internal/Headset/All
HDMI: Measure the delay of the device connected to the HDMI output.
Line: Measure the delay of the device connected to the Line output (only available on video conferencing devices that have a Line output).
Internal: Measure the delay of the internal loudspeaker (only available on video conferencing devices that have an internal loudspeaker).
Headset: Measure the delay of the headset (only available on video conferencing devices that have a headset).
All: Measure the maximum delay of all outputs.
Default value: HDMI
Volume :
Integer (0..50)
The volume of the test signal. In a noisy environment a higher volume gives more reliable and robust results.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 257 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Default value: 20 xCommand Audio Equalizer List
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
This command lists the current equalizer parameters. If no EqualizerId is specified, the command lists all 8 equalizers.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Equalizer List [EqualizerId: EqualizerId ] where
EqualizerId :
Integer (1..8)
Each EqualizerId has 6 second-order filter sections with these parameters: FilterType,
Frequency, Gain and Q-value.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Audio Equalizer Update
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
This command sets the equalizer parameters for the selected EqualizerId and Section. Each of the 8 available equalizers consist of 6 cascaded second-order IIR filters.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Equalizer Update EqualizerId: EqualizerId FilterType: FilterType
Frequency: " Frequency " Gain: " Gain " Q: " Q " Section: Section where
EqualizerId :
Integer (1..8)
FilterType : highpass/highshelf/lowpass/lowshelf/none/peaking
Frequency :
String (0, 32)
Gain :
String (0, 32)
Q :
String (0, 32)
Section :
Integer (1..6)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 258 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio LocalInput Add
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Create a virtual local input, and generate an identifier for it (InputId). A local input is associated with a set of input connectors, and you can specify the following: a name for the local input, how to mix the signals from the associated input connectors, the use of Automatic Gain Control
(AGC) and mute, whether to make a mono or stereo signal, and whether to use direct mode to bypass input processing.
The maximum number of local input modules is 8. You get an error message if you exceed the limit.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalInput Add [InputId: InputId ] [Name: " Name "] [AGC: AGC ]
[Channels: Channels ] [Direct: Direct ] [MixerMode: MixerMode ] [Mute: Mute ] where
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
A unique identifier for the local input. If you don't specify an InputID, the device will automatically create one for you. We recommend that you specify the InputId yourself in case you need to refer to the local input at a later stage.
Name :
String (0, 255)
Choose a name that describes the local input. If you don't specify a name, the string will be empty.
AGC :
On/Off
On: Adjusts the gain continuously to maintain a constant sound level (default).
Off: No automatic gain control.
Channels :
Integer (1..2)
1: Mixes the input signals into a mono signal (default).
2: Mixes the input signals into a stereo signal.
Direct :
On/Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 259
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
On: Bypass input processing such as acoustic echo cancellation and noise reduction, regardless of the configuration for each connected input connector. Bypassing the input processing reduces the audio input delay, which is useful when doing local sound reinforcement.
Off: All regular input processing is performed, according to the configuration of each connector (default).
MixerMode :
Auto/Fixed/GainShared
Auto: If one input signal is dominating, the signal on the other connectors are attenuated with 20 dB each.
Fixed: The input signals all have the same weight, and consequently they are mixed together with equal gains (default).
GainShared: If one or some of the input signals dominate, the rest of the input signals are attenuated by a few dB so that the total gain of the mixed signal remains the same all the time.
Auto and GainShared are intended for the microphone inputs; Fixed is recommended for
Line and HDMI inputs.
Mute :
On/Off
On: Mutes the mix of input signals (default).
Off: No muting.
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio LocalInput AddConnector
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Attach an input connector to the local input given by the input ID. You have to specify both the connector's type and number (ConnectorType, ConnectorId) to uniquely identify the connector.
A connector can only be attached to one local input.
Run xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalInput AddConnector InputId: InputId ConnectorType:
ConnectorType ConnectorId: ConnectorId where
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local input. It was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command.
ConnectorType :
HDMI/Line/Microphone [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
HDMI/ARC/Microphone/WebView [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select the connector type.
HDMI: HDMI cable input connector.
ARC: HDMI with ARC (Audio Return Channel) is input connector.
Line: Line input connector.
Microphone: Microphone input connector.
WebView: WebView input connector.
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..3) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..4) for a Line connector; Integer (1..8) for a microphone connector [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..5) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..3) for an HDMI with ARC (Audio Return
Channel) connector; Integer (1..8) for a microphone connector; Integer (1..8) for WebView connector [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select a connector. The connectors' numbers are printed on the codec connector panel.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio LocalInput Remove
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Remove the local input given by the input ID.
Run xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalInput Remove InputId: InputId where
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local input. It was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 260 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio LocalInput RemoveConnector
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Detach an input connector from the local input given by the input ID. You need to enter both the connector's type and number (ConnectorType, ConnectorId) to uniquely identify the connector.
Run xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalInput RemoveConnector InputId: InputId ConnectorType:
ConnectorType ConnectorId: ConnectorId where
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier for the local input. It was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command.
ConnectorType :
HDMI/Line/Microphone [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
HDMI/ARC/Microphone/WebView [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select the connector type.
HDMI: HDMI cable input connector.
ARC: HDMI with ARC (Audio Return Channel) is input connector.
Line: Line input connector.
Microphone: Microphone input connector.
WebView: WebView input connector.
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..3) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..4) for a Line connector; Integer (1..8) for a microphone connector [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..5) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..3) for an HDMI with ARC (Audio Return
Channel) connector; Integer (1..8) for a microphone connector; Integer (1..8) for WebView connector [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select a connector. The connectors' numbers are printed on the codec connector panel.
xCommand Audio LocalInput Update
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Update the settings of the local input given by the input ID.
Run xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalInput Update InputId: InputId [Name: " Name "] [AGC: AGC ]
[Channels: Channels ] [Direct: Direct ] [MixerMode: MixerMode ] [Mute: Mute ] where
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier for the local input. It was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command.
Name :
String (0, 255)
Choose a name that describes the local input.
AGC :
On/Off
On: Adjust the gain continuously to maintain a constant sound level).
Off: No automatic gain control.
Channels :
Integer (1..2)
1: Mix the input signals into a mono signal.
2: Mix the input signals into a stereo signal.
Direct :
On/Off
On: Bypass input processing such as acoustic echo cancellation and noise reduction, regardless of the configuration for each connected input connector. Bypassing the input processing reduces the audio input delay, which is useful when doing local sound reinforcement.
Off: All regular input processing is performed, according to the configuration of each connector.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 261 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
MixerMode :
Auto/Fixed/GainShared
Auto: If one input signal is dominating, the signal on the other connectors are attenuated with 20 dB each.
Fixed: The input signals all have the same weight, and consequently they are mixed together with equal gains.
GainShared: If one or some of the input signals dominate, the rest of the input signals are attenuated by a few dB so that the total gain of the mixed signal remains the same all the time.
Auto and GainShared are intended for the microphones; Fixed is recommended for Line and HDMI inputs.
Mute :
On/Off
On: Mutes the mix of input signals.
Off: No muting.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Create a virtual local output and generate an identifier for it (OutputId). A local output is a mix of local inputs and the remote input signals. Use the xCommand Audio LocalOutput ConnectInput command to specify which local inputs to include. The remote input signal (from far-end) is by default automatically added to this local output when in a call.Use the AutoconnectRemote parameter if you want to override the default behavior. A local output is associated with a set of output connectors, which all receive the same signal.
The maximum number of local output modules is 6. You get an error message if you exceed the limit.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add [OutputId: OutputId ] [Name: " Name "]
[AutoconnectRemote: AutoconnectRemote ] [Loudspeaker: Loudspeaker ] [Channels:
Channels ] [VolumeControlled: VolumeControlled ] where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
A unique identifier for the local output. If you don't specify an OutputId, the device will automatically create one for you. We recommend that you specify the OutputId yourself in case you need to refer to the output module at a later stage.
Default value: 0
Name :
String (0, 255)
Choose a name that describes the local output.
Default value: ""
AutoconnectRemote :
On/Off
On: The remote input signal is automatically added to the local output when in a call.
Off: The remote input signal is not added to the local output.
Default value: On
Loudspeaker :
On/Off
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 262 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
On: Choose On if at least one of the associated connectors are connected to a loudspeaker. This is important because it tells the echo canceler to use this signal as a reference signal.
Off: Choose Off if no loudspeaker is connected to the associated connectors. Note that only one of the local outputs should have a loudspeaker connected.
Default value: Off
Channels :
Integer (1..2)
1: Mix the local and remote input signals into a mono signal.
2: Mix the local and remote input signals into a stereo signal.
Default value: 1
VolumeControlled :
On/Off
On: The volume will change according to the level set with the volume controls on the user interface, or with the xCommand Audio Volume commands. If Loudspeaker is On,
VolumeControlled is forced to On no matter what you specify here.
Off: The volume is neither influenced by the volume controls on the user interface, nor the xCommand Audio Volume commands.
Default value: Off xCommand Audio LocalOutput AddConnector
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Attach an output connector to the local output given by the output ID. You have to specify both the connector's type and number (ConnectorType, ConnectorId) to uniquely identify the connector. A connector can only be attached to one local output.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput AddConnector OutputId: OutputId ConnectorType:
ConnectorType ConnectorId: ConnectorId where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
ConnectorType :
HDMI/Line [ SX80 CodecPro ]
HDMI/Line/ARC [ MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70G2 ]
Select the connector type.
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..2) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..6) for a Line connector [ SX80 MX700/MX800/
MX800D ]
Integer (1..3) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..6) for a line out connectors; Integer (1..1) for an HDMI with ARC (Audio Return Channel) connector [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select a connector. The connectors' numbers are printed on the codec connector panel.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 263 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio LocalOutput ConnectInput
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Connect a local or remote input to a local output by giving their IDs as parameters. A local input can be connected to any number of local outputs. Likewise, any number of local inputs can be connected to each local output. Note that the remote input signal (from far-end) is automatically added to all local outputs when a call is made, and automatically disconnected when the call is ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs, xStatus Audio
Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs, and xStatus Audio Input RemoteInput to see the remote input details.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput ConnectInput OutputId: OutputId InputId: InputId
[InputGain: InputGain ] where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local or remote input. The local input's ID was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command. The remote input's ID was generated automatically when the call was made.
InputGain :
Integer (-54..15)
Set the gain on the input signal. The gain can also be negative (attenuation). The value -54 dB equals Off.
Default value: 0 xCommand Audio LocalOutput DisconnectInput
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Disconnect a local or remote input from a local output. Note that the remote input signal (from far-end) is automatically disconnected when a call is ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs, xStatus Audio
Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs, and xStatus Audio Input RemoteInput to see the remote input details.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput DisconnectInput OutputId: OutputId InputId: InputId where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local or remote input. The local input's ID was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command. The remote input's ID was generated automatically when the call was made.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 264 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio LocalOutput Remove
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Remove the local output given by the output ID.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput Remove OutputId: OutputId where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Audio LocalOutput RemoveConnector
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Detach an output connector from the local output given by the output ID. You need to enter both the connector's type and number (ConnectorType, ConnectorId) to uniquely identify the connector.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput RemoveConnector OutputId: OutputId ConnectorType:
ConnectorType ConnectorId: ConnectorId where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
ConnectorType :
HDMI/Line [ SX80 CodecPro ]
HDMI/Line/InternalSpeaker [ MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70G2 ]
Select the connector type.
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..2) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..6) for a Line connector [ SX80 MX700/MX800/
MX800D ]
Integer (1..3) for an HDMI connector; Integer (1..6) for a line out connectors; Integer (1..1) for an HDMI with ARC (Audio Return Channel) connector [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Select a connector. The connectors' numbers are printed on the codec connector panel.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 265 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio LocalOutput Update
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Update the settings of the local output given by the output ID.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput Update OutputId: OutputId [Name: " Name "]
[AutoconnectRemote: AutoconnectRemote ] [Loudspeaker: Loudspeaker ] [Channels:
Channels ] [VolumeControlled: VolumeControlled ] where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
Name :
String (0, 255)
Choose a name that describes the local output.
AutoconnectRemote :
On/Off
On: The remote input signal is automatically added to the local output when in a call.
Off: The remote input signal is not added to the local output.
Loudspeaker :
On/Off
On: Choose On if at least one of the associated connectors are connected to a loudspeaker. This is important because it tells the echo canceler to use this signal as a reference signal.
Off: Choose Off if no loudspeaker is connected to the associated connectors. Note that only one of the local outputs should have a loudspeaker connected.
Channels :
Integer (1..2)
1: Mix the local and remote input signals into a mono signal.
2: Mix the local and remote input signals into a stereo signal.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 266
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
VolumeControlled :
On/Off
On: The volume will change according to the level set by the volume controls on the user interface, or the xCommand Audio Volume commands. If Loudspeaker is On,
VolumeControlled is forced to On no matter what you specify here.
Off: The volume is neither influenced by the volume controls on the user interface, nor the xCommand Audio Volume commands.
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus xCommand Audio LocalOutput UpdateInputGain
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Update the gain of a local or remote input that is connected to a local output. Note that the remote input signal (from far-end) is automatically added to all local outputs when a call is made, and automatically disconnected when the call is ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to get an overview of all local outputs, xStatus Audio
Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs, and xStatus Audio Input RemoteInput to see the remote input details.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. If you don't use Audio
Console, you need to manually add the command in a startup script, or use the macro framework, in order to make the definition persistent over a reboot.
USAGE: xCommand Audio LocalOutput UpdateInputGain OutputId: OutputId InputId: InputId
[InputGain: InputGain ] where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local output. It was generated when the local output was created with the xCommand Audio LocalOutput Add command.
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the local or remote input. The local input's ID was generated when the local input was created with the xCommand Audio LocalInput Add command. The remote input's ID was generated automatically when the call was made.
InputGain :
Integer (-54..15)
Set the gain on the input signal. The gain can also be negative (attenuation). The value -54 dB equals Off.
Default value: 0 xCommand Audio Microphones Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Mute all microphones.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Microphones Mute xCommand Audio Microphones ToggleMute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Toggle the microphone between muted and unmuted.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Microphones ToggleMute xCommand Audio Microphones Unmute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Unmute all microphones.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Microphones Unmute
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 267 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio RemoteOutput ConnectInput
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Connect an input to a remote output by giving their IDs as parameters. An input can be connected to any number of remote output gates, and any number of inputs can be connected to one remote output gate. Note that all local inputs are automatically added to all remote output gates when a call is made, and automatically disconnected when the call is ended.
Run xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. It is only applicable during a call.Connect an input to a remote output by giving their IDs as parameters. An input can be connected to any number of remote output gates, and any number of inputs can be connected to one remote output gate. Note that all local inputs are automatically added to all remote output gates when a call is made, and automatically disconnected when the call is ended.
Run xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. It is only applicable during a call.
USAGE: xCommand Audio RemoteOutput ConnectInput OutputId: OutputId InputId: InputId
[InputGain: InputGain ] where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the remote output. It was automatically generated when the call was made.
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the input. It was either generated when the input was created with the xCommand Audio Local Input Add command, or when the call was set up (remote input).
InputGain :
Integer (-54..15)
Set the gain on the input signal. The gain can also be negative (attenuation). The value -54 dB equals Off.
Default value: 0 xCommand Audio RemoteOutput DisconnectInput
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Disconnect an input from a remote output by giving their IDs as parameters. Note that the remote output is automatically removed when the call has ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput to get an overview of the remote outputs, and xStatus
Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. It is only applicable during a call.Disconnect an input from a remote output by giving their IDs as parameters. Note that the remote output is automatically removed when the call has ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput to get an overview of the remote outputs, and xStatus
Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. It is only applicable during a call.
USAGE: xCommand Audio RemoteOutput DisconnectInput OutputId: OutputId InputId: InputId where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the remote output. It was automatically generated when the call was made.
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the input. It was either generated when the input was created with the xCommand Audio Local Input Add command, or when the call was set up (remote input).
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 268 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio RemoteOutput UpdateInputGain
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Update the gain of an input that is connected to a remote output. Note that the remote output is automatically removed when the call has ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput to get an overview of the remote outputs, and xStatus
Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. It is only applicable during a call.Update the gain of an input that is connected to a remote output. Note that the remote output is automatically removed when the call has ended.
Run xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput to get an overview of the remote outputs, and xStatus
Audio Input LocalInput to get an overview of all local inputs.
This command is mainly intended for internal use by the Audio Console. It is only applicable during a call.
USAGE: xCommand Audio RemoteOutput UpdateInputGain OutputId: OutputId InputId: InputId
[InputGain: InputGain ] where
OutputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the remote output. It was automatically generated when the call was made.
InputId :
Integer (0..65534)
The unique identifier of the input. It was either generated when the input was created with the xCommand Audio Local Input Add command, or when the call was set up (remote input).
InputGain :
Integer (-54..15)
Set the gain on the input signal. The gain can also be negative (attenuation). The value -54 dB equals Off.
Default value: 0 xCommand Audio Select
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Select which type of audio device to use (built-in loudspeakers and microphone, headsets, or handset).
USAGE: xCommand Audio Select Device: Device where
Device :
Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetAnalog/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB
Choose whether to use the built-in loudspeakers and microphone (internal), a Bluetooth headset (DX70 and DX only), an analog headset (DX70 only), a USB headset, or a USB handset.
xCommand Audio Setup Clear
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Remove all local inputs and local outputs.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Setup Clear xCommand Audio Setup Reset
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
This command resets the audio setup of the video conferencing device (as set up using the
Audio Console application or API commands). In effect it removes all local inputs and local outputs, sets connectors and groups back to their default values, and rebuilds the audio setup the same way as after a restart.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Setup Reset
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 269 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio Sound Play
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Play a specified audio sound.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Sound Play [Loop: Loop ] Sound: Sound where
Loop :
Off/On
Determines whether or not to loop the playout of the audio sound. The sound is looped by default. Irrespective of how this parameter is set, some of the sounds (Busy, CallWaiting,
Dial, Ringing, and SpecialInfo) will play until the Audio Sound Stop command is issued.
Default value: Off
Sound :
Alert/Announcement/Binding/Bump/Busy/CallDisconnect/CallInitiate/CallWaiting/
Dial/KeyInput/KeyInputDelete/KeyTone/Nav/NavBack/Notification/OK/Pairing/
PresentationConnect/Ringing/SignIn/SpecialInfo/StartListening/TelephoneCall/VideoCall/
VolumeAdjust/WakeUp
Choose which ringtone to play.
xCommand Audio SpeakerCheck
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Runs a test that you can use to check that all the internal speakers are connected correctly.
A test tone will be emitted from each speaker in sequence, from left to right. If the speakers don't play in correct order, reconnect the loudspeaker cables to obtain the correct sequence.
All speakers are part of the test sequence, and you must be in the same room as the device to verify that the test sequence plays correctly.
The device uses the connected microphones to listen for the test signal, and the result of the test is returned in the API.
USAGE: xCommand Audio SpeakerCheck [MeasurementLength: MeasurementLength ] [Volume:
Volume ] where
MeasurementLength :
Integer (1..5)
Test signal duration for each speaker in seconds.
Default value: 1
Volume :
Integer (1..30)
Test signal level.
Default value: 1 xCommand Audio Sound Stop
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Stop playing audio sound.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Sound Stop xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone List
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
List all available ringtones. Use the xConfiguration Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone setting to choose a ringtone.
USAGE: xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone List
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 270 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Play one of the available ringtones. Use the xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone List command to get a list of the available ringtones.
USAGE: xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play [Loop: Loop ] RingTone: " RingTone " where
Loop :
On/Off
Repeats the chosen ringtone in a loop. To turn off the audio, use the Audio
SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Stop xCommand.
Default value: Off
RingTone :
String (1, 100)
The name of the ringtone.
xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Stop
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Stops the chosen ringtone from playing. To start playing the ringtone again, use the Audio
SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play xCommand.
USAGE: xCommand Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Stop xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio Volume Decrease
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Decrease the volume on the video conferencing device. By default, the volume is decreased by 5 steps (each step is 0.5 dB). Use the Steps parameter if you want to override the default behavior.
Note that DX70, DX80, Desk Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, and Room 55 have several audio units: built-in loudspeakers, headsets, and handset. This command affects only one unit at a time. You can use the optional Device parameter to specify which audio unit to address.
The most recently selected unit is chosen if you don't specify a unit (see xStatus Audio
SelectedDevice). Also refer to xCommand Audio Select.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume Decrease [Device: Device ] [Steps: Steps ] where
Device :
[ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetAnalog/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ DX70/DX80 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 ]
Choose whether to decrease the volume on the built-in loudspeakers, a Bluetooth headset
(only Desk Pro, DX70, and DX80), an analog headset (only Desk Pro and DX70), a USB headset, or a USB handset.
Steps :
Integer (1..10)
Choose the number of steps to decrease the volume with. One step is 0.5 dB.
Default value: 5
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 271 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio Volume Increase
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Increase the volume on the video conferencing device. By default, the volume is increased by 5 steps (each step is 0.5 dB). Use the Steps parameter if you want to override the default behavior.
Note that DX70, DX80, Desk Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, and Room 55 have several audio units: built-in loudspeakers, headsets, and handset. This command affects only one unit at a time. You can use the optional Device parameter to specify which audio unit to address.
The most recently selected unit is chosen if you don't specify a unit (see xStatus Audio
SelectedDevice). Also refer to xCommand Audio Select.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume Increase [Device: Device ] [Steps: Steps ] where
Device :
[ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetAnalog/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ DX70/DX80 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 ]
Choose whether to increase the volume on the built-in loudspeakers, a Bluetooth headset
(only Desk Pro, DX70, and DX80), an analog headset (only Desk Pro and DX70), a USB headset, or a USB handset.
Steps :
Integer (1..10)
Choose the number of steps to increase the volume with. One step is 0.5 dB.
Default value: 5 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Audio Volume Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Mute the volume on the video conferencing device.
Note that DX70, DX80, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, and Room 55 have several audio units: built-in loudspeakers, headsets, and handset. This command affects only the selected audio unit. Refer to the xStatus Audio SelectedDevice and xCommand Audio Select commands for more information about the selected unit.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume Mute xCommand Audio Volume Set
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the volume on the video conferencing device to a specified level.
Note that DX70, DX80, Desk Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, and Room 55 have several audio units: built-in loudspeakers, headsets, and handset. This command affects only one unit at a time. You can use the optional Device parameter to specify which unit to address. The most recently selected unit is chosen if you don't specify a unit (see xStatus Audio SelectedDevice).
Also refer to xCommand Audio Select.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume Set [Device: Device ] Level: Level where
Device :
[ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetAnalog/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ DX70/DX80 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 ]
Choose whether to set the volume on the built-in loudspeakers, a Bluetooth headset (only
Desk Pro, DX70, and DX80), an analog headset (only Desk Pro and DX70), a USB headset, or a USB handset.
Level :
Integer (0..100)
Select the gain level. 70 equals 0 dB gain, and 100 equals 15 dB gain.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 272 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio Volume SetToDefault
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the volume to the default level that is defined in the xConfiguration Audio DefaultVolume setting.
Note that DX70, DX80, Desk Pro, Room Kit, Room Kit Mini, and Room 55 have several audio unit: built-in loudspeakers, headsets, and handset. This command affects only one unit at a time. You can use the optional Device parameter to specify which audio unit to address.
The most recently selected unit is chosen if you don't specify a unit (see xStatus Audio
SelectedDevice). Also refer to xCommand Audio Select.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume SetToDefault [Device: Device ] where
Device :
[ DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro ]
Internal/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 ]
Internal/HeadsetBluetooth/HeadsetAnalog/HeadsetUSB/HandsetUSB [ DX70/DX80 DeskPro ]
Choose whether to set the volume on the built-in loudspeakers, a Bluetooth headset (only
Desk Pro, DX70, and DX80), an analog headset (only Desk Pro and DX70), a USB headset, or a USB handset.
xCommand Audio Volume ToggleMute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Toggle the loudspeaker between muted and unmuted.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume ToggleMute xStatus xCommand Audio Volume Unmute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the volume on the device back on after muting.
USAGE: xCommand Audio Volume Unmute
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 273 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio VuMeter Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Start a VU meter to show the audio signal level on the specified connector. You have to specify both the connector's type and number (ConnectorType, ConnectorId) to uniquely identify the connector. The VU meter measures the input level for frequencies below 20 kHz.
USAGE: xCommand Audio VuMeter Start ConnectorID: ConnectorID ConnectorType:
ConnectorType [IncludePairingQuality: IncludePairingQuality ] [IntervalMs:
IntervalMs ] where
ConnectorID :
Integer (1..8) for Microphone; Integer (1..4) for Line; Integer (1..3) for HDMI [ SX80 MX700/
MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..8) for Microphone; Integer (1..5) for HDMI [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..2) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for Line [ SX20 ]
Integer (1..2) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for HDMI [ SX10 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/
Room55D ]
Integer (1..1) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for HDMI [ RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (1..3) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for Line; Integer (1..2) for HDMI [ MX200G2/
MX300G2 ]
Integer(1..1) [ DX70/DX80 ]
Select a connector number.
Note the following if the ConnectorType is Microphone: If the device has a built-in microphone, that microphone will be Microphone [1]. The external microphones connected to the input connectors starts from Microphone [2]. For DX70 and DX80, Microphone
[1] refers to the selected audio device, which may be either the built-in microphone, or a connected headset or handset. Refer to the xStatus Audio SelectedDevice and xCommand Audio Select commands for more information about the selected device.
ConnectorType :
HDMI/Line/Microphone [ SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Line/Microphone [ SX20 ]
HDMI/Microphone [ DX70/DX80 SX10 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 ]
HDMI/Microphone/MicArray [ DeskPro Boards ]
Select the connector type.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
IncludePairingQuality :
Off/On
The device can measure the pairing quality (value 0 to 100). With no other ultrasound sources in the same room this value will be high, but if there are other ultrasound sources in the same room the value will be low. To monitor the pairing quality, sign in to the device's web interface, navigate to Setup > Peripherals > Microphones and tick the Show
Pairing Rate check box. Or, use the xFeedback and xEvents commands to monitor the value. Read more about the xFeedback and xEvents commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
Default value: Off
IntervalMs :
10..1000
Specifies the update interval in milliseconds of the VuMeter values. The values can be specified in 10 ms steps.
Default value: 100
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 274 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Audio VuMeter Stop
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Stop the VU meter on the specified connector. You have to specify both the connector's type and number (ConnectorType, ConnectorId) to uniquely identify the connector.
USAGE: xCommand Audio VuMeter Stop ConnectorID: ConnectorID ConnectorType:
ConnectorType where
ConnectorID :
Integer (1..8) for Microphone; Integer (1..4) for Line; Integer (1..3) for HDMI [ SX80 MX700/
MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..8) for Microphone; Integer (1..5) for HDMI [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..2) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for Line [ SX20 ]
Integer (1..2) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for HDMI [ SX10 RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/
Room55D ]
Integer (1..1) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for HDMI [ RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (1..3) for Microphone; Integer (1..1) for Line; Integer (1..2) for HDMI [ MX200G2/
MX300G2 ]
Integer(1..1) [ DX70/DX80 ]
Select a connector number.
Note the following if the ConnectorType is Microphone: If the device has a built-in microphone, that microphone will be Microphone [1]. The external microphones connected to the input connectors starts from Microphone [2]. For DX70 and DX80, Microphone
[1] refers to the selected audio device, which may be either the built-in microphone, or a connected headset or handset. Refer to the xStatus Audio SelectedDevice and xCommand Audio Select commands for more information about the selected device.
ConnectorType :
HDMI/Line/Microphone [ SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Line/Microphone [ SX20 ]
HDMI/Microphone [ DX70/DX80 SX10 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 ]
HDMI/Microphone/MicArray [ DeskPro Boards ]
Select the connector type.
xCommand Audio VuMeter StopAll
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Stop all VU meters.
USAGE: xCommand Audio VuMeter StopAll xStatus
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 275
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Bookings commands
xCommand Bookings Clear
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Clear the current stored list of bookings.
USAGE: xCommand Bookings Clear xCommand Bookings Get
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Get the booking information for a specific ID.
USAGE: xCommand Bookings Get Id: " Id " where
Id :
String (0, 128)
The booking ID of a call or conference.
xConfiguration
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Bookings List
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
List the stored bookings for the device. The list of booking details is received from the management system. All parameters are optional, and can be used to limit the search result.
If no parameters are set, past, present and future bookings are all listed. To avoid listing bookings from yesterday and before, use DayOffset = 0.
USAGE: xCommand Bookings List [Days: Days ] [DayOffset: DayOffset ] [Limit: Limit ]
[Offset: Offset ] where
Days :
Integer (1..365)
Number of days to retrieve bookings from.
DayOffset :
Integer (0..365)
Which day to start the search from (today: 0, tomorrow: 1, …).
Default value: 0
Limit :
Integer (1..65534)
Max number of bookings to list.
Offset :
Integer (0..65534)
Offset number of bookings for this search.
Default value: 0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 276 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Bookings NotificationSnooze
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Sets notifications for the stored bookings in this device to snooze.
USAGE: xCommand Bookings NotificationSnooze [Id: " Id "] [SecondsToSnooze:
SecondsToSnooze ] where
Id :
String (0, 128)
The ID of the notification snooze setting.
SecondsToSnooze :
Integer (1..3600)
The duration of the snooze period, in seconds.
Default value: 300 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Call commands
xCommand Call Accept
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Accept an incoming call. If no CallId is specified, all incoming calls are accepted.
USAGE: xCommand Call Accept [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During the call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: 0 xCommand Call Disconnect
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN,INTEGRATOR, USER
Disconnect a call.
USAGE: xCommand Call Disconnect [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During the call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: 0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 277 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Call DTMFSend
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Send DTMF tones to the far end.
USAGE: xCommand Call DTMFSend [CallId: CallId ] DTMFString: " DTMFString " where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During the call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: -1
DTMFString :
String (0, 32)
Enter the DTMF string.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Call FarEndControl Camera Move
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Move the far end camera (the remote camera).
NOTE: The far end camera moves in the specified direction until the stop command (ref: xCommand FarEndControl Camera Stop) is issued.
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndControl Camera Move [CallId: CallId ] Value: Value where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During the call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: -1
Value :
Left/Right/Up/Down/ZoomIn/ZoomOut
Select the action for how to move the camera.
xCommand Call FarEndControl Camera Stop
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Stop the far end camera after the xCommand FarEndControl Camera Move has been issued.
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndControl Camera Stop [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: -1
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 278 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Call FarEndControl RoomPreset Activate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
While in a call, this command is used to activate a preset on the far end codec. The preset covers the far end codec's camera positions and input video switcher settings.
The preset must be stored on the far end codec beforehand, either by using the xCommand
Preset Store command locally on the far end codec, or by using the xCommand FarEndControl
Preset Store command from a remote codec.
Note: The far end codec's xConfiguration Conference FarEndControl Mode setting must be switched On for the FarEndControl commands to work.
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndControl RoomPreset Activate [CallId: CallId ] PresetId:
PresetId where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallId is required to identify the far end codec only when in a Multipoint call. The
CallId is returned when issuing the xCommand Dial command. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: -1
PresetId :
Integer (1..15)
The ID of the preset that is stored on the far end codec.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Call FarEndControl Source Select
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Select which video input source to use as the main source on the far end device.
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndControl Source Select [CallId: CallId ] SourceId: SourceId where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: -1
SourceId :
Integer (0..15)
Select a video input source on the far end.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 279 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Send data between two codecs in a point-to-point call, for use with control systems or macros.
Works with SIP calls only. Requires that the Conference FarEndMessage Mode is set to On.
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send Text: " Text " Type: " Type " [CallId: CallId ] where
Text :
String (1, 1450)
Enter the message to be sent to the far end.
Type :
String (0, 255)
Enter the message type to be sent to the far end.
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
xCommand Call FarEndMessage SStringSend
Applies to:
SX80
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Send data between two codecs in a point-to-point call, for use with control systems or macros.
Works with H.323 and SIP calls. Uses the H.224 data channel (UDP). We recommend to use the new version of the command: xCommand Call FarEndMessage Send.
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndMessage SStringSend Message: " Message " [CallId: CallId ] where
Message :
String (0, 255)
Enter the message to be sent to the far end.
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
xCommand Call FarEndMessage TStringSend
Applies to: SX80
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Send data between two codecs in a point-to-point call, for use with control systems or macros.
Works with H.323 calls only. Uses the H.245 control channel (TCP).
USAGE: xCommand Call FarEndMessage TStringSend Message: " Message " CallId: CallId where
Message :
String (0, 255)
Enter the message to be sent to the far end.
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 280 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Call Forward
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Specifies what number or URI you want to forward your incoming calls to. The display name is a local reference for the forwarded destination. A message, together with the local reference, is shown on screen when you have configured the device to forward all calls.
USAGE: xCommand Call Forward DisplayName: " DisplayName " Number: " Number " where
DisplayName :
String (0, 255)
The local reference for the forwarded destination.
Number :
String (0, 255)
The directory number or URI which you want to forward the incoming calls to.
xCommand Call Ignore
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Turns off the ringtone for the incoming call. The call can still be answered.
USAGE: xCommand Call Ignore CallId: CallId where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
xCommand Call Hold
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Put a call on hold.
USAGE: xCommand Call Hold [CallId: CallId ] [Reason: Reason ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: 0
Reason :
Conference/Transfer/Other
Internal usage only.
Default value: Other xCommand Call Join
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Internal usage only.
USAGE: xCommand Call Join [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
You can have from 1 to 10 CallId parameters in the same command.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 281 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Call Reject
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reject incoming call. If no call id is specified, all incoming calls are rejected.
USAGE: xCommand Call Reject [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: 0 xCommand Call Resume
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Resume a call that have been put on hold.
USAGE: xCommand Call Resume [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Default value: 0
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Call UnattendedTransfer
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Transfers an ongoing call to another participant. Fully supported for SIP calls only.
USAGE: xCommand Call UnattendedTransfer CallId: CallId Number: " Number " where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
The CallID is returned when the xCommand Dial command is run. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the CallId.
Number :
String (0, 255)
The number the call is transfered to.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 282 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
CallHistory commands
xConfiguration xCommand CallHistory AcknowledgeAllMissedCalls
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Turns off the missed calls indicator on the touch controller for all missed calls.
USAGE: xCommand CallHistory AcknowledgeAllMissedCalls xCommand CallHistory AcknowledgeMissedCall
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Turns off the missed calls indicator on the touch controller for the specified call.
USAGE: xCommand CallHistory AcknowledgeMissedCall CallHistoryId: CallHistoryId
[AcknowledgeConsecutiveDuplicates: AcknowledgeConsecutiveDuplicates ] where
CallHistoryId :
Integer (1..2147483647)
CallHistoryId for the call in question. Run xCommand CallHistory Get to get the id number.
AcknowledgeConsecutiveDuplicates :
False/True
You can include or exclude all surrounding calls with duplicate information.
Default value: False xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand CallHistory DeleteAll
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Deletes all information on previous calls.
USAGE: xCommand CallHistory DeleteAll [Filter: Filter ] where
Filter :
All/Missed/Placed/Received
You can filter which calls to delete.
Default value: All xCommand CallHistory DeleteEntry
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Deletes all information on the specified call.
USAGE: xCommand CallHistory DeleteEntry CallHistoryId: CallHistoryId
[DeleteConsecutiveDuplicates: DeleteConsecutiveDuplicates ] where
CallHistoryId :
Integer (1..2147483647)
CallHistoryId for the call in question. Run xCommand CallHistory Get to get the id number.
DeleteConsecutiveDuplicates :
False/True
You can delete the surrounding calls with duplicate information or not.
Default value: False
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 283 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand CallHistory Get
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Retrieve all information on previous calls made on the device.
USAGE: xCommand CallHistory Get [Filter: Filter ] [Offset: Offset ] [Limit: Limit ]
[DetailLevel: DetailLevel ] [SearchString: " SearchString "] [CallHistoryId:
CallHistoryId ] where
Filter :
All/Missed/AnsweredElsewhere/Forwarded/Placed/Pmr/NoAnswer/Received/Rejected/
UnacknowledgedMissed
You can filter which calls to retrieve. Pmr refers to a personal meeting room.
Default value: All
Offset :
Integer (0..65534)
Sets the call from which to start.
Default value: 0
Limit :
Integer (0..65534)
Defines the amount of calls in the output.
Default value: 65534
DetailLevel :
Basic/Full
Sets the level of detail for the information on these calls.
Default value: Basic
SearchString :
String ( 0, 255)
Allows you to set the command to apply to a specified display name or call back number.
Default value: ""
CallHistoryId :
Integer (1..2147483647)
CallHistoryId for the call in question.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand CallHistory Recents
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Retrieve aggregated information on previous calls made on the device.
USAGE: xCommand CallHistory Recents [Filter: Filter ] [Offset: Offset ] [Limit: Limit ]
[DetailLevel: DetailLevel ] [SearchString: " SearchString "] [Order: Order ] where
Filter :
All/Missed/AnsweredElsewhere/Forwarded/Placed/Pmr/NoAnswer/Received/Rejected/
UnacknowledgedMissed
You can filter which calls to retrieve. Pmr refers to a personal meeting room.
Default value: All
Offset :
Integer (0..65534)
Sets the call from which to start.
Default value: 0
Limit :
Integer (0..65534)
Defines the amount of calls in the output.
Default value: 65534
DetailLevel :
Basic/Full
Sets the level of detail for the information on these calls.
Default value: Basic
SearchString :
String (0, 255)
Allows you to set the command to apply to a specified display name or call back number.
Default value: ""
Order :
OccurrenceTime/OccurrenceFrequency
Define the order in which the previous calls are presented.
Default value: OccurrenceTime
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 284 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Camera commands
xConfiguration xCommand Camera PositionReset
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Reset the camera position to default position.
USAGE: xCommand Camera PositionReset [Axis: Axis ] CameraId: CameraId where
Axis :
All/Focus/PanTilt/Zoom
Select which function to reset. If not specified all are reset.
Default value: All
CameraId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
The ID of the camera preset you want to reset.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Camera PositionSet
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Set the camera position. If the combination of the pan, tilt, zoom, and roll values is not possible, the camera automatically adjusts the values to a valid combination.
USAGE: xCommand Camera PositionSet CameraId: CameraId [Focus: Focus ] [Lens: Lens ] [Pan:
Pan ] [Roll: Roll ] [Tilt: Tilt ] [Zoom: Zoom ] where
CameraId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
The ID of the camera preset you want to reset.
Focus :
Integer (0..65535)
Focus the camera near or far.
Lens :
Wide/Center/Left/Right
Set the camera's lens position.
Pan :
Integer (-10000..10000)
Move the camera to the left or right.
Roll :
[ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (-300..300)
Rotate the camera view. The observed image rotates counterclockwise when the value is positive, and clockwise when the value is negative. The unit is 1/100 degree, that is 300 corresponds to 3 degrees.
Tilt :
Integer (-2500..2500)
Move the camera up or down.
Zoom :
Integer (0..11800)
Zoom in or out.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 285 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Camera Preset Activate
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Activate one of the stored camera presets.
Note that the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to an individual camera. This is in contrast to the xCommand Preset commands where a single preset covers ALL connected cameras plus the Video Input switcher settings.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset Activate PresetId: PresetId where
PresetId :
Integer (1..35)
The ID of the camera preset you want to activate.
xCommand Camera Preset ActivateDefaultPosition
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Sets the cameras to their default position, if one is defined. The default position is defined by xCommand Camera Preset Store or by xCommand Camera Preset Edit. Only one default position can be defined per camera.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset ActivateDefaultPosition [CameraId: CameraId ] where
CameraId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
The ID of the camera preset you want to activate. If CameraId is not specified, all cameras will be set in their respective default position, if one is defined.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Camera Preset Edit
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Edit a stored camera preset. You can change the name of the camera preset and its position in the list that is returned by the xCommand Camera Preset List command. You can also change whether or not this preset is the default position for the associated camera.
Note that the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to an individual camera. This is in contrast to the xCommand Preset commands where a single preset covers ALL connected cameras and the Video Input switcher settings.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset Edit PresetId: PresetId [ListPosition: ListPosition ]
[Name: " Name "] [DefaultProsition: DefaultProsition ] where
PresetId :
Integer (1..35)
The ID of the camera preset you want to edit.
ListPosition :
Integer (1..35)
The position in the list returned by the xCommand Camera Preset List command.
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the camera preset. It will be used in the list returned by the xCommand
Camera Preset List command.
DefaultProsition :
False/True
Defines whether or not this preset is the default position for the associated camera. Note that each camera can only have one default position, so if set, the old default preset will automatically be marked as not default.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 286 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Camera Preset List
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
List information about available camera presets.
Note that the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to an individual camera. This is in contrast to the xCommand Preset commands where a single preset covers ALL connected cameras plus the Video Input switcher settings.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset List [CameraId: CameraId ] [DefaultPosition:
DefaultPosition ] where
CameraId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Only list presets for the specified camera.
DefaultPosition :
False/True
List default positions only, or only those that are not default positions.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Camera Preset Remove
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Remove a camera preset.
Note that the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to an individual camera. This is in contrast to the xCommand Preset commands where a single preset covers ALL connected cameras plus the Video Input switcher settings.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset Remove PresetId: PresetId where
PresetId :
Integer (1..35)
The ID of the camera preset you want to remove.
xCommand Camera Preset Show
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the preset details for the requested PresetId.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset Show PresetId: PresetId where
PresetId :
Integer (1..35)
The ID of the camera preset you wish to see.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 287 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Camera Preset Store
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Store the current position (pan and tilt), zoom and focus of the chosen camera. The camera is identified by the CameraId parameter.
Note that the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to an individual camera. This is in contrast to the xCommand Preset commands where a single preset covers ALL connected cameras plus the Video Input switcher settings. The xCommand Camera Preset commands are useful when you want to handle multiple camera positions individually per camera, rather than working with complete sets of camera positions. The individual camera presets are not available for far end control.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Preset Store [PresetId: PresetId ] CameraId: CameraId
[ListPosition: ListPosition ] [Name: " Name "] [TakeSnapshot: TakeSnapshot ]
[DefaultProsition: DefaultProsition ] where
PresetId :
Integer (1..35)
The ID of this camera preset. If not set explicitly, the codec will assign a preset ID automatically.
CameraId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Select the camera for which to store the preset position.
ListPosition :
Integer (1..35)
The new camera preset's position in the list returned by the xCommand Camera Preset
List command.
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the new camera preset. It will be used in the list returned by the xCommand
Camera Preset List command.
TakeSnapshot :
False/True
Allow or disallow snapshot of the preview.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 288
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
DefaultProsition :
False/True
Defines whether or not this preset shall be the default position of the associated camera.
Note that each camera can hold only one default position, so if set, the old default preset will automatically be marked as not default.
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Camera Ramp
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Move the camera in a specified direction. The camera moves at specified speed until a stop command is issued. In a daisy chain, you need to know the CameraId for the camera you want to address. Be aware that pan and tilt can be operated simultaneously, but no other combinations. In the latter case only the first operation specified is executed. For example, if you try to run both zoom and pan at the same time, only zoom is executed.
NOTE: You must run a stop command to stop the camera, see the example below.
USAGE: xCommand Camera Ramp CameraId: CameraId [Pan: Pan ] [PanSpeed: PanSpeed ] [Tilt:
Tilt ] [TiltSpeed: TiltSpeed ] [Zoom: Zoom ] [ZoomSpeed: ZoomSpeed ] [Focus: Focus] where
CameraId :
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards ]
Select the camera.
Pan :
Left/Right/Stop
Move the camera to the Left or Right, followed by Stop.
PanSpeed :
Integer (1..15)
Set the pan speed.
Tilt :
Down/Up/Stop
Move the camera Up or Down, followed by Stop.
TiltSpeed :
Integer (1..15)
Set the tilt speed.
Zoom :
In/Out/Stop
Zoom the camera In or Out, followed by Stop.
ZoomSpeed : xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Integer (1..15)
Set the zoom speed.
Focus :
Far/Near/Stop
Focus the camera Far or Near, followed by Stop.
xCommand Camera TriggerAutofocus
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Trigger the auto-focus functionality. The camera must support auto-focus functionality. If the camera is daisy chained, the CameraId is given by its place in the chain.
USAGE: xCommand Camera TriggerAutofocus CameraId: CameraId where
CameraId :
Integer (1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 DeskPro ]
Select the camera to auto-focus.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 289 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Cameras commands
xConfiguration xCommand Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Start
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Start diagnostics on auto focus.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Start CameraId: CameraId where
CameraId :
1..7
Select which camera to diagnose.
xCommand Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Stop
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Stop diagnostics on auto focus.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Stop CameraId: CameraId where
CameraId :
1..7
Select which camera to diagnose.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Cameras Background Set
Applies to:
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Specify the camera background settings. The Cameras Background Enabled configuration must be True for this command to take effect.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras Background Set [Image: Image ] [Mode: Mode ] where
Image :
Image1/Image2/Image3
The image to use as the background. For the image to be shown, the "xCommand
Cameras Background Set Mode" must be set to "Image".
Image 1-3 is a set of pre-installed images.
Image1 = Office space
Image2 = Home office
Image3 = Beach
Mode :
[]
Disabled/Blur/BlurMonochrome/DepthOfField/Monochrome/Image
The mode for the background image. Options include:
Disabled: There are no images or effects masking the background of the camera view.
Blur: The background is blurred.
BlurMonochrome: combination of blur and monochrome (blurred without colors)
DepthOfField: variant of blur with less blurring
Monochrome: Shows the image in grayscale
Image: The background is replaced by the selected background image.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 290 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack ClearPosition
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Clear the stored presenter tracking camera position for the overview image of the stage. The
PresenterTrack feature will still work after the camera position has been cleared, but the camera will not view a predefined position upon activation.
For SX80 and Codec Pro: This setting applies only when using a Precision 60 camera or
SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack ClearPosition xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack Set
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Set the presenter tracking mode.
This command takes effect only if the PresenterTrack feature is enabled. Sign in to the device's web interface and use the Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled setting to enable or disable the feature.
For SX80 and Codec Pro: This setting applies only when using a Precision 60 camera or
SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack Set Mode: Mode where
Mode :
Off/Follow/Diagnostic/Background/Setup/Persistent
Off: Turn off presenter tracking.
Follow: Turn on presenter tracking. This is the default mode when the feature is activated from the Touch user interface. Presenter tracking is automatically turned off when camera moves to a different preset, when another camera is selected, or when standby is activated.
Diagnostic: Turn on diagnostic mode in order to troubleshoot presenter tracking, or to see exactly what happens on the device screen. In diagnostics mode there are several activities on the screen. The screen will show the overview image, and the rectangles/squares listed below will be visible:
* RED: The trigger zone.
* YELLOW: The cropped image of the presenter. Visible only when a face is being tracked.
* GREEN: Indicates that a face is detected and that it is tracked.
* GREEN BLINKING FILLED: Indicates a positive face detection. If the tracked individual does not get a valid face-read the square becomes red.
* RED BLINKING FILLED: Indicates a false face detection. After some seconds the tracking stops.
* BLUE: A face is detected but the face is not tracked.
Background: This setting is used by the codec's internal scripts. Turns on presenter tracking with no cropping of the image.
Setup: This setting is used by the codec's web interface to show the trigger zone on the device screen when setting up the PresenterTrack feature.
Persistent: This setting is used by the codec's internal scripts. Turns on presenter tracking
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 291 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices in persistent mode. Persitent mode is automatically turned off when camera moves to a different preset.
xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack StorePosition
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Store the current position of the presenter tracking camera for the overview image of the stage.
The presenter tracking camera will move to this position when activating the feature.
For SX80 and Codec Pro: This setting applies only when using a Precision 60 camera or
SpeakerTrack 60 camera.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras PresenterTrack StorePosition xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Deactivate
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Deactivate SpeakerTrack or Best Overview mode.
This command applies only to devices with cameras that support speaker tracking or best overview.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Deactivate xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Activate
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Activate SpeakerTrack or Best Overview mode. Requires that xConfiguration Cameras
SpeakerTrack Mode is set to Auto (default).
This command applies only to devices with cameras that support speaker tracking or best overview.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Activate xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Start
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Starts diagnostics on the camera's tracking.
This command applies only to devices with cameras that support speaker tracking or best overview.
The Tracking parameter only applies to the SpeakerTrack 60 camera and MX700/MX800 with dual camera.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Start [Tracking: Tracking ] where
Tracking :
On/Off
On: Displays diagnostics from both cameras simultaneously. In this mode the tracking is determined by who is talking in the room identical to SpeakerTrack's standard behavior.
Off: Displays diagnostics from one camera at a time. Diagnostics is switched from one camera to the other in 15 seconds intervals, and camera related diagnostics are shown for the active camera. Both cameras stay in full wide position. Use Tracking: Off when you wish to see the tracking diagnostics from one camera at a time.
Default value: On
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 292 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Stop
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Stops diagnostics on the camera's tracking.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Stop xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard ActivatePosition
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Moves the specified camera to the position stored with xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack
Whiteboard StorePosition.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard ActivatePosition CameraId: CameraId
[WhiteboardId: WhiteboardId ] where
CameraId :
Integer(1..1) [ RoomKit Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Integer(1..2) [ CodecPlus ]
Integer(1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
The ID of the camera that is being positioned.
WhiteboardId :
Integer (1..8)
The id set for the camera position used for the snap-to-whiteboard feature. Currently only id 1 can be used.
Default value: 1 xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard AlignPosition
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Only applicable for MX700 and MX800 with a dual camera, and for SX80 and Codec Pro with a
SpeakerTrack 60 camera. Not applicable for any other products.
Align the position of the second camera to the first camera's stored position. You must also set the distance to a whiteboard.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard AlignPosition CameraId: CameraId
Distance: Distance where
CameraId :
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer(1..7)
The ID of the camera that is being positioned.
Distance :
[ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (300..1500)
Set distance to whiteboard in centimeters. Use an accurate measurement for the feature to work seamlessly.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 293 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard SetDistance
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the cameras distance to the whiteboard. This information is needed by the camera to frame the whiteboard automatically.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard SetDistance Distance: Distance
[WhiteboardId: WhiteboardId ] where
Distance :
Integer (0..65534)
Set distance to whiteboard in centimeters. Use an accurate measurement for the feature to work seamlessly.
WhiteboardId :
Integer (1..8)
The id set for the camera position used for the snap-to-whiteboard feature. Currently only id 1 can be used.
Default value: 1 xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard StorePosition
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D
Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Store the position of the specified camera as the Snap to Whiteboard position. Frame the image so that there is room around the whiteboard for the speaker. To use the Snap to Whiteboard feature it must be enabled with xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode and tracking must be enabled with xConfiguration Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode.
Note: For MX700 and MX800 with a dual camera, and for SX80 and Codec Pro with a
SpeakerTrack 60 camera, you must store a snap-to-whiteboard position for both cameras.
USAGE: xCommand Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard StorePosition CameraId: CameraId
[WhiteboardId: WhiteboardId ] where
CameraId :
Integer(1..1) [ RoomKit Room55 Room70/Room55D ]
Integer(1..2) [ CodecPlus ]
Integer(1..7) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
The ID of the camera that is being positioned.
WhiteboardId :
Integer (1..8)
You can give the position an id number. Currently the only id that can be used is 1.
Default value: 1
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 294 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Conference commands
xCommand Conference Call AuthenticationResponse
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command is only available for Cisco Webex registered devices. The command gives a response to an authentication request based on the Conference Call[n] AuthenticationRequest status.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Call AuthenticationResponse [CallId: CallId ]
ParticipantRole: ParticipantRole [Pin: Pin ] where
CallId :
Integer (1..65534)
Unique identifier of the call. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the
CallId.
Default value: 0
ParticipantRole :
Host/Panelist/Guest
Host: Join as host.
Panelist: Join as panelist.
Guest: Join as guest.
Pin :
String(0, 32)
PIN code. Must be provided if joining as host, panelist or as guest when the Conference
Call[n] AuthenticationRequest status indicates that a PIN code must provided.
Default value: "" xCommand Conference DoNotDisturb Activate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
This command switches on the Do Not Disturb mode, and the Timeout parameter allows you to control when it is switched off again. When Do Not Disturb is switched on, all incoming calls are rejected and registered as missed calls. The calling side receives a busy signal.
USAGE: xCommand Conference DoNotDisturb Activate [Timeout: Timeout ] where
Timeout :
Integer (1..1440)
Set the number of minutes before Do Not Disturb is switched off. If not set, Do Not Disturb times out after 1440 minutes (24 hours).
xCommand Conference DoNotDisturb Deactivate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Switch off the Do Not Disturb mode. When Do Not Disturb is switched off incoming calls come through as normal.
USAGE: xCommand Conference DoNotDisturb Deactivate
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 295 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Conference Participant Admit
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Admits or lets in a participant that is waiting to be admitted into the call or meeting. This command is only available Cisco Webex registered devices.
A participant is waiting to be admitted if he has status "waiting" in the result from the
Conference ParticipantList Search command (*r ParticipantListSearchResult Participant [n]
Status = "waiting").
USAGE: xCommand Conference Participant Admit CallId: CallId ParticipantId:
" ParticipantId " where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
Unique identifier of the call. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the
CallId.
ParticipantId :
String (0, 255)
Unique identifier of a participant in the call.
xCommand Conference Participant Disconnect
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Disconnects the participant from a call or meeting. It is only possible to disconnect a participant if the Conference Call[n] Capabilities ParticipantDisconnect status for the meeting shows
Available.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Participant Disconnect CallId: CallId ParticipantId:
" ParticipantId " where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
Unique identifier of the call. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the
CallId.
ParticipantId :
String (0, 255)
Unique identifier of a participant in the call.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 296 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Conference Participant Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Mutes the participant in the call or meeting. It is only possible to mute a participant if the
Conference Call[n] Capabilities ParticipantMute status shows Available.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Participant Mute AudioMute: AudioMute CallId: CallId
ParticipantId: " ParticipantId " where
AudioMute :
On/Off
Indicate the desired mute state of the participant.
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
Unique identifier of the call. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the
CallId.
ParticipantId :
String (0, 255)
Unique identifier of a participant in the call.
xCommand Conference Participant Search
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Searches the list of participants in the call or meeting. There is a participant list that can be searched only if the Conference Call[n] Capabilities ParticipantList status shows Available.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Participant Search [CallId: CallId ] [Limit: Limit ] [Offset:
Offset ] [SearchString: " SearchString "] where
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
Unique identifier of the call. During a call you can run the xStatus Call command to see the
CallId.
Default value: 0
Limit :
Integer (0..65534)
Limit the number of records (participants) in the result set to this number. For example, if the limit is set to 10, the result set will contain only 10 entries even if the total number of hits is larger.
Default value: 200
Offset :
Integer (0..65534)
Get records starting with this offset in a search.
Default value: 0
SearchString :
String (0,255)
URI or DisplayName. Leave this parameter empty if you want the search to return all participants in the call.
Default value: ""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 297 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Conference Recording Pause
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define if the recording of a meeting shall be paused. When you are recording a meeting, you can use this setting if you want to pause the recording. You can resume the recording by using the command Conference Recording Resume.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Recording Pause [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (1..65534)
Identify CallID for the remote participant.
xCommand Conference Recording Resume
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define if the recording of a meeting shall be resumed. When you are recording a meeting, you can use this setting if you want to resume a recording that has previously been paused.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Recording Resume [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (1..65534)
Identify CallID for the remote participant.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Conference Recording Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define if the meeting shall be recorded. Once you are in a meeting, you can use this setting if you want to start recording. Note that the recording commands are only available if your infrastructure (Cisco Meeting Server) supports recording.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Recording Start [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (1..65534)
Identify CallID for the remote participant.
xCommand Conference Recording Stop
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Define if the recording of a meeting shall be stoppped. When you are recording a meeting, you can use this setting to stop recording.
USAGE: xCommand Conference Recording Stop [CallId: CallId ] where
CallId :
Integer (1..65534)
Identify CallID for the remote participant.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 298 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Conference SpeakerLock Release
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Releases locked speaker set by xCommand Conference SpeakerLock Set. Default voice switching is switched back on.
USAGE: xCommand Conference SpeakerLock Release xCommand Conference SpeakerLock Set
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
For manually locking one of the speakers to the prominent speaker position. This overrides the default voice switching.
USAGE: xCommand Conference SpeakerLock Set Target: Target [CallId: CallId ] where
Target :
Local/Remote
Identifies local or remote participant.
CallId :
Integer (0..65534)
Identify CallID for the remote participant. Only relevant if Target is set to "remote".
Default value: 0 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Diagnostics commands
xCommand Diagnostics Run
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
This command runs self-diagnostics commands on the device.
USAGE: xCommand Diagnostics Run [ResultSet: ResultSet ] where
ResultSet :
Alerts/All/None
You can filter the diagnostics results to alerts, all or none. If not set, the result will show all results.
Default value: Alerts
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 299 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Dial commands
xConfiguration xCommand Dial
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Dial out from the device. Returns information about the CallId and ConferenceId, which are required for some of the other commands.
USAGE: xCommand Dial Number: " Number " [Protocol: Protocol ] [CallRate: CallRate ]
[CallType: CallType ] [BookingId: " BookingId "] [Appearance: Appearance ]
[DisplayName: " DisplayName "] [TrackingData: "TrackingData"] where
Number :
String (0, 255)
Enter the number or address.
Protocol :
H320/H323/Sip/Spark
Select the call protocol.
CallRate :
Integer (64..6000) [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit
RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (64..10000) [ Boards ]
Integer (64..3072) [ SX10 ]
Set the call rate.
CallType :
Audio/Video/Auto
Select a call type (audio or video). By selecting Auto, the device will detect the call type automatically.
BookingId :
String (0, 255)
Any identifier that an external booking system (e.g. TMS, CTS-MAN) can use for its own references to match placed calls with the booking systems internal identifier for a meeting.
This can be any string, e.g. a GUID. The booking Id is supplied in call logs, call events etc for the call.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 300 xStatus
Default value: ""
Appearance :
Integer (1..999999999)
Not appliable. For internal usage only.
DisplayName :
String (0, 255)
The display name of the remote participant.
Default value: ""
TrackingData :
String (0, 255)
Adds a tag to a call, so that it can be identified in the call history.
Default value:
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
GPIO commands
xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
HttpClient commands
xCommand GPIO ManualState Set
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the state of a GPIO pin that is configured to OutputManualState mode (ref. xConfiguration
GPIO Pin [1..4] Mode).
USAGE: xCommand GPIO ManualState Set [Pin1: Pin1 ] [Pin2: Pin2 ] [Pin3: Pin3 ] [Pin4: Pin4 ] where
Pin1 :
High/Low
Pin2 :
High/Low
Pin3 :
High/Low
Pin4 :
High/Low xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adds an HTTP(S) server to the list of allowed servers (hosts).
The HttpClient Allow Hostname commands let you set up and maintain a list of up to ten allowed hosts. As long as the list is not empty, you can send HTTP(S) requests only to the servers in the list. The check against the list is performed both when using insecure (HTTP) and secure
(HTTPS) transfer of data.
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Add Expression: " Expression " where
Expression :
String (2, 200)
Regular expression that matches a host name or IP address of an HTTP(S) server.
xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Clear
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Removes all HTTP(S) servers from the list of allowed servers (hosts), leaving you with an empty list.
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Clear
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 301 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname List
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Returns the list of allowed HTTP(S) servers (hosts).
The HttpClient Allow Hostname commands let you set up and maintain a list of up to ten allowed hosts. As long as the list is not empty, you can send HTTP(S) requests only to the servers in the list. The check against the list is performed both when using insecure (HTTP) and secure
(HTTPS) transfer of data.
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname List xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Remove
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Removes an HTTP(S) server from the list of allowed servers (hosts). Use the HttpClient Allow
Hostname List command to find the indentifier of each entry in the list.
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Allow Hostname Remove Id: Id where
Id :
Integer (0..9)
The identifier of the HTTP(S) server you want to remove from the list.
xCommand HttpClient Delete
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Sends an HTTP(S) Delete request to the server that is specified in the Url parameter. You can use the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter to specify whether or not to validate the server's certificate before sending data over HTTPS. This parameter has no effect unless the xConfiguration HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS is set to On. The command returns the HTTP status code along with the data returned from the server (HTTP headers and body).
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Delete [AllowInsecureHTTPS: AllowInsecureHTTPS ] [Header:
" Header "] [ResponseSizeLimit: ResponseSizeLimit ] [ResultBody: ResultBody ]
[Timeout: Timeout ] Url: " Url " where
AllowInsecureHTTPS :
False/True
If set to True the device skips the certificate validation process, and sends data to the server anyway. If set to False, the server certificate is checked, and data is not sent to the server if the certificate validation fails.
Default value: False
Header :
String (0, 1024)
An HTTP header field. You can add up 20 Header parameters in one command, each holding one HTTP header field.
ResponseSizeLimit :
Integer (1..100000)
The maximum payload size (bytes) of the response to this request. If the response payload is larger than this maximum size, the command returns a status error with a message saying that the maximum file size is exceeded. However, this has no effect on the server side; the request was received and processed properly by the server.
Default value: 100000
ResultBody :
None/PlainText/Base64
None: The body of the HTTP response (if any) is not included in the command result.
PlainText: The body of the HTTP response is included in the command result as plain text.
If the response contain non-printable letters, the command returns a status error with a message saying that non-printable data was encountered.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 302 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Base64: The body of the HTTP response is Base64 encoded before it is included in the command result.
Default value: None
Timeout :
Integer (1..30)
Timeout period in seconds. If the request is not completed during this period, the API will return an error.
Default value: 30
Url :
String (8, 2048)
The URL that the request will be sent to: <Protocol> + <Host name or IP address of an
HTTP(S) server> + <Path>.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand HttpClient Get
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Sends an HTTP(S) Get request to the server that is specified in the Url parameter. You can use the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter to specify whether or not to validate the server's certificate before sending data over HTTPS. This parameter has no effect unless the xConfiguration
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS is set to On. The command returns the HTTP status code along with the data returned from the server (HTTP headers and body).
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Get [AllowInsecureHTTPS: AllowInsecureHTTPS ] [Header:
" Header "] [ResponseSizeLimit: ResponseSizeLimit ] [ResultBody: ResultBody ]
[Timeout: Timeout ] Url: " Url " where
AllowInsecureHTTPS :
False/True
If set to True the device skips the certificate validation process, and sends data to the server anyway. If set to False, the server certificate is checked, and data is not sent to the server if the certificate validation fails.
Default value: False
Header :
String (0, 1024)
An HTTP header field. You can add up 20 Header parameters in one command, each holding one HTTP header field.
ResponseSizeLimit :
Integer (1..100000)
The maximum payload size (bytes) of the response to this request. If the response payload is larger than this maximum size, the command returns a status error with a message saying that the maximum file size is exceeded. However, this has no effect on the server side; the request was received and processed properly by the server.
Default value: 100000
ResultBody :
None/PlainText/Base64
None: The body of the HTTP response (if any) is not included in the command result.
PlainText: The body of the HTTP response is included in the command result as plain text.
If the response contain non-printable letters, the command returns a status error with a message saying that non-printable data was encountered.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 303 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Base64: The body of the HTTP response is Base64 encoded before it is included in the command result.
Default value: None
Timeout :
Integer (1..30)
Timeout period in seconds. If the request is not completed during this period, the API will return an error.
Default value: 30
Url :
String (8, 2048)
The URL that the request will be sent to: <Protocol> + <Host name or IP address of an
HTTP(S) server> + <Path>.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand HttpClient Patch
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Sends an HTTP(S) Patch request to the server that is specified in the Url parameter. This is a multiline command, so the payload (data) follows after the parameters. You can use the
AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter to specify whether or not to validate the server's certificate before sending data over HTTPS. This parameter has no effect unless the xConfiguration
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS is set to On. The command returns the HTTP status code along with the data returned from the server (HTTP headers and body).
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Patch [AllowInsecureHTTPS: AllowInsecureHTTPS ] [Header:
" Header "] [ResponseSizeLimit: ResponseSizeLimit ] [ResultBody: ResultBody ]
[Timeout: Timeout ] Url: " Url " where
AllowInsecureHTTPS :
False/True
If set to True the device skips the certificate validation process, and sends data to the server anyway. If set to False, the server certificate is checked, and data is not sent to the server if the certificate validation fails.
Default value: False
Header :
String (0, 1024)
An HTTP header field. You can add up 20 Header parameters in one command, each holding one HTTP header field.
ResponseSizeLimit :
Integer (1..100000)
The maximum payload size (bytes) of the response to this request. If the response payload is larger than this maximum size, the command returns a status error with a message saying that the maximum file size is exceeded. However, this has no effect on the server side; the request was received and processed properly by the server.
Default value: 100000
ResultBody :
None/PlainText/Base64
None: The body of the HTTP response (if any) is not included in the command result.
PlainText: The body of the HTTP response is included in the command result as plain text.
If the response contain non-printable letters, the command returns a status error with a
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 304 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration message saying that non-printable data was encountered.
Base64: The body of the HTTP response is Base64 encoded before it is included in the command result.
Default value: None
Timeout :
Integer (1..30)
Timeout period in seconds. If the request is not completed during this period, the API will return an error.
Default value: 30
Url :
String (8, 2048)
The URL that the request will be sent to: <Protocol> + <Host name or IP address of an
HTTP(S) server> + <Path>.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand HttpClient Post
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Sends an HTTP(S) Post request to the server that is specified in the Url parameter.
You can use the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter to specify whether or not to validate the server's certificate before sending data over HTTPS. This parameter has no effect unless the xConfiguration HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS is set to On.
This is a multiline command, so the payload (data) follows after the parameters.
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Post [AllowInsecureHTTPS: AllowInsecureHTTPS ] [Header:
" Header "] [ResponseSizeLimit: ResponseSizeLimit ] [ResultBody: ResultBody ]
[Timeout: Timeout ] Url: " Url " where
AllowInsecureHTTPS :
False/True
If set to True the device skips the certificate validation process, and sends data to the server anyway. If set to False, the server certificate is checked, and data is not sent to the server if the certificate validation fails.
Default value: False
Header :
String (0, 1024)
An HTTP header field. You can add up 20 Header parameters in one command, each holding one HTTP header field.
ResponseSizeLimit :
Integer (1..100000)
The maximum payload size (bytes) of the response to this request. If the response payload is larger than this maximum size, the command returns a status error with a message saying that the maximum file size is exceeded. However, this has no effect on the server side; the request was received and processed properly by the server.
Default value: 100000
ResultBody :
None/PlainText/Base64
None: The body of the HTTP response (if any) is not included in the command result.
PlainText: The body of the HTTP response is included in the command result as plain text.
If the response contain non-printable letters, the command returns a status error with a message saying that non-printable data was encountered.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 305 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Base64: The body of the HTTP response is Base64 encoded before it is included in the command result.
Default value: None
Timeout :
Integer (1..30)
Timeout period in seconds. If the request is not completed during this period, the API will return an error.
Default value: 30
Url :
String (8, 2048)
The URL that the request will be sent to: <Protocol> + <Host name or IP address of an
HTTP(S) server> + <Path>.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand HttpClient Put
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Sends an HTTP(S) Put request to the server that is specified in the Url parameter.
You can use the AllowInsecureHTTPS parameter to specify whether or not to validate the server's certificate before sending data over HTTPS. This parameter has no effect unless the xConfiguration HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS is set to On.
This is a multiline command, so the payload (data) follows after the parameters.
USAGE: xCommand HttpClient Put [AllowInsecureHTTPS: AllowInsecureHTTPS ] [Header:
" Header "] [ResponseSizeLimit: ResponseSizeLimit ] [ResultBody: ResultBody ]
[Timeout: Timeout ] Url: " Url " where
AllowInsecureHTTPS :
False/True
If set to True the device skips the certificate validation process, and sends data to the server anyway. If set to False, the server certificate is checked, and data is not sent to the server if the certificate validation fails.
Default value: False
Header :
String (0, 1024)
An HTTP header field. You can add up 20 Header parameters in one command, each holding one HTTP header field.
ResponseSizeLimit :
Integer (1..100000)
The maximum payload size (bytes) of the response to this request. If the response payload is larger than this maximum size, the command returns a status error with a message saying that the maximum file size is exceeded. However, this has no effect on the server side; the request was received and processed properly by the server.
Default value: 100000
ResultBody :
None/PlainText/Base64
None: The body of the HTTP response (if any) is not included in the command result.
PlainText: The body of the HTTP response is included in the command result as plain text.
If the response contain non-printable letters, the command returns a status error with a message saying that non-printable data was encountered.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 306 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Base64: The body of the HTTP response is Base64 encoded before it is included in the command result.
Default value: None
Timeout :
Integer (1..30)
Timeout period in seconds. If the request is not completed during this period, the API will return an error.
Default value: 30
Url :
String (8, 2048)
The URL that the request will be sent to: <Protocol> + <Host name or IP address of an
HTTP(S) server> + <Path>.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
HttpFeedback commands
xCommand HttpFeedback Deregister
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deregister the HTTP feedback over HTTP(S).
USAGE: xCommand HttpFeedback Deregister FeedbackSlot: FeedbackSlot where
FeedbackSlot :
Integer (1..4)
Deregister the feedback slot that was registered using the xCommand HttpFeedback
Register command.
xCommand HttpFeedback Enable
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Re-enables a previously registered feedback slot after it has failed and become deactivated.
USAGE: xCommand HttpFeedback Enable FeedbackSlot: FeedbackSlot where
FeedbackSlot :
Integer (1..4)
Specifies the feedback slot that is enabled.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 307 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand HttpFeedback Register
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Register the device to an HTTP(S) server to return XML feedback over HTTP(S) to specific
URLs.
USAGE: xCommand HttpFeedback Register FeedbackSlot: FeedbackSlot [Format: Format ]
ServerUrl: " ServerUrl " [Expression: " Expression "] where
FeedbackSlot :
Integer (1..4)
The codec can register up to 4 slots of servers requesting HTTP feedback. Set the registering to one of them.
Note: Avoid using FeedbackSlot 3 in an environment where Cisco TelePresence
Management Suite (TMS) is used as TMS uses this feedbackslot to register its expressions.
Format :
XML/JSON
Set the format for the feedback from the HTTP server to XML or JSON.
Default value: XML
ServerUrl :
String (1, 2048)
The URL to the HTTP server where you want the codec to post the HTTP feedback messages to.
Expression :
String (1, 255)
The XPath expression specifies which parts of the Status, Configuration or Event XML documents are monitored. You can have from 0 to 15 XPath expressions in the same command.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Logging commands
xCommand Logging SendLogs
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command applies only to devices that are registered to the Cisco Webex cloud service.
Send logs to the Cisco Webex cloud. These logs can help diagnose and fix issues with the device. The command returns a log ID, which an administrator or TAC engineer can use to identify and download the logs.
USAGE: xCommand Logging SendLogs
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 308 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Macros commands
xConfiguration xCommand Macros Log Clear
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Clears the Macros Logs.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Log Clear xCommand Macros Log Get
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Shows the logs for all running macros and for the runtime itself.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Log Get [Offset: Offset ] where
Offset :
Integer (0..65534)
Shows lines with the same or higher Offset than the one provided.
Default value: 0 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Macros Macro Activate
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Activates a macro created on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Activate Name: " Name " where
Name :
String (0, 255)
Specifies the name of the macro to activate.
xCommand Macros Macro Deactivate
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deactivates a macro currently running on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Deactivate Name: " Name " where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the macro to deactivate.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 309 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Macros Macro Get
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Shows the details of a macro created on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Get [Content: Content ] [Name: " Name "] where
Content :
False/True
Shows the content for the specified Macro or not.
Default value: False
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the macro.
xCommand Macros Macro Remove
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Removes a macro created on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Remove Name: " Name " where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the macro that is removed.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Macros Macro RemoveAll
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Removes all of the macros created on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro RemoveAll xCommand Macros Macro Rename
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Renames a macro created on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Rename Name: " Name " NewName: " NewName " [Overwrite:
Overwrite ] where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the macro that is renamed.
NewName :
String (0, 255)
The new name of the macro.
Overwrite :
False/True
Overwrites the existing content or not.
Default value: False
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 310 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Macros Macro Roles Set
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Sets the role for a macro.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Roles Set Name: " Name " [Role: Role ] where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the macro that is set.
Role :
Admin/Audit/User/Integrator/RoomControl
The role that is set for this macro.
Default value: Admin xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Macros Macro Save
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Saves the details of a macro. This is a multiline command.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Macro Save Name: " Name " [Overwrite: Overwrite ] [Transpile:
Transpile ] where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the macro that is saved.
Overwrite :
False/True
Overwrites the existing content or not.
Default value: True
Transpile :
False/True
Translates current JavaScript language features into EcmaScript 5.0/5.1.
Default value: True xCommand Macros Runtime Restart
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Restarts all of the macros set up on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Runtime Restart
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 311 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Macros Runtime Start
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Starts all of the macros set up on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Runtime Start xCommand Macros Runtime Status
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Shows the current status of the macros runtime on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Runtime Status xCommand Macros Runtime Stop
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Stops all of the macros set up on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Macros Runtime Stop xStatus
Message commands
xCommand Message Send
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Triggers a Message Send event which sends text to any listening clients.
USAGE: xCommand Message Send Text: " Text " where
Text :
String (0, 255)
The text that the message contains.
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 312 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Network commands
xConfiguration xCommand Network SMTP VerifyConfig
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX80 RoomKitMini DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Verifies if the SMTP server is configured in the instance emails are not being sent.
USAGE: xCommand Network SMTP VerifyConfig
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 313
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Network Wifi Configure
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Configures the device to connect to a specific Wi-Fi network.
This is only available if the Wi-Fi is enabled on the device.
To do this, you must unplug the ethernet cable.
Then, you must connect to the terminal over Wi-Fi.
USAGE: xCommand Network Wifi Configure [AllowMissingCA: AllowMissingCA ]
[AnonymousIdentity: " AnonymousIdentity "] [Identity: " Identity "] [Password:
" Password "] SSID: " SSID " Type: Type where
AllowMissingCA :
False/True
The policy for allowing a web connection with missing Certificate Authentication (CA).
False: Not Allowed, True: Allowed
AnonymousIdentity :
String (0, 255)
The anonymous identity, if applicable.
Identity :
String (0, 255)
The username for the Wi-Fi connection, if applicable.
Password :
String (0, 255)
The password for the Wi-Fi connection, if applicable.
SSID :
String (0, 255)
The SSID for the Wi-Fi connection.
Type :
Open/Wpa-psk/Wpa2-psk/Wpa-eap/Wpa-eap-fast/Wpa-eap-peap/Wpa-eap-tls/
Wpa-eap-ttls
The encryption type for the Wi-Fi connection.
We support: open networks (not secured), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), EAP-TLS,
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, PEAP, EAP-MSCHAPv2, EAP-GTC xCommand Network Wifi Delete
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Deletes the specified Wi-Fi network connection from the device. This command is only available if Wi-Fi services are turned on and ethernet is disconnected.
USAGE: xCommand Network Wifi Delete SSID: " SSID " where
SSID :
String (0, 255)
The SSID for the Wi-Fi connection.
xCommand Network Wifi List
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the details of the current Wi-Fi connection. This command is only available if Wi-Fi services are turned on and ethernet is disconnected.
USAGE: xCommand Network Wifi List xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Network Wifi Scan Start
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Scans for available Wi-Fi networks.
USAGE: xCommand Network Wifi Scan Start [Duration: Duration ] where
Duration :
Integer (1..30)
The duration of the Wi-Fi scan, in seconds.
Default value: 10 xCommand Network Wifi Scan Stop
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Stops an ongoing Wi-Fi scan.
USAGE: xCommand Network Wifi Scan Stop
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 314 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Peripherals commands
xConfiguration xCommand Peripherals Connect
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Register peripherals that are connected to the codec, such as control systems and touch panels. The registered peripherals are displayed on the web interface under Configuration >
Peripherals.
This command should be used when the peripheral connects to the codec for the first time or when the software version on the peripheral has changed. The list of connected devices is available with the command xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Status.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals Connect [HardwareInfo: " HardwareInfo "] ID: " ID " [Name:
" Name "] [NetworkAddress: " NetworkAddress "] [SerialNumber: " SerialNumber "]
[SoftwareInfo: " SoftwareInfo "] Type: Type where
HardwareInfo :
String (0, 100)
The device's hardware number.
ID :
Default value: ""
String (1, 100)
A unique ID for the device you are connecting to, typically a MAC address.
Name :
String (0, 100)
Define a name for the device.
Default value: ""
NetworkAddress :
String (0, 100)
Network address for the device you are connecting to.
Default value: ""
SerialNumber :
String (0, 100) xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
The device's serial number.
Default value: ""
SoftwareInfo :
String (0, 100)
Software version the device is running.
Default value: ""
Type :
Byod/ControlSystem/Other/TouchPanel
Define the type of device you are connecting to.
xCommand Peripherals HeartBeat
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
When a peripheral is registered as a connected device, you can set it to send a heartbeat to the codec to let the codec know that it is still connected.
This will keep the device on the xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice list. If the peripheral is not set to send a heartbeat, the device will disappear from the list after a while.
Note: Does not apply to cameras.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals HeartBeat ID: " ID " [Timeout: Timeout ] where
ID :
String (1, 100)
A unique ID for the device you are connecting to, typically a MAC address.
Timeout :
Integer (1..65535)
Set how long the device will send heartbeat.
Default value: 60
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 315 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xCommand Peripherals List
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Lists all currently and previously connected peripherals.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals List [Connected: Connected ] [Type: Type ] where
Connected :
False/True
Limit the search to currently connected devices.
Type :
All/ControlSystem/ISDNLink/Other/TouchPanel
Limit the search by device type.
Default value: All xConfiguration
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 316 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Peripherals Pairing DeviceDiscovery Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Start device discovery to detect ISDN Links in the same network.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals Pairing DeviceDiscovery Start [AutoPairing: AutoPairing ]
[DeviceType: DeviceType ] [Timeout: Timeout ] where
AutoPairing :
On/Off
You can select to automatically pair the detected device to the video conferencing device.
Default value: Off
DeviceType :
ISDNLink
Only look for ISDN Link.
Timeout :
Integer (3..60)
Set a maximum time for the search from 3 to 60 seconds.
Default value: 10 xCommand Peripherals Pairing Pair
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Pair an ISDN Link to a video conferencing device.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals Pairing Pair MacAddress: " MacAddress " where
MacAddress :
String (1, 1450)
Enter the MAC address for the ISDN Link you wish to pair to the video conferencing device.
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Peripherals Pairing Unpair
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Unpair the video conferencing device from an ISDN Link, when the two have contact.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals Pairing Unpair MacAddress: " MacAddress " where
MacAddress :
String (1, 100)
Enter the MAC address for the ISDN Link you wish to unpair from the video conferencing device.
xCommand Peripherals Purge
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Force unpair a video conferencing device from an ISDN Link when a connection has been lost.
Note: You must also unpair the ISDN Link to be able to pair it to another video conferencing device.
USAGE: xCommand Peripherals Purge ID: " ID " where
ID :
String (1, 100)
Mac address of the ISDN Link in the format "xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx".
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Phonebook commands
xCommand Phonebook Contact Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Add a new contact to the local phonebook. The command returns the ContactId, which is a unique string that identifies the contact; typically, the format is “localContactId-n”.
You can add several contact methods to a contact using the xCommand Phonebook
ContactMethod Add command. Note that only the first contact method will appear in the
Favorites list on the Cisco Touch controller. All contact methods are available on the other UIs.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Contact Add Name: " Name " [Number: " Number "] [CallRate:
CallRate ] [CallType: CallType ] [Device: Device ] [FolderId: " FolderId "] [ImageURL:
" ImageURL "] [Protocol: Protocol] [Tag: Tag] [Title: "Title"] where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the contact.
Number :
String (0, 255)
The phone number or address of the contact.
CallRate :
Integer (0..6000)
Set a call rate.
CallType :
Audio/Video/Auto
Select a call type (audio or video). By selecting Auto, the device will detect the call type automatically.
Device :
Mobile/Other/Telephone/Video
Select the device type.
FolderId :
String (0, 255)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 317 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
The unique identifier for the folder that you want to store the contact in. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook Folder Add command was issued to make the folder.
ImageURL :
String (0, 255)
Currently not in use.
Protocol :
Auto/H320/H323/SIP/Spark
Select the Auto, Spark, SIP, H323 or H320 protocol.
Tag :
Untagged/Favorite
Tag the contact as a Favorite, or untag an already tagged contact.
Title :
String (0, 255)
The title of the contact.
xCommand Phonebook Contact Delete
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Delete an existing contact from the local phonebook.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Contact Delete ContactId: " ContactId " where
ContactId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Contact Add command was issued to make the contact.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Phonebook Contact Modify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Modify contact details of an existing contact in the local phonebook. The following parameters can be changed using this command: Name, FolderId, ImageURL and Title. You must use the xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Modify command to change the other parameters:
Number, Protocol, CallRate, CallType and Device.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Contact Modify ContactId: " ContactId " [Name: " Name "]
[FolderId: " FolderId "] [ImageURL: " ImageURL "] [Tag: Tag ] [Title: " Title "] where
ContactId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact you want to modify. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand
Phonebook Contact Add command was issued to make the contact.
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the contact.
FolderId :
String (0, 255)
A unique identifier for the folder. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Folder Add command was issued.
ImageURL :
String (0, 255)
Currently not in use.
Tag :
Untagged/Favorite
Tag the contact as a Favorite, or untag an already tagged contact.
Title :
String (0, 255)
The title of the contact.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 318 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Add contact details for an existing contact in the local phonebook. The command returns the
ContactMethodId, which is a unique string that identifies the contact method; typically, the format is “n”.
You can add several contact methods to a contact. Note that only the first contact method will appear in the Favorites list on the device's user interface. The first contact method may have been created when issuing the xCommand Phonebook Contact Add command to make the contact. All contact methods are available in the API and on the web interface.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Add ContactId: " ContactId " [CallRate: CallRate ]
[CallType: CallType ] [Device: Device ] Number: " Number " [Protocol: Protocol ] where
ContactId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact that you want to add a contact method to. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook Contact Add command was issued to make the contact.
CallRate :
Integer (0..6000)
Set a call rate.
CallType :
Audio/Video/Auto
Select a call type (audio or video). By selecting Auto, the device will detect the call type automatically.
Default value: Auto
Device :
Mobile/Other/Telephone/Video
Set which type of device to call to.
Number :
String (0, 255)
The phone number or address of the contact.
Protocol :
Auto/H320/H323/SIP/Spark
Select protocol.
xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Delete
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Delete a contact method from an existing contact in the local phonebook.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Delete ContactId: " ContactId " ContactMethodId:
" ContactMethodId " where
ContactId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact you want to change. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand
Phonebook Contact Add command was issued to make the contact.
ContactMethodId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact method you want to delete. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Add command was issued to make the contact method.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 319 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Modify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Modify details about the contact method for an existing contact in the local phonebook.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Modify ContactId: " ContactId " ContactMethodId:
" ContactMethodId " [Device: Device ] [Number: " Number "] [Protocol: Protocol ]
[CallRate: CallRate ] [CallType: CallType ] where
ContactId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Contact Add command was issued to make the contact.
ContactMethodId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the contact method you want to modify. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook ContactMethod Add or xCommand Phonebook Contact Add commands were issued to make the contact method.
Device :
Mobile/Other/Telephone/Video
Set which type of device to call to.
Number :
String (0, 255)
The phone number or address of the contact.
Protocol :
Auto/H320/H323/SIP/Spark
Select protocol.
CallRate :
Integer (0..6000)
Set a call rate.
CallType :
Audio/Video/Auto
Select a call type (audio or video). By selecting Auto, the device will detect the call type automatically.
Default value: Auto xCommand Phonebook Folder Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Phonebook entries can be stored in folders. Use this command to add a folder to the local phonebook. The command returns the FolderId, which is a unique string that identifies the folder; typically, the format is “localGroupId-n”.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Folder Add Name: " Name " [ParentFolderId: " ParentFolderId "] where
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the folder.
ParentFolderId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the parent folder. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Folder Add command was issued to make the parent folder.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 320 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Phonebook Folder Delete
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Delete an existing folder from the local phonebook.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Folder Delete FolderId: " FolderId " where
FolderId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the folder. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Folder Add command was issued to make the folder.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Phonebook Folder Modify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Modify an existing phonebook folder.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Folder Modify FolderId: " FolderId " [Name: " Name "]
[ParentFolderId: " ParentFolderId "] where
FolderId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the folder. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Folder Add command was issued to make the folder.
Name :
String (0, 255)
The name of the contact.
ParentFolderId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the parent folder. The identifier will be returned by an xCommand
Phonebook Search command. It was also returned when the xCommand Phonebook
Folder Add command was issued to make the parent folder.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 321 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Phonebook Search
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The search command lets you search in both the local and corporate phone books. A search gives a ResultSet.
The total number of folders and contacts (TotalRows) is always included in the result set when searching the local phone book. When searching a corporate phonebook the total number of folders and contacts may not be included. Whether it is included or not depends on the backend corporate phonebook service (e.g. CUCM, VCS, TMS) and its version.
USAGE: xCommand Phonebook Search [PhonebookId: " PhonebookId "] [PhonebookType:
PhonebookType ] [SearchString: " SearchString "] [SearchField: SearchField ]
[SearchFilter: SearchFilter ] [ContactType: ContactType ] [Offset: Offset ]
[FolderId: "FolderId"] [Limit: Limit] [ContactMethodLimit: ContactMethodLimit]
[Recursive: Recursive] [Tag: Tag] where
PhonebookId :
String (0, 255)
The identifier of the phonebook server that will be searched. See the xConfiguration
Phonebook Server ID setting.
PhonebookType :
Corporate/Local
Define whether to search the local phone book or the corporate phonebook.
Default value: Local
SearchString :
String (0, 255)
Search for entries containing this string (note that the entry does not have to begin with the string). If no FolderId is specified, all folders / phonebook directories will be searched.
SearchField :
Name/Number
Currently not in use.
SearchFilter :
All/Rooms/People
Only available for Cisco Webex registered devices. Filter search results by choosing the type of results you want to see. You can select rooms, people, or search in all directories.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus
ContactType :
Any/Folder/Contact
Search all contact types, or limit the search to folders or individual contacts.
Default value: Any
Offset :
Integer (0..65534)
Get records starting with this offset in a search. The default value is 0. Offset is used together with Limit to support paging.
Default value: 0
FolderId :
String (0, 255)
Search only in the specified folder. The FolderId (string) is listed in the ResultSet of a search result containing folders.
Limit :
Integer (0..65534)
Limit the number of records in the result set to this number. For example, if the limit is set to 10, the ResultSet will contain only 10 entries (Contacts and Folders) even if the total number of hits is larger. The maximum limit is 1000.
Default value: 50
ContactMethodLimit :
Integer (0..10)
Limit the number of records in the result set to this number. For example, if the limit is set to 2, the ResultSet will contain only 2 entries even if the total number of hits is larger.
Default value: 0
Recursive :
False/True
This parameter will only have effect when searching the local phone book. The setting determines whether a local phone book search should be limited to the given FolderId, or also recursively search in its subfolders. If not specified, the search will be recursive.
When issuing the command without specifying any parameters, all folders, contacts and contact methods in the local phone book will be returned.
Default value: True
Tag :
Untagged/Favorite
Limits the search to contacts that have been tagged as favorite or the untagged contacts.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 322 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Presentation commands
xConfiguration xCommand Presentation Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Open a media stream from the selected presentation source.
You can combine multiple presentation sources in a single presentation video stream (the maximum number of different input sources depend on the type of video conferencing device) by adding multiple ConnectorId or PresentationSource parameters in the same command. The order in which you write them in the command determines the order in which the sources show up on the screen. You can't use a mix of identifier types in the same command; use either
ConnectorId or PresentationSource.
USAGE: xCommand Presentation Start [ConnectorId: ConnectorId ] [Instance: Instance ]
[Layout: Layout ] [PresentationSource: PresentationSource ] [SendingMode:
SendingMode ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..6) [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..5) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..4) [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Integer (1..3) [ CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Integer (1..2) [ DX70/DX80 SX20 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Integer (2..3) [ SX10 ]
Select the video input source to be used for presentation, identified by connectorId.
Instance :
New/1/2/3/4/5/6
Select which local presentation instance you wish to start.
Layout :
Equal/Prominent
Select the layout of the presentation if the stream is composed of multiple input sources.
Equal: The presentations are shown in same-sized images. There can be a maximum of four images on screen.
Prominent: The first presentation source is shown as a large image, and the next
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 323
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus presentation sources are shown as smaller images placed below.
Default value: Equal
PresentationSource :
None/1/2/3/4/5/6 [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..4) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..2) [ DX70/DX80 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 Boards ]
None/1/2 [ RoomKit RoomKitMini ]
None/1/2/3 [ CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Integer (2..2) [ SX10 ]
Select the video input source to be used for presentation, identified by source number.
The value None means that a black frame is inserted. None can only be used when you have multiple PresentationSource parameters in the same command.
SendingMode :
LocalRemote/LocalOnly
Select whether the presentation is shown local and/or remote.
LocalRemote: The presentation is shown both local and remote.
LocalOnly: The presentation is shown locally.
Default value: LocalRemote
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Presentation Stop
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Stop the media stream from the presentation source.
USAGE: xCommand Presentation Stop [Instance: Instance ] [PresentationSource:
PresentationSource ] where
Instance :
1/2/3/4/5/6
Select which local presentation you wish to stop, identified by presentation instance.
PresentationSource :
Integer (1..6) [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..4) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (1..3) [ CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Integer (1..2) [ DX70/DX80 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini Boards ]
Integer (2..2) [ SX10 ]
Select which local presentation you wish to stop, identified by source number.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Provisioning commands
xCommand Provisioning CompleteUpgrade
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Starts installing the software upgrade if you wish to install it before it is set to do so.
USAGE: xCommand Provisioning CompleteUpgrade xCommand Provisioning PostponeUpgrade
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Postpones the installing of the software upgrade.
USAGE: xCommand Provisioning PostponeUpgrade SecondsToPostpone: SecondsToPostpone where
SecondsToPostpone :
Integer (0..65534)
Set how long to postpone the upgrade. The value is in seconds.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 324 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Login
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Login command for the Extension Mobility service. You log in to the Extension Mobility service with a username (UserId) and pin code (Pin). The username and pin code are set up in CUCM.
CUCM also supports multiple profiles for a user.
If you, for a user that has multiple profiles, submit a login command with only username and pin code, CUCM will send a list of available profiles back to the device. Then the device will create corresponding ExtensionMobilityProfileSelection Profile events, so that a new login command, which contains the Profile parameter in addition to the username and pin code, can be submitted.
USAGE: xCommand Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Login UserId: " UserId " Pin: " Pin "
[Profile: " Profile "] where
UserId :
String (1, 255)
A valid username, as set up in CUCM.
Pin :
String (1, 255)
A valid pin code for the user, as set up in CUCM.
Profile :
String (1, 255)
A valid profile for the user, as set up in CUCM. This parameter applies only if the user has multiple profiles.
xCommand Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Logout
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command will log you out of your Extension Mobility profile.
USAGE: xCommand Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Logout xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Provisioning RoomType Activate
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Activate a room type template, that has been configured from the web interface.
USAGE: xCommand Provisioning RoomType Activate Name: Name where
Name :
Briefing/Classroom/Standard
Briefing: Activate the briefing room template.
Classroom: Activate the class room template.
Standard: Turn off room templates.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 325 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Provisioning Service Fetch
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Add or update the customization template that details the custom elements of the device.
Examples of custom elements are: branding images, macros, favorites, sign-in banner, and in-room control panels.
USAGE: xCommand Provisioning Service Fetch [Checksum: " Checksum "] [ChecksumType:
ChecksumType ] [Mode: Mode ] [Origin: Origin ] URL: " URL " where
Checksum :
String (0, 128)
The checksum is used to ensure the integrity of the downloaded customization template.
When using HTTP, it is mandatory to add a checksum. When using HTTPS, it is mandatory to add a checksum only if you are downloading the template from a server that presents an unsigned certificate, or a self-signed certificate that is not in the CA list of the device
(not trusted).
ChecksumType :
SHA512
The algorithm that is used to calculate the checksum.
Default value: SHA512
Mode :
Add/Replace
If the mode is set to Add, all items listed in the uploaded file are added to the existing customization template. If the mode is set to Replace, the newer customization template that is uploaded, is compared against the previously uploaded template. Items that are not present in the newer file are removed. In both cases, items with the same name are overwritten.
Default value: Add
Origin :
Other/Provisioning
Specifies whether the customization template is used for provisioning or for another purpose. When the value is Provisioning, the configurations (xConfiguration) in the template are ignored, and the provisioning system (CUCM or TMS) can set configurations like they normally do. CUCM always acts as if this parameter is set to Provisioning.
Note that some configurations may be specific to one device, and you may end up with
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus devices that you cannot reach if you provision those configurations to more than one device.
Default value: Other
URL :
String (0, 128)
The URL of the customization template.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 326 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Proximity commands
xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
RoomPreset commands
xCommand Proximity Services Activate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reactivate the Proximity services that were deactivated with xCommand Proximity Services
Deactivate.
USAGE: xCommand Proximity Services Activate xCommand Proximity Services Deactivate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command deactivates all proximity services on the device. To reactivate proximity services use the command xCommand Proximity Services Activate.
USAGE: xCommand Proximity Services Deactivate xCommand RoomPreset Activate
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Activate one of the locally stored presets.
Note that information about all video input sources, and pan, tilt, zoom and focus values for all cameras are included in the same preset. In contrast, the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to individual cameras only.
USAGE: xCommand RoomPreset Activate PresetId: PresetId where
PresetId :
Integer (1..15)
The ID of the preset you want to activate.
xCommand RoomPreset Clear
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Delete a preset.
Note that information about all video input sources, and pan, tilt, zoom and focus values for all cameras are included in the same preset. In contrast, the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to individual cameras only.
USAGE: xCommand RoomPreset Clear PresetId: PresetId where
PresetId :
Integer (1..15)
The ID of the preset you want to delete.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 327 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand RoomPreset Store
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Store the connector selections for all video input sources and the current position (pan and tilt), zoom and focus values for all cameras.
Note that information about all video input sources, and pan, tilt, zoom and focus values for all cameras are included in the same preset. The device may hold 15 such predefined video input presets. These presets are available for far end control, i.e. they are referred in the
PresetId parameter of the xCommand FarEndControl Preset Activate command. In contrast, the xCommand Camera Preset commands applies to individual cameras only. Those presets are not available for far end control.
USAGE: xCommand RoomPreset Store [Description: " Description "] PresetId: PresetId Type:
Type where
Description :
String (0, 255)
Enter a description of the camera preset.
PresetId :
Integer (1..15)
The ID of this preset.
Type :
All/Camera
Not applicable. If you want to ensure that a preset only affects camera positions we recommend that you select Camera.
Security commands
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Security Certificates CA Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Uploads CA security certificates to this device. This is a multiline command.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates CA Add xCommand Security Certificates CA Delete
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deletes a CA security certificate from this device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates CA Delete Fingerprint: " Fingerprint " where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate that is deleted. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates CA Show.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 328 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Security Certificates CA Show
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the details for the CA security certificates on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates CA Show [Format: Format ] where
Format :
PEM/Text
Specifies the format of the listed certificates, PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) or plain text.
Default value: Text xCommand Security Certificates Services Activate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Activates a security certificate on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates Services Activate Fingerprint: " Fingerprint "
Purpose: Purpose where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate that is activated. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates Services Show.
Purpose :
802.1X/HTTPS/Audit/SIP)
The type of service which applies to this certificate.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Security Certificates Services Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Uploads security certificates to this device. This is a multiline command.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates Services Add [PrivateKeyPassword:
" PrivateKeyPassword "] where
PrivateKeyPassword :
String (0, 128)
Stores the details of the private key for the password.
Default value: "" xCommand Security Certificates Services Deactivate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deactivates security certificates on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates Services Deactivate Fingerprint: " Fingerprint "
Purpose: Purpose where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate that is deactivated. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates Services Show.
Purpose :
802.1X/HTTPS/Audit/SIP)
The type of service which applies to this certificate.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 329 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Security Certificates Services Delete
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deletes security certificates from this device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates Services Delete Fingerprint: " Fingerprint " where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate that is deleted. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates Services Show.
xCommand Security Certificates Services Show
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows details for security certificates on this device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates Services Show [Filter: Filter ] [Format: Format ] where
Filter :
802.1X/HTTPS/Audit/SIP
Filters the results according to the chosen service.
Format :
PEM/Text
Specifies the format of the listed certificates, PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) or plain text.
Default value: Text xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty Disable
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Disables a bundled certificate used for SMTP and HttpClient.
Disabling a certificate results in a server providing a certificate signed with this root certificate will be declined.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty Disable Fingerprint: " Fingerprint " where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate that is disabled. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates Services Show.
xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty Enable
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Enables a bundled certificate used for SMTP and HttpClient.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty Enable Fingerprint: " Fingerprint " where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate that is enabled. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates Services Show.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 330 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty List
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Lists all bundled certificates and their state.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty List xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty Show
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Shows a single third-party certificate.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates ThirdParty Show Fingerprint: " Fingerprint "
[Format: Format ] where
Fingerprint :
String (0, 128)
The unique Identifier for the certificate you want to see. You can get the fingerprint ID by running xCommand Security Certificates Services Show.
Format :
PEM/Text
Specifies the format of the listed certificates, PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) or plain text.
Default value: Text
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Security Certificates Webex Show
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
This command applies only to devices that are registered to the Cisco Webex cloud service.
Shows the list of trusted CA certificates that verifies the certificates of servers and services used by the Cisco Webex cloud.
USAGE: xCommand Security Certificates Webex Show [Filter: Filter ] [Format: Format ] where
Filter :
Cisco/Non-Cisco/TLS-proxy
Cisco: Shows the list of CA certificates used when communicating with servers and services that are provided by Cisco.
Non-Cisco: Shows the list CA certificates used when communicating with servers and services that are provided by others than Cisco.
TLS-proxy: Shows the list of additional CA certificates required when using a TLS inspecting proxy for outbound traffic.
Format :
PEM/Text
Specifies the format of the listed certificates, PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) or plain text.
Default value: Text
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 331 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus xCommand Security Persistency
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set the following features to persistent or non-persistent mode. In non-persistent mode the information gathered by the specified feature does not persist a reboot of the device. Persistent mode is the default. This command reboots the device.
USAGE: xCommand Security Persistency Configurations: Configurations CallHistory:
CallHistory InternalLogging: InternalLogging LocalPhonebook: LocalPhonebook
DHCP: DHCP ConfirmAndReboot: ConfirmAndReboot where
Configurations :
NonPersistent/Persistent
In non-persistent mode, all configurations are set back to default when the device reboots.
CallHistory :
NonPersistent/Persistent
In non-persistent mode call history is deleted when the device reboots.
InternalLogging :
NonPersistent/Persistent
In non-persistent mode eventlog is deleted when the device reboots.
LocalPhonebook :
NonPersistent/Persistent
In non-persistent mode local phone book is deleted when the device reboots.
DHCP :
NonPersistent/Persistent
In non-persistent mode all IP related information is deleted when the device reboots.
ConfirmAndReboot :
Yes
Reboots the device.
xCommand Security Session Get
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, AUDIT, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows details of your current session.
USAGE: xCommand Security Session Get xCommand Security Session List
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
List active sessions.
USAGE: xCommand Security Session List xCommand Security Session Terminate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Terminate a session.
USAGE: xCommand Security Session Terminate SessionId: " SessionId " where
SessionId :
String (0, 32)
The session ID number.
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 332 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Standby commands
xCommand Standby Activate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Set the device in standby mode, which turns off the video outputs and put the camera into sleep mode.
USAGE: xCommand Standby Activate xCommand Standby ResetHalfwakeTimer
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Sets a temporary Halfwake timer delay. If the device is in Halfwake mode when the reset timer is set, the device is brought out of Halfwake mode. When left idle for the given delay the device goes into halfwake mode.
USAGE: xCommand Standby ResetHalfwakeTimer Delay: Delay where
Delay :
Integer (1..480)
Set the delay in minutes.
xCommand Standby Deactivate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Bring the device out of standby mode.
USAGE: xCommand Standby Deactivate xCommand Standby Halfwake
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Sets the device to "Halfwake" state. This state informs the user from the UI, to pick up a remote or to tap the touch device to get started.
USAGE: xCommand Standby Halfwake xCommand Standby ResetTimer
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reset the standby delay timer or set a temporary standby delay. If the device is in standby mode when the timer is set, the device is brought out of standby mode before starting the countdown.
If you don't specify a Delay, the standby delay timer is reset, and the device goes into standby after the period that is given by the Standby Delay setting (xConfiguration Standby Delay). If you do specify a Delay, the device goes into standby when it has been idle for the specified period.
Next time, the standby delay is as configured in the Standby Delay setting again.
USAGE: xCommand Standby ResetTimer [Delay: Delay ] where
Delay :
Integer (1..480)
Set the delay in minutes.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 333 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
SystemUnit commands
xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand SystemUnit Boot
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Reboot the device.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit Boot [Action: Action ] [Force: Force ] where
Action :
Restart/Shutdown
As a default the device restarts after a reboot. By selecting Shutdown, the device will not restart.
Default value: Restart
Force :
False/True
As a default the device reboots right away, regardless of whether the device is in use or not. By selecting False, the device reboots only if it is not in use (i.e. if it is in idle, standby, or halfwake mode).
Default value: True xCommand SystemUnit FactoryReset
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reset the codec to factory default settings. The call logs are deleted and all device parameters are reset to default values. All files that have been uploaded to the codec are deleted. Option key(s) are not affected. Use the parameter Keep in order to choose which configurations and files to keep when you factory reset the device.
As a default the device restarts after the factory reset, but other behaviors can be forced by selecting a different TrailingAction.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit FactoryReset Confirm: Confirm [Keep: Keep ] [TrailingAction:
TrailingAction ] where
Confirm :
Yes
Include to confirm your choice.
Keep :
Certificates/HTTP/LocalSetup/Network/Provisioning/SerialPort/Webex
Select which configurations and files to keep when you factory reset the device. You can have up to 7 CallId parameters in the same command.
Certificates:
Client and CA certificates.
HTTP: xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTP Mode xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate xConfiguration NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyServerCertificate
LocalSetup: xConfiguration Audio DefaultVolume xConfiguration Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume xConfiguration Time Zone xConfiguration UserInterface Language xConfiguration Video Output Connector OverscanLevel xCommand Camera Preset Store
Network:
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 334 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xConfiguration Network 1 xConfiguration NetworkServices Wifi Allowed xConfiguration NetworkServices Wifi Enabled
Provisioning: xConfiguration Provisioning Mode
SerialPort: xConfiguration SerialPort Mode xConfiguration SerialPort BaudRate xConfiguration SerialPort LoginRequired
Spark: xConfiguration Spark ServiceOverrides GdsBaseUrl xConfiguration Spark ServiceOverrides U2CBaseUrl xConfiguration Spark ServiceOverrides WdmBaseUrl
TrailingAction :
NoAction/Restart/Shutdown
Select Shutdown or NoAction to override the default behavior (Restart).
Default value: Restart xCommand SystemUnit FirstTimeWizard Stop
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Stops the wizard which appears the first time you start the device, so the device can be set up without it. The wizard only appears again if the device is reset to its factory default settings.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit FirstTimeWizard Stop xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand SystemUnit Notifications RemoveAll
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Clears the list of system notifications that are reported by xStatus SystemUnit Notifications
Text/Type.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit Notifications RemoveAll xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey Add
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Add an option key to support additional features.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey Add Key: " Key " where
Key :
String (16, 24)
The key you have received for the option you wish to switch on.
xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey List
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
List all option keys.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey List
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 335 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey Remove
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Remove a specified option key.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey Remove Type: Type where
Type :
RemoteMonitoring [ DX70/DX80 ]
Encryption/RemoteMonitoring [ SX10 ]
MultiSite/RemoteMonitoring [ SX20 ]
Encryption/MultiSite/RemoteMonitoring [ SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit
RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards ] xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey RemoveAll
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Remove all option keys.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit OptionKey RemoveAll Confirm: Confirm where
Confirm :
Yes xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand SystemUnit ProductPlatform Set
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Select the product platform for your device. This command is typically used after a device has been in for repair and the product platform don't match the actual product. Use with caution.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit ProductPlatform Set Platform: Platform where
Platform :
ROOM70D/ROOM70S [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
ROOM55D/ROOM70S/ROOM70D [ CodecPlus Room70/Room55D ]
MX700/MX700ST/MX800/MX800ST/MX800D [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
ROOM55D: The platform is set to Room 55 Dual.
ROOM70S: For Codec Plus and Room 70, the platform is set to Room 70 Single. For
Codec Pro and Room 70 G2, the platform is set to Room 70 Single G2.
ROOM70D: For Codec Plus and Room 70, the platform is set to Room 70 Dual. For Codec
Pro and Room 70 G2, the platform is set to Room 70 Dual G2.
MX700: The platform is set to MX700 (dual screen, single camera).
MX700ST: The platform is set to MX700 (dual screen, dual camera)
MX800: The platform is set to MX800 (single screen, single camera).
MX800ST: The platform is set to MX800 (single screen, dual camera).
MX800D: The platform is set to MX800 Dual (dual screen, dual camera).
xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Clear
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Clear the sign in banner set with xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Set.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Clear
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 336 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Get
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Get the custom message set with xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Set.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Get xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Set
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set a sign in banner with a custom message on the device's user interface. This is a multiline command.
Use: xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Set <enter>
Banner text <enter>
. <enter>
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit SignInBanner Set xCommand SystemUnit SoftReset
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reset most parameters to their default values. This does not include parameters associated with room setup, such as camera position, language, and volume.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit SoftReset Confirm: Confirm where
Confirm :
Yes xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand SystemUnit SoftwareUpgrade
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Initiate a software upgrade by fetching the software from a given URL.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit SoftwareUpgrade URL: " URL " [Forced: Forced ] where
URL :
String (0, 255)
The URL to the software package location.
Forced :
False/True
You can force a device to accept a software upgrade immediately, without giving users a chance to acknowledge or postpone the update.
Default value: True xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Clear the welcome banner set with xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, AUDIT, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Get the custom message set with xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set.
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 337 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set up a welcome banner that the user sees after they sign in to the device's web interface or the command line interface. The banner can for example contain information that the user needs to get started or things they need to be aware of when changing settings. This is a multiline command.
Use: xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set <enter>
Banner text <enter>
. <enter>
USAGE: xCommand SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set
Time commands
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Time DateTime Get
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Read the time and date from the device.
USAGE: xCommand Time DateTime Get xCommand Time DateTime Set
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the date and time for the device, if not available from NTP (Network Time Protocol).
USAGE: xCommand Time DateTime Set [Year: Year ] [Month: Month ] [Day: Day ] [Hour: Hour ]
[Minute: Minute ] [Second: Second ] where
Year :
Integer (2015..2037)
Month :
Integer (1..12)
Day :
Integer (1..31)
Hour :
Integer (0..23)
Minute :
Integer (0..59)
Second :
Integer (0..59)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 338 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
UserInterface commands
xCommand UserInterface Branding Clear
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Deletes the custom wallpaper, the brand background image, and the logo files from the device.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Branding Clear xCommand UserInterface Branding Delete
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Deletes the image file, which is specified in the Type parameter, from the device.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Branding Delete Type: Type where
Type :
Background/Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80
MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ Boards ]
Background: Delete the custom wallpaper.
Branding: Delete the logo that is displayed when the device is active.
HalfwakeBackground: Delete the brand image that is displayed as a background when the device is in the halfwake state.
HalfwakeBranding: Delete the logo that is displayed when the device is in the halfwake state.
xCommand UserInterface Branding Fetch
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Fetches an image file from a URL and stores the file on the device. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF, JPEG, and PNG. The maximum image size is 16 megapixels, and the maximum file size is 4 MByte.
The Type parameter determines what kind of image it is. If it is a background image, the associated feature (Custom wallpaper or Branding with background and logo) is automatically applied.
This command issues an HTTP request, so it is included in the HTTP requests count. The maximum number of concurrent requests is limited.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Branding Fetch [Checksum: " Checksum "] [ChecksumType:
ChecksumType ] Type: Type URL: " URL " where
Checksum :
String (0, 128)
The checksum is used to ensure the integrity of the downloaded image file. When using
HTTP, it is mandatory to add a checksum. When using HTTPS, it is mandatory to add a checksum only if you are downloading the template from a server that presents an unsigned certificate, or a self-signed certificate that is not in the CA list of the device (not trusted).
ChecksumType :
SHA512
The algorithm that is used to calculate the checksum.
Default value: SHA512
Type :
Background/Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80
MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ Boards ]
Background: Fetches a background image that can be used as custom wallpaper.
Branding: Fetches a logo that can be displayed when the device is active.
HalfwakeBackground: Fetches a brand image that can be displayed as a background when the device is in the halfwake state.
HalfwakeBranding: Fetches a logo that can be displayed when the device is in the
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 339 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration halfwake state.
URL :
String (5, 250)
The URL of the image file.
xCommand UserInterface Branding Get
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The command returns the image file that is specified in the Type parameter, given that such a file is stored on the device. The file is Base64 encoded. The format is JPG for background images and PNG for logos, regardless of the format of the originally uploaded file.
Background images are stored in three sizes, one for the main screen, one for the Touch controller, and one for the web interface illustrations. Use the Size parameter to choose which one to get. Logos have only one size.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Branding Get [Size: Size ] Type: Type where
Size :
Large/Small/Thumbnail
Large: The size of the image that is displayed on the main screen.
Small: The size of the image that is displayed on the Touch controller.
Thumbnail: The size of the image that is used in the web interface illustrations.
Default value: Large
Type :
Background/Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80
MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ Boards ]
Background: Return the custom wallpaper.
Branding: Return the logo that is displayed when the device is active.
HalfwakeBackground: Return the brand image that is displayed as a background when the device is in the halfwake state.
HalfwakeBranding: Return the logo that is displayed when the device is in the halfwake state.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand UserInterface Branding Updated
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
This command creates an event that tells that a new image file is uploaded to the device and ready for use. The Type parameter identifies what kind of image it is.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Branding Updated Type: Type where
Type :
Background/Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80
MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ Boards ]
Background: A new background image that can be used as a custom wallpaper is ready for use.
Branding: A new logo that can be displayed when the device is active is ready for use.
HalfwakeBackground: A new brand image that can be displayed as a background when the device is in the halfwake state is ready for use.
HalfwakeBranding: A new logo that can be displayed when the device is in the halfwake state is ready for use.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 340 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Branding Upload
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Uploads an image file to the device. The following image formats are supported: BMP, GIF,
JPEG, and PNG, and the maximum image size is 16 megapixels. The file must be Base64 encoded, and the maximum file size is 4 MByte.
The Type parameter determines what kind of image it is. If it is a background image, the associated feature (Custom wallpaper or Branding with background and logo) is automatically applied.
This is a multiline command.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Branding Upload Type: Type where
Type :
Background/Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80
MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Branding/HalfwakeBackground/HalfwakeBranding [ Boards ]
Background: Uploads a background image that can be used as custom wallpaper.
Branding: Uploads a logo that can be displayed when the device is active.
HalfwakeBackground: Uploads a brand image that can be displayed as a background when the device is in the halfwake state.
HalfwakeBranding: Uploads a logo that can be displayed when the device is in the halfwake state.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Extensions Clear
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Delete user interface extensions (web apps, custom buttons, panels, and widgets) from the device. If you don't specify an ActivityType, all extensions are deleted.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Clear [ActivityType: ActivityType ] where
ActivityType :
Custom [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Custom/WebApp [ DeskPro Boards ]
Custom: Custom buttons, panels, and widgets are removed. Web apps are not affected.
WebApp: Web apps are removed. Custom buttons, panels, and widgets are not affected.
xCommand UserInterface Extensions List
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
List user interface extensions (web apps, custom buttons, panels, and widgets) that exist on the device. If you don't specify an ActivityType, all extensions are listed.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions List [ActivityType: ActivityType ] where
ActivityType :
Custom [ DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Custom/WebApp [ DeskPro Boards ]
Custom: Custom buttons, panels, and widgets are listed. Web apps are not included.
WebApp: Web apps are listed. Custom buttons, panels, and widgets are not included.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 341 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Clicked
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Creates an event when the user clicks a custom panel.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Clicked PanelId: " PanelId " where
PanelId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier of the custom panel.
xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Close
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Closes an opened custom panel.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Close xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Open
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Opens the custom panel that has the given PanelId. If the panel has multiple pages you can specify which page to open by including the PageId parameter.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Open PanelId: " PanelId " [PageId:
" PageId "] where
PanelId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier of the custom panel.
PageId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier of a page on a custom panel.
xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Remove
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Removes the custom panel from the user interface of this device.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Remove PanelId: " PanelId " where
PanelId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier of the custom panel.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 342 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Save
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Adds a custom panel to the current configuration. The panel will be added to the configuration, but if a panel with the same panel ID already exists, it will be overwritten. This is a multiline command.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Save PanelId: " PanelId " where
PanelId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier of the custom panel.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Update
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Updates the custom panel that has the given PanelId. Successful changes are immediately visible on the endpoint.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Panel Update PanelId: " PanelId " [Name: " Name "]
[Color: " Color "] [Icon: Icon ] [Visibility: Visibility ] where
PanelId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier of the custom panel.
Name :
String (0, 255)
The new name of the custom panel.
Color :
String (0, 255)
The color of the specified panel button, specified in hexadecimal (e.g., #4287f5).
Icon :
Briefing/Camera/Concierge/Disc/Handset/Help/Helpdesk/Home/Hvac/Info/Input/
Language/Laptop/Lightbulb/Media/Microphone/Power/Proximity/Record/Spark/Tv/Webex/
General
The icon to display on the button as selected from the list available options.
Visibility :
Auto/Hidden
The visibility of the button.
Auto: the button will be visible according to the configuration (Always, Only out of call, or
Only in call).
Hidden: the button will always be hidden.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 343 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Extensions Set
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Set the configuration scheme you have chosen in the user interface extensions (widgets) for your device. Updates the UserInterface Extensions status tree. This is a multiline command.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Set ConfigId: " ConfigId " where
ConfigId :
String (0, 40)
The unique identifier for the configuration.
xCommand UserInterface Extensions Widget Action
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Sets the action of the given widget. Updates the UserInterface Extensions status tree.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Widget Action [Type: " Type "] [Value: " Value "]
WidgetId: " WidgetId " where
Type :
String (0, 255)
The type of widget that is set.
Value :
String (0, 255)
The value of the widget. The range of values depends on the widget type.
WidgetId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the widget.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Extensions Widget SetValue
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Set the value of the given widget. Updates the UserInterface Extensions status tree. Returns an error if the value is out of range.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Widget SetValue Value: " Value " WidgetId:
" WidgetId " where
Value :
String (0, 255)
The value of the widget. The range of values depends on the widget type.
WidgetId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the widget.
xCommand UserInterface Extensions Widget UnsetValue
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Empties the value of the given widget. Updates the UserInterface Extensions status tree and notifies the user interface that this widget is no longer selected.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Extensions Widget UnsetValue WidgetId: " WidgetId " where
WidgetId :
String (0, 255)
The unique identifier for the widget.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 344 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Message Alert Clear
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Remove the message which was displayed using the UserInterface Message Alert Display command. This is required when the Duration parameter is not set.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message Alert Clear xCommand UserInterface Message Alert Display
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Display a message on screen. Optionally you can keep the message for a specified duration of time. If Duration is not set, the command must be followed by a UserInterface Message Alert
Clear command.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message Alert Display [Title: " Title "] Text: " Text "
[Duration: Duration ] where
Title :
String (0, 255)
The title of the message.
Default value: ""
Text :
String (0, 255)
The message to be displayed. The <p> and <br> HTML tags will result in line breaks as normal; any other tags will appear as plain text.
Duration :
Integer (0..3600)
How long (in seconds) the message is to be displayed on the screen. If set to 0 (zero) the message is displayed until a UserInterface Message Alert Clear command is sent.
Default value: 0 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Message Prompt Clear
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Remove the window which was displayed using the UserInterface Message Prompt Display command. This is required when the Duration parameter is not set.
Use the xFeedback commands to monitor the feedback from the user. Read more about the xFeedback commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message Prompt Clear [FeedbackId: " FeedbackId "] where
FeedbackId :
String (0, 255)
The FeedbackId corresponds to the FeedbackId given by the UserInterface Message
Prompt Display command.
Default value: ""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 345 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Message Prompt Display
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Display a small window on screen with a title, text and up to five options for response from the user. The message is displayed on screen until the user gives a response, or until the device receives a UserInterface Message Prompt Clear command.
Use the xFeedback commands to monitor the feedback from the user. Read more about the xFeedback commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message Prompt Display [Title: " Title "] Text: " Text "
[FeedbackId: " FeedbackId "] [Duration: Duration ] [Option.1: " Option.1
"] [Option.2:
" Option.2
"] [Option.3: " Option.3
"] [Option.4: "Option.4"] [Option.5: "Option.5"] where
Title :
String (0, 255)
The title of the message.
Text :
String (0, 255)
Enter the text line to be displayed. The <p> and <br> HTML tags will result in line breaks as normal; any other tags will appear as plain text.
FeedbackId :
String (0, 255)
To identify the feedback enter a FeedbackId.
Duration :
Integer (0..3600)
How long (in seconds) the message window is to be displayed on the screen. If set to
0 (zero) the message window is displayed until a UserInterface Message Prompt Clear command is sent.
Default value: 0
Option.1
:
String (0, 255)
The text to appear on feedback option 1.
Option.2
:
String (0, 255)
The text to appear on feedback option 2.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Option.3
:
String (0, 255)
The text to appear on feedback option 3.
Option.4
:
String (0, 255)
The text to appear on feedback option 4.
Option.5
:
String (0, 255)
The text to appear on feedback option 5.
xCommand UserInterface Message Prompt Response
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Give a response to the UserInterface Message Prompt Display command. This command is executed when the user selects an option in the user interface.
Use the xFeedback commands to monitor the feedback from the user. Read more about the xFeedback commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message Prompt Response [FeedbackId: " FeedbackId "]
OptionId: OptionId where
FeedbackId :
String (0, 255)
The FeedbackId corresponds to the FeedbackId given by the UserInterface Message
Prompt Display command.
Default value: ""
OptionId :
Integer (1..5)
The OptionId corresponds to the OptionIds given as possible responses in the
UserInterface Message Prompt Display command.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 346 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Message TextInput Clear
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Remove the text input message which was displayed using the UserInterface Message
TextInput Display command. This is required when the Duration parameter is not set.
Use the xFeedback commands to monitor the feedback from the user. Read more about the xFeedback commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message TextInput Clear [FeedbackId: " FeedbackId "] where
FeedbackId :
String (0, 255)
The FeedbackId corresponds to the FeedbackId given by the UserInterface Message
TextInput Display command.
Default value: ""
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 347
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand UserInterface Message TextInput Display
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Displays an input dialog box to which a user can respond. This is only supported for devices with a touch-based user interface. The message is displayed on screen until the user gives a response, or until the device receives a UserInterface Message TextInput Clear command.
Use the xFeedback commands to monitor the feedback from the user. Read more about the xFeedback commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message TextInput Display [Duration: Duration ]
[FeedbackId: " FeedbackId "] [InputText: " InputText "] [InputType: InputType ]
[KeyboardState: KeyboardState ] [Placeholder: " Placeholder "] [SubmitText:
" SubmitText "] Text: "Text" [Title: "Title"] where
Duration :
Integer (0..3600)
How long (in seconds) the message is to be displayed on the screen. If set to 0 (zero) the message is displayed until a UserInterface Message TextInput Clear command is sent.
Default value: 0
FeedbackId :
String (0, 255)
To identify the feedback enter a FeedbackId.
InputText :
String (0, 255)
Text that is pre-populated in the text input field when the dialog box opens. Before submitting the response, you can edit this text, or delete it and enter your own text.
If this parameter is not included, the content of the Placeholder parameter is shown in the text input field when the dialog box opens.
Default value: ""
InputType :
SingleLine/Numeric/Password/PIN
The type of text input dialog box that is displayed. This also determines the keyboard layout that it displayed.
Default value: SingleLine
KeyboardState :
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Open/Closed
Specifies if the device's keyboard should open when the text input message displays.
Default value: Open
Placeholder :
String (0, 255)
Placeholder text that is displayed in the text input field until you start typing. If the
InputText parameter is included, the Placeholder parameter has no effect.
Default value: ""
SubmitText :
String (0, 32)
The text that is shown on the Submit button.
Default value: "OK"
Text :
String (0, 128)
The message that is to be displayed to the user. The <p> and <br> HTML tags will result in line breaks as normal; any other tags will appear as plain text.
Title :
String (0, 40)
The title of the input dialog box.
Default value: "" xCommand UserInterface Message TextInput Response
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Give a response to the UserInterface Message TextInput Display command. This command is executed when the user submits the reply that he has entered in the text input field in the user interface.
Use the xFeedback commands to monitor the feedback from the user. Read more about the xFeedback commands in the API introduction section in this guide.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message TextInput Response [FeedbackId: " FeedbackId "]
Text: " Text " where
FeedbackId :
String (0, 255)
To identify the feedback enter a FeedbackId.
Text :
String (0, 255)
The message that is to be displayed to the user.
xCommand UserInterface Message TextLine Clear
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Remove the text line which was displayed by the UserInterface Message TextLine Display command. This is required when the Duration parameter is not set.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message TextLine Clear
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 348 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface Message TextLine Display
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Display a text line on screen. Optionally you can place the text line at a specified location and for a specified duration of time. If Duration is not set, the command must be followed by the
UserInterface Message TextLine Clear command.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Message TextLine Display Text: " Text " [X: X ] [Y: Y ]
[Duration: Duration ] where
Text :
String (0, 140)
The text line to be displayed. The <p> and <br> HTML tags will result in line breaks as normal; any other tags will appear as plain text.
X :
Integer (1..10000)
Enter the X-coordinate (horizontal) on screen. X=0 is in the upper left corner.
Default value: 0
Y :
Integer (1..10000)
Enter the Y-coordinate (vertical) on screen. Y=0 is in the upper left corner.
Default value: 0
Duration :
Integer (0..3600)
How long (in seconds) the text line is to be displayed on the screen. If set to 0 (zero) the text line is displayed until a UserInterface Message TextLine Clear command is sent.
Default value: 0 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Click
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20
Requires user role: ADMIN
Emulates a remote control key press, followed by a key release.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Click Key: Key where
Key :
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/C/Call/Disconnect/Down/F1/F2/F3/F4/F5/Grab/Home/Layout/Left/
Mute/MuteMic/Ok/PhoneBook/Presentation/Right/Selfview/Square/SrcAux/SrcCamera/
SrcDocCam/SrcPc/SrcVcr/Star/Up/VolumeDown/VolumeUp/ZoomIn/ZoomOut/+/-
Define the remote key to press.
xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Press
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20
Requires user role: ADMIN
Emulates a remote control key press without releasing it. The Key Press command must be followed by a Key Release command to emulate releasing the key.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Press Key: Key where
Key :
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/C/Call/Disconnect/Down/F1/F2/F3/F4/F5/Grab/Home/Layout/Left/
Mute/MuteMic/Ok/PhoneBook/Presentation/Right/Selfview/Square/SrcAux/SrcCamera/
SrcDocCam/SrcPc/SrcVcr/Star/Up/VolumeDown/VolumeUp/ZoomIn/ZoomOut/+/-
Define the remote key to press.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 349 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Release
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20
Requires user role: ADMIN
Emulates a remote control key release. The Key Release command is issued after a Key Press command.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface OSD Key Release Key: Key where
Key :
0/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/C/Call/Disconnect/Down/F1/F2/F3/F4/F5/Grab/Home/Layout/Left/
Mute/MuteMic/Ok/PhoneBook/Presentation/Right/Selfview/Square/SrcAux/SrcCamera/
SrcDocCam/SrcPc/SrcVcr/Star/Up/VolumeDown/VolumeUp/ZoomIn/ZoomOut/+/-
Define the remote control key to release.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Establish and set up an input source that is connected to the device via an external switch.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add ConnectorId: ConnectorId
SourceIdentifier: " SourceIdentifier " Name: " Name " Type: Type where
ConnectorId :
Integer (2..3) [ SX10 ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX20 ]
Integer (1..5) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (0..5) [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
Integer (2..4) [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Integer (2..2) [ DX70/DX80 ]
The ID of the device connector that the external switch is connected to.
SourceIdentifier :
String (0, 40)
A unique string that identifies the input source. The identifier is used by other commands and events when addressing this specific input source.
Name :
String (0, 40)
The name of the input source. This name will be displayed on the user interface.
Type : camera/desktop/document_camera/mediaplayer/PC/whiteboard/other
The type of input source. The type determines which icon to display on the user interface.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 350 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource List
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Returns the current list of external input sources.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource List xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Remove
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Remove the input source (specified by the SourceIdentifier) from the list of external input sources.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Remove SourceIdentifier:
" SourceIdentifier " where
SourceIdentifier :
String (0, 40)
The unique string that identifies this input source. It was defined when the source was created with the UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add command.
xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Select
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Starts to present the input source (specified by the SourceIdentifier) if it is in Ready state (see the UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource State Set command). The input source will be shown in the user interface sharetray as "Presenting".
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Select SourceIdentifier:
" SourceIdentifier " where
SourceIdentifier :
String (0, 40)
The unique string that identifies this input source. It was defined when the source was created with the UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add command.
xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource RemoveAll
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Remove all input sources from the list of external input sources.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource RemoveAll
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 351 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource State Set
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL
Set or change the state of the input source (specified by the SourceIdentifier).
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource State Set SourceIdentifier:
" SourceIdentifier " State: State [ErrorReason: " ErrorReason "] where
SourceIdentifier :
String (0, 40)
The unique string that identifies this input source. It was defined when the source was created with the UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add command.
State :
Hidden/Ready/NotReady/Error
Ready: The input source will be presented when someone selects it (taps it on the user interface, or when the UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Select command is issued).
NotReady: The input source is not ready, and cannot be selected.
Error: The input source is in an erroneous state. The ErrorReason parameter may be used to inform the user about the reason for failure.
Hidden: The input source will not be displayed in the user interface sharetray.
ErrorReason :
String (0, 80)
This string is displayed in the user interface sharetray, given that the State parameter is set to Error.
Default value: "" xCommand UserInterface WebView Clear
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Closes the current web view.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface WebView Clear xCommand UserInterface WebView Display
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Opens the web view and displays the web page given by the URL.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface WebView Display [Header: " Header "] [Options: " Options "]
[Title: " Title "] Url: " Url " where
Header :
String (0, 8192)
An HTTP header field. You can add up 15 Header parameters in one command, each holding one HTTP header field.
Options :
String (0, 255)
This value is intended for internal use by the UI Extensions Editor.
Title :
String (0, 255)
The title of the web page.
Url :
String (0, 2000)
The URL of the web page.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 352 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
UserManagement commands
xConfiguration xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser Create
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Create a remote support user passphrase that Technical Assistance Center (TAC) can use to access the device for troubleshooting.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser Create [ExpiryDays: ExpiryDays ] where
ExpiryDays :
Integer (1..31)
Define the duration for the passphrase validity. Default is 7 days.
xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser Delete
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Delete the remote support user created with the command xCommand UserManagement
RemoteSupportUser Create.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser Delete xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser DisablePermanently
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Disable the creation of new remote support users. To enable the remote support user again you must factory reset your device.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser DisablePermanently Confirm: Confirm where
Confirm :
Yes xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser GetState
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Retrieves the state of the generated remote support user, if one exists.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement RemoteSupportUser GetState
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 353 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserManagement User Add
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adds a new user to this device.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Add [Active: Active ] [ClientCertificateDN:
" ClientCertificateDN "] Passphrase: " Passphrase " [PassphraseChangeRequired:
PassphraseChangeRequired ] [Role: Role ] [ShellLogin: ShellLogin ] Username:
" Username " [YourPassphrase: "YourPassphrase"] where
Active :
False/True
Specifies whether this is an active user or not.
ClientCertificateDN :
String (0, 255)
Identifies a user who logs in with a client certificate instead of a username and password.
Passphrase :
String (0, 255)
Specifies a Passphrase for the user.
PassphraseChangeRequired :
False/True
Specifies whether the user's passphrase requires changing or not.
Role :
Admin/Audit/Integrator/RoomControl/User
Sets the user's role.
ShellLogin :
False/True
Specifies whether the user should have a shell login or not.
Username :
String (0, 127)
Specifies the user's username.
YourPassphrase :
String (0, 255)
The user's passphrase.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserManagement User Delete
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deletes a user from this device.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Delete Username: " Username " [YourPassphrase:
" YourPassphrase "] where
Username :
String (0, 127)
Specifies the username of the user that is deleted.
YourPassphrase :
String (0, 255)
The passphrase of the user that is deleted.
xCommand UserManagement User Get
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Shows the details of users on this device.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Get [ClientCertificateDN: " ClientCertificateDN "]
[Username: " Username "] where
ClientCertificateDN :
String (0, 255)
Identifies a user who logs in with a client certificate instead of a username and password.
Username :
String (0, 127)
Specify a username to show the details of a particular user.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 354 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserManagement User List
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Shows the list of users on this device.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User List [Limit: Limit ] [Offset: Offset ] where
Limit :
Integer (0..65536)
Limits the number of results that are shown.
Default value: 0
Offset :
Integer (0..65536)
Shows lines with the same or higher Offset than the one provided.
Default value: 0
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 355
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand UserManagement User Modify
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Modifies the details of a particular user.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Modify [Active: Active ] [AddRole: AddRole ]
[ClientCertificateDN: " ClientCertificateDN "] [PassphraseChangeRequired:
PassphraseChangeRequired ] [RemoveRole: RemoveRole ] [ShellLogin: ShellLogin ]
Username: " Username " [YourPassphrase: "YourPassphrase"] where
Active :
False/True
Specifies whether this is an active user or not.
AddRole :
Admin/Audit/Integrator/RoomControl/User
Adds a new role for the specified user.
ClientCertificateDN :
String (0, 255)
Identifies a user who logs in with a client certificate instead of a username and password.
PassphraseChangeRequired :
False/True
Specifies whether the user's passphrase requires changing or not.
RemoveRole :
Admin/Audit/Integrator/RoomControl/User
Removes a role from the specified user.
ShellLogin :
False/True
Specifies whether the user should have a shell login or not.
Username :
String (0, 127)
Specifies the user's username.
YourPassphrase :
String (0, 255)
The user's passphrase.
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand UserManagement User Passphrase Change
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, AUDIT, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Change the passphrase for the user you logged in as. If you are logged in as the administrator, this will change the administrator passphrase.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Passphrase Change NewPassphrase: " NewPassphrase "
OldPassphrase: " OldPassphrase " where
NewPassphrase :
String (0, 255)
OldPassphrase :
String (0, 255) xCommand UserManagement User Passphrase Set
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Set a user passphrase for the specified user. You must be logged in as an administrator to set a user passphrase.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Passphrase Set NewPassphrase: " NewPassphrase "
Username: " Username " [YourPassphrase: " YourPassphrase "] where
NewPassphrase :
String (0, 255)
Username :
String (0, 127)
YourPassphrase :
String (0, 255) xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand UserManagement User Unblock
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Unblocks a user who is blocked out because of too many failed login attempts.
USAGE: xCommand UserManagement User Unblock Username: " Username " [YourPassphrase:
" YourPassphrase "] where
Username :
String (0, 127)
YourPassphrase :
String (0, 255)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 356 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Video commands
xConfiguration xCommand Video ActiveSpeakerPIP Set
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Sets position for the active speakers PiP (picture in picture).
USAGE: xCommand Video ActiveSpeakerPIP Set Position: Position where
Position :
CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/LowerRight/UpperCenter/UpperLeft/UpperRight
Select one of the predefined positions.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Video CEC Input KeyClick
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Mimics a remote control key click event from the input device.
USAGE: xCommand Video CEC Input KeyClick ConnectorId: ConnectorId [Key: Key ]
[LogicalAddress: LogicalAddress ] [NamedKey: NamedKey ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..5) [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..3) [ RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D DeskPro ]
Integer (2..2) [ Boards ]
The unique identifier of the connector.
Key :
Integer (0..255)
The CEC specified key code for the key that is sent to the logical address of the device as if it was pushed on a remote control.
LogicalAddress :
Integer (0..15)
The logical address of the connected device.
NamedKey :
Up/Down/Right/Left/Ok/Back/Stop/Play)
The name of the key that is sent to the logical address of the device as if it was pushed on a remote control.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 357 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video CEC Output KeyClick
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
Mimics a remote control key click event from this device.
USAGE: xCommand Video CEC Output KeyClick ConnectorId: ConnectorId [Key: Key ]
LogicalAddress: LogicalAddress [NamedKey: NamedKey ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
The unique identifier of the connector.
Key :
Integer (0..255)
The CEC specified key code for the key that is sent to the logical address of the device as if it was pushed on a remote control.
LogicalAddress :
Integer (0..15)
The logical address of the connected device.
NamedKey :
Up/Down/Right/Left/Ok/Back/Stop/Play)
The name of the key that is sent to the logical address of the device as if it was pushed on a remote control.
xCommand Video CEC Output SendActiveSourceRequest
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
A request from the video conferencing device to become the active source of the screen
(device) that is connected to the specified output connector.
USAGE: xCommand Video CEC Output SendActiveSourceRequest [ConnectorId: ConnectorId ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..1) [ SX10 RoomKitMini ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro
Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
The unique identifier of the connector.
xCommand Video CEC Output SendInactiveSourceRequest
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
A request from the video conferencing device to stop being the active source of the screen
(device) that is connected to the specified output connector. It is up to the screen to decide how to respond to the request. It can become the active source itself, make another source the active one, or do nothing.
USAGE: xCommand Video CEC Output SendInactiveSourceRequest [ConnectorId: ConnectorId ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..1) [ RoomKitMini ]
Integer (1..3) [ RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro ]
The unique identifier of the connector.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 358 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video Graphics Clear
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Not applicable in this version.
USAGE: xCommand Video Graphics Clear [Layer: Layer ] [Target: Target ] where
Layer :
Integer (1..3)
Target :
LocalOutput/MainSource/PresentationSource xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Graphics Text Display
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Not applicable in this version.
USAGE: xCommand Video Graphics Text Display [Date: Date ] [Duration: Duration ] [Layer:
Layer ] [Target: Target ] [Text: " Text "] [Time: Time ] where
Date :
On/Off
Duration :
Integer (0..3600)
Layer :
Integer (1..3)
Target :
LocalOutput/MainSource/PresentationSource
Text :
String (0, 1024)
Time :
On/Off xCommand Video Input MainVideo Mute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Stop sending video from the device. Selfview is also turned off. This command does not affect the presentation channel.
USAGE: xCommand Video Input MainVideo Mute
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 359 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video Input MainVideo Unmute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Start sending video from the device if previously turned off using the Video Input MainVideo
Mute command (or, if available, the "Turn off video" button on the user interface). Selfview is also available.
USAGE: xCommand Video Input MainVideo Unmute
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Set which input source is the main video source. You can identify the input source by either the physical connector that it is connected to (ConnectorId) or the logical source identifier
(SourceId).
You can combine up to four input sources in a single main video stream (the maximum number of different input sources depend on the type of video conferencing device) by adding multiple
ConnectorIds or SourceIds in the same command. There cannot be a mix of identifier types in the same command; use either ConnectorId or SourceId. DX70 and DX80 don't support such combination of input sources.
USAGE: xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource [ConnectorId: ConnectorId ] [Layout:
Layout ] [PIPPosition: PIPPosition ] [PIPSize: PIPSize ] [SourceId: SourceId ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (1..n)
The identifier (ID) of the connector. Connector [n] has ID n. Run the following API command to find the ID: xStatus Video Input Connector.
Layout :
Equal/PIP/Prominent
Sets the layout of the main video source if the main video source is composed of multiple input sources.
Equal: The input sources are shown in same-sized images. There can be a maximum of four images on screen.
PIP: Shows one of the input source as a Picture in Picture (only available when composing two input sources).
Prominent: The first input source is shown as a large image, and the next input sources are shown as smaller images placed below.
PIPPosition :
LowerLeft/LowerRight/UpperLeft/UpperRight
Select the PIP position of the main video source if the main video source is composed of multiple input sources.
PIPSize :
Auto/Large
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 360 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Select the PIP size of the main video source if the main video source is composed of multiple input sources.
SourceId :
Integer (1..n)
The identifier (ID) of the input source. Input Source [n] has ID n. Run the following API command to find the ID: xStatus Video Input Source.
xCommand Video Input Source SetActiveConnector
Applies to: SX10 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Select which connector is active.
On SX80 and MX700/MX800 Input Connector 4 (DVI-I) and Connector 5 (S-Video/Composite) cannot be active simultaneously.
On SX10 Input Connector 2 (HDMI) and Connector 3 (VGA) cannot be active simultaneously.
On MX200G2/MX300G2: Only one of Input Connector 2 (DVI), Connector 3 (HDMI), and
Connector 4 (HDMI) can be active at any time.
USAGE: xCommand Video Input Source SetActiveConnector [ConnectorId: ConnectorId ] where
ConnectorId :
Integer (4..5) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
Integer (2..4) [ MX200G2/MX300G2 ]
Integer (2..3) [ SX10 ]
The identifier (ID) of the connector. Connector [n] has ID n. Check the Video Input
Connector status to find the connector IDs. On SX80 and MX700/MX800, the connector
ID is also printed on the codec connector panel.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Layout LayoutFamily Set
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Select the screen layout mode.
USAGE: xCommand Video Layout LayoutFamily Set [Target: Target ] LayoutFamily:
LayoutFamily [CustomLayoutName: " CustomLayoutName "] where
Target :
Local/Remote
Select if the target is the local layout or the remote layout.
LayoutFamily : auto/custom/equal/overlay/prominent/single
Select a layout family.
CustomLayoutName :
String (1, 128)
Enter a name for the layout.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 361 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Matrix Assign
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Video Matrix commands are a smart overlay to the xCommand Video Layout commands to make it easy to do simple video compositions.
USAGE: xCommand Video Matrix Assign [Layout: Layout ] [Mode: Mode ] Output: Output
[RemoteMain: RemoteMain ] [SourceId: SourceId ] where
Layout :
Equal/Prominent
Select the layout you wish to use for the video composition.
Equal: All sources are shown in same-sized images on the output.
Prominent: The first source is shown as a large image, and the next sources are shown as smaller images placed below.
Mode :
Add/Replace
Choose whether to replace the existing source on that output rendered full screen or to add it. Using Add, the layout engine will recompose the multiple sources automatically.
Replace is the default value.
Output :
Integer (1..2) [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Choose the output you wish to use for this layout.
RemoteMain :
Integer (1..4)
Add a remote site to the layout.
SourceId :
Integer (1..6) [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX20 ]
Integer (1..4) [ SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus ]
The identifier (ID) of the input source. Input Source [n] has ID n. Run the following API command to find the ID: xStatus Video Input Source. You can use up to four SourceIds in one command.
xCommand Video Matrix Reset
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Reset the content on the output to the default layout xCommand Video Matrix commands are a smart overlay to the xCommand Video Layout commands to make it easy to do simple video compositions.
USAGE: xCommand Video Matrix Reset [Output: Output ] where
Output :
Integer (1..2) [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Choose the output you want to reset.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 362 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video Matrix Swap
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Swap the content defined with xCommand Video Matrix Assign between two outputs.
xCommand Video Matrix commands are a smart overlay to the xCommand Video Layout commands to make it easy to do simple video compositions.
USAGE: xCommand Video Matrix Swap OutputA: OutputA OutputB: OutputB where
OutputA :
Integer (1..2) [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
The output you are swapping from.
OutputB :
Integer (1..2) [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
The output you are swapping to.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Matrix Unassign
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Remove a source from an output. Just as with xCommand Video Matrix Assign the layout engine will recompose the remaining sources automatically.
xCommand Video Matrix commands are a smart overlay to the xCommand Video Layout commands to make it easy to do simple video compositions.
USAGE: xCommand Video Matrix Unassign Output: Output [RemoteMain: RemoteMain ]
[SourceId: SourceId ] where
Output :
Integer (1..2) [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..3) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2 ]
Choose the output you wish to remove the source from.
RemoteMain :
Integer (1..4)
Remove a remote site from the layout.
SourceId :
Integer (1..2) [ SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit ]
Integer (1..3) [ CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..4) [ SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus ]
Integer (1..6) [ CodecPro Room70G2 ]
The identifier (ID) of the input source. Input Source [n] has ID n. Run the following API command to find the ID: xStatus Video Input Source.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 363 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video Output Monitor Backlight Set
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the monitor backlight.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Backlight Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
[ MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Integer (0..100)
Select the level.
xCommand Video Output Monitor Brightness Set
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the monitor brightness.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Brightness Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Integer (0..100)
Select the level.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Blue Set
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the level of blue on the monitor.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Blue Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Integer (0..100)
Select the level.
xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Green Set
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the level of green on the monitor.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Green Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Integer (0..100)
Select the level.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 364 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Red Set
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the level of red on the monitor.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Red Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Integer (0..100)
Select the level.
xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Select
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the monitor's color temperature.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Color Select Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
4900K/5500K/6500K/7200K/9300K/10500K/12000K/User [ MX700/MX800/MX800D ]
4900K/5500K/6500K/7200K/9300K/10500K/12000K [ Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ] xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Output Monitor Contrast Set
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the contrast level on the monitor.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Contrast Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Integer (0..100)
Select the level.
xCommand Video Output Monitor CSC Select
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Select the monitor's color space.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor CSC Select Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
RGB/YUV
Select either RGB or YUV.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 365 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video Output Monitor Gamma Set
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the gamma level on the monitor.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Gamma Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
1.5/1.6/1.7/1.8/1.9/2.0/2.1/2.2/2.3/2.4/2.5/2.6/2.7
Select the level.
xCommand Video Output Monitor Reset
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2 Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Reset monitor settings (not available for Room 55 Dual).
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Reset Position: Position where
Position :
[ MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2 ]
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Video Output Monitor Sharpness Set
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN
Adjust the image sharpness on the monitor.
USAGE: xCommand Video Output Monitor Sharpness Set Position: Position Value: Value where
Position :
Left/Right
Choose whether to apply the command to the left or right integrated screen. This parameter is only present for devices with two integrated screens (dual screen devices).
Value :
Softest/Soft/Normal/Sharp/Sharpest
Select the level.
xCommand Video PresentationPIP Set
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Sets position for the presentation PiP (picture in picture).
USAGE: xCommand Video PresentationPIP Set Position: Position where
Position :
CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/LowerRight/UpperCenter/UpperLeft/UpperRight
Select one of the predefined positions.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 366 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand Video PresentationView Set
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Set the presentation view mode
USAGE: xCommand Video PresentationView Set View: View where
View :
Default/Maximized/Minimized
Select Default when you want the presentation to be viewed with the default settings for the codec. Select Maximized when you want the presentation to be displayed in full screen. Select
Minimized when you want the presentation to be displayed in a small picture on screen.
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus xCommand Video Selfview Set
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Sets self-view on/off and specifies its size and position. If the parameter is not specified, current value is used.
USAGE: xCommand Video Selfview Set [Mode: Mode ] [FullscreenMode: FullscreenMode ]
[PIPPosition: PIPPosition ] [OnMonitorRole: OnMonitorRole ] where
Mode :
On/Off
Selfview is set to on or off.
FullscreenMode :
On/Off
Choose between displaying the self-view in full screen or as picture-in-picture.
PIPPosition :
CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/LowerRight/UpperCenter/UpperLeft/UpperRight
Select the position for the self-view image.
OnMonitorRole :
First/Second/Third
Displays self-view on monitors with this role.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 367 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
WebEngine commands
xConfiguration xCommand UserInterface WebEngine DeleteStorage
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN
Deletes session data for web view types, such as digital signage and web apps.
USAGE: xCommand UserInterface WebEngine DeleteStorage [Type: Type ] where
Type :
All/Signage/WebApps
All: Deletes the session data for all web view types.
Signage: Deletes the session data related to digital signage.
WebApps: Deletes the session data related to all web views except digital signage.
Default value: All xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Webex commands
xCommand Webex Join
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Join the Webex Meeting specified by the meeting number.
Add optional information, such as the display name or a tag, to identify the call in the call history.
USAGE: xCommand Webex Join [DisplayName: " DisplayName "] Number: " Number " [TrackingData:
" TrackingData "] where
DisplayName :
String (0, 255)
The display name of the remote participant.
Number :
String (0, 255)
The meeting number, meeting link, video address, or Personal Room ID.
TrackingData :
String (0, 255)
A tag or label preserved with the call number in the call history.
xCommand Webex Registration Cancel
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Cancel device registration to Cisco Webex.
This command only works in the short period after the registration is started with xCommand
Webex Registration Start.
USAGE: xCommand Webex Registration Cancel
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 368 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand Webex Registration ConvertToCloud
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN
Convert a device to be managed by the Cisco Webex cloud service.
This is only available on systems linked with Webex Edge for Devices. All current connections to on-premises services for calling and directory will be replaced with cloud data sources.
To convert back to on-premises again, the device must factory reset.
USAGE: xCommand Webex Registration ConvertToCloud Confirm: Confirm where
Confirm :
Yes
Enter Yes, case-insensitive, to confirm that you will proceed with the command. Any other text will cancel the request.
xCommand Webex Registration Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Start registering a device to Cisco Webex by entering the activation code that has been created in Control Hub and choosing whether to keep local users and integrations. You get a confirmation that the registration has been successful or failed.
USAGE: xCommand Webex Registration Start ActivationCode: ActivationCode SecurityAction:
SecurityAction where
ActivationCode :
String: 16, 19
The activation code that has been created in Control Hub for this device.
SecurityAction :
Harden/NoAction
Harden: Deactivates all local users that have been created for this device and deactivates
Macros.
NoAction: Does not remove any configurations. Use NoAction if you wish to keep existing integrations.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 369 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Chapter 5
xStatus commands
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 370 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Description of the xStatus commands
In this chapter, you can find all of the xStatus commands and the responses. Status type commands return information about the system and system processes. You can query all information or just some of it.
xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 371 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 372 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 373 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 374 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 375 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 376 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 377 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Audio status
xConfiguration xStatus Audio Devices Bluetooth ActiveProfile
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Bluetooth headset profile currently in use.
Value space of the result returned:
None/HFP/A2DP
HFP Hands-Free Profile), A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile), or None, no profile in use.
Example: xStatus Audio Devices Bluetooth ActiveProfile
*s Audio Devices Bluetooth ActiveProfile: None
** end xStatus Audio Devices HandsetUSB ConnectionStatus
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if a USB handset is connected.
Value space of the result returned:
Connected/NotConnected
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HandsetUSB ConnectionStatus
*s Connected
** end xCommand xStatus Audio Devices HandsetUSB Cradle
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if a USB handset is on hook or off hook.
Value space of the result returned:
OnHook/OffHook
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HandsetUSB Cradle
*s OnHook
** end xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetAnalog Connection Status
Applies to: DX70/DX80 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if an analog headset is connected. (DX70 only)
Value space of the result returned:
Connected/NotConnected
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetAnalog Connection Status
*s Connected
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 378 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetAnalog HasMicrophone
Applies to:
DX70/DX80
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if an analog headset has a built-in microphone. (DX70 only)
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetAnalog HasMicrophone
*s True
** end xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetUSB ConnectionStatus
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if a USB headset is connected.
Value space of the result returned:
Connected/NotConnected
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetUSB ConnectionStatus
*s Connected
** end xConfiguration xCommand xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Description
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows a description of the attached USB headset.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Description
*s HeadsetUSB Description: "Description of USB headset."
** end xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Manufacturer
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the USB headset manufacturer.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Manufacturer
*s HeadsetUSB Manufacturer: "CompanyName"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 379 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Input Connectors HDMI [n] Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the audio channel on a HDMI input connector is muted or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Input Connectors HDMI 1 Mute
*s Audio Input Connectors HDMI 1 Mute: Off
** end xStatus Audio Input Connectors Line [n] Mute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the audio on a Line input connector is muted or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Input Connectors Line 1 Mute
*s Audio Input Connectors Line 1 Mute: Off
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] ConnectionStatus
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 MX200G2/MX300G2 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Indicates whether a microphone is detected on the microphone input connector.
Value space of the result returned:
Connected/NotConnected/Unknown
Connected: A microphone is connected.
NotConnected: Nothing is connected.
Unknown: The video conferencing device is not able to detect if a microphone is connected.
Example: xStatus Audio Input Connectors Microphone ConnectionStatus
*s Audio Input Connectors Microphone 1 ConnectionStatus: NotConnected
*s Audio Input Connectors Microphone 2 ConnectionStatus: Connected
** end xStatus Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] EcReferenceDelay
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the detected latency for each loudspeaker to microphone path. The result is in milliseconds.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Audio Input Connectors Microphone 1 EcReferenceDelay
*s Audio Input Connectors Microphone 1 EcReferenceDelay: 120
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 380 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the audio on a Microphone input connector is muted or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Input Connectors Microphone 1 Mute
*s Audio Input Connectors Microphone 1 Mute: Off
** end xStatus Audio Input Connectors USBC [n] Mute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the audio channel on a USB-C input connector is muted or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Input Connectors USBC 1 Mute
*s Audio Input Connectors USBC 1 Mute: Off
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Input KeyClick Attenuate
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the device is automatically attenuating clicking noises, such as those detected microphone signals caused by the typing of a keyboard.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
True: The attenuation of the microphone signal is turned on.
False: The attenuation of the microphone signal is turned off.
Example: xStatus Audio Input KeyClick Attenuate
*s Audio Input KeyClick Attenuate: True
** end xStatus Audio Input KeyClick Detected
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows what type of audio signals the device is detecting for attenuation. The device will attenuate the microphone signal if clicking noises from a keyboard are detected. If voice or silence is detected, the microphone signal will not be attenuated.
Value space of the result returned:
KeyClick/Voice/Silence
KeyClick: Only key clicks are being detected.
Voice: Voice is being detected.
Silence: No audio signals are being detected.
Example: xStatus Audio Input KeyClick Detected
*s Audio Input KeyClick Detected: KeyClick
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 381 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Input KeyClick Enabled
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether detection for attenuation on the microphone signal is enabled.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
True: Detection on the microphone signal is turned on.
False: Detection on the microphone signal is turned off.
Example: xStatus Audio Input KeyClick Enabled
*s Audio Input KeyClick Enabled: On
** end xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] AGC
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) mode on the local input.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 AGC
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 AGC: "On"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] Channels
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
States if the local input channels are mixed into a mono signal (1) or stereo signal (2).
You can run the command xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
1..2
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 Channels
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 Channels: 1
** end xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] Connector
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the connectors that are attached to the local input.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
Microphone.1/../Microphone.4/Line.1/Line.2/HDMI.2
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 Connector
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 Connector: "Microphone.1"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 382 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] Direct
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether or not input processing such as acoustic echo cancellation and noise reduction is bypassed on this local input. Bypassing the input processing reduces the audio input delay, which is useful when doing local sound reinforcement. You can run the command xStatus Audio
Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/On
Off: All regular input processing is performed, according to the configuration of each connector.
On: Bypass input processing such as acoustic echo cancellation and noise reduction, regardless of the configuration for each connected input connector.
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 Direct
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 Direct: "Off"
** end xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] MixerMode
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows how the local input connectors have been mixed together. You can run the command xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
Auto/Fixed/GainShared
Auto: The microphone with the strongest speaker is active and the others are strongly attenuated.
Fixed: The input connector signals are mixed together with equal gains.
GainShared: The microphones are given a normalized gain factor relative to the strongest speaker before being mixed together.
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 MixerMode
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 MixerMode: "Auto"
** end xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] Mute
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the mute mode for the local inputs. A local input is a mix of input connectors.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 Mute
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 Mute: "Off"
** end xStatus Audio Input LocalInput [n] Name
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the name of the local input. A local input is a mix of input connectors. You can run the command xStatus Audio Input LocalInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Audio Input LocalInput 1 Name
*s Audio Input LocalInput 1 Name: "Microphone"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 383 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Input RemoteInput [n] CallId
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the CallId for the remote audio input.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Input RemoteInput to find the identity [n] of the input.
Value space of the result returned:
0..65534
Example: xStatus Audio Input RemoteInput 8 CallId
*s Audio Input RemoteInput 8 CallId: 28
** end xStatus Audio Microphones Mute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether the microphones are muted.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Microphones Mute
*s Audio Microphones Mute: Off
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] DelayMs
Applies to:
CodecPlus CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the delay of the ARC output.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The delay in milliseconds.
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors ARC 1 DelayMs
*s Audio Output Connectors ARC 1 DelayMs: 60
** end xStatus Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] Mode
Applies to: CodecPlus CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether the audio channel on the ARC output connector is enabled or disabled.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors ARC 1 Mode
*s Audio Output Connectors ARC 1 Mode: Off
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 384 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] DelayMs
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the delay of the HDMI output.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The delay in milliseconds.
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors HDMI 1 DelayMs
*s Audio Output Connectors HDMI 1 DelayMs: 60
** end xStatus Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] Mode
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether the audio channel on the HDMI output connector is enabled or disabled, or if the connector is being used to measure the audio delay through the connected video display.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off/DelayMeasurement
On: The audio channel on the HDMI output connector is enabled.
Off: The audio channel on the HDMI output connector is disabled
DelayMeasurement: The connector is being used to measure the audio delay through the connected video display.
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors HDMI 1 Mode
*s Audio Output Connectors HDMI 1 Mode: On
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] DelayMs
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the delay of the internal loudspeaker.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The delay in milliseconds.
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker 1 DelayMS
*s Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker 1 DelayMs: 0
** end xStatus Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] Mode
Applies to: RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether the device's integrated speakers are enabled or disabled.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker 1 Mode
*s Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker 1 Mode: On
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 385 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Audio Output Connectors Line [n] ConnectionStatus
Applies to:
RoomKit CodecPlus Room55 Room70/Room55D Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether the audio output line is connected.
Value space of the result returned:
Connected/NotConnected/Unknown
Connected: A device is connected.
NotConnected: Nothing is connected.
Unknow: The device is not able to detect if anything is connected.
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors Line 1 ConnectionStatus
*s Audio Output Connectors Line 1 ConnectionStatus: Connected
** end xStatus Audio Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the delay in milliseconds.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer (0..290)
Example: xStatus Audio Output Connectors Line 1 DelayMs
*s Audio Output Connectors Line 1 DelayMs: 60
** end xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] AutoconnectRemote
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether or not the remote input signal (from far-end) is automatically added to this local output. It can always be added manually using the Audio LocalOutput ConnectInput command.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
On: The remote input signal is automatically added to all local outputs when in a call.
Off: The remote input signal is not automatically added to the local output.
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 4 AutoconnectRemote
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 4 AutoconnectRemote: "On"
** end xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Channels
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
States if the local output channels are mixed into a mono signal (1) or stereo signal (2).
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to find the identity [n] of the output.
Value space of the result returned:
1..2
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Channels
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Channels: "1"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 386 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Connector [n]
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the connectors that are attached to the local output.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to find the identity [n] of the output.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Connector
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Connector: "Line.1"
** end xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Input [n] Gain
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the gain (dB) on the input, when it is connected to the local output.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to find the identity [n] of the output and input.
Value space of the result returned:
-54..15
Range from -54 dB to 15 dB, where -54 dB equals Off.
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Input 2 Gain
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Input 2 Gain: 0
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Loudspeaker
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Loudspeaker mode on the local output. If one or more of the output connectors that are attached to the local output are connected to a loudspeaker, then this signal should be a reference signal to the echo canceler and Loudspeaker should be set to On.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to find the identity [n] of the output.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Loudspeaker
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Loudspeaker: "Off"
** end xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Name
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the name of the local output.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput to find the identity [n] of the output.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Name
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 4 Name: "MyLocalOutput1"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 387 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput [n] VolumeControlled
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows where this output's volume is controlled from.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Off: This output's volume is controlled by global audio control.
On: This output's volume is at the level defined with xCommand Audio Volume Set.
Example: xStatus Audio Output LocalOutput 5 VolumeControlled
*s Audio Output LocalOutput 5 VolumeControlled: "On"
** end xStatus Audio Output MeasuredHdmiArcDelay
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the measured audio delay of the device connected to the HDMI connector. This delay is measured through the HDMI audio return channel, and will secure good lip-synchronization between audio and video.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The measured audio delay in milliseconds.
Example: xStatus Audio Output MeasuredHdmiArcDelay
*s Audio Output MeasuredHdmiArcDelay: 85
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio Output MeasuredHdmiDelay
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the measured audio delay of the device connected to the HDMI connector. This delay is measured from the HDMI output to one of the microphones.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The measured audio delay in milliseconds.
Example: xStatus Audio Output MeasuredHdmiDelay
*s Audio Output MeasuredHdmiDelay: 134
** end xStatus Audio Output MeasuredHdmiCecDelay
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the reported video delay of the device connected to the HDMI connector. This delay is reported through the consumer electronics control (CEC) protocol, and will secure good lip-synchronization between audio and video.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The measured audio delay in milliseconds.
Example: xStatus Audio Output ReportedHdmiCecDelay
*s Audio Output ReportedHdmiCecDelay: 39
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 388 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput [n] CallId
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the CallId for the remote audio output.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput to find the identity [n] of the output.
Value space of the result returned:
1..65534
Example: xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput 9 CallId
*s Audio Output RemoteOutput 9 CallId: 28
** end xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput [n] Input [n] Gain
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the gain (dB) on the input, when input is connected to the remote output. Range from
-54 dB to 15 dB, where -54 dB equals Off.
You can run the command xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput to find the identity [n] of the output and input.
Value space of the result returned:
-54..15
Example: xStatus Audio Output RemoteOutput 9 Input 1 Gain
*s Audio Output RemoteOutput 9 Input 1 Gain: 0
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Audio SelectedDevice
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the audio device that is selected. Only DX80 and DX70 support Bluetooth. Only the
DX70 supports analog headsets.
Value space of the result returned:
Internal/HeadsetUSB/HeadsetAnalog/HeadsetBluetooth/HandsetUSB
[]
Example: xStatus Audio SelectedDevice
*s Audio SelectedDevice: Internal
** end xStatus Audio Volume
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the volume level (dB) of the loudspeaker output.
Value space of the result returned:
0..100
Example: xStatus Audio Volume
*s Audio Volume: 70
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 389 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Audio VolumeHandsetUsb
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the volume level of the USB handset.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Audio VolumeHandsetUsb
*s 6
** end xStatus Audio VolumeHeadsetAnalog
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the volume level of the analog headset (DX70 only).
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Audio VolumeHeadsetAnalog
*s 6
** end xConfiguration xCommand xStatus Audio VolumeHeadsetUsb
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the volume level of the USB headset.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Audio VolumeHeadsetUsb
*s 6
** end xStatus Audio VolumeInternal
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the internal volume level.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Audio VolumeInternal
*s 6
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 390 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Audio VolumeMute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the device volume is set to mute.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/On
Example: xStatus Audio VolumeMute
*s Audio VolumeMute: Off
** end xConfiguration xCommand
Bookings status
xStatus Bookings Current Id
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The ID of the on going booking event, if any.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Bookings Current Id
*s Bookings Current Id: "123"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 391 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Call status
xConfiguration xStatus Call [n] AnswerState
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates if a call is answered, ignored or has been automatically answered by a device.
Value space of the result returned:
Unanswered/Ignored/Autoanswered/Answered
Example: xStatus Call AnswerState
*s Call 5 AnswerState: Answered
** end xStatus Call [n] AttendedTransferFrom
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the CallId for the call the current call was transferred from.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Call 1 AttendedTransferFrom
*s Call 1 AttendedTransferFrom: 1234
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Call [n] CallbackNumber
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the remote (far end) number or URI of an incoming or outgoing call, including the call protocol, for call back. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Call 27 CallbackNumber
*s Call 27 CallbackNumber: "h323:[email protected]"
** end xStatus Call [n] CallType
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the call type of the incoming or outgoing call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
Video/Audio/AudioCanEscalate/ForwardAllCall/Unknown
Example: xStatus Call 27 CallType
*s Call 27 CallType: Video
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 392 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Call [n] DeviceType
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows where the call is connected to.
Value space of the result returned:
Endpoint/MCU
Endpoint: It is a point-to-point call to another device.
MCU: The call is to a multipoint conferencing unit (MCU) in the network, or a MultiSite call hosted on a device.
Example: xStatus Call DeviceType
*s Call 4 DeviceType: Endpoint
** end xStatus Call [n] Direction
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
States the direction of the call initiation. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
Incoming/Outgoing
Example: xStatus Call 27 Direction
*s Call 27 Direction: Outgoing
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Call [n] DisplayName
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the name of the remote (far end) participant in an incoming or outgoing call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Call 27 DisplayName
*s Call 27 DisplayName: "[email protected]"
** end xStatus Call [n] Duration
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the duration of a call (in seconds). You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Call 27 Duration
*s Call 27 Duration: 2354
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 393 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Call [n] Encryption Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the encryption type of the call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
None/Aes-128
Example: xStatus Call 27 Encryption Type
*s Call 27 Encryption Type: "None"
** end xStatus Call [n] FacilityServiceId
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
When calling a facility service, the facility service id is shown. Otherwise the value 0 is returned.
Value space of the result returned:
0..5
Example: xStatus Call FacilityServiceId
*s Call 3 FacilityServiceId: 1
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Call [n] HoldReason
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the reason the current outgoing call was put on hold.
Value space of the result returned:
Conference/Transfer/None
Conference: On hold while the call is being merged into a conference.
Transfer: On hold while the call is being transferred.
None: All other instances.
Example: xStatus Call 2 HoldReason
*s Call 2 HoldReason: None
** end xStatus Call [n] Ice
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
ICE is a feature that enables two sides of a call to send media (video and audio) directly between each other, if a direct network path has been found through ICE negotiation. This status reflects the result of that negotiation.
Value space of the result returned:
Disabled/Passed/Failed
Disabled: ICE is disabled.
Passed: A direct network path was found and is being used.
Failed: A direct network path was not found, and media will most likely flow through an intermediary component.
Example: xStatus Call 2 Ice
*s Call 2 Ice: Passed
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 394 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Call [n] PlacedOnHold
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the placed on hold status of the call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Call 27 PlacedOnHold
*s Call 27 PlacedOnHold: False
** end xStatus Call [n] Protocol
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the call protocol of the incoming or outgoing call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
H320/H323/SIP/Spark/Unknown
Example: xStatus Call 27 Protocol
*s Call 27 Protocol: "h323"
** end xStatus Call [n] ReceiveCallRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the receive bandwidth in the call in kilobits per second (kbps). You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Call 27 ReceiveCallRate
*s Call 27 ReceiveCallRate: 4000
** end xStatus Call [n] RemoteNumber
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the remote (far end) number or URI of an incoming or outgoing call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Call 27 RemoteNumber
*s Call 27 RemoteNumber: "5585232"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 395 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Call [n] Status
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of a call. You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
Idle/Dialling/Ringing/Connecting/Connected/Disconnecting/OnHold/EarlyMedia/Preserved/
RemotePreserved
Example: xStatus Call 27 Status
*s Call 27 Status: Connected
** end xStatus Call [n] TransmitCallRate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the transmit bandwidth in the call in kilobits per second (kbps). You can run the command xStatus Call to find the call identity.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Call 27 TransmitCallRate
*s Call 27 TransmitCallRate: 768
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Cameras status
xStatus Cameras Background Image
Applies to:
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows which of a set of three pre-installed images is selected as the background image.
Value space of the result returned:
Image1/Image2/Image3
Image1: Office space
Image2: Home office
Image3: Beach
Example: xstatus Cameras Background Mode
*s Cameras Background Mode: Image
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 396 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Cameras Background Mode
Applies to:
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows whether any images or effects have been selected to mask the background of the camera view.
Value space of the result returned:
Disabled/Blur/BlurMonochrome/DepthOfField/Monochrome/Image
Disabled: There are no images or effects masking the background of the camera view.
Blur: The background is blurred.
BlurMonochrome: combination of blur and monochrome (blurred without colors)
DepthOfField: variant of blur with less blurring
Monochrome: Shows the image in grayscale
Image: The background is replaced by the selected background image.
Example: xstatus Cameras Background Image
*s Cameras Background Image: Image3
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Capabilities Options
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the camera capabilities (ptzf = pan, tilt, zoom, focus).
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Capabilities Options
*s Camera 1 Capabilities Options: "ptzf"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Connected
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows if the camera is connected or not.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Connected
*s Camera 1 Connected: True
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] DetectedConnector
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the connector number the camera has detected it is connected to, or shows 0 if no connection is detected.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 DetectedConnector
*s Cameras Camera 1 DetectedConnector: 1
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 397 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Flip
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows if the image is flipped upside down.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/On
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Flip
*s Camera 1 Flip: "Off"
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Framerate
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Value space of the result returned:
Integer xStatus Cameras Camera [n] HardwareID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the hardware identity of the camera.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 HardwareID
*s Camera 1 HardwareID: "50000000"
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] LightingConditions
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows how the camera perceives the lighting conditions in the room.
Value space of the result returned:
Unknown/Good/Dark/Backlight
Unknown: The camera is turned off or does not support this functionality.
Good: The lighting is at a good level.
Dark: The lighting is too low.
Backlight: There is a high level of backlight in the image.
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 LightingConditions
*s Camera 1 LightingConditions: Good
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] MacAddress
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the MAC (Media Access Control) address for the camera.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 MacAddress
*s Camera 1 MacAddress: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 398 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Manufacturer
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the manufacturer of the camera.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Manufacturer
*s Camera 1 Manufacturer: "Cisco"
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Model
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the camera model.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Model
*s Camera 1 Model: "Precision 40"
** end xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Position Focus
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the current focus position of the camera. The value range depends on camera type.
Value space of the result returned:
0..65535
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Position Focus
*s Camera 1 Position Focus: 4597
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Position Lens
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the camera's current lens position.
Value space of the result returned:
Default/Wide/Center/Left/Right
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Position Lens
*s Cameras Camera 1 Position Lens: Center
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 399 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Position Pan
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the current pan (move left and right) position of the camera. The value range depends on camera type.
Value space of the result returned:
-10000..10000
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Position Pan
*s Camera 1 Position Pan: 412
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Position Roll
Applies to: CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the current rotation (roll) of the camera view. The observed image is rotated counterclockwise if the value is positive, and clockwise if the value is negative. The unit is 1/100 degree, that is 300 corresponds to 3 degrees.
Value space of the result returned:
-300..300
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Position Roll
*s Camera 1 Position Roll: 20
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Position Tilt
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the current tilt (move up and down) position of the camera. The value range depends on camera type.
Value space of the result returned:
-2500..2500
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Position Tilt
*s Camera 1 Position Tilt: 106
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] Position Zoom
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the current zoom (zoom in and out) position of the camera. The value range depends on camera type.
Value space of the result returned:
0..11800
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 Position Zoom
*s Camera 1 Position Zoom: 828
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 400 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Cameras Camera [n] SerialNumber
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D
Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the camera serial number.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 SerialNumber
*s Camera 1 SerialNumber: "B1AB26B00010"
** end xStatus Cameras Camera [n] SoftwareID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro
Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the software identity of the camera.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Cameras Camera 1 SoftwareID
*s Camera 1 SoftwareID: "S01718-4.0FINAL [ID:40063] 2014-10-20"
** end xStatus Cameras PresenterTrack Availability
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows whether presenter tracking is available.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/Unavailable/Available
Off: Presenter tracking is disabled.
Unavailable: Presenter tracking is not configured correctly, camera is disconnected, or a
Multisite or Multistream call is in progress.
Available: Presenter tracking is available.
Example: xStatus Cameras PresenterTrack Availability
*s Cameras PresenterTrack Availability: Available
** end xStatus Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows whether presenter tracking is currently in use.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
Example: xStatus Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected
*s Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected: False
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 401 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Cameras PresenterTrack Status
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Returns the current status for presenter tracking.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/Follow/Diagnostic/Background/Setup/Persistent
Off: Not running.
Follow: Tracking is in progress and working normally
Diagnostics: In diagnostics mode. This mode is used for troubleshooting.
Background: The algorithm is running when the PresenterTrack camera is not selected as the main camera. This is used in the Briefing room setup to enable automatic switching between the different cameras.
Setup: Web wizard for setting up SpeakerTrack camera is active.
Persistent: The camera is active and selected as main camera.
Example: xStatus Cameras PresenterTrack Status
*s Cameras PresenterTrack Status: Off
** end xStatus Cameras SpeakerTrack Availability
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
The product may support speaker tracking (which also includes best overview), or only the best overview feature. This status shows whether or not that feature is available.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/Unavailable/Available
Off: Speaker tracking / best overview is turned off with the command xConfiguration
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode: Off
Unavailable: Hardware for speaker tracking / best overview is not found.
Available: Hardware for speaker tracking / best overview is found, and it is possible to turn the feature on or off from the user interface.
Example: xStatus Cameras SpeakerTrack Availability
*s Cameras SpeakerTrack Availability: Available
** end xStatus Cameras SpeakerTrack ActiveConnector
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the number of the connector that a camera with speaker tracking support is connected to. If it is a SpeakerTrack 60 camera or the dual camera of an MX700/MX800, it is the connector number for the camera that is currently chosen by the SpeakerTrack algorithm.
This status is not applicable for Room Kit Mini.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Cameras SpeakerTrack ActiveConnector
*s Cameras SpeakerTrack ActiveConnector: 1
** end xStatus Cameras SpeakerTrack Status
Applies to: SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/
Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
The product may support speaker tracking (which also includes best overview), or only the best overview feature. This status shows whether or not that feature is active.
Value space of the result returned:
Active/Inactive
Active: Speaker tracking / best overview is active.
Inactive: Speaker tracking / best overview is inactive.
Example: xStatus Cameras SpeakerTrack Status
*s Cameras SpeakerTrack Status: Active
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 402 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
Capabilities status
xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxActiveCalls
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the maximum number of simultaneous active calls. Calls that are set on hold/transfer are not counted as active.
Value space of the result returned:
0..5
Example: xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxNumberOfActiveCalls
*s Capabilities Conference MaxNumberOfActiveCalls: 3
** end xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxAudioCalls
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the maximum number of simultaneous audio calls that is supported.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxAudioCalls
*s Capabilities Conference MaxAudioCalls: 3
** end xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxCalls
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the maximum number of simultaneous calls.
Value space of the result returned:
0..5
Example: xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxCalls
*s Capabilities Conference MaxCalls: 3
** end xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxVideoCalls
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the maximum number of simultaneous video calls that is supported.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Capabilities Conference MaxVideoCalls
*s Capabilities Conference MaxVideoCalls: 3
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 403 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Conference status
xConfiguration xStatus Conference ActiveSpeaker CallId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the CallId of the current active speaker.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Conference ActiveSpeaker CallId
*s Conference ActiveSpeaker CallId: 3
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] AuthenticationRequest
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
This status is only relevant for Cisco Webex registered devices. When this status has another value than "None" the device is waiting for an authentication response. Use the Conference
Call AuthenticationResponse command to give the response.
Value space of the result returned:
None/HostPinOrGuest/HostPinOrGuestPin/PanelistPin
None: The device is not waiting for an authentication response (no authentication request).
HostPinOrGuest: You must either provide a host PIN, or join as a Guest without PIN.
HostPinOrGuestPin: You must either provide a host PIN or a guest PIN.
PanelistPin: You must provide a Panelist PIN for joining an Event Center event as panelist.
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 AuthenticationRequest
*s Conference Call 2 AuthenticationRequest: None
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Conference Call [n] BookingId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the booking ID of a conference (if assigned). The booking ID can be used for easy identification of a call or conference.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 BookingId
*s Conference Call 2 BookingId: "MyConference"
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FarendMessage Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Not applicable in this release.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Conference Call Capabilities FarendMessage Mode
*s Conference Call 4 Capabilities FarendMessage Mode: Off
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 404 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether or not you have permission to control the input sources at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
On: Far end input source control is permitted.
Off: Far end input source control is not permitted.
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Mode
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Mode: On
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC NumberOfPresets
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of presets available for the input sources at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
1..15
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC NumberOfPresets
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC NumberOfPresets: 15
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC NumberOfSources
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of input sources that can be connected at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
1..5
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC NumberOfSources
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC NumberOfSources: 5
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Source [n] Name
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the name of an input source that can be connected at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Source 1 Name
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Source 1 Name: "Main camera"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 405 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Source [n] Options
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows available options for an input source that can be connected at a far end site (for a camera: p=pan; t=tilt; z=zoom; f=focus).
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Source 1 Options
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Source 1 Options: "ptzf"
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Source [n] SourceId
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the ID of an input source that can be connected at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Source 1 SourceId
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities FECC Source 1 SourceId: 6
** end xCommand xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities Hold
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates whether the far-end site can be placed on hold or not.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Conference Call Capabilities Hold
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities Hold: True
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities IxChannel Status
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Not applicable in this release.
Value space of the result returned:
Active/Failed/Off
Example: xStatus Conference Call 4 Capabilities IxChannel Status
*s Conference Call 4 Capabilities IxChannel Status: Active
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 406 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantDisconnect
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space of the result returned:
Available/Unavailable
Shows if you can disconnect participants on this call.
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities ParticipantDisconnect
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities ParticipantDisconnect: Available
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantList
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space of the result returned:
Available/Unavailable
Shows if you can see the participant list on this call.
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities ParticipantList
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities ParticipantList: Available
** end xCommand xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantMute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space of the result returned:
Available/Unavailable
Shows if you can mute and unmute participants on this call.
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities ParticipantMute
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities ParticipantMute: Available
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Capabilities Presentation
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the presentation capabilities for other participants in the conference.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Capabilities Presentation
*s Conference Call 2 Capabilities Presentation: True
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 407 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Conference Call [n] EventCenter Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if the Practice Session mode is currently in use on this call. This status is only available for cloud registered devices.
Value space of the result returned:
Normal/PracticeSession
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 EventCenter Mode
*s Conference Call 2 EventCenter Mode: Normal
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] Manufacturer
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the manufacturer of the device at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Manufacturer
*s Conference Call 2 Manufacturer: "Cisco"
** end xCommand xStatus Conference Call [n] MicrophonesMuted
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the audio mute status for other participants in the conference.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 MicrophonesMuted
*s Conference Call 2 MicrophonesMuted: True
** end xStatus Conference Call [n] SoftwareID
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the ID of the software running on the device at a far end site.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 SoftwareID
*s Conference Call 2 SoftwareID: "CE8"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 408 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Conference Call [n] Streamed
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if the conference is being live streamed.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
Example: xStatus Conference Call 2 Streamed
*s Conference Call 2 Streamed: False
** end xStatus Conference DoNotDisturb
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether DoNotDisturb mode is switched on or not.
Value space of the result returned:
Active/Inactive
Example: xStatus Conference DoNotDisturb
*s Conference DoNotDisturb: Inactive
** end xConfiguration
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus Conference Line [n] Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates whether the device is configured as private or shared line on CUCM.
Value space of the result returned:
Shared/Private
Example: xStatus Conference Line Mode
*s Conference Line 1 Mode: Private
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 409 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Conference Multipoint Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The multipoint status depends on the Conference Multipoint Mode setting and the MultiSite option key. A device that doesn't have the MultiSite option key cannot host a MultiSite conference regardless of the Conference Multipoint Mode setting.
Value space of the result returned:
CUCMMediaResourceGroupList/MultiSite/Off/Spark
Off: Multiparty conferences may be set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote Add). All products except
SX10, DX70, and DX80 can call one extra device on audio-only. Also if Conference
Multipoint Mode is set to MultiSite on a device that doesn't have the MultiSite option key, the add one extra device on audio-only behavior applies.
MultiSite: If Conference Multipoint Mode is set to MultiSite, multiparty conferences are always set up using the built-in MultiSite feature. If Conference Multipoint Mode is set to
Auto, the built-in MultiSite feature is used for multiparty conferences only when calling other video devices. Multiparty conferences are set up via an MCU if you call an MCU that allows devices to add participants to a conference (Direct Remote Add).
CUCMMediaResourceGroupList: Multiparty conferences are hosted by a CUCM configured conference bridge (ad hoc conferencing).
Spark: Multiparty conferences are set up through the Cisco Webex cloud service.
Example: xStatus Conference Multipoint Mode
*s Conference Multipoint Mode: "CUCMMediaResourceGroupList"
** end xStatus Conference Presentation CallId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER, ROOMCONTROL
Shows the identity of the device that sends the presentation.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Conference Presentation CallId
*s Conference Presentation CallId: 0
** end xStatus Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] DirectShare
Applies to:
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Indicates whether or not the presentation originates as a direct share session.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Conference Presentation LocalInstance 1 DirectShare
*s Conference Presentation LocalInstance 1 DirectShare: 1
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 410 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] SendingMode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows whether a presentation source is shared locally or with a remote participant. There can be multiple local presentations which all have their own instance.
Value space of the result returned:
LocalOnly/LocalRemote/Off
Example: xStatus Conference Presentation LocalInstance 1 SendingMode
*s Conference Presentation LocalInstance 1 SendingMode: LocalOnly
** end xStatus Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] Source
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the SourceId for a current presentation. There can be multiple local presentations which all have their own instance.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Conference Presentation LocalInstance 1 Source
*s Conference Presentation LocalInstance 1 Source: 1
** end xCommand xStatus Conference Presentation Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the status of the secondary video stream.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/Sending/Receiving
Example: xStatus Conference Presentation Mode
*s Conference Presentation Mode: Off
** end xStatus Conference SelectedCallProtocol
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates which call protocol is used as default.
Value space of the result returned:
H320/H323/SIP/Spark
Example: xStatus Conference SelectedCallProtocol
*s Conference SelectedCallProtocol: SIP
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 411 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Conference SpeakerLock CallId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the CallId for the participant locked as the prominent speaker in the conference.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Conference SpeakerLock CallId
*s Conference SpeakerLock CallId: 0
** end xStatus Conference SpeakerLock Mode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the speaker lock is enabled or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Conference SpeakerLock Mode
*s Conference SpeakerLock Mode: Off
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Diagnostics status
xStatus Diagnostics Message [n] Description
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows a description of the current diagnostics alerts.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Diagnostics Message Description
*s DiagnosticsResult Message 1 Description: "IP configuration incomplete"
** end xStatus Diagnostics Message [n] Level
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the level of importance of the diagnostics message.
Value space of the result returned:
Error/Warning/Critical
Error: There is an error in the device. The device can still be used, but there can be some restrictions.
Warning: A problem is detected and a more specific report follows indicating the exact problem.
Critical: The warning level is critical. The device cannot be used.
Example: xStatus Diagnostics Message 4 Level
*s Diagnostics Message 4 Level: Warning
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 412 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Diagnostics Message [n] References
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Additional information on the diagnostics alert, if available.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Diagnostics Message 10 References
*s Diagnostics Message 10 References: "delay=190"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 xConfiguration
413
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus Diagnostics Message [n] Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows information on the results of the latest diagnostics on the device.
Value space of the result returned:
ANATOnVCS/AbnormalCallTermination/AmplifierDetection/AmplifierFanStatus/
AudioInternalSpeakerDisabled/AudioPairingInterference/AudioPairingNoise/AudioPairingRate/
AudioPairingSNR/AudioPairingTokenDecode/CAPFOperationState/
CTLinstallation/CUCMVendorConfigurationFile/CallProtocolDualStackConfig/
CallProtocolIPStackPlatformCompatibility/
CallProtocolVcsProvisioningCompatibility/CameraDetected/CameraId/CameraPairing/
CameraSerial/CameraSoftwareVersion/CameraStatus/CamerasDetected/
CaptivePortalDetected/CertificateExpiry/
CompanionModeIncompatibilityLocal/CompanionModeIncompatibilityRemote/
ConfigurationFile/ContactInfoMismatch/ControlSystemConnection/CurrentNetworkQuality/
DefaultCallProtocolRegistered/
ECReferenceDelay/EmbeddedWebViewFailedToLoad/
EmbeddedWebViewTerminatedUnexpectedly/EthernetDuplexMatches/FanStatus/
FirstTimeWizardNotCompleted/H320GatewayStatus/H323GatekeeperStatus/
HTTPFeedbackFailed/HTTPSModeSecurity/HasActiveCallProtocol/HasValidReleaseKey/
HdmiCecModeNoSound/IPv4Assignment/IPv6Assignment/IPv6Mtu/ISDNLinkCompatibility/
ISDNLinkIpStack/ITLinstallation/
InvalidSIPTransportConfig/IpCameraStatus/KioskModeFailedToLoad/LockDown/
LowBattery/MacrosRuntimeStatus/MediaBlockingDetected/MediaPortRangeNegative/
MediaPortRangeOdd/MediaPortRangeOverlap/
MediaPortRangeTooSmall/MediaPortRangeValueSpace/MicrophoneOverloaded/
MicrophoneReinforcement/MicrophonesConnected/MissingDisplay/MissingThirdDisplay/
MonitorDelay/NTPStatus/NetLinkStatus/
NetSpeedAutoNegotiated/NetworkQuality/OSDVideoOutput/OutputConnectorLocations/
PIILoggingMode/PanoramaCameraHdmi/PanoramaView/PeripheralSoftwareUpgrade/
PeripheralSoftwareVersion/PlatformSanity/
PresentationSourceSelection/PresenterTrack/ProvModeWebexAndWebexEdgeEnabled/
ProvisioningDeveloperOptions/ProvisioningModeAndStatus/ProvisioningStatus/RoomControl/
SIPEncryption/SIPListenPortAndOutboundMode/
SIPListenPortAndRegistration/SIPProfileRegistration/SIPProfileType/
SelectedVideoInputSourceConnected/SignageFailedToLoad/
SignageTerminatedUnexpectedly/SipIceAndAnatConflict/SipOrH323ButNotBothEnabled/
SoftwareUpgrade/SoftwareUpgradeKeepsFailing/SpeakerTrackEthernetConnection/
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
SpeakerTrackFrontPanelMountedCorrectly/SpeakerTrackMicrophoneConnection/
SpeakerTrackVideoInputs/TCPMediaFallback/TLSVerifyRequiredCerts/
TemperatureCheck/TouchPanelConnection/TurnBandwidth/UltrasoundConfigSettings/
UltrasoundSpeakerAvailability/ValidPasswords/VideoFromInternalCamera/
VideoInputSignalQuality/VideoInputStability/VideoPortRangeNegative/
VideoPortRangeOdd/VideoPortRangeTooSmall/VideoPortRangeValueSpace/
WebexAccountPlusWebexEdgeEnabled/WebexActivationRequired/
WebexAudioProximityConnectivity/WebexConnectivity/
WebexEdgeAccountPendingCloudRegistration/
WebexEdgeAccountPlusProvModeWebex/WebexLyraConnectivity/
WebexMustUpgradeCeSoftware/WebexNotificationConnectivity/WebexOffline/
WebexShouldUpgradeCeSoftware/WifiCARequired
Example: xStatus Diagnostics Message Type
*s Diagnostics Message 1 Type: CamerasDetected
** end xCommand
GPIO status
xStatus GPIO Pin [n] State
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the current state of each of the four GPIO pins.
Value space of the result returned:
High/Low
High: +12V, the default state.
Low: 0V, when activated.
Example: xStatus GPIO Pin 1 State
*s GPIO Pin 1 State: High
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 414 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
H320 status
xConfiguration xStatus H320 Gateway Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the IPv4 address of the ISDN Gateway, if the video conferencing device is paired to one.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus H320 Gateway Address
*s H320 Gateway Address: ""
** end xStatus H320 Gateway Id
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the unique identification of the H320 Gateway, if the video conferencing device is paired with an ISDN Link.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus H320 Gateway Id
*s H320 Gateway Id: "00:50:60:0B:EF:11"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus H320 Gateway Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns information on the type of calls the ISDN Gateway is configured for, if the video conferencing device is paired with an ISDN Link.
Value space of the result returned:
BRI/External/G703/PRI/Unknown
Example: xStatus H320 Gateway Mode
*s H320 Gateway Mode: Unknown
** end xStatus H320 Gateway Number
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the IPv6 address of the ISDN Gateway if the video conferencing device is paired to one.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus H320 Gateway Number
*s H320 Gateway Number: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 415 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus H320 Gateway Reason
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the reason for rejected Gateway registration. Only available if the video conferencing device is connected to an ISDN Link.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus H320 Gateway Reason
*s H320 Gateway Reason: ""
** end xStatus H320 Gateway Status
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the state of the H320 Gateway, if the video conferencing device is paired with an ISDN
Link.
Value space of the result returned:
Error/Inactive/OK/OKWithWarning/Warning/NoConnection
Example: xStatus H320 Gateway status
*s H320 Gateway Status: Error
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
H323 status
xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Address
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Displays the IP address of the gatekeeper where the device is registered.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Address
*s H323 Gatekeeper Address: "192.0.1.20"
** end xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Port
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the port which is used when connecting to on the gatekeeper.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Port
*s H323 Gatekeeper Port: 1719
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 416 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Reason
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the reason for rejected registration.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Reason
*s H323 Gatekeeper Reason: ""
** end xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Status
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the gatekeeper registration status.
Value space of the result returned:
Required/Discovering/Discovered/Authenticating/Authenticated/Registering/Registered/
Inactive/Rejected
Example: xStatus H323 Gatekeeper Status
*s H323 Gatekeeper Status: Registered
** end xStatus H323 Mode Reason
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether there is a conflict between H.323 settings and xStatus H323 Mode Status.
Value space of the result returned:
String
“”: When H.323 is set to On and there is no conflict between H.323 Mode configuration and the rest of the device settings.
“SIP is enabled”: When H.323 Mode is set to On and SIP is enabled on a device that does not support the two simultaneously.
"Not available": When a device does not support H.323.
Example: xStatus H323 Mode Reason
*s H323 Mode Reason: ""
** end xStatus H323 Mode Status
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status for H.323 registration.
Value space of the result returned:
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled: Registration is enabled.
Disabled: Registration is disable, because SIP is enabled.
Example: xStatus H323 Mode Status
*s H323 Mode Status: "Disabled"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 417 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
HttpFeedback status
xConfiguration xStatus HttpFeedback [n] Expression [n]
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the feedback from the HTTP server. There can be up to 4 slots of servers requesting
HTTP feedback and up to 15 expressions for each URL. See the xCommand HttpFeedback commands for more information.
Value space of the result returned:
String xStatus HttpFeedback [n] Format
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the format of the HTTP Feedback feedback from the HTTP server.
Value space of the result returned:
XML/JSON
Example: xStatus HttpFeedback 1 Format
*s HttpFeedback 1 Format: XML
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus HttpFeedback [n] Status
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of the feedback sent to the HTTP server.
Value space of the result returned:
OK/Failed
OK: Shows that the feedback has been successfully sent.
Failed: Shows that the feedback has not been successfully sent.
Example: xStatus HttpFeedback 1 Status
*s HttpFeedback 1 Status: OK
** end xStatus HttpFeedback [n] URL
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the URL (Uniform Resource Locator) of the HTTP server. There can be up to three HTTP servers, specified by the URL.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus HttpFeedback 1 URL
*s HttpFeedback 1 URL: "http://tms.company.com/tms/public/feedback/code.aspx"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 418 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
MediaChannels status
xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio Channels
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of incoming or outgoing audio channels.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio Channels
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio Channels: 1
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio ChannelRole
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the role of the incoming or outgoing audio channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Main/Presentation
Main: The audio from the main video is on the incoming or outgoing audio channel.
Presentation: The audio from the presentation is on the incoming or outgoing audio channel.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio ChannelRole
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio ChannelRole: Main
** end xCommand xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio Mute
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Audio mute status of the incoming audio.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio Mute
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio Mute: False
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 419 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio Protocol
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the audio algorithm of the incoming or outgoing audio.
Value space of the result returned:
AACLD/G711A/G711Mu/G722/G7221/G7221C/G723_1/G728/G729/G729A/G729AB/Off/Opus
AACLD: The AAC-LD is an MPEG-4 Low Delay Audio Coder audio compression format.
G711A: The G.711 A-law algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G711Mu: The G.711 Mu-law algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G722: The G.722 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G7221: The G.722.1 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G7221C: The G.722.1 annex C algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G723_1: The G.723.1 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G728: The G.728 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G729: The G.729 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G729A: The G.729 annex A algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G729AB: The G.729 annex A and B algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
Off: No audio.
Opus: Opus is a royalty-free IETF standard for audio compression.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio Protocol
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Audio Protocol: AACLD
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Direction
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the direction of the call.
Value space of the result returned:
Incoming/Outgoing
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Direction
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Direction: Incoming
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Encryption
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the encryption status for audio or video on the incoming or outgoing call.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Encryption
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Encryption: On
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 420 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Bytes
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of bytes for audio, video or data on the incoming or outgoing channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Bytes
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Bytes: 496640
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat ChannelRate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the bandwidth for audio, video or data on the incoming or outgoing channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat ChannelRate
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat ChannelRate: 128000
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Jitter
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the jitter for audio, video or data at the present moment on the incoming or outgoing channel, as specified by RFC 3550.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Jitter
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Jitter: 2
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat LastIntervalLost
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of packets lost for audio, video or data during the last interval on the incoming or outgoing channels.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalLost
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalLost: 0
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 421 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat LastIntervalReceived
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of packets received for audio, video or data during the last interval on the incoming or outgoing channels.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalReceived
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalReceived: 289
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Loss
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of packets lost for audio, video or data on the incoming or outgoing channels.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Loss
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Loss: 0
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat MaxJitter
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the maximum jitter for audio, video or data that has been measured during last interval
(about 5 seconds).
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat MaxJitter
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat MaxJitter: 2
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Packets
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of packets that was received or sent for audio, video or data on the incoming or outgoing channels.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Packets
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 NetStat Packets: 1551
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 422 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] ParticipantId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the ID of the Active Control participant on the incoming audio or video channel.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 ParticipantId
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 ParticipantId: ""
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Type
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the media type on the incoming or outgoing channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Audio/Video/Data
Audio: The media type on the incoming or outgoing channel is audio.
Video: The media type on the incoming or outgoing channel is video.
Data: The media type on the incoming or outgoing channel is data.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Type
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Type: Audio
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video ChannelRole
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the role of the incoming or outgoing video channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Main/Presentation
Main: The main video is on the incoming or outgoing video channel.
Presentation: The presentation is on the incoming or outgoing video channel.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video ChannelRole
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video ChannelRole: Main
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video FrameRate
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the frame rate of the incoming or outgoing video channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video FrameRate
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video FrameRate: 30
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 423 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video Protocol
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the video algorithm of the incoming or outgoing video channel.
Value space of the result returned:
H261/H263/H263p/H263pp/H264/HEVC/JPEG/MP4V/Off
H261: The H.261 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H263: The H.263 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H263p: The H.263p (H.263+) algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H263pp: The H.263pp (H.263++) algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H264: The H.264 algorithm (MPEG-4 AVC) is an ITU-T and ISE/IEC standard for video compression.
HEVC: The HEVC (H.265) algorithm (MPEG-H part 2) is an ITU-T and ISE/IEC standard for video compression.
JPEG: The JPEG algorithm is an ISO/IEC standard for video compression.
MP4V: The MP4V format is an ISO/IEC file format for video compression.
Off: No video.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video Protocol
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video Protocol: H264
** end xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionX
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the width (resolution in direction X) of the incoming or outgoing video.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionX
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionX: 1920
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionY
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the height (resolution in direction Y) of the incoming or outgoing video.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionY
*s MediaChannels Call 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionY: 1080
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Audio Channels
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of audio channels (none, mono, stereo) received over the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
0: None
1: Mono
2: Stereo
Example:
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Audio Channels
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Audio Channels: 1
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 424 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Audio Protocol
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the audio codec used for the active incoming share session.
Value space of the result returned:
AACLC/AACLD/AMR/CiscoPCM16/L16-768/ComfortNoise/G711A/G711Mu/G722/G7221/
G7221C/G723_1/G728/G729/G729A/G729AB/Off/Opus/Raw
The audio standards supported are essentially the same as supported in call, but the client will typically only ever use Opus (or AAC).
AACLD: The AAC-LD is an MPEG-4 Low Delay Audio Coder audio compression format.
G711A: The G.711 A-law algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G711Mu: The G.711 Mu-law algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G722: The G.722 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G7221: The G.722.1 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G7221C: The G.722.1 annex C algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G723_1: The G.723.1 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G728: The G.728 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G729: The G.729 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G729A: The G.729 annex A algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
G729AB: The G.729 annex A and B algorithm is an ITU-T standard for audio compression.
Off: No audio.
Opus: Opus is a royalty-free IETF standard for audio compression.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Audio Protocol
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Audio Protocol: AACLD
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Encryption
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the encryption status for the incoming audio/video channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Encryption
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Encryption: On
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Bytes
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the cumulative number of bytes received for the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Bytes
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Bytes: 496640
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 425 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat ChannelRate
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the current incoming audio/video bandwidth for the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat ChannelRate
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat ChannelRate: 128000
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Jitter
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the jitter currently measured for received audio/video on the incoming channel, as specified by RFC 3550.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Jitter
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Jitter: 2
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat LastIntervalLost
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of lost audio/video packets during the last interval on the incoming channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalLost
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalLost: 0
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat
LastIntervalReceived
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of received audio/video packets during the last interval over the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalReceived
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalReceived: 289
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 426 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat
LastIntervalReceived
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of received audio/video packets during the last interval over the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalReceived
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat LastIntervalReceived: 289
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Loss
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of audio/video packets lost for the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Loss
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Loss: 0
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat MaxJitter
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the maximum jitter measured on the channel in question during the last interval (about 5 seconds).
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat MaxJitter
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat MaxJitter: 2
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Packets
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the total number of packets received for the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Packets
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 NetStat Packets: 1551
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 427 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video FrameRate
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the received frame rate for the channel in question. Note: Only applicable to video channels.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video FrameRate
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video FrameRate: 30
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video Protocol
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the video codec used for the channel in question.
Value space of the result returned:
H261/H263/H263p/H263pp/H264/HEVC/AV1/JPEG/MP4V/Off/Raw/RDP
The video standards supported are essentially the same as supported in call, but the client will typically only ever use H264.
H261: The H.261 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H263: The H.263 algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H263p: The H.263p (H.263+) algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H263pp: The H.263pp (H.263++) algorithm is an ITU-T standard for video compression.
H264: The H.264 algorithm (MPEG-4 AVC) is an ITU-T and ISE/IEC standard for video compression.
HEVC: The HEVC (H.265) algorithm (MPEG-H part 2) is an ITU-T and ISE/IEC standard for video compression.
JPEG: The JPEG algorithm is an ISO/IEC standard for video compression.
MP4V: The MP4V format is an ISO/IEC file format for video compression.
Off: No video.
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video Protocol
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video Protocol: H264
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 428 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionX
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the width (resolution in the x-direction) of the video stream received.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionX
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionX: 1920
** end xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionY
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the height (resolution in y-direction) of the video stream received.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionY
*s MediaChannels DirectShare 27 Channel 327 Video ResolutionY: 1080
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Network status
xStatus Network [n] CDP Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the first network address of both receiving and sending devices.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP Address
*s Network 1 CDP Address: "192.0.1.20"
** end xStatus Network [n] CDP Capabilities
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Describes the functional capability for the switch in form of a device type. See documentation for CDP protocol for more information.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP Capabilities
*s Network 1 CDP Capabilities: "0x0029"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 429 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] CDP DeviceId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Identifies the name of the switch in form of a character string.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP DeviceId
*s Network 1 CDP DeviceId: "123456.company.com"
** end xStatus Network [n] CDP Duplex
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates the status (duplex configuration) of the CDP broadcast interface. Used by network operators to diagnose connectivity problems between adjacent network elements.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP Duplex
*s Network 1 CDP Duplex: "Full"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] CDP Platform
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the hardware platform name of the switch connected to the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP Platform
*s Network 1 CDP Platform: "cisco WS-C3750X-48P"
** end xStatus Network [n] CDP PortID
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the identification the switch uses of the port the device is connected to.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP PortID
*s Network 1 CDP PortID: "GigabitEthernet1/0/23"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 430 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] CDP PrimaryMgmtAddress
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the management address used to configure and monitor the switch the device is connected to.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP PrimaryMgmtAddress
*s Network 1 CDP PrimaryMgmtAddress: "10.1.1.2"
** end xStatus Network [n] CDP SysName
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the SysName as configured in the switch the device is connected to.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP SysName
*s Network 1 CDP SysName: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] CDP SysObjectID
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the SysObjectID as configured in the switch the device is connected to.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP SysObjectID
*s Network 1 CDP SysObjectID: ""
** end xStatus Network [n] CDP Version
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns information about the software release version the switch is running.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 CDP Version
*s Network 1 CDP Version: "Cisco IOS Software, C3560CX Software (C3560CX-
UNIVERSALK9-M), Version 15.2(3)E, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc4)*Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport*Copyright (c) 1986-2014 by Cisco Systems,
Inc.*Compiled Sun 07-Dec-14 13:15 by prod _ rel _ team"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 431 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus Network [n] CDP VoIPApplianceVlanID
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Identifies the VLAN used for VoIP traffic from the device to the switch. For more information see documentation of the IEEE 802.1Q protocol.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP VoIPApplianceVlanID
*s Network 1 CDP VoIPApplianceVlanID: "300"
** end xStatus Network [n] DNS Domain Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the domain name.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 DNS Domain Name
*s Network 1 DNS Domain Name: "www.example.com www.example.int"
** end xStatus Network [n] CDP VTPMgmtDomain
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the switch's configured VTP management domain name-string.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network CDP VTPMgmtDomain
*s Network 1 CDP VTPMgmtDomain: "anyplace"
** end xStatus Network [n] DNS Server [n] Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the IP address of the DNS server.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 DNS Server 1. Address
*s Network 1 DNS Server 1 Address: "192.0.2.60"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 432 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] Ethernet MacAddress
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the MAC (Media Access Control) address for the Ethernet interface.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Ethernet MacAddress
*s Network 1 Ethernet MacAddress: "00:50:60:02:FD:C7"
** end xStatus Network [n] Ethernet Speed
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Ethernet speed in Mbps. The speed can be in full-duplex or half-duplex.
Value space of the result returned:
10half/10full/100half/100full/1000full
Example: xStatus Network 1 Ethernet Speed
*s Network 1 Ethernet Speed: "100full"
** end xCommand xStatus Network [n] IPv4 Address
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the IPv4 address that uniquely identifies this device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 IPv4 Address
*s Network 1 IPv4 Address: "192.0.2.149"
** end xStatus Network [n] IPv4 Gateway
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the address of the IPv4 gateway.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 IPv4 Gateway
*s Network 1 IPv4 Gateway: "192.0.2.10"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 433 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the subnet mask which determines which subnet an IPv4 address belongs to.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 IPv4 SubnetMask
*s Network 1 IPv4 SubnetMask: "255.255.255.0"
** end xStatus Network [n] IPv6 Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the IPv6 address that uniquely identifies this device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 IPv6 Address
*s Network 1 IPv6 Address: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] IPv6 Gateway
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the address of the IPv6 gateway.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 IPv6 Gateway
*s Network 1 IPv6 Gateway: ""
** end xStatus Network [n] IPv6 LinkLocalAddress
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the IPv6 link local address that is displayed on the primary user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 IPv6 LinkLocalAddress
*s Network 1 IPv6 LinkLocalAddress: "2001:DB8:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0001"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 434 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The feedback shows the VLAN Voice ID.
Value space of the result returned:
Off/1..4094
Off: The VLAN Voice Mode is not enabled.
1..4094: VLAN Voice ID
Example: xStatus Network 1 VLAN Voice VlanId
*s Network 1 VLAN Voice VlanId: "Off"
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi BSSID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Basic Service Set Identifiers (BSSID) used for the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi BSSID
*s Network 1 Wifi BSSID: "xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] Wifi Channel
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the channel used for the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Channel
*s Network 1 Wifi Channel: 13
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi Frequency
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the frequency corresponding to the Wi-Fi channel.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi frequency
*s Network 1 Wifi Frequency: nnnn
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 435 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] Wifi MacAddress
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the MacAddress used for the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi MacAddress
*s Network 1 Wifi MacAddress: "xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx"
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi Phase2Method
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Phase2Method used for the Wi-Fi connection, if applicable.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Phase2Method
*s Network 1 Wifi Phase2Method: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] Wifi RawSSID
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Raw SSID of the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi RawSSID
*s Network 1 Wifi RawSSID: "Aurora"
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi Reason
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the reason defined for the Wi-Fi connection, if applicable.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Reason
*s Network 1 Wifi Reason: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 436 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] Wifi Region
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the region of the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Region
*s Network 1 Wifi Region: "00"
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi RSSI
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) used by the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi RSSI
*s Network 1 Wifi RSSI: -62
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] Flags
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns all the flags found in a scan result.
Note that you must run a scan (e.g., "Network Wifi Scan Start") before this will yield results.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 Flags
*s Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 Flags: "[ESS]"
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] RawSSID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns all the RawSSID values found in a scan result.
Note that you must run a scan (e.g., "Network Wifi Scan Start") before this will yield results.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 RawSSID
*s Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 RawSSID: "Aurora"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 437 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] SignalLevel
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns all the SignalLevel values found in a scan result.
Note that you must run a scan (e.g., "Network Wifi Scan Start") before this will yield results.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 SignalLevel
*s Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 SignalLevel: -61
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] SSID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns all the SSID values found in a scan result.
Note that you must run a scan (e.g., "Network Wifi Scan Start") before this will yield results.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 SSID
*s Network 1 Wifi ScanResult 1 SSID: "Aurora"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Network [n] Wifi Speed
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the speed of the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Speed
*s Network 1 Wifi Speed: 39
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi SSID
Applies to: DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the Server Set Identifier (SSID) of the Wi-Fi connection.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi SSID
*s Network 1 Wifi SSID: "Aurora"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 438 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Network [n] Wifi Status
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of the Wi-Fi network connection.
Value space of the result returned:
Associating/Connected/Disconnected/AuthFailed/Failed/Other
Associating-Trying to connect to a WI-FI network.
Connected- The device is not connected to a WI-FI network.
Disconnected-The device is not connected to a WI-FI network.
AuthFailed- Authentication failed when trying to connect to a WI-FI network.
Failed- The device could not connect to the WI-FI network for reasons other than authentication failure.
Other-Any other scenario.
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Status
*s Network 1 Wifi Status: Connected
** end xStatus Network [n] Wifi Type
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the encryption type of the Wi-Fi network connection.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Network 1 Wifi Type
*s Network 1 Wifi Type: "Wpa2-psk"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
NetworkServices status
xStatus NetworkServices NTP CurrentAddress
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the address of the NTP server that is currently in use.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus NetworkServices NTP CurrentAddress
*s NetworkServices NTP CurrentAddress: "123.254.15.121"
** end xStatus NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the address of the NTP server(s) the device is using.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus NetworkServices NTP Address
*s NetworkServices NTP Address: "12.104.193.12 64.104.222.16 144.254.15.121"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 439 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus NetworkServices NTP Status
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the status of the devices synchronizing with the NTP server.
Value space of the result returned:
Discarded/Synced/NotSynced/Unknown/Off
Discarded: The NTP result has been discarded.
Synced: The device is in sync with the NTP server.
NotSynced: The device is not in sync with the NTP server.
Unknown: The state of the synchronization is unknown.
Off: No synchronization with the NTP server.
Example: xStatus NetworkServices NTP Status
*s NetworkServices NTP Status: Synced
** end
Peripherals status
xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] HardwareInfo
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows hardware information about connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 HardwareInfo
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 HardwareInfo: "1122330-0"
** end xStatus NetworkServices UPnP Status
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reports whether or not the UPnP service advertises the device's presence on the network. The advertisement permits a Touch controller to discover the device automatically, and you do not need to manually enter the device's IP address in order to pair the Touch controller.
Value space of the result returned:
Running/Stopped
Running: The device's presence is advertised on the network.
Stopped: The device's presence is not advertised on the network.
Example: xStatus NetworkServices UPnP Status
*s NetworkServices UPnP Status: Running
** end xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] ID
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the MAC-address of the connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 ID
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 ID: "00:10:20:20:be:21"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 440 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the product name of connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 Name
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 Name: "Cisco TelePresence Touch"
** end xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] SerialNumber
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the serial number of a connected peripheral device, for example the Touch 10.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 SerialNumber
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 SerialNumber: "ABC123…"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] SoftwareInfo
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows information of the software version running on the connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 SoftwareInfo
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1007 SoftwareInfo: "TI7.2.0"
** end xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Status
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows peripheral devices that are currently connected to the video conferencing device.
Value space of the result returned:
Connected/ResponseTimedOut
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 Status
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 Status: Connected
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 441 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the type of a peripheral that is connected to the video conferencing device.
Note: The Precision 60 and Quad cameras returns the value Camera. A SpeakerTrack 60 camera returns the value SpeakerTracker. Only recognized Cisco headsets returns the value
Headset.
Value space of the result returned:
Byod/Camera/ControlSystem/Headset/InputDevice/ISDNLink/Other/SpeakerTrack/
TouchPanel
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 Type
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 Type: TouchPanel
** end xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeFailureReason
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows that a connected device has failed during an upgrade and provides a reason.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Describes the reason for the upgrade failure.
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 UpgradeFailureReason
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 UpgradeFailureReason: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeStatus
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the status of the previous software upgrade on the currently connected peripherals.
Value space of the result returned:
Downloading/Failed/Installing/InstallationReady/None/Succeeded/Rebooting/Retrying/
Aborted/Paused
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 UpgradeStatus
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 UpgradeStatus: None
** end xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeURL
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the upgrade URL for the connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Specifies the full URL.
Example: xStatus Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 UpgradeURL
*s Peripherals ConnectedDevice 1001 UpgradeURL: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 442 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Provisioning status
xConfiguration xStatus Provisioning CUCM Customization Checksum
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
You can provision custom elements to multiple devices by using a customization template (a backup file). This status reports the checksum of the last customization template that has been uploaded to the device. Also see the xCommand Provisioning Service Fetch command.
Value space of the result returned:
String
The checksum of the customization template.
Example: xStatus Provisioning CUCM Customization Checksum
*s Provisioning CUCM Customization Checksum: "633e163e2694b89ce37103b2448c36a..."
** end xStatus Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Enabled
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if Extension Mobility is enabled for a CUCM registered device.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Enabled
*s Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Enabled: False
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LastLoggedInUserId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the user id that was last logged in to the device. Only in use if CUCM Extension Mobility is enabled, and CUCM is configured to remember the last logged in user on a device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LastLoggedInUserId
*s Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LastLoggedInUserId: "User 1"
** end xStatus Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LoggedIn
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if someone is logged in to Extension Mobility or not.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LoggedIn
*s Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LoggedIn: False
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 443 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Provisioning RoomType
Applies to:
SX80 MX700/MX800/MX800D CodecPlus CodecPro Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Specifies the room type setup configured for this device.
Value space of the result returned:
Briefing/Classroom/Standard
Briefing: This device is using the briefing room setup.
Classroom: This device is using is using the classroom setup.
Standard: This device is using the default room setup.
Example: xStatus Provisioning RoomType
*s Provisioning RoomType: Briefing
** end xStatus Provisioning Software Current CompletedAt
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows date and time for when the current software upgrade was completed.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software Current CompletedAt
*s Provisioning Software Current CompletedAt: "2011-06-07T07:20:03Z"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Provisioning Software Current URL
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the URL that the current software was uploaded from.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software Current URL
*s Provisioning Software Current URL: "http://.../s52020ce8 _ 0 _ 0.pkg"
** end xStatus Provisioning Software Current VersionId
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the version ID of the current software.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software Current VersionId
*s Provisioning Software Current VersionId: "s52020ce8 _ 0 _ 0.pkg"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 444 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus LastChange
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the date and time for the latest software upgrade.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus LastChange
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus LastChange: "2011-06-07T07:20:03Z"
** end xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Message
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the system message for the software upgrade.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Message
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Message: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Phase
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the phase of the software upgrade.
Value space of the result returned:
None/DownloadPending/FormingHierarchy/Downloading/DownloadPaused/DownloadDone/
Seeding/AboutToInstallUpgrade/Postponed/PeripheralsReady/UpgradingPeripherals/
Installing/InstallingPeripherals
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Phase
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Phase: None
** end xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus SessionId
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the ID of the session for the software upgrade.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus SessionId
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus SessionId: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 445 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Status
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of the software upgrade.
Value space of the result returned:
None/InProgress/Failed/InstallationFailed/Succeeded
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Status
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Status: None
** end xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Urgency
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows how urgently the software needs to be upgraded.
Value space of the result returned:
Low/Medium/Critical
Specifies the urgency of the software upgrade.
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Urgency
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Urgency: Low
** end xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus URL
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the URL that the new software currently is being uploaded and installed from.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus URL
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus URL: "http://.../s52020ce8 _ 0 _ 0.pkg"
** end xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus VersionId
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the version ID of the software currently being uploaded and installed.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus VersionId
*s Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus VersionId: "s52010ce8 _ 0 _ 0.pkg"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 446 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Provisioning Status
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of the provisioning.
Value space of the result returned:
Failed/AuthenticationFailed/Provisioned/Idle/NeedConfig/ConfigError
Failed: The provisioning failed.
AuthenticationFailed: The authentication failed.
Provisioned: The device is provisioned.
Idle: The provisioning is not active.
NeedConfig: The device needs to be configured.
ConfigError: An error occurred during configuration.
Example: xStatus Provisioning Status
*s Provisioning Status: Provisioned
** end xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Proximity status
xStatus Proximity Services Availability
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether proximity services are available on the device.
Value space of the result returned:
Available, Deactivated, Disabled
Available: Proximity mode has been enabled with the command xConfiguration Proximity
Mode and one or more of the proximity services have been enabled with xConfiguration
Proximity Services commands.
Deactivated: Proximity services have been deactivated with the command xCommand
Proximity Services Deactivate.
Disabled: Proximity mode has been disabled with xConfiguration Proximity Mode, or none of the services have been enabled with the xConfiguration Proximity Services commands.
Example: xStatus Proximity Services Availability
*s Proximity Services Availability: Disabled
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 447 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
RoomAnalytics status
xStatus RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level A
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The device can be set up to estimate the stationary ambient noise level in the room (refer to the
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode setting). The result is reported in this status.
The value is an A-weighted decibel value (dBA). The value is only a relative value and should not be treated as an absolute SPL (Sound Pressure Level) value. Especially not for third-party microphones that the device doesn't know the sensitivity of.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The stationary ambient noise level in dBA.
Example: xStatus RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level A
*s RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level A: 30
** end xStatus RoomAnalytics AmbientTemperature
Applies to: DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the ambient temperature for the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus RoomAnalytics AmbientTemperature
*s RoomAnalytics AmbientTemperature: "20.7"
** end xStatus RoomAnalytics Engagement CloseProximity
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini Room55 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
The device can detect the presence of people at close proximity.
This status depends on the camera running. To use, we recommend turning on the configuration "RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall".
This will cause the camera to turn on periodically and CloseProximity will be updated.
If not, the status will only be updated in conversation or when self-view is on.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
False: The status will be False when the camera is not running or when the conditions for
True are not met.
True: The status becomes True if at least one person meets these criteria:
- Less than 1 meter from the camera
- Has face facing camera
- Standing relatively still
The status goes from True to False again if the person goes further than 1.5 meters from the camera or leaves the camera view.
Example: xstatus RoomAnalytics Engagement
*s RoomAnalytics Engagement CloseProximity: False
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 448 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus RoomAnalytics PeopleCount Current
Applies to:
SX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2
DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the number of people who are in the room by use of face detection. The call must have a duration of minimum two minutes in order to get a reliable average. Persons that have not faced the camera will not be counted. If there are objects or pictures in the room that can be detected as faces, these might be counted. The device will not keep record of who was in the room, only the average number of faces that were detected. When the device is in standby, or if the feature is turned off, the number returned is -1.
For SX80 and Codec Plus, this status only applies if you have a Cisco Quad Camera.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus RoomAnalytics PeopleCount Current
*s RoomAnalytics PeopleCount Current: 2
** end xStatus RoomAnalytics Sound Level A
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
If the RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode setting is On, the device will in addition to the ambient noise also measure the sound level in the room. The result is reported in this status every 10th second.
The value is an A-weighted averaged sound level in decibel (dBA). The value is only a relative value and should not be treated as an absolute SPL (Sound Pressure Level) value. Especially not for third-party microphones that the device doesn't know the sensitivity of.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
The average sound level in dBA.
Example: xStatus RoomAnalytics Sound Level A
*s RoomAnalytics Sound Level A: 33
** end xStatus RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence
Applies to: SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows if there are people present in the room or not. The feature is based on ultrasound.
The device will not keep record of who was in the room, only whether or not there are people present in the room.
When someone enters the room, the status is updated immediately. After the room gets vacant, it may take up to two minutes for the status to change.
Value space of the result returned:
Yes/No/Unknown
Example: xStatus RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence
*s RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence: No
** end xStatus RoomAnalytics RelativeHumidity
Applies to: DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the relative humidity for the device.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus RoomAnalytics RelativeHumidity
*s RoomAnalytics RelativeHumidity: 26
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 449 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
RoomPreset status
xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus RoomPreset [n] Defined
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if a camera preset is stored at this position.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus RoomPreset 1 Defined
*s RoomPreset 1 Defined: True
** end xStatus RoomPreset [n] Description
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the configured name for the specific preset.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus RoomPreset 1 Description
*s RoomPreset 1 Description: "Zoom in"
** end xStatus RoomPreset [n] Type
Applies to:
SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the camera preset type.
Value space of the result returned:
All/Camera
Example: xStatus RoomPreset 1 Type
*s RoomPreset 1 Type: All
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 450 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Security status
xStatus Security Persistency CallHistory
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether call history logging is set to persistent or non-persistent mode. Persistent is the default mode.
Value space of the result returned:
NonPersistent/Persistent
Example: xStatus Security Persistency CallHistory
*s Security Persistency CallHistory: Persistent
** end xStatus Security Persistency Configurations
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether all the device's configurations are set to persistent or non-persistent mode.
Persistent is the default mode.
Value space of the result returned:
NonPersistent/Persistent
Example: xStatus Security Persistency Configurations
*s Security Persistency Configurations: Persistent
** end xStatus Security Persistency DHCP
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether DHCP logging is set to persistent or non-persistent mode. Persistent is the default mode.
Value space of the result returned:
NonPersistent/Persistent
Example: xStatus Security Persistency DHCP
*s Security Persistency DHCP: Persistent
** end xStatus Security Persistency InternalLogging
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether internal logging is set to persistent or non-persistent mode. Persistent is the default mode.
Value space of the result returned:
NonPersistent/Persistent
Example: xStatus Security Persistency InternalLogging
*s Security Persistency InternalLogging: Persistent
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 451 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Security Persistency LocalPhonebook
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether local phone book is set to persistent or non-persistent mode. Persistent is the default mode.
Value space of the result returned:
NonPersistent/Persistent
Example: xStatus Security Persistency LocalPhonebook
*s Security Persistency LocalPhonebook: Persistent
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
SIP status
xStatus SIP AlternateURI Alias [n] URI
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP AlternateURI Alias
*s SIP AlternateURI Alias URI: ""
** end xStatus SIP AlternateURI Primary [n] URI
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP AlternateURI Primary
*s SIP AlternateURI Primary URI: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 452 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus SIP Authentication
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows which authentication mechanism is used when registering to the SIP Proxy Server.
Value space of the result returned:
Digest/Off
Digest: Uses the Digest access authentication method, as specified by RFC 2069.
Off: No authentication mechanism is used.
Example: xStatus SIP Authentication
*s SIP Authentication: Off
** end xStatus SIP CallForward DisplayName
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the URI that is displayed on the user interface for the forwarded call.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP CallForward DisplayName
*s SIP CallForward DisplayName: ""
** end xStatus SIP CallForward Mode
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates whether the call forward mode for SIP is set to on or off.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus SIP CallForward Mode
*s SIP CallForward Mode: Off
** end xStatus SIP CallForward URI
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates the address the incoming calls are directed to when call forward mode is set on.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP CallForward URI
*s SIP CallForward URI: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 453 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus SIP Mailbox MessagesWaiting
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Indicates how many new messages are in the mailbox.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus SIP Mailbox MessagesWaiting
*s SIP Mailbox MessagesWaiting: 0
** end xStatus SIP Mailbox URI
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the URI for your SIP mailbox.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP Mailbox URI
*s SIP Mailbox URI: "12345678"
** end xStatus SIP Proxy [n] Address
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the address of the SIP Proxy that the device communicates with.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP Proxy 1 Address
*s SIP Proxy 1 Address: "192.0.2.50"
** end xStatus SIP Proxy [n] Status
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of the communication between the device and the SIP Proxy server.
Value space of the result returned:
Active/AuthenticationFailed/DNSFailed/Off/Timeout/UnableTCP/UnableTLS/Unknown
Active: The communication between the device and the SIP Proxy is active.
DNSFailed: The attempt to establish communication to the DNS server failed.
Off: There is no communication between the device and the SIP Proxy.
Timeout: The attempt to establish communication to the SIP Proxy timed out.
UnableTCP: The device is unable to use TCP as the transport method.
UnableTLS: The device is unable to use TLS as the transport method.
Unknown: The status of the communication is not known.
AuthenticationFailed: Wrong username or password.
Example: xStatus SIP Proxy 1 Status
*s SIP Proxy 1 Status: Active
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 454 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus SIP Registration [n] Authentication
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows which authentication mechanism is used when registering to the SIP Proxy Server.
Value space of the result returned:
Digest/Off
Digest: Uses the Digest access authentication method, as specified by RFC 2069.
Off: No authentication mechanism is used.
Example: xStatus SIP Registration 1 Authentication
*s SIP Registration 1 Authentication: Off
** end xStatus SIP Registration [n] Reason
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows a message to explain the reason why the SIP registration failed.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP Registration 1 Reason
*s SIP Registration 1 Reason: "404 Not Found"
** end xStatus SIP Registration [n] Status
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the status of the registration to the SIP Proxy Server.
Value space of the result returned:
Deregister/Failed/Inactive/Registered/Registering
Deregister: The device is in the process of de-registering to the SIP Proxy.
Failed: The device failed to register to the SIP Proxy.
Inactive: The device is not registered to any SIP Proxy.
Registered: The device is registered to the SIP Proxy.
Registering: The device is in the process of registering to the SIP Proxy.
Example: xStatus SIP Registration 1 Status
*s SIP Registration 1 Status: Registered
** end xStatus SIP Registration [n] URI
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the URI used for registration to the SIP Proxy server.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SIP Registration 1 URI
*s SIP Registration 1 URI: "[email protected]"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 455 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus SIP Secure
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the encryption status of the signaling with the SIP Proxy server.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
Example: xStatus SIP Secure
*s SIP Secure: True
** end xStatus SIP Verified
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether or not the SSL certificate of the server that the device tries to register to is included in the device's trusted CA-list. The server is typically a Cisco VCS or CUCM.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
True: The server's SIP certificate is checked against the trusted CA-list on the device and found valid. Additionally, the fully qualified domain name of the server matches the valid certificate.
False: A TLS connection is not set up because the SIP certificate verification failed or the domain name did not match. Note that the status also returns False when TLS is not used
(xConfiguration SIP DefaultTransport not set to TLS) or certificate verification is switched off (SIP TlsVerify: Off. This setting is accessible through your products web interface).
Example: xStatus SIP Verified
*s SIP Verified: False
** end
Standby status
xStatus Standby PowerSave State
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the device is in power save mode or not.
Value space of the result returned:
Active/Deactivating/Unavailable/Inactive/Disabled
Active: It is out-of-office hours, so the device is in power save mode.
Deactivating: The device is in the process of waking up from power save mode.
Inactive: It is regular working hours, so the device is not in power save mode.
Disabled: The device is configured not to use power save mode.
Example: xStatus Standby PowerSave State
*s Standby PowerSave State: Inactive
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 456 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Standby State
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows whether the device is in standby mode or not.
Value space of the result returned:
Standby/EnteringStandby/Halfwake/Off
Standby: The device is in standby state.
EnteringStandby: The device is entering the standby state.
Halfwake: The device is in standby, but greets the user when presence is detected by motion or the Proximity pairing app. Not applicable for DX70.
Off: The device is not in standby.
Example: xStatus Standby State
*s Standby State: Off
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
SystemUnit status
xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Module CompatibilityLevel
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The devices have different sets of compatibility levels. Please check the release note to find the compatibility levels and minimum software version required for your product.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Shows the compatibility level for the device.
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Module CompatibilityLevel
*s SystemUnit Hardware Module CompatibilityLevel: 1
** end xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Module SerialNumber
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the serial number of the hardware module in the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Hardware MainBoard SerialNumber
*s SystemUnit Hardware MainBoard SerialNumber: "FOC99999999"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 457 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Fan [n] Status
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
The feedback shows the speed (rpm) for the specified fan.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Fan 1 Status
*s SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Fan 1 Status: "locked on 1096 rpm"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Temperature Status
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the current temperature alarm level. "High" is meant to raise attention to the temperature trend since the operating temperature is higher than normal. At "Critical" level the device will shut down processes and processors to prevent any damage to the device. To avoid high operating temperatures, make sure the device is operating in a ventilated environment.
Value space of the result returned:
Unknown, Normal, High, Critical
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Temperature Status
*s SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Temperature Status: Normal
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Temperature
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the current maximum temperature (degree Celsius) measured in the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Hardware Temperature
*s SystemUnit Hardware Temperature: "64.0"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Hardware TemperatureThreshold
Applies to: DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns information on the maximum temperature for the device. If this temperature is exceeded the device automatically shuts down.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Hardware TemperatureThreshold
*s SystemUnit Hardware TemperatureThreshold: "85"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 458 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus SystemUnit Notifications Notification [n] Text
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists text related to important system notifications. Notifications are issued e.g. when a device was rebooted because of a software upgrade, or when a factory reset has been performed.
All the notifications can be removed from the list by issuing the xCommand SystemUnit
Notifications RemoveAll command.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Notifications Notification 1 Text
*s SystemUnit Notifications Notification 1 Text: "OK"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Notifications Notification [n] Type
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Lists the system notification types. Notifications are issued e.g. when a device is rebooted because of a software upgrade, or when a factory reset is performed.
All the notifications can be removed from the list by issuing the xCommand SystemUnit
Notifications RemoveAll command.
Value space of the result returned:
SoftwareUpgradeOK/SoftwareUpgradeFailed/RebootRequired/Other
SoftwareUpgradeOK: This value is returned after a successful software upgrade.
SoftwareUpgradeFailed: This value is returned after a failed software upgrade attempt.
RebootRequired: This value is returned when a reboot is required.
Other: This value is returned for any other notifications.
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Notifications Notification 1 Type
*s SystemUnit Notifications Notification 1 Type: SoftwareUpgradeOK
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus SystemUnit ProductId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the product identity.
Value space of the result returned:
String
"Cisco Webex Board 55": Cisco Webex Board 55
"Cisco Webex Board 55S": Cisco Webex Board 55S (second generation / S series)
"Cisco Webex Board 70": Cisco Webex Board 70
"Cisco Webex Board 70S": Cisco Webex Board 70S (second generation / S series)
"Cisco Webex Board 85S": Cisco Webex Board 85S
"Cisco Webex Codec Plus": Cisco Webex Codec Plus
"Cisco Webex Codec Pro": Cisco Webex Codec Pro
"Cisco Webex Desk Pro": Cisco Webex Desk Pro
"Cisco TelePresence DX70": Cisco Webex DX70 (also sold as Cisco DX70)
"Cisco Webex DX80": Cisco Webex DX80 (also sold as Cisco DX80)
"Cisco TelePresence MX200 G2": Cisco TelePresence MX200 G2
"Cisco TelePresence MX300 G2": Cisco TelePresence MX300 G2
"Cisco TelePresence MX700": Cisco TelePresence MX700 with dual screen and single camera
"Cisco TelePresence MX700 SpeakerTrack": Cisco TelePresence MX700 with dual screen and dual camera
"Cisco TelePresence MX800": Cisco TelePresence MX800 with single screen and single camera
"Cisco TelePresence MX800 SpeakerTrack": Cisco TelePresence MX800 with single screen and dual camera
"Cisco TelePresence MX800 Dual": Cisco TelePresence MX800 Dual with dual screen and dual camera
"Cisco Webex Room Kit": Cisco Webex Room Kit
"Cisco Webex Room Kit Mini": Cisco Webex Room Kit Mini
"Cisco Webex Room 55": Cisco Webex Room 55
"Cisco Webex Room 55 Dual": Cisco Webex Room 55 Dual (based on Codec Plus)
"Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual": Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual (based on Codec Plus)
"Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual G2": Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual G2 (based on Codec Pro)
"Cisco Webex Room 70 Single": Cisco Webex Room 70 Single (based on Codec Plus)
"Cisco Webex Room 70 Single G2": Cisco Webex Room 70 Single G2 (based on Codec
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 459 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Pro)
"Cisco Webex Room 70 USB": Cisco Webex Room USB
"Cisco TelePresence SX10": Cisco TelePresence SX10
"Cisco TelePresence SX20": Cisco TelePresence SX20
"Cisco TelePresence SX80": Cisco TelePresence SX80
Example: xStatus SystemUnit ProductId
*s SystemUnit ProductId: "Cisco TelePresence SX80"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 xConfiguration
460
API Reference Guide
Appendices xCommand xStatus SystemUnit ProductPlatform
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the product platform.
Value space of the result returned:
String
"Board 55": Cisco Webex Board 55
"Board 55S": Cisco Webex Board 55S (second generation / S series)
"Board 70": Cisco Webex Board 70
"Board 70S": Cisco Webex Board 70S (second generation / S series)
"Board 85S": Cisco Webex Board 85S
"Codec Plus": Cisco Webex Codec Plus
"Codec Pro": Cisco Webex Codec Pro
"Desk Pro": Cisco Webex Desk Pro
"DX70": Cisco Webex DX70 (also sold as Cisco DX70)
"DX80": Cisco Webex DX80 (also sold as Cisco DX80)
"MX200 G2": Cisco TelePresence MX200 G2
"MX300 G2": Cisco TelePresence MX300 G2
"MX700": Cisco TelePresence MX700 with dual screen and single camera
"MX700ST": Cisco TelePresence MX700 with dual screen and dual camera
"MX800": Cisco TelePresence MX800 with single screen and single camera
"MX800ST": Cisco TelePresence MX800 with single screen and dual camera
"MX800D": Cisco TelePresence MX800 Dual with dual screen and dual camera
"Room Kit": Cisco Webex Room Kit
"Room Kit Mini": Cisco Webex Room Kit Mini
"Room 55": Cisco Webex Room 55
"Room 55D": Cisco Webex Room 55 Dual (based on Codec Plus)
"Room 70D": Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual (based on Codec Plus)
"Room 70D G2": Cisco Webex Room 70 Dual G2 (based on Codec Pro)
"Room 70S": Cisco Webex Room 70 Single (based on Codec Plus)
"Room 70S G2": Cisco Webex Room 70 Single G2 (based on Codec Pro)
"Room USB": Cisco Webex Room USB
"SX10": Cisco TelePresence SX10
"SX20": Cisco TelePresence SX20
"SX80": Cisco TelePresence SX80
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration
Example: xStatus SystemUnit ProductPlatform
*s SystemUnit ProductPlatform: "SX80"
** end xStatus SystemUnit ProductType
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the product type.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit ProductType
*s SystemUnit ProductType: "Cisco Codec"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Software DisplayName
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the name of the software that is installed on the device, as it is displayed in the UI.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software DisplayName
*s SystemUnit Software DisplayName: "Display Name"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus SystemUnit Software Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the name of the software that is installed on the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software Name
*s SystemUnit Software Name: "s53200"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Software OptionKeys Encryption
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if the device has the option key or the software installed that supports the encryption functionality. The option key is available for SX10, SX80, and the MX series.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software OptionKeys Encryption
*s SystemUnit Software OptionKeys Encryption: "true"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 461 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus SystemUnit Software OptionKeys MultiSite
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini
CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows if the device has the option key installed that supports the MultiSite functionality.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True/NotApplicable
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software OptionKeys MultiSite
*s SystemUnit Software OptionKeys MultiSite: "true"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Software OptionKeys RemoteMonitoring
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the device has the remote monitoring option key installed. Remote monitoring option key enables snapshots from the web interface, and from a remote paired Touch 10.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software OptionKeys RemoteMonitoring
*s SystemUnit Software OptionKeys RemoteMonitoring: "true"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Software ReleaseDate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the release date of the software installed on the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software ReleaseDate
*s SystemUnit Software ReleaseDate: "2015-05-05"
** end xStatus SystemUnit Software Version
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the software version installed on the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Software Version
*s SystemUnit Software Version: "CE8.0.0"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 462 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus SystemUnit State CameraLid
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 DeskPro
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the position of the camera lid (i.e., Closed or Open).
Value space of the result returned:
Closed/Open
Closed: The camera lid is closed.
Open: The camera lid is open.
Example: xStatus SystemUnit State CameraLid
*s SystemUnit State CameraLid: Closed
** end xStatus SystemUnit State NumberOfActiveCalls
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the number of active calls.
Value space of the result returned:
0..5
Example: xStatus SystemUnit State NumberOfActiveCalls
*s SystemUnit State NumberOfActiveCalls: 0
** end xConfiguration xCommand xStatus SystemUnit State NumberOfInProgressCalls
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Shows the number of calls in progress.
Value space of the result returned:
0..5
Example: xStatus SystemUnit State NumberOfInProgressCalls
*s SystemUnit State NumberOfInProgressCalls: 0
** end xStatus SystemUnit State NumberOfSuspendedCalls
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of suspended calls.
Value space of the result returned:
0..5
Example: xStatus SystemUnit State NumberOfSuspendedCalls
*s SystemUnit State NumberOfSuspendedCalls: 0
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 463 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus SystemUnit Uptime
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the number of seconds since the last restart of the device.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus SystemUnit Uptime
*s SystemUnit Uptime: 597095
** end xConfiguration xCommand
Time status
xStatus Time SystemTime
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Returns the date and time set on the device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Time SystemTime
*s Time SystemTime: "2014-04-25T10:04:03Z"
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 464 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
UserInterface status
xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus UserInterface ContactInfo ContactMethod [n] Number
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the device's active contact information. This address is used to reach this device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus UserInterface ContactInfo ContactMethod Number
*s UserInterface ContactInfo ContactMethod 1 Number: "12345678"
** end xStatus UserInterface ContactInfo Name
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the device's active contact name. The result depends on which protocol, if any, the device is registered on. The automatically set contact name may have been overridden with the command xConfiguration UserInterface ContactInfo Type. This results in a diagnostics warning about contact mismatch.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus UserInterface ContactInfo Name
*s UserInterface ContactInfo Name: "MySystem"
** end xStatus UserInterface Extensions Widget [n] Value
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Returns the value for a widget. Widgets are used in custom panels, for example in-room controls, that are added to the user interface. The value space depends on the widget type.
The value is an empty string until a value is set with the UserInterface Extensions Widget
SetValue command.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example:
UserInterface Extensions Value
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 1 Value: "on"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 2 Value: "255"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 3 Value: "Blinds"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 4 Value: "inactive"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 5 Value: "2"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 6 Value: "Projector is ready"
** end
[]
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 465 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus UserInterface Extensions Widget [n] WidgetId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, ROOMCONTROL, USER
Returns the unique identifier for a widget. Widgets are used in custom panels, for example in-room controls, that are added to the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example:
UserInterface Extensions WidgetId
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 1 WidgetId: "togglebutton"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 2 WidgetId: "slider"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 3 WidgetId: "spinner"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 4 WidgetId: "button"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 5 WidgetId: "groupbutton"
*s UserInterface Extensions Widget 6 WidgetId: "textfield"
** end
[] xStatus UserInterface Features Call End
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the default End call button is removed from the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The default button is in the user interface.
Hidden: The default button is removed from the user interface.
Example: xStatus UserInterface Features Call End
*s UserInterface Features Call End: Visible
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus UserInterface Features Call Keypad
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the default Keypad button is removed from the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The default button is in the user interface.
Hidden: The default button is removed from the user interface.
Example: xStatus UserInterface Features Call Keypad
*s UserInterface Features Call Keypad: Visible
** end xStatus UserInterface Features MidCallControls
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the default Hold, Transfer, and Resume in-call buttons are removed from the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The default button is in the user interface.
Hidden: The default button is removed from the user interface.
Example: xStatus UserInterface Features MidCallControls
*s UserInterface Features MidCallControls: Visible
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 466 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus UserInterface Features Call Start
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the default Call button and the Add participant button are removed from the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The default button is in the user interface.
Hidden: The default button is removed from the user interface.
Example: xStatus UserInterface Features Call Start
*s UserInterface Features Call Start: Visible
** end xStatus UserInterface Features Share Start
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the default buttons and other UI elements for sharing and previewing content, both in call and out of call, are removed from the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The default button is in the user interface.
Hidden: The default button is removed from the user interface.
Example: xStatus UserInterface Features Share Start
*s UserInterface Features Share Start: Visible
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start
Applies to:
DX70/DX80 RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the default Whiteboard button is removed from the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The default button is in the user interface.
Hidden: The default button is removed from the user interface.
Example: xStatus UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start
*s UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start: Visible
** end xStatus UserInterface OSD Output
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Indicates which monitor on-screen information and indicators (OSD) are displayed on. If the device is controlled with a remote control also the on-screen menus appear on this monitor.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus UserInterface OSD Output
*s UserInterface OSD Output: 1
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 467 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR
This status reports whether or not the the device name (or contact information) in the upper left corner of the user interface, and the associated drop down menu and Settings panel, are shown in the user interface.
Value space of the result returned:
Visible/Hidden
Visible: The device name with drop down menu and Settings panel is shown in the upper left corner of the user interface.
Hidden: The device name with drop down menu and Settings panel is not shown.
Example: xStatus UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
*s UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility: Visible
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Video status
xStatus Video ActiveSpeaker PIPPosition
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the position of the active speaker's image on the screen.
Value space of the result returned:
UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/LowerRight
Example: xStatus Video ActiveSpeaker PIPPosition
*s Video PIP ActiveSpeaker Position: UpperCenter
** end xStatus Video Input Connector [n] Connected
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether is something is connected to the specified connector. Not all connections can be detected.
Value space of the result returned:
False/True/Unknown
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 1 Connected
*s Video Input Connector 1 Connected: True
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 468 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] DeviceType
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows what type of input device is connected.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 DeviceType
*s Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 DeviceType: "Playback"
** end xStatus Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] LogicalAddress
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the CEC logical address of the connected input device. The address is fixed at 0.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC 1 LogicalAddress
*s Video Input Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC 1 LogicalAddress: 0
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the name of the connected input device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 Name
*s Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 Name: "Device-2"
** end xStatus Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerStatus
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the state of the CEC enabled devise connected to the HDMI input.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 PowerStatus
*s Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 PowerStatus: "Standby"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 469 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the vendor ID for the connected input device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 VendorId
*s Video Input Connector 2 ConnectedDevice CEC 5 VendorId: "20576"
** end xStatus Video Input Connector [n] SignalState
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the signal state for the specified input.
Value space of the result returned:
OK/Unknown/Unsupported
Unknown: The signal format is unknown.
OK: A signal is detected and the signal format is supported.
Unsupported: A signal is detected, but the signal format is not supported.
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 1 SignalState
*s Video Input Connector 1 SignalState: OK
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Input Connector [n] SourceId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the identifer of the input source that the connector is associated with.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 1 SourceId
*s Video Input Connector 1 SourceId: 1
** end xStatus Video Input Connector [n] Type
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows which connector type it is.
Value space of the result returned:
Camera/Composite/DVI/3G-SDI/HD-SDI/HDMI/USB/Unknown/VGA/YC/YPbPr/USBC-DP
Example: xStatus Video Input Connector 1 Type
*s Video Input Connector 1 Type: HDMI
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 470 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Video Input DirectShare [n] Peer Address
Applies to:
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the IP address of the connected direct share peer.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Input DirectShare 27 Peer Address
*s Video Input DirectShare 27 Peer Address: xxx.xxx.xx.xx
** end xStatus Video Input DirectShare [n] Peer PeripheralID
Applies to:
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows a unique identifier of the direct share peer in question.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Input DirectShare 27 Peer PeripheralID
*s Video Input DirectShare 27 Peer PeripheralID: byod-5
** end xConfiguration xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Input DirectShare [n] Type
Applies to:
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the type of direct share peer (currently limited to "Proximity" only).
Value space of the result returned:
Proximity
Proximity: Sharing through a proximity connection.
Example: xStatus Video Input DirectShare 27 Type
*s Video Input DirectShare 27 Type: Proximity
** end xStatus Video Input MainVideoMute
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Indicates whether sending of main video has been stopped by using the Video Input MainVideo
Mute command (or, if available, the "Turn video off" button on the user interface).
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
On: Video has been stopped.
Off: Video has not been stopped.
Example: xStatus Video Input MainVideoMute
*s Video Input MainVideoMute: Off
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 471 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Input MainVideoSource
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the local video input currently used as the main source. The value Composed is returned if the main source is composed of more than one local input. The default main video source is set with the xConfiguration Video DefaultMainSource command. It can be changed using xCommand Video Input SetMainVideoSource (this command is not applicable to SX10,
DX70, and DX80).
Value space of the result returned:
1/2/3/4/5/6/Composed
Example: xStatus Video Input MainVideoSource
*s Video Input MainVideoSource: 1
** end xStatus Video Input Source [n] ConnectorId
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the identifier of the connector that is associated with the input source.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Input Source 1 ConnectorId
*s Video Input Source 1 ConnectorId: 1
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Input Source [n] FormatStatus
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the resolution format status for the video input source.
Value space of the result returned:
Ok/OutOfRange/NotFound/Interlaced/Error/Unknown
Example: xStatus Video Input Source 1 FormatStatus
*s Video Input Source 1 Resolution FormatStatus: Ok
** end xStatus Video Input Source [n] FormatType
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the resolution format type for the video input source.
Value space of the result returned:
Unknown/AnalogCVTBlanking/AnalogCVTReducedBlanking/AnalogGTFDefault/
AnalogGTFSecondary/AnalogDiscreteTiming/AnalogDMTBlanking/AnalogCEABlanking/Digital
Example: xStatus Video Input Source 1 FormatType
*s Video Input Source 1 Resolution FormatType: Digital
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 472 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Video Input Source [n] MediaChannelId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
For internal use only.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Input Source MediaChannelId
*s Video Input Source 1 MediaChannelId: 2
*s Video Input Source 2 MediaChannelId: 3
** end xStatus Video Input Source [n] Resolution Height
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the resolution height (in pixels) for the video input source.
Value space of the result returned:
0..3000
Example: xStatus Video Input Source 1 Resolution Height
*s Video Input Source 1 Resolution Height: 1080
** end xConfiguration xCommand xStatus Video Input Source [n] Resolution RefreshRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the resolution refresh rate (Hz) for the video input source.
Value space of the result returned:
0..300
Example: xStatus Video Input Source 1 Resolution RefreshRate
*s Video Input Source 1 Resolution RefreshRate: 50
** end xStatus Video Input Source [n] Resolution Width
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the resolution width (in pixels) for the video input source.
Value space of the result returned:
0..4000
Example: xStatus Video Input Source 1 Resolution Width
*s Video Input Source 1 Resolution Width: 1920
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 473 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xStatus Video Layout LayoutFamily Local
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the local screen layout family.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Layout LayoutFamily Local
*s Video Layout LayoutFamily Local: "equal"
** end xStatus Video Layout LayoutFamily Remote
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the remote screen layout family.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Layout LayoutFamily Remote
*s Video Layout LayoutFamily Remote: "equal"
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 xConfiguration
474 xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Monitors
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitor layout mode.
Value space of the result returned:
Single/Dual/DualPresentationOnly/Triple/TriplePresentationOnly
Single: The same layout is shown on all monitors.
Dual: The layout is distributed on two monitors.
DualPresentationOnly: All participants in the call will be shown on the first monitor, while the presentation (if any) will be shown on the second monitor.
Triple: The layout is distributed on three monitors.
TriplePresentationOnly: All participants in the call will be shown on the first and second monitors, while the presentation (if any) will be shown on the third monitor.
Example: xStatus Video Monitors
*s Video Monitors: Single
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] Connected
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Describes whether a device (for example a display) is connected to the output connector or not. When a display enters standby mode, the video conferencing device may not be able to detect it. The connector status will then return False/Unknown even if the display is physically connected.
Value space of the result returned:
True/False
True: A device is connected to the video output connector.
False: Nothing is connected to the video output connector.
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 Connected
*s Video Output Connector 1 Connected: True
** end
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] DeviceType
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the type of CEC enabled device connected to the HDMI output that the video conferencing device has detected.
This information is only available when the device connected to the HDMI output has the CEC feature configured on and the video conferencing device has the configuration xConfiguration
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode set to on.
Value space of the result returned:
Unknown/TV/Reserved/Recorder/Tuner/Playback/Audio
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC DeviceType
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC DeviceType: TV
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] LogicalAddress
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the CEC logical address of the device.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC 1 LogicalAddress
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC 1 LogicalAddress: 4
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Returns the name of the connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC Name
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC 1 Name: "LG SIGNAGE TV"
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerStatus
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the state of the CEC enabled devise connected to the HDMI output.
This information is only available when the device connected to the HDMI output has the CEC feature configured on and the video conferencing device has the configuration xConfiguration
Video Output Connector CEC Mode set to on.
Value space of the result returned:
Unknown/Ok/In progress/Failed to power on/Failed to standby
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC PowerStatus
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC PowerStatus: Ok
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 475 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Returns the vendor ID for the connected device.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC VendorId
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice CEC 1 VendorId: "57489"
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice Name
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the name of the monitor connected to the HDMI port as defined in the monitors EDID.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice Name
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice Name: "G2420HDBL"
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice PreferredFormat
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the preferred input format of the monitor connected to the HDMI port as defined in the monitors EDID. This is not necessarily the format the video conferencing device is sending out.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice PreferredFormat
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice PreferredFormat: "1920x1080@60Hz"
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice ScreenSize
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the screen size of the connected device in inches. If this information is not available, the default value is set to 0.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice ScreenSize
*s Video Output Connector 1 ConnectedDevice ScreenSize: 55
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 476 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Describes which video stream is shown on the device that is connected to the video output connector.
Value space of the result returned:
First/Second/Third/PresentationOnly/Recorder
First/Second/Third: The role of the monitor in a multimonitor setup. In a singlemonitor setup, there is no difference between First, Second and Third.
PresentationOnly: Shows presentation video stream if active.
Recorder: Shows all participants, including the local main video. If active, shows also the presentation.
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 MonitorRole
*s Video Output Connector 1 MonitorRole: First
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] Resolution Height
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the resolution height (in pixels) for the video output connector.
Value space of the result returned:
120..3000
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 Resolution Height
*s Video Output Connector 1 Resolution Height: 1080
** en xCommand xStatus Video Output Connector [n] Resolution RefreshRate
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the resolution refresh rate (Hz) for the video output connector.
Value space of the result returned:
1..300
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 Resolution RefreshRate
*s Video Output Connector 1 Resolution RefreshRate: 60
** end xStatus Video Output Connector [n] Resolution Width
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the resolution width (in pixels) for the video output connector.
Value space of the result returned:
176..4000
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 Resolution Width
*s Video Output Connector 1 Resolution Width: 1920
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 477 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Connector [n] Type
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the type of connector.
Value space of the result returned:
HDMI/DVI
Example: xStatus Video Output Connector 1 Type
*s Video Output Connector 1 Type: HDMI
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Backlight
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors backlight level, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor
Backlight Set.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Backlight
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Backlight: 80
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Brightness
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors brightness level, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor
Brightness Set.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Brightness
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Brightness: 50
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Blue
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors level for blue, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor
Color Blue Set.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Blue
*s Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Blue: 50
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 478 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Green
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors level for green, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor
Color Green Set.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Green
*s Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Green: 50
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Red
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors level for red, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor
Color Red Set.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Red
*s Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Red: 50
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Selected
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D Room70/Room55D Room70G2
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors color temperature, that has been set with xCommand Video Output
Monitor Color Select.
Value space of the result returned:
4900/5500/6500/7200/9300/10500/12000/User
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Selected
*s Video Output Monitor 1 ColorTemperature Selected: 6500
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Contrast
Applies to: MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors contrast level, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor[n]
Contrast.
Value space of the result returned:
Integer
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Contrast
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Contrast: 50
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 479 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] CSCYUV
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors selected color space, that has been set with xCommand Video Output
Monitor[n] CSC Select.
Value space of the result returned:
RGB/YUV
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 CSCYUV
*s Video Output Monitor 1 CSCYUV: RGB
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] FirmwareVersion
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the firmware version of the monitor. This status field is only populated when connecting with a supported LG monitor.
Value space of the result returned:
String
The firmware version of the monitor.
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 FirmwareVersion
*s Video Output Monitor 1 FirmwareVersion: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Gamma
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors gamma level, that has been set with xCommand Video Output Monitor[n]
Gamma.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Gamma
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Gamma: "2.2"
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] ModelName
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the model name of the monitor. This status field is only populated when connecting with a supported LG monitor.
Value space of the result returned:
String
The model name of the monitor.
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 ModelName
*s Video Output Monitor 1 ModelName: ""
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 480 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Position
Applies to:
SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows whether the monitor is positioned on the left or the right. Applicable for dual screen devices only.
Value space of the result returned:
Left/Right
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Position
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Position: Left
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] SerialNumber
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the serial number of the monitor. This status field is only populated when connecting with a supported LG monitor.
Value space of the result returned:
String
The serial number of the monitor.
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 SerialNumber
*s Video Output Monitor 1 SerialNumber: ""
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Sharpness
Applies to:
MX700/MX800/MX800D
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Returns the monitors selected sharpness, that has been set with xCommand Video Output
Monitor[n] Sharpness.
Value space of the result returned:
Softest/Soft/Normal/Sharp/Sharpest
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Sharpness
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Sharpness: Normal
** end xStatus Video Output Monitor [n] Temperature
Applies to: SX10 SX20 SX80 MX200G2/MX300G2 MX700/MX800/MX800D RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus
CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the temperature of the monitor. This status field is only populated when connecting with a supported LG monitor.
Value space of the result returned:
Normal/High
Normal: The temperature of the monitor is normal.
High: The temperature of the monitor is too high.
Example: xStatus Video Output Monitor 1 Temperature
*s Video Output Monitor 1 Temperature: Normal
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 481 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Presentation PIPPosition
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Shows the position of the presentation image on the screen.
Value space of the result returned:
UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/LowerRight
Example: xStatus Video Presentation PIPPosition
*s Video PIP Presentation Position: CenterLeft
** end xStatus Video Selfview FullscreenMode
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether selfview is set on full screen mode or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Video Selfview FullscreenMode
*s Video Selfview FullscreenMode: Off
** end xCommand xStatus Video Selfview Mode
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows whether selfview mode is set on or not.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus Video Selfview Mode
*s Video Selfview Mode: Off
** end xStatus Video Selfview OnMonitorRole
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Identifies which monitor(s) contains the selfview, if present.
Value space of the result returned:
First/Second/Third
Example: xStatus Video Selfview OnMonitorRole
*s Video Selfview OnMonitorRole: First
** end
API Reference Guide
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 482 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xStatus Video Selfview PIPPosition
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, INTEGRATOR, USER
Shows the position of the selfview image on the screen.
Value space of the result returned:
UpperLeft/UpperCenter/UpperRight/CenterLeft/CenterRight/LowerLeft/LowerRight
Example: xStatus Video Selfview PIPPosition
*s Video Selfview PIPPosition: LowerRight
** end xCommand
API Reference Guide
Appendices
WebEngine status
xStatus WebEngine Features Signage
Applies to:
RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reports whether or not the digital signage feature is enabled. It is enabled (On) only when both the WebEngine Mode and Standby Signage Mode settings are On.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus WebEngine Features Signage
*s WebEngine Features Signage: On
** end xStatus WebEngine Features WebEngine
Applies to: RoomKit RoomKitMini CodecPlus CodecPro Room55 Room70/Room55D Room70G2 DeskPro
Boards
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reports whether or not the web engine is enabled. It is enabled (On) when the WebEngine
Mode setting is On.
Value space of the result returned:
On/Off
Example: xStatus WebEngine Features WebEngine
*s WebEngine Features WebEngine: On
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 483 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Webex status
xConfiguration xStatus Webex Services Proximity GuestToken
Applies to:
All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Provides the device-specific code that can be used with devices.webex.com. Note that the code will change periodically.
The status is only available for cloud-registered devices.
Value space of the result returned:
String
Example: xStatus Webex Services Proximity GuestToken
*s Webex Services Proximity GuestToken: "6K2-WEC-7UZ"
** end xStatus Webex Status
Applies to: All products
Requires user role: ADMIN, USER
Reports the status of the connection between the device and the Cisco Webex cloud service. If the could service is up and running, the status reports Registered. If the device is registered to an on-premise service such as CUCM or VCS, the status reports Disabled.
Value space of the result returned:
Disabled/Error/Registered/Registering/Stopped
Example: xStatus Webex Status
*s Webex Status: Disabled
** end xCommand
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 484
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Chapter 6
Appendices
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 485 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Supported commands matrix
Here you can find tables that show the complete list of configurations, commands, and statuses that are supported for devices running CE9.12.
xConfiguration xCommand
Configuration ......................................................................487
Command ...........................................................................504
Status .................................................................................. 517
Information about the tables
1. Which devices support a configuration, status, or command
Some entries are supported by all types of devices, while others only exist for a smaller subset.
The following devices are covered:
• Desk series: Desk Pro, DX80, DX70
• MX series: MX800, MX700, MX300 G2, MX200 G2
• Room series: Codec Pro, Codec Plus, Room Kit,
Room Kit Mini, Room 55, Room 55 Dual, Room 70,
Room 70 G2
• SX series: SX80, SX20, SX10
• Webex Boards: 55, 55S, 70, 70S, and 85S
2. Which call services support a configuration, status, or command
Some of the configurations, commands, and statuses that are available in the API only apply to on-premises registered devices. They don’t apply to Webex registered devices. These items are marked with “On-prem only”.
Among the non-applicable configurations, commands, and statuses, are everything that is related to H.323,
H.320, SIP, NTP, CUCM, LDAP, Proximity, and Far End
Camera Control.
xStatus
API Reference Guide
3. How to access each configuration, status, or command
Configurations: You can access all configurations from the device’s web interface. A subset is also part of the device’s API.
Commands: You can only issue commands from the device’s API.
Statuses: You can request the listed statuses from the device’s API. You can access more statuses from the device’s web interface.
4. Which user role is required to use a configuration, status, or command
A user account may hold one, or a combination, of the following user roles:
• ADMIN (A)
• AUDIT (Au)
• INTEGRATOR (I)
• ROOMCONTROL (R)
• USER (U)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 486 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Audio DefaultVolume
Audio Input ARC [n] Mode
Audio Input HDMI [n] Level
Audio Input HDMI [n] Mode
Audio Input HDMI [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer ID
Audio Input Line [n] Equalizer Mode
Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation MuteOnInactiveVideo
Audio Input Line [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
Audio Input Line [n] Channel
Audio Input Line [n] Level
Audio Input Line [n] Mode
Audio Input Microphone [n] Channel
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Mode
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl Dereverberation
Audio Input Microphone [n] EchoControl NoiseReduction
Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer ID
Audio Input Microphone [n] Equalizer Mode
Audio Input Microphone [n] Level
Audio Input Microphone [n] Mode
Audio Input Microphone [n] Type
Audio Input Microphone [n] PhantomPower
Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation
MuteOnInactiveVideo
Audio Input Microphone [n] VideoAssociation VideoInputSource
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 487 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Audio Input MicrophoneMode
Audio Input USBC[n] Level
Audio Input USBC[n] Mode
Audio Input WebView[n] Mode
Audio KeyClickDetector Attenuate
Audio KeyClickDetector Enabled
Audio Microphones Mute Enabled
Audio Microphones PhantomPower
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Input Microphone [n] Mode
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Output Line [n] Mode
Audio MicrophoneReinforcement Gain
Audio Output ARC [n] Delay DelayMs
Audio Output ARC [n] Delay Mode
Audio Output ARC [n] Mode
Audio Output ConnectorSetup
Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay DelayMs
Audio Output HDMI [n] Delay Mode
Audio Output HDMI [n] Level
Audio Output HDMI [n] Mode
Audio Output InternalSpeaker Mode
Audio Output Line [n] Channel
Audio Output Line [n] Delay DelayMs
Audio Output Line [n] Delay Mode
Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer ID
Audio Output Line [n] Equalizer Mode
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 488 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Audio Output Line [n] Level
Audio Output Line [n] Mode
Audio Output Line [n] OutputType
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingTone
Audio SoundsAndAlerts RingVolume
Audio Ultrasound Mode
Audio Ultrasound MaxVolume
Bluetooth Allowed
Bluetooth Enabled
BYOD TouchForwarding Enabled
CallHistory Mode
Cameras Camera [n] AssignedSerialNumber
Cameras Background Enabled
Cameras Camera [n] Backlight DefaultMode
Cameras Camera [n] Brightness Mode
Cameras Camera [n] Brightness DefaultLevel
Cameras Camera [n] Flip
Cameras Camera [n] Focus Mode
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Mode
Cameras Camera [n] Gamma Level
Cameras Camera [n] IrSensor
Cameras Camera [n] Mirror
Cameras Camera [n] MotorMoveDetection
Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Mode
Cameras Camera [n] Whitebalance Level
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web A I
Web, API A I
Web A
Web A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web A U
Web, API A I
Web A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 489 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Cameras Camera Framerate
Cameras PowerLine Frequency
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Pan
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Tilt
Cameras PresenterTrack CameraPosition Zoom
Cameras PresenterTrack Connector
Cameras PresenterTrack Enabled
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetectedStatus
Cameras PresenterTrack TriggerZone
Cameras Preset TriggerAutofocus
Cameras SpeakerTrack Mode
Cameras SpeakerTrack Closeup
Cameras SpeakerTrack TrackingMode
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection Mode
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraLeft
Cameras SpeakerTrack ConnectorDetection CameraRight
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard Mode
Conference ActiveControl Mode
Conference AutoAnswer Mode
Conference AutoAnswer Mute
Conference AutoAnswer Delay
Conference CallProtocolIPStack
Conference DefaultCall Protocol
Conference DefaultCall Rate
Conference DoNotDisturb DefaultTimeout
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A
Web A I
Web
Web
A I
A I
Web
Web
Web
Web
A I
A I
A I
A I
Web A I
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 490 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Conference Encryption Mode
Conference FarEndControl Mode
Conference FarEndControl SignalCapability
Conference FarEndMessage Mode
Conference MaxReceiveCallRate
Conference MaxTransmitCallRate
Conference MaxTotalReceiveCallRate
Conference MaxTotalTransmitCallRate
Conference MicUnmuteOnDisconnect Mode
Conference Multipoint Mode
Conference MultiStream Mode
Conference IncomingMultisiteCall Mode
Conference Presentation OnPlacedOnHold
Conference Presentation RelayQuality
FacilityService Service [n] Type
FacilityService Service [n] Name
FacilityService Service [n] Number
FacilityService Service [n] CallType
GPIO Pin [n] Mode
H323 Authentication Mode
H323 Authentication LoginName
H323 Authentication Password
H323 CallSetup Mode
H323 Encryption KeySize
H323 Gatekeeper Address
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A
X Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web
Web
A
A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
-
-
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 491 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
H323 H323Alias E164
H323 H323Alias ID
H323 NAT Mode
H323 NAT Address
H323 PortAllocation
HttpClient Mode
HttpClient AllowHTTP
HttpClient AllowInsecureHTTPS
HttpClient UseHttpProxy
HttpFeedback TlsVerify
HttpFeedback UseHttpProxy
Logging Debug Wifi
Logging External Mode
Logging External Protocol
Logging External Server Address
Logging External Server Port
Logging External TlsVerify
Logging Internal Mode
Logging Mode
Macros Mode
Macros AutoStart
Macros UnresponsiveTimeout
Macros XAPI Transport
Network [n] DNS DNSSEC Mode
Network [n] DNS Domain Name
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
-
-
X Web
-
A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 492 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Network [n] DNS Server [m] Address
Network [n] IEEE8021X Mode
Network [n] IEEE8021X TlsVerify
Network [n] IEEE8021X UseClientCertificate
Network [n] IEEE8021X Identity
Network [n] IEEE8021X Password
Network [n] IEEE8021X AnonymousIdentity
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Md5
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Ttls
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Tls
Network [n] IEEE8021X Eap Peap
Network [n] IPStack
Network [n] IPv4 Assignment
Network [n] IPv4 Address
Network [n] IPv4 Gateway
Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask
Network [n] IPv6 Assignment
Network [n] IPv6 Address
Network [n] IPv6 Gateway
Network [n] IPv6 DHCPOptions
Network [n] MTU
Network [n] QoS Mode
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Audio
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Video
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Data
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 493 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Network [n] QoS Diffserv Signalling
Network [n] QoS Diffserv ICMPv6
Network [n] QoS Diffserv NTP
Network [n] RemoteAccess Allow
Network [n] Speed
Network [n] TrafficControl Mode
Network [n] VLAN Voice Mode
Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId
NetworkPort [n] Mode
NetworkServices CDP Mode
NetworkServices H323 Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy LoginName
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Password
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Mode
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy Url
NetworkServices HTTP Proxy PACUrl
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP Mode
NetworkServices HTTPS OCSP URL
NetworkServices HTTPS Server MinimumTLSVersion
NetworkServices HTTPS StrictTransportSecurity
NetworkServices HTTPS VerifyClientCertificate
NetworkServices NTP Mode
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Key
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I
Web A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A
Web, API A
X Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web A
Web A
Web, API A
-
-
Web, API A
Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 494 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyId
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] KeyAlgorithn
NetworkServices SIP Mode
NetworkServices SMTP Mode
NetworkServices SMTP Server
NetworkServices SMTP Port
NetworkServices SMTP Username
NetworkServices SMTP Password
NetworkServices SMTP From
NetworkServices SMTP Security
NetworkServices SNMP Mode
NetworkServices SNMP CommunityName
NetworkServices SNMP SystemContact
NetworkServices SNMP SystemLocation
NetworkServices SSH Mode
NetworkServices SSH HostKeyAlgorithm
NetworkServices SSH AllowPublicKey
NetworkServices Telnet Mode
NetworkServices UPnP Mode
NetworkServices UPnP Timeout
NetworkServices Websocket
NetworkServices WelcomeText
NetworkServices Wifi Allowed
NetworkServices Wifi Enabled
NetworkServices XMLAPI Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A U
Web A U
Web A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 495 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Peripherals InputDevice Mode
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels EmcResilience
Peripherals Pairing CiscoTouchPanels RemotePairing
Peripherals Profile Cameras
Peripherals Profile Cameras
Peripherals Profile ControlSystems
Peripherals Profile TouchPanels
Phonebook Server [n] ID
Phonebook Server [n] Pagination
Phonebook Server [n] TlsVerify
Phonebook Server [n] Type
Phonebook Server [n] URL
Provisioning Connectivity
Provisioning CUCM CallManagementRecords
Provisioning ExternalManager Address
Provisioning ExternalManager AlternateAddress
Provisioning ExternalManager Protocol
Provisioning ExternalManager Path
Provisioning ExternalManager Domain
Provisioning Mode
Provisioning LoginName
Provisioning Password
Provisioning TlsVerify
Provisioning WebexEdge
Proximity AlternatePort Enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A
-
-
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
X Web, API A U
Web A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 496 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Proximity Mode
Proximity Services CallControl
Proximity Services ContentShare FromClients
Proximity Services ContentShare ToClients
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoiseEstimation Mode
RoomAnalytics PeopleCountOutOfCall
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresenceDetector
RoomReset Control
RTP Ports Range Start
RTP Ports Range Stop
RTP Video Ports Range Start
RTP Video Ports Range Stop
Security Audit Logging Mode
Security Audit OnError Action
Security Audit Server Address
Security Audit Server Port
Security Audit Server PortAssignment
Security Fips Mode
Security Session FailedLoginsLockoutTime
Security Session InactivityTimeout
Security Session MaxFailedLogins
Security Session MaxSessionsPerUser
Security Session MaxTotalSessions
Security Session ShowLastLogon
SerialPort Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web A
Web
Web
Web
Web
Web, API Au
Web, API Au
Web, API Au
Web, API Au
A
A
A
A
Web, API Au
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A I
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 497 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
SerialPort BaudRate
SerialPort LoginRequired
SIP ANAT
SIP Authentication UserName
SIP Authentication Password
SIP DefaultTransport
SIP DisplayName
SIP Ice DefaultCandidate
SIP Ice Mode
SIP Line
SIP ListenPort
SIP Mailbox
SIP MinimumTLSVersion
SIP PreferredIPSignaling
SIP Proxy [n] Address
SIP TlsVerify
SIP Turn DiscoverMode
SIP Turn DropRflx
SIP Turn Server
SIP Turn UserName
SIP Turn Password
SIP Type
SIP URI
Standby BootAction
Standby Control
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
Web, API A I
Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web A
X Web, API A
X Web A
X Web, API A
X Web A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web
X Web
A
A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web A
X Web, API A
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 498 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Standby Delay
Standby Signage Audio
Standby Signage InteractionMode
Standby Signage Mode
Standby Signage RefreshInterval
Standby Signage Url
Standby StandbyAction
Standby WakeupAction
Standby WakeupOnMotionDetection
Standby PowerSave
SystemUnit Name
SystemUnit CrashReporting Advanced
SystemUnit CrashReporting Mode
SystemUnit CrashReporting Url
SystemUnit IrSensor
Time TimeFormat
Time DateFormat
Time Zone
Time WorkDay Start
Time WorkDay End
Time WorkWeek FirstDayOfWeek
Time WorkWeek LastDayOfWeek
UserInterface Accessibility IncomingCallNotification
UserInterface Assistant Mode
UserInterface Assistant ProactiveMeetingJoin
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web A
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web A
Web A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 499 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
UserInterface Bookings Visibility Title
UserInterface Branding AwakeBranding Colors
UserInterface ContactInfo Type
UserInterface CustomMessage
UserInterface Diagnostics Notifications
UserInterface KeyTones Mode
UserInterface Features Call End
UserInterface Features Call Keypad
UserInterface Features Call MidCallControls
UserInterface Features Call JoinWebex
UserInterface Features Call Start
UserInterface Features Call VideoMute
UserInterface Features HideAll
UserInterface Features Share Start
UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start
UserInterface Language
UserInterface OSD EncryptionIndicator
UserInterface OSD HalfwakeMessage
UserInterface OSD Output
UserInterface Phonebook Mode
UserInterface Proximity Notifications
UserInterface RoomKitTouch Enabled
UserInterface Security Mode
UserInterface SettingsMenu Mode
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A U
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web A I
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 500 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
UserInterface SoundEffects Mode
UserInterface Wallpaper
UserInterface UsbPromotion
UserInterface WebcamOnlyMode
UserInterface Whiteboard ActivityIndicators
UserManagement LDAP Admin Filter
UserManagement LDAP Admin Group
UserManagement LDAP Attribute
UserManagement LDAP BaseDN
UserManagement LDAP Encryption
UserManagement LDAP MinimumTLSVersion
UserManagement LDAP Mode
UserManagement LDAP Server Address
UserManagement LDAP Server Port
UserManagement LDAP VerifyServerCertificate
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumDigits
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumLength
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity
MinimumLowercase
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity MinimumSpecial
UserManagement PasswordPolicy Complexity
MinimumUppercase
UserManagement PasswordPolicy MaxLifetime
UserManagement PasswordPolicy ReuseLimit
Video ActiveSpeaker DefaultPIPPosition
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Local
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web A I U
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
X Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web
Web
A I
A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 501 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Configuration
Video DefaultLayoutFamily Remote
Video DefaultMainSource
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl CameraId
Video Input Connector [n] CameraControl Mode
Video Input Connector [n] CEC Mode
Video Input Connector [n] DviType
Video Input Connector [n] HDCP Mode
Video Input Connector [n] InputSourceType
Video Input Connector [n] Name
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Profile
Video Input Connector [n] OptimalDefinition Threshold60fps
Video Input Connector [n] PreferredResolution
Video Input Connector [n] PresentationSelection
Video Input Connector [n] Quality
Video Input Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
Video Input Connector [n] SignalType
Video Input Connector [n] Visibility
Video Monitors
Video Output Connector [n] Brightness
Video Output Connector [n] BrightnessMode
Video Output Connector [n] CEC Mode
Video Output Connector [n] Location HorizontalOffset
Video Output Connector [n] Location VerticalOffset
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
Video Output Connector [n] OverscanLevel
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web A
Web, API A U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web A I
Web A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web
Web
A I
A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web
Web
A U
A U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 502 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Configuration
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution
Video Output Connector [n] RGBQuantizationRange
Video Output Connector [n] Whitebalance Level
Video Presentation DefaultPIPPosition
Video Presentation DefaultSource
Video Presentation Priority
Video Selfview Default FullscreenMode
Video Selfview Default Mode
Video Selfview Default OnMonitorRole
Video Selfview Default PIPPosition
Video Selfview Mirrored
Video Selfview OnCall Mode
Video Selfview OnCall Duration
VoiceControl Wakeword Mode
WebEngine Features WebGL
WebEngine Mode
WebEngine RemoteDebugging
WebEngine UseHttpProxy xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I U
Web A I
Web
Web
A U
A I
Web, API A U
Web, API A
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web A
Web, API A
Web, API A
Web, API A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 503 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Audio Diagnostics Advanced Run
Audio Diagnostics MeasureDelay
Audio Equalizer List
Audio Equalizer Update
Audio LocalInput Add
Audio LocalInput AddConnector
Audio LocalInput Remove
Audio LocalInput RemoveConnector
Audio LocalInput Update
Audio LocalOutput Add
Audio LocalOutput AddConnector
Audio LocalOutput ConnectInput
Audio LocalOutput DisconnectInput
Audio LocalOutput Remove
Audio LocalOutput RemoveConnector
Audio LocalOutput Update
Audio LocalOutput UpdateInputGain
Audio Microphones Mute
Audio Microphones ToggleMute
Audio Microphones Unmute
Audio RemoteOutput ConnectInput
Audio RemoteOutput DisconnectInput
Audio RemoteOutput UpdateInputGain
Audio Select
Audio Setup Clear
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
API
API
API
API
-
-
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
-
-
API
API
-
-
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A U
A U
A
A
A
A I U
A I U
A I U
A
A
A
A U
A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 504 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Command
Audio Setup Reset
Audio Sound Play
Audio Sound Stop
Audio SpeakerCheck
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone List
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Play
Audio SoundsAndAlerts Ringtone Stop
Audio Volume Decrease
Audio Volume Increase
Audio Volume Mute
Audio Volume Set
Audio Volume SetToDefault
Audio Volume ToggleMute
Audio Volume Unmute
Audio VuMeter Start
Audio VuMeter Stop
Audio VuMeter StopAll
Bookings Clear
Bookings Get
Bookings List
Bookings NotificationSnooze
Call Accept
Call Disconnect
Call DTMFSend xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A I U
A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 505 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Call FarEndControl Camera Move
Call FarEndControl Camera Stop
Call FarEndControl RoomPreset Activate
Call FarEndControl Source Select
Call FarEndMessage Send
Call FarEndMessage SStringSend
Call FarEndMessage TStringSend
Call Forward
Call Hold
Call Ignore
Call Join
Call Reject
Call Resume
Call UnattendedTransfer
CallHistory AcknowledgeAllMissedCalls
CallHistory AcknowledgeMissedCall
CallHistory DeleteAll
CallHistory DeleteEntry
CallHistory Get
CallHistory Recents
Camera PositionReset
Camera PositionSet
Camera Preset Activate
Camera Preset ActivateDefaultPosition
Camera Preset Edit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X API
X API
X API
X API
X API
API
API
X API
X API
API
API
API
X API
X API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A I U
A I U
A U
A U
A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 506 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Camera Preset List
Camera Preset Remove
Camera Preset Show
Camera Preset Store
Camera Ramp
Camera TriggerAutofocus
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Start
Cameras AutoFocus Diagnostics Stop
Cameras Background Set
Cameras PresenterTrack ClearPosition
Cameras PresenterTrack Set
Cameras PresenterTrack StorePosition
Cameras SpeakerTrack Activate
Cameras SpeakerTrack Deactivate
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Start
Cameras SpeakerTrack Diagnostics Stop
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard ActivatePosition
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard AlignPosition
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard SetDistance
Cameras SpeakerTrack Whiteboard StorePosition
Conference Call AuthenticationResponse
Conference DoNotDisturb Activate
Conference DoNotDisturb Deactivate
Conference Participant Admit
Conference Participant Disconnect
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A U
A U
A I U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A I U
A U
A I
A I
A I U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A I U
A I U
A U
A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 507 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Conference Participant Mute
Conference Participant Search
Conference Recording Pause
Conference Recording Resume
Conference Recording Start
Conference Recording Stop
Conference SpeakerLock Release
Conference SpeakerLock Set
Diagnostics Run
Dial
GPIO ManualState Set
HttpClient Allow Hostname Add
HttpClient Allow Hostname Clear
HttpClient Allow Hostname List
HttpClient Allow Hostname Remove
HttpClient Delete
HttpClient Get
HttpClient Patch
HttpClient Post
HttpClient Put
HttpFeedback Deregister
HttpFeedback Enable
HttpFeedback Register
Logging SendLogs
Macros Log Clear
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
API
API
API
API
API
API
X API
X API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A
A
A
A
A I U
A U
A
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A U
A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 508 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Macros Log Get
Macros Macro Activate
Macros Macro Deactivate
Macros Macro Get
Macros Macro Remove
Macros Macro RemoveAll
Macros Macro Rename
Macros Macro Roles Set
Macros Macro Save
Macros Runtime Restart
Macros Runtime Start
Macros Runtime Status
Macros Runtime Stop
Message Send
Network SMTP VerifyConfig
Network Wifi Configure
Network Wifi Delete
Network Wifi List
Network Wifi Scan Start
Network Wifi Scan Stop
Peripherals Connect
Peripherals HeartBeat
Peripherals List
Peripherals Pairing DeviceDiscovery Start
Peripherals Pairing Pair
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A
A
A
A
A
A I
A U
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A I R U
A I R U
A I R
A
A
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 509 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Peripherals Pairing Unpair
Peripherals Purge
Phonebook Contact Add
Phonebook Contact Delete
Phonebook Contact Modify
Phonebook ContactMethod Add
Phonebook ContactMethod Delete
Phonebook ContactMethod Modify
Phonebook Folder Add
Phonebook Folder Delete
Phonebook Folder Modify
Phonebook Search
Presentation Start
Presentation Stop
Provisioning CompleteUpgrade
Provisioning PostponeUpgrade
Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Login
Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Logout
Provisioning RoomType Activate
Provisioning Service Fetch
Proximity Services Activate
Proximity Services Deactivate
RoomPreset Activate
RoomPreset Clear
RoomPreset Store
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
X API
X API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
A I
A
A U
A U
A U
A U
A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 510 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Security Certificates CA Add
Security Certificates CA Delete
Security Certificates CA Show
Security Certificates Services Activate
Security Certificates Services Add
Security Certificates Services Deactivate
Security Certificates Services Delete
Security Certificates Services Show
Security Certificates ThirdParty Disable
Security Certificates ThirdParty Enable
Security Certificates ThirdParty List
Security Certificates ThirdParty Show
Security Certificates Webex Show
Security Persistency
Security Session Get
Security Session List
Security Session Terminate
Standby Activate
Standby Deactivate
Standby Halfwake
Standby ResetHalfwakeTimer
Standby ResetTimer
SystemUnit Boot
SystemUnit FactoryReset
SystemUnit FirstTimeWizard Stop
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
A
A
A
A U
A
A Au I
R U
A
A
A U
A
A
A
A
A U
A
A
A I U
A I U
A I
A U
A U
A I U
A U
A I U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
X API
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 511 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
SystemUnit Notifications RemoveAll
SystemUnit OptionKey Add
SystemUnit OptionKey List
SystemUnit OptionKey Remove
SystemUnit OptionKey RemoveAll
SystemUnit ProductPlatform Set
SystemUnit SignInBanner Clear
SystemUnit SignInBanner Get
SystemUnit SignInBanner Set
SystemUnit SoftReset
SystemUnit SoftwareUpgrade
SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Clear
SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Get
SystemUnit WelcomeBanner Set
Time DateTime Get
Time DateTime Set
UserInterface Branding Clear
UserInterface Branding Delete
UserInterface Branding Fetch
UserInterface Branding Get
UserInterface Branding Updated
UserInterface Branding Upload
UserInterface Extensions Clear
UserInterface Extensions List
UserInterface Extensions Panel Clicked
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
A U
A
A
A Au I
R U
A
A U
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A U
A U
A I
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I R
I R U
A I R U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 512 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
UserInterface Extensions Panel Close
UserInterface Extensions Panel Open
UserInterface Extensions Panel Remove
UserInterface Extensions Panel Save
UserInterface Extensions Panel Update
UserInterface Extensions Set
UserInterface Extensions Widget Action
UserInterface Extensions Widget SetValue
UserInterface Extensions Widget UnsetValue
UserInterface Message Alert Clear
UserInterface Message Alert Display
UserInterface Message Prompt Clear
UserInterface Message Prompt Display
UserInterface Message Prompt Response
UserInterface Message TextInput Clear
UserInterface Message TextInput Display
UserInterface Message TextInput Response
UserInterface Message TextLine Clear
UserInterface Message TextLine Display
UserInterface OSD Key Click
UserInterface OSD Key Press
UserInterface OSD Key Release
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Add
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource List
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Remove
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A I R
A I R U
A I R
A I R U
A I R
A I R U
A I R U
A I R U
A I R U
A I R
A I R
A I R U
A I R
A I R U
A I R
A I R
A I R U
A I R U
A I R
A
A
A
A I R
A I R
A I R
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 513 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource RemoveAll
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource Select
UserInterface Presentation ExternalSource State Set
UserInterface WebView Clear
UserInterface WebView Display
UserManagement RemoteSupportUser Create
UserManagement RemoteSupportUser Delete
UserManagement RemoteSupportUser DisablePermanently
UserManagement RemoteSupportUser GetState
UserManagement User Add
UserManagement User Delete
UserManagement User Get
UserManagement User List
UserManagement User Modify
UserManagement User Passphrase Change
UserManagement User Passphrase Set
UserManagement User Unblock
Video ActiveSpeakerPIP Set
Video CEC Input KeyClick
Video CEC Output KeyClick
Video CEC Output SendActiveSourceRequest
Video CEC Output SendInactiveSourceRequest
Video Graphics Clear
Video Graphics Text Display
Video Input MainVideo Mute
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
A
A
A
A
A
A
A Au I
R U
A I R
A I R U
A I R
A I U
A I U
A
A
A
A
A
A U
A I
A I
A I
A I
A I U
A I U
A I U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 514 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Command
Video Input MainVideo Unmute
Video Input SetMainVideoSource
Video Input Source SetActiveConnector
Video Layout LayoutFamily Set
Video Matrix Assign
Video Matrix Reset
Video Matrix Swap
Video Matrix Unassign
Video Output Monitor Backlight Set
Video Output Monitor Brightness Set
Video Output Monitor Color Blue Set
Video Output Monitor Color Green Set
Video Output Monitor Color Red Set
Video Output Monitor Color Select
Video Output Monitor Contrast Set
Video Output Monitor CSC Select
Video Output Monitor Gamma Set
Video Output Monitor Reset
Video Output Monitor Sharpness Set
Video PresentationPIP Set
Video PresentationView Set
Video Selfview Set
UserInterface WebEngine DeleteStorage
Webex Join
Webex Registration Cancel
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
API
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A I U
A I U
A U
A U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A I U
A
A
A
A
A U
A U
A U
A
A I U
A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 515 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Command
Webex Registration ConvertToCloud
Webex Registration Start xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
API
API
A
A U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 516 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Audio Devices Bluetooth ActiveProfile
Audio Devices HandsetUSB ConnectionStatus
Audio Devices HandsetUSB Cradle
Audio Devices HeadsetAnalog Connection Status
Audio Devices HeadsetAnalog HasMicrophone
Audio Devices HeadsetUSB ConnectionStatus
Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Description
Audio Devices HeadsetUSB Manufacturer
Audio Input Connectors HDMI [n] Mute
Audio Input Connectors Line [n] Mute
Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] ConnectionStatus
Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] EcReferenceDelay
Audio Input Connectors Microphone [n] Mute
Audio Input Connectors USBC [n] Mute
Audio Input KeyClick Attenuate
Audio Input KeyClick Detected
Audio Input KeyClick Enabled
Audio Input LocalInput [n] AGC
Audio Input LocalInput [n] Channels
Audio Input LocalInput [n] Connector
Audio Input LocalInput [n] Direct
Audio Input LocalInput [n] MixerMode
Audio Input LocalInput [n] Mute
Audio Input LocalInput [n] Name
Audio Input RemoteInput [n] CallId
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 517 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Status
Audio Microphones Mute
Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] DelayMs
Audio Output Connectors ARC [n] Mode
Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] DelayMs
Audio Output Connectors HDMI [n] Mode
Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] DelayMs
Audio Output Connectors InternalSpeaker [n] Mode
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] ConnectionStatus
Audio Output Connectors Line [n] DelayMs
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] AutoconnectRemote
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Channels
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Connector [n]
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Input [n] Gain
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Loudspeaker
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] Name
Audio Output LocalOutput [n] VolumeControlled
Audio Output MeasuredHdmiArcDelay
Audio Output MeasuredHdmiDelay
Audio Output MeasuredHdmiCecDelay
Audio Output RemoteOutput [n] CallId
Audio Output RemoteOutput [n] Input [n] Gain
Audio SelectedDevice
Audio Volume
Audio VolumeHandsetUsb xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 518 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Audio VolumeHeadsetAnalog
Audio VolumeHeadsetUsb
Audio VolumeInternal
Audio VolumeMute
Bookings Current Id
Call [n] AnswerState
Call [n] AttendedTransferFrom
Call [n] CallbackNumber
Call [n] CallType
Call [n] DeviceType
Call [n] Direction
Call [n] DisplayName
Call [n] Duration
Call [n] Encryption Type
Call [n] FacilityServiceId
Call [n] HoldReason
Call [n] Ice
Call [n] PlacedOnHold
Call [n] Protocol
Call [n] ReceiveCallRate
Call [n] RemoteNumber
Call [n] Status
Call [n] TransmitCallRate
Cameras Background Image
Cameras Background Mode
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A I U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 519 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Cameras Camera [n] Capabilities Options
Cameras Camera [n] Connected
Cameras Camera [n] DetectedConnector
Cameras Camera [n] Flip
Cameras Camera [n] Framerate
Cameras Camera [n] HardwareID
Cameras Camera [n] LightingConditions
Cameras Camera [n] MacAddress
Cameras Camera [n] Manufacturer
Cameras Camera [n] Model
Cameras Camera [n] Position Focus
Cameras Camera [n] Position Lens
Cameras Camera [n] Position Pan
Cameras Camera [n] Position Roll
Cameras Camera [n] Position Tilt
Cameras Camera [n] Position Zoom
Cameras Camera [n] SerialNumber
Cameras Camera [n] SoftwareID
Cameras PresenterTrack Availability
Cameras PresenterTrack PresenterDetected
Cameras PresenterTrack Status
Cameras SpeakerTrack ActiveConnector
Cameras SpeakerTrack Availability
Cameras SpeakerTrack Status
Capabilities Conference MaxActiveCalls
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
-
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 520 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Capabilities Conference MaxAudioCalls
Capabilities Conference MaxCalls
Capabilities Conference MaxVideoCalls
Conference ActiveSpeaker CallId
Conference Call [n] AuthenticationRequest
Conference Call [n] BookingId
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FarendMessage Mode
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Mode
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC NumberOfPresets
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC NumberOfSources
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Source [n] Name
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Source [n] Options
Conference Call [n] Capabilities FECC Source [n] SourceId
Conference Call [n] Capabilities Hold
Conference Call [n] Capabilities IxChannel Status
Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantDisconnect
Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantList
Conference Call [n] Capabilities ParticipantMute
Conference Call [n] Capabilities Presentation
Conference Call [n] EventCenter Mode
Conference Call [n] Manufacturer
Conference Call [n] MicrophonesMuted
Conference Call [n] SoftwareID
Conference Call [n] Streamed
Conference DoNotDisturb
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
-
-
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 521 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Conference Line [n] Mode
Conference Multipoint Mode
Conference Presentation CallId
Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] DirectShare
Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] SendingMode
Conference Presentation LocalInstance [n] Source
Conference Presentation Mode
Conference SelectedCallProtocol
Conference SpeakerLock CallId
Conference SpeakerLock Mode
Diagnostics Message [n] Description
Diagnostics Message [n] Level
Diagnostics Message [n] References
Diagnostics Message [n] Type
GPIO Pin [n] State
H320 Gateway Address
H320 Gateway Id
H320 Gateway Mode
H320 Gateway Number
H320 Gateway Reason
H320 Gateway Status
H323 Gatekeeper Address
H323 Gatekeeper Port
H323 Gatekeeper Reason
H323 Gatekeeper Status
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A U
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 522 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
H323 Mode Reason
H323 Mode Status
HttpFeedback [n] Expression [n]
HttpFeedback [n] Format
HttpFeedback [n] Status
HttpFeedback [n] URL
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio Channels
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio ChannelRole
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio Mute
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Audio Protocol
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Direction
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Encryption
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Bytes
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat ChannelRate
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Jitter
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat LastIntervalLost
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat LastIntervalReceived
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Loss
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat MaxJitter
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] NetStat Packets
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] ParticipantId
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Type
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video ChannelRole
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video FrameRate
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video Protocol
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 523 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionX
MediaChannels Call [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionY
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Audio Channels
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Audio Protocol
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Encryption
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Bytes
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat ChannelRate
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Jitter
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat
LastIntervalLost
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat
LastIntervalReceived
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat
LastIntervalReceived
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Loss
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat MaxJitter
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Netstat Packets
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video FrameRate
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video Protocol
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionX
MediaChannels DirectShare [n] Channel [n] Video ResolutionY
Network [n] CDP Address
Network [n] CDP Capabilities
Network [n] CDP DeviceId
Network [n] CDP Duplex
Network [n] CDP Platform
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 524 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Network [n] CDP PortID
Network [n] CDP PrimaryMgmtAddress
Network [n] CDP SysName
Network [n] CDP SysObjectID
Network [n] CDP Version
Network [n] CDP VoIPApplianceVlanID
Network [n] CDP VTPMgmtDomain
Network [n] DNS Domain Name
Network [n] DNS Server [n] Address
Network [n] Ethernet MacAddress
Network [n] Ethernet Speed
Network [n] IPv4 Address
Network [n] IPv4 Gateway
Network [n] IPv4 SubnetMask
Network [n] IPv6 Address
Network [n] IPv6 Gateway
Network [n] IPv6 LinkLocalAddress
Network [n] VLAN Voice VlanId
Network [n] Wifi BSSID
Network [n] Wifi Channel
Network [n] Wifi Frequency
Network [n] Wifi MacAddress
Network [n] Wifi Phase2Method
Network [n] Wifi RawSSID
Network [n] Wifi Reason
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 525 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Network [n] Wifi Region
Network [n] Wifi RSSI
Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] Flags
Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] RawSSID
Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] SignalLevel
Network [n] Wifi ScanResult [n] SSID
Network [n] Wifi Speed
Network [n] Wifi SSID
Network [n] Wifi Status
Network [n] Wifi Type
NetworkServices NTP CurrentAddress
NetworkServices NTP Server [n] Address
NetworkServices NTP Status
NetworkServices UPnP Status
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] HardwareInfo
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] ID
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Name
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] SerialNumber
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] SoftwareInfo
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Status
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] Type
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeFailureReason
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeStatus
Peripherals ConnectedDevice [n] UpgradeURL
Provisioning CUCM Customization Checksum
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
-
-
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 526 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility Enabled
Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LastLoggedInUserId
Provisioning CUCM ExtensionMobility LoggedIn
Provisioning RoomType
Provisioning Software Current CompletedAt
Provisioning Software Current URL
Provisioning Software Current VersionId
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus LastChange
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Message
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Phase
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus SessionId
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Status
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus Urgency
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus URL
Provisioning Software UpgradeStatus VersionId
Provisioning Status
Proximity Services Availability
RoomAnalytics AmbientNoise Level A
RoomAnalytics AmbientTemperature
RoomAnalytics Engagement CloseProximity
RoomAnalytics PeopleCount Current
RoomAnalytics PeoplePresence
RoomAnalytics Sound Level A
RoomAnalytics RelativeHumidity
RoomPreset [n] Defined
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 527 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
RoomPreset [n] Description
RoomPreset [n] Type
Security Persistency CallHistory
Security Persistency Configurations
Security Persistency DHCP
Security Persistency InternalLogging
Security Persistency LocalPhonebook
SIP AlternateURI Alias [n] URI
SIP AlternateURI Primary [n] URI
SIP Authentication
SIP CallForward DisplayName
SIP CallForward Mode
SIP CallForward URI
SIP Mailbox MessagesWaiting
SIP Mailbox URI
SIP Proxy [n] Address
SIP Proxy [n] Status
SIP Registration [n] Authentication
SIP Registration [n] Reason
SIP Registration [n] Status
SIP Registration [n] URI
SIP Secure
SIP Verified
Standby PowerSave State
Standby State
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
-
-
X Web, API A U
X Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I R U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 528 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
SystemUnit Hardware Module CompatibilityLevel
SystemUnit Hardware Module SerialNumber
SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Fan [n] Status
SystemUnit Hardware Monitoring Temperature Status
SystemUnit Hardware Temperature
SystemUnit Hardware TemperatureThreshold
SystemUnit Notifications Notification [n] Text
SystemUnit Notifications Notification [n] Type
SystemUnit ProductId
SystemUnit ProductPlatform
SystemUnit ProductType
SystemUnit Software DisplayName
SystemUnit Software Name
SystemUnit Software OptionKeys Encryption
SystemUnit Software OptionKeys MultiSite
SystemUnit Software OptionKeys RemoteMonitoring
SystemUnit Software ReleaseDate
SystemUnit Software Version
SystemUnit State CameraLid
SystemUnit State NumberOfActiveCalls
SystemUnit State NumberOfInProgressCalls
SystemUnit State NumberOfSuspendedCalls
SystemUnit Uptime
Time SystemTime
UserInterface ContactInfo ContactMethod [n] Number
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 529 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
UserInterface ContactInfo Name
UserInterface Extensions Widget [n] Value
UserInterface Extensions Widget [n] WidgetId
UserInterface Features Call End
UserInterface Features Call Keypad
UserInterface Features MidCallControls
UserInterface Features Call Start
UserInterface Features Share Start
UserInterface Features Whiteboard Start
UserInterface OSD Output
UserInterface SettingsMenu Visibility
Video ActiveSpeaker PIPPosition
Video Input Connector [n] Connected
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] DeviceType
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n]
LogicalAddress
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] PowerStatus
Video Input Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId
Video Input Connector [n] SignalState
Video Input Connector [n] SourceId
Video Input Connector [n] Type
Video Input DirectShare [n] Peer Address
Video Input DirectShare [n] Peer PeripheralID
Video Input DirectShare [n] Type
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I R U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 530 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Video Input MainVideoMute
Video Input MainVideoSource
Video Input Source [n] ConnectorId
Video Input Source [n] FormatStatus
Video Input Source [n] FormatType
Video Input Source [n] MediaChannelId
Video Input Source [n] Resolution Height
Video Input Source [n] Resolution RefreshRate
Video Input Source [n] Resolution Width
Video Layout LayoutFamily Local
Video Layout LayoutFamily Remote
Video Monitors
Video Output Connector [n] Connected
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n]
DeviceType
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n]
LogicalAddress
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] Name
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n]
PowerStatus
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice CEC [n] VendorId
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice Name
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice PreferredFormat
Video Output Connector [n] ConnectedDevice ScreenSize
Video Output Connector [n] MonitorRole
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution Height
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 531 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Status
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution RefreshRate
Video Output Connector [n] Resolution Width
Video Output Connector [n] Type
Video Output Monitor [n] Backlight
Video Output Monitor [n] Brightness
Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Blue
Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Green
Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Red
Video Output Monitor [n] ColorTemperature Selected
Video Output Monitor [n] Contrast
Video Output Monitor [n] CSCYUV
Video Output Monitor [n] FirmwareVersion
Video Output Monitor [n] Gamma
Video Output Monitor [n] ModelName
Video Output Monitor [n] Position
Video Output Monitor [n] SerialNumber
Video Output Monitor [n] Sharpness
Video Output Monitor [n] Temperature
Video Presentation PIPPosition
Video Selfview FullscreenMode
Video Selfview Mode
Video Selfview OnMonitorRole
Video Selfview PIPPosition
WebEngine Features Signage
WebEngine Features WebEngine
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
X
X
-
X
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A I U
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 532 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Status
Webex Services Proximity GuestToken
Webex Status xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X: Supported - : Not supported
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
Web, API A U
Web, API A U
A: ADMIN Au: AUDIT I: INTEGRATOR R: ROOMCONTROL U: USER
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 533 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Startup scripts
You can add one or more startup scripts to the device.
A startup script contains commands (xCommand) and configurations (xConfiguration) that will be executed as part of the start up procedure every time the device boots. A few commands and configurations cannot be placed in a startup script, e.g. xCommand SystemUnit Boot .
Use the device’s web interface to create and manage startup scripts.
Read more about the web interface and startup scripts in the
Administrator guide for your product.
xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 534 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API xConfiguration xCommand
The SystemTools commands
NOTE: The systemtools commands are used for administrative control of the device and are only available from a command line interface. Systemtools should not be used to program the device.
Required parameters in angle brackets: <text>
Optional parameters in square brackets: [text]
To get an overview of the supported commands type
“systemtools ?”.
Example: systemtools ?
rootsettings selectsw whoami license network ntp pki ps securitystatus sudo idefixversion pairing touch
To see the usage of the commands add a question mark after the command.
Example: systemtools network ?
usage: network ping <hostname> | traceroute
<hostname> | netstat | addrs | ifconfig | ifstats
<ifname> systemtools idefixversion (not for Desk Pro, DX70, and
DX80)
Returns the software version the connected Touch controller should have. Used when downgrading to TC7.3 or earlier.
systemtools license list
Lists all the licenses for the device.
systemtools license show <name>
Shows the content of a license file, defined by the name.
<name>: The name of the license file.
systemtools network ping <hostname>
Network debug command.
<hostname>: The IP-address or URL of the host.
systemtools network traceroute <hostname>
Network debug command.
<hostname>: The IP-address or URL of the host. systemtools network netstat
Network debug command.
systemtools network addrs
Shows the device’s IP-addresses. systemtools network ifconfig
Network debug command.
xStatus
API Reference Guide systemtools network ifstats <ifname>
Network debug command. Prints out network interface statistics.
<ifname>: The name of the interface. systemtools ntp
Shows the NTP status.
systemtools pairing unpair
Removes association with remotely paired Touch controller.
systemtools pki list
Lists the device certificate and CA list if they exist.
systemtools pki delete <cert-name>
Delete the device certificate and CA list if they exist.
<cert-name>: The name of the certificate.
systemtools ps
Lists all running processes.
systemtools rootsettings
Root access is no longer available in release software.
Please use the remotesupport account instead.
systemtools securitystatus
Shows the security status for the device.
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 535 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API systemtools selectsw
Select which of the available software images to use.
Changing the software image will restart the device.
No argument given: Lists the version of the available software images, and shows which one is active. image name: Swap to the software with this name.
systemtools sudo on
Changes the user role of the current session to the role of the specified user.
<username>: The name of the sudo user.
<password>: The password for the sudo user.
systemtools sudo off
Reverts back to the user role of the signed in user.
systemtools touch start (only for Desk Pro, DX70, DX80, and
Boards)
Debug command for testing the touch panel.
systemtools touch stop (only for Desk Pro, DX70, DX80, and
Boards)
Debug command for testing the touch panel.
systemtools touch forever (only for Desk Pro, DX70, DX80, and Boards)
Debug command for testing the touch panel.
systemtools whoami
Lists the name and id of the signed in user, and the user roles held by this user.
xConfiguration xCommand
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 536 xStatus
API Reference Guide
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Disconnect cause types
The following parameters are logged when a call is disconnected. The disconnect cause types are used in disconnect events (xEvent).
API Reference Guide xConfiguration xCommand xStatus
CauseValue
CauseType
CauseString
CauseCode
CauseOrigin
Proprietary. We recomend the use of CauseType and CauseCode.
Describes why the call was disconnected. The value space is { OtherLocal, LocalDisconnect,
UnknownRemoteSite, LocalBusy, LocalReject, InsufficientSecurity, OtherRemote, RemoteDisconnect,
RemoteBusy, RemoteRejected, RemoteNoAnswer, CallForwarded, NetworkRejected }
Describes the Cause Code.
The disconnect Cause Codes are defined in SIP and Q.850.
SIP, Q.850, internal.
Example: xEvent DisconnectEvent
*e CallDisconnect CauseValue: 1
CauseType: “LocalDisconnect”
CauseString: “”
OrigCallDirection: “outgoing”
RemoteURI: “[email protected]”
CallId: 89
CauseCode: 0
CauseOrigin: SIP
** end
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 537 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
User documentation on the Cisco web site
xConfiguration
User documentation for the Cisco Collaboration products is available at
https://www.cisco.com/go/telepresence/docs
Select the product series:
• Webex Board
• Webex DX Series (Webex Desk Series)
• TelePresence MX Series
• Webex Room Series
• TelePresence SX Series
Alternatively, use the following short-links:
https://www.cisco.com/go/board-docs
https://www.cisco.com/go/desk-docs
https://www.cisco.com/go/mx-docs
https://www.cisco.com/go/room-docs
https://www.cisco.com/go/sx-docs xCommand xStatus
API Reference Guide
Install and Upgrade
Installation and Upgrade Guides
• Installation guides: How to install the product
• Getting started guide: Initial configurations required to get the device up and running
• Physical interface guide: Details about the product’s physical interface, including the connector panel and
LEDs (SX80 only)
• RCSI guide: Regulatory compliance and safety information
Maintain and Operate
Maintain and Operate Guides
• Administrator guide: Information required to administer your product
• Deployment guide for TelePresence endpoints on
CUCM: Tasks to perform to start using the product with the Cisco Unified Communications Manager (CUCM)
End-User Guides
• User guides: How to use the product
• Quick reference guides: How to use the product
Reference Guides
Command references
• API reference guides: Reference guide for the
Application Programming Interface (API)
Technical References
• CAD drawings: 2D CAD drawings with dimensions
Configure
Configuration Guides
• Cistomization Guide: How to customize the user interface, how to use the device’s API to program in-room controls, making macros, configure advanced audio set-ups using the Audio Console, and other customizations.
• UI Extensions Editor (formerly: In-Room Control Editor):
Download the UI extensions editor
Design
Design Guides
• Video conferencing room guidelines: General guidelines for room design and best practice
• Video conferencing acoustics room guidelines: Things to do to improve the perceived audio quality
Software Downloads, Release and General
Information
Release notes
• Release notes and deferral notices
Licensing Information
• Open sourse licences: Licenses and notices for open source software used in this product
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 538 Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software
Introduction About the API
Intellectual property rights
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS
IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL
STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS
MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS
MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY
PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE
ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION
PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE
INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO
LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT
YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system.
All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of
California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL
DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE
PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED
SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR
ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR
DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers.
Any examples, command display output, network topology diagrams, and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.
All printed copies and duplicate soft copies are considered un-Controlled copies and the original on-line version should be referred to for latest version.
Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.
com/go/offices.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks.
Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)
D15407.13 Cisco Collaboration Endpoint Software API Reference Guide CE9.12, APRIL 2020 xConfiguration
539 xCommand xStatus
Cisco contacts
On our web site you will find an overview of the worldwide Cisco contacts.
Go to: https://www.cisco.com/go/offices
Corporate Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Dr.
San Jose, CA 95134 USA
API Reference Guide
Appendices
Copyright © 2020 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Herunterladen
Werbung